Health, Safety &

Environmental Manual
June 2015
This manual supports Provincial / Territorial legislation. Changes to such legislation will take
precedence over documentation herein. Periodic updates to the Health, Safety & Environmental
Manual will reflect any legislative changes that may have been enacted.

The Policies and Procedures in this Manual are applicable to all employees of the Stuart Olson
Construction Ltd. group of companies (herein referred to as Stuart Olson). In the event of a legal
name change, merger or acquisition, sale or purchase of the Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. group
of companies, the resultant corporation shall, if still wholly owned by Stuart Olson Construction
Ltd., be bound by the Policies and Procedures herein. Dormant companies are also covered by
these Policies and Procedures.

In the event of a discrepancy between the Health Safety and Environment (HSE) Manual and the
Handbook, the information in the most recently published HSE Manual will take precedence.

Property of Stuart Olson Construction Ltd.

Unauthorized modification, reproduction, distribution or
transmission in any form is prohibited.
 REQUEST FOR MANUAL REVISION

All employees are encouraged to contribute to this Health and Safety program and its development
through the process of Continuous Improvement.

Existing Policy or Title:

Section Number & Page:

Reason for Change or Addition:

Proposed Change or Addition:

Requested by: Date:

Reviewed by: Date

Approved: Rejected Date

Effective: Date:

Further action required:

 COMPANY POLICIES
“NO-ONE” WORKING FOR COMPANY HAS THE RIGHT, OR AUTHORITY TO UNILATERALLY
CHANGE OR ENFORCE ANY CHANGES TO COMPANY SAFETY POLICIES EXCEPT THE CHIEF
EXECUTIVE OFFICER (COO).

There are certain circumstances whereby we may have to raise our standards regarding site-specific
safety rules which do not require the COO’s signature.

Example:

1. When we are not designated Prime Contractor, and the company designated as prime
has requirements exceed our standards.

2. Site hazards or conditions that the Site Superintendent or Safety Department feel are
necessary that will meet or exceed legislative requirements.

Please involve the Safety Department in these decisions.

Should you feel that changes to “policies” are required or necessary, forward your request to the
Safety Department who will in turn follow the Matrix below.

SAFETY
DEPARTMENT

IVAN KRISSA
FOR REVIEW OF
CHANGE & CONTENT

LEGAL
REVIEW

BUILDINGS GROUP
CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER (COO)
FOR
REVIEW
APPROVAL
AND SIGNATURE
Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Details

Number

R6 June 2015 Full Manual

- Signatures - All President Signatures and relevant references revised to
COO, Stuart Olson Buildings Ltd. except Section 20 – where President title
was updated to reflect Stuart Olson Inc.
- Removed references to previous company names
- Update footer to reflect Revision 6, June 2015
- Update policy dates to reflect reaffirmation June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management

Update to reflect current forms and job titles throughout.
- 15.2 – Claims Investigation
- 15.3 – Updated to reflect current forms and job titles.
- 15.4.2 – Added the words: “worker, together with the”
- 15.4.3 – Communicating with the Worker on Leave - updated
- 15.4.4 – Modified Work Program – updated
- Form 28 Illness / Injury Report
- Form 25 Modified Work Program Offer

R5 March 2015 Full Manual – Replace all references to Divisional Safety Supervisors with
Regional Safety Manager.

Section 1.5.1 – Revised to reflect Leadership in Safety Award.

Sections 11.2.8 – Page 8, Safe Work Practice 18.46 and Safe Work Practice
18.50 – added reference to new Form 86, Respirator Screening Form.

Update to Section 20, Drugs and Alcohol Policy Revisions to Drug and
Alcohol Policy:
- Manitoba and Ontario Addendum Added

FORMS
- Added Form 86 Respirator Screening Form
- Revised Form 30 - Site HS&E Inspection Report – signature block
and distribution
- Form 31 - Work Refusal Process and Record, updated November
2014, replaces Refusal to Work form 31.

**All proposed 2016 updates must be sent to Ivan Krissa for review**

R4-2 September 16, 2014 Update to Section 20, Drugs and Alcohol Policy Revisions to Drug and
Alcohol Policy:
- Page 1 – 4.6 Random Testing removed from table of contents
- Page 7 – 4.6, 4.6.1, 4.6.2 Random Testing paragraphs removed
- Page 8 – 4.9.2 “and random testing” removed
- Page 23 – “1.1 Random Testing: will be necessary only when
required by owner or by contract.” Removed
- Figure C.1 – 1.1 Random Testing removed from process flow chart
R4 March 2014 Rebrand to reflect Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. details.

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

Revision Revision Date Revision Details
Number

R4 March 2014 Full Manual - All President Signatures revised to Interim President & COO,
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd. David LeMay, where applicable.

R4 March 2014 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 Update Table of Contents to reflect manual changes
 Header and Footer update throughout
R4 March 2014 DEFINITIONS
 Define “Return to Work / Stay at Work”
R4 March 2014 SECTION 1
 Revised Date of Revision, and Revision #
 Updated Signature and Date
 Addition to Section 1 between 1.2 and 1.3 (moved from 4.8)

R4 March 2014 SECTION 3

 Smoking - added to Company Rules – moved from Section 4.15

R4 March 2014 SECTION 4

Changes to Supplementary Programs:
 Move 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, and 4.16 to Code of Practice Section
 Move 4.8 to Section 1 between 1.2 and 1.3
 Remove 4.3, 4.5
 Move 4.15 to Company Rules – Section 3 - Smoking
 Renumber section
R4 March 2014 SECTION 5
 Added language about SODCL conducting formal inspections
R4 March 2014 SECTION 10
 Replaced “forms” should with “forms shall.”
 Added Records of First Aid, Near Miss Report Forms to bulleted list.
 Added information on how to archive Safety Documentation.
R4 March 2014 SECTION 12
Emergency Preparedness:
 Added Emergency Response Plan language for Office, Shop/Yard
facilities.
 Added piece on internal training and orientation by Division Safety
Supervisor (office) Foreman or Site Safety Coordinator (Site).
Added details about frequency of ERP testing for Office, Shop/Yard facilities.
R4 March 2014 SECTION 15
 Claims Management
 Definitions – “Return to Work / Stay at Work” added
R4 March 2014 SECTION 18
 Added Asbestos Safety at 18.3
 Added Assured Grounding Program at 18.4
 Added Fall Protection at 18.18
 Section Alphabetized and Renumbered
R4 March 2014 SECTION 20
 Updated to reflect most recent update to Drugs and Alcohol in the
Workplace Polies and Procedures.
R4 March 2014 FORMS:
 Administration Tab: Site Emergency Plan – Form 06: updated
contact information
 Safety Orientation Tab: Safety Orientation Workers Form 33 –
updated to include Respectful Workplace Policy.
 Safety Violation / Discipline Tab: Addition of Explanation of how and
why the form is used for both Notice of Safety Non-Compliance –
Form 34 and Progressive Disciplinary Action - Form 35
 Hazards Tab: Field Level Hazard Assessment – Form 23
 Inspection Reports Tab: Safety Inspection Report – Form 30 updated

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

Revision Revision Date Revision Details
Number

 Office Inspection Form added

 Safe Work Practices and Procedures Tab: Critical Task Inventory
Form 04 updated
 Safe Work Practices form added
 Safe Work Procedures – Form 67 revised
 Hot Work Permit - Form 18 revised
Drug and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policy and Procedures (Section 20) –
Form 70(b) added – Conditions for Employment (Pre-Employment)
R3 January 2013 INSIDE TITLE PAGE
 Clarify that the HSE Manual takes precedence

R3 January 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 Update Table of Contents to reflect manual changes
Header and Footer update throughout
R3 January 2013 DEFINITIONS
 Define “Emergency”
 Define “Near Miss”
R3 January 2013 ALL
 Update footer to reflect Revision 3, January 2013
 Update policies to reflect reaffirmation January 2013
R3 January 2013 SECTION 2
 2.9.1 – Worker’s Rights. Add reference to form 31
 2.11 – Clarify visitor orientation. Add form references.
R3 January 2013 SECTION 3
 3.4 – Clarify visitor orientation. Add form references.
 3.6.1 (11) – correct reference to 4.0 Distracted Driving Policy
 3.9 – Worker Safety Training, include SCOT and other provincially
recognized safety training
3.10.2 – add 1-2 days to second offence and reference form 35 for non-safety
related non-compliance issues
R3 January 2013 SECTION 4
 Correct title page – “Drugs and Alcohol ...”
 4.3 – Change title and text to read “Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace”
 4.6.1 – Add Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Procedures after
Policy
 4.10 – Amend Distracted Driving Policy to exclude the use of hand-held
devices and advise of the need to pull over after answering a call and
before engaging in a conversation with the caller
 4.16 – Add new section: Musculoskeletal Injury Prevention Program
R3 January 2013 SECTION 5
 5.2.3 – Define timeframe for management inspections and add reference
to Form 30: Safety Inspection Report (renamed from “Monthly” Inspection
Report)
R3 January 2013 SECTION 6
 6.2 - Change reference from Form 23 FLHA to Form 14: Hazard
Assessment Report
 6.4 – Clarify the need for hazard assessments to be completed, using
Form 14, during the estimating and project start-up phases
 6.5 – Clarify the process to be used to prioritize and classify the risks of
worksite hazards
R3 January 2013 SECTION 11
 11.2.2 – Revise description as to when hard hats can be worn in the
reverse position
 11.2.9 – New Section on Fall Protection
 11.2.10 – Manufacturer’s Specifications and Recommendations
renumbered (previously 11.2.9)

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

Revision Revision Date Revision Details
Number
R3 January 2013 SECTION 12
 12.2 – Include reference to telephone threats
 12.3 – New section covering Emergency Level and Reporting inserted
and subsequent sections re-numbered
R3 January 2013 SECTION 15
 Throughout – naming convention for roles clarified
 15.4.1 (7) – New Clause
 15.4.3 – New Section: Communicating with the Worker on Leave
 15.4.4 – Benefits of Modified Work Program added
R3 January 2013 SECTION 18
 18.58 – New: Office Ergonomics – Chair Height
 18.59 – New: Preventing Slips, Trips & Falls
 18.60 – New: Safe Lifting Practices
R3 January 2013 SECTION 19
 19.9 – Major Incident – update to reflect revisions to Section 12.3.6
 19.18 – New Procedure for Cut-Off Saw
- January 2013 FORM 06 – SITE EMERGENCY PLAN
 Contact information updated on page 2
- January 2013 FORM 11 – FALL PROTECTION PLAN
 Change Arrest Anchor for SK to read 5000 lbs/2268 kg
- January 2013 FORM 14 – HAZARD ASSESSMENT REPORT
 Add column for total risk evaluation/change heading “define” to “classify”
- January 2013 FORM 18 – HOT WORK PERMIT
 P. 1 Add Contractor Name and Permit #, p2. Add Contractor Name
- January 2013 FORM 23 – FIELD LEVEL HAZARD ASSESSMENT (FLHA)
 Revise form and prepare for issue in 7 x 8.5 format
- January 2013 FORM 29 – MONTHLY SAFETY ACTIVITY SUMMARY REPORT
 Add “SCOT” to acceptable training in point 12.
- January 2013 FORM 30 – SAFETY INSPECTION REPORT
 Change name from “Monthly” to “Safety”
 Add space for “Title” of person completing inspection
 Add new items Excavation/Trenching and Ladder Safety
 Change Hazard Rating to Hazard Classification and Systems A-B-C
- January 2013 FORM 33 – SAFETY ORIENTATION – WORKERS
 Revise wording re “gloves” (Employer Provided PPE)
 Revise wording re “Disciplinary Action” (General Safety Conditions)
 Add new point “D&A Policy/Testing” (General Safety Conditions)
 Revise wording re “Certification” and “Fall Protection” (Tools section)
- January 2013 FORM 34 – NOTICE OF SAFETY NON-COMPLIANCE
 Revise form to include line for employer, 3-strike rule and signatures
- January 2013 FORM 35 – PROGRESSIVE DISCIPLINARY ACTION
 Revise form to clarify the 3-strike rule
- January 2013 FORM 39 – TRADE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
 Add points to cover drug and alcohol testing, and fall and hand protection
- January 2013 FORM 50 – VISITOR AND SHORT DURATION WORK ORIENTATION
 Delete Waiver and Release Form (previous Form 50)
 Add new form: Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation
- January 2013 FORM 55 – HARASSMENT, VIOLENCE, DISCRIMATION REPORTING
 Define where the completed form is to be sent
- January 2013 FORM 62 – TELEPHONE THREAT REPORT
 Clarify procedure based on RCMP instructions

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

Revision Revision Date Revision Details
Number
- January 2013 DELETE FORM 59 – POST HARASSMENT, VIOLENCE, DISCRIMINATION
REPORTING FORM
- January 2012 FORM 70 – CONDITIONS FOR EMPLOYMENT
 Form number assigned. No other changes/revision date not changed
- January 2012 FORM 76 – DETERMINING REASONABLE CAUSE
 Form number assigned. No other changes/revision date not changed
- January 2012 FORM 85 – REASONABLE CAUSE OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
 Form number assigned. No other changes/revisions date not changed
R2 January 2012 GENERAL
 New issue of complete manual
 Title page – add note indicating status of manual.
 All policies reaffirmed / new heading added
 Include “territorial” when referencing authorities
R2 January 2012 FRONT END
 Add definitions from new Section 15 Claims Management and Section
20, Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

R2 January 2012 SECTION 1

 1.2 – 2nd bullet, refer to Occupational Health & Safety
 1.3 – include Yukon Territory
R2 January 2012 SECTION 2
 2.1.2 – redefine documents to be posted on project sites based on
legislative requirements.
 2.2 – 2.8 inclusive – add new bullet to read: In consultation with the
senior on-site employee, force a portion or all of the Company operation
or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where
there is the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public,
outside the boundaries of the Company property or project site perimeter.
R2 January 2012 SECTION 3
 3.1 – Include “territorial” and policy heading
 3.10 – Include Discipline Policy. Renumber subsequent sections.
R2 January 2012 SECTION 4
 4.3 – Remove content and refer reader to Section 20
 4.6 – Revise policy to meet Saskatchewan requirements
 4.10 – Add Distracted Driving Policy
 4.12 – Add Working Alone Policy
 4.13 – Change title to Inexperienced Workers and add
definition
 4.14 – Update to wording in New Mentoring Program
R2 January 2012 SECTION 6
 6.4 – Revise wording to indicate that a hazard assessment, using the
FLHA form, is to be completed during the estimating stage of a project.
R2 January 2012 SECTION 11
 11.2.6 – Define that CSA Class B ear protection is to be worn when noise
levels exceed 85dB, CSA Class A ear protection is to be worn when
noise levels exceed 95dBA and audio headsets are not allowed.
R2 January 2012 SECTION 12
 12.1 – Add Emergency Response Plan Policy and renumber subsequent
sections.

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

Revision Revision Date Revision Details
Number

R2 January 2012 SECTION 14

14.7.1 – Revise time frame in last bullet under “responsibilities of fire watch.”

R2 January 2012 SECTION 15 – Claims Management

Rename to read “Claims Management” and replace entire contents.

R2 January 2012 SECTION 17 - Environmental

 17.1 – replace existing Environmental Protection Policy with revised
policy
 17.2 – replace Spill Responses with “Site Specific Requirements”
 17.3 –update to include Yukon emergency response
 Refer to Environmental Protection Program Manual
R2 January 2012 SECTION 18 – Safe Work Practices
 18.31 – correct fire watch to be provided for 30 minutes after work. Add
additional bullet to cover monitoring for 2 hours when hot work is
completed on wooden structure
 18.34 – change name to “Extension Ladders”. Add note to use only CSA
approved ladders and remove bullet referencing stepladders.
 18.35 – change name to “Stepladders”. Correct 5th bullet to read: ratio of
1 horizontal to 4 vertical. Add new bullet for ladder length limits.
 18.48 – Scaffolds: metal scaffolds – correct 5th bullet from end to read: …
no more than 300 mm (12 inches)
 18.56 – Utility Locates: corrections to Daylighting and Permits
R2 January 2012 SECTION 19 – Safe Work Procedures
 19.7 – Excavating and Trenching: change all references from 1.5m to
1.2m (4 ft)
 19.9 – Major Incident: reword first bullet
 19.12 – Propane and Natural Gas Heaters: include additional information
on open flame heaters
R2 January 2012 SECTION 20 – Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policies and Procedures
 New section 20 reflecting revised Policy and Procedures (previously
Section 4.3 with supporting information in Section 21 – Resource
Information) NOTE: This section is set up so it can be printed in its
entirety as a stand-alone document.
R2 January 2012 SECTION 21 – Forms (previously Section 20)
 Index updated, include alphabetical and numerical listing
 Form 05: Project Safety Inspection Report – rename form to match title
and add “Environmental Hazards” to list
 Form 06: Site Emergency Plan, update information
 Form 12: Record of First Aid, revise format
 Form 14: Hazard Assessment Report, correct typo and add signature
lines
 Form 18: Hot Work Permit, reformat and revise 2nd Fire Watch bullet
 Form 19: Incident Investigation, replace references to “accidents”, and
adjust wording as needed
 Form 25: Letter to Injured Worker, delete
 NEW Form 25: Illness/Injury Report
 Form 26: Letter to Physician, delete
 NEW Form 26: Operator Competency Assurance Verification
 Form 27: Modified Duty Restrictions Report. Delete
 NEW Form 27: Damage Report
 Form 28: Modified Work Offer”, re-name and revise
 Form 29: Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report, revise to include all
points required for reporting
 Form 32: Return to Work, delete
 NEW Form 32: Dangerous Work in Progress

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

Revision Revision Date Revision Details
Number

 Form 33: Safety Orientation Workers: add qualification for benching

under project hazards, correct signature line
 Form 39: Add lines for project name, location and trade contractors name
 Form 42: Tool Box Safety Meeting – add Supt. signature
 Form 44: Voluntary Emergency Medical Information – revise to match
form in Privacy Manual
 Form 48: HSE Quiz – replace to match video quiz
 Form 55: Abuse Reporting Form – rename Harassment, Violence,
Discrimination Reporting Form
 Form 59: Post Abuse Victim Follow-Up Questionnaire – rename:
Harassment, Violence and Discrimination...
 Form 60: Trade Contractor Start-Up Meeting – add “Program Orientation”
 Form 65: Ground Disturbance Permit – add review note to point 3 and
include spotter’s signature line
 Form 76: Physicians Report to Employer, delete
Form 77: Modified and Graduated Return to Work, delete
R1 December 2010 General Updates to all sections

R0 July 2010 New issue of Stuart Olson Dominion manual

HSE MANUAL – Revision #6, June 2015

 Table of Contents

Introduction

Request for Manual Revision

Company Policies
Revision History
Table of Contents
Acronyms
Definitions

1. Policies and Administration

1.1 Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Policy .......................................................... 1-2
1.2 Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Manual ........................................................ 1-4
1.2.1 Health and Safety Program, Regular Review .................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 Focus of the Review .......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Provincial / Territorial Regulatory Authorities......................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Emergency Contacts .................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.5 Safety Performance Recognition ..................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.1 Leadership in Safety Award ........................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.2 Hourly Employee Safety Recognition ..................................................................... 1-8

2. Health, Safety and Environmental Responsibilities

2.1 Stuart Olson ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.1 Worker Orientation ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.2 Posting of Information ......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Proper Cleanup of a Work Site ........................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Fire Prevention ................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.5 Special Hazard Protection .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.6 HSE Reporting .................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Executive ..................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3 Management ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.4 Project Managers ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.5 Regional Safety Manager ........................................................................................................... 2-9
2.6 Project Superintendent ............................................................................................................ 2-11
2.7 Supervisors / Foremen............................................................................................................. 2-13
2.8 Site Safety Coordinator............................................................................................................ 2-15
2.9 Workers ..................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.9.1 Worker’s Rights ............................................................................................................. 2-18
2.10 Trade Contractors .................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.10.1 Loss Control Management ............................................................................................. 2-21
2.11 Visitors ......................................................................................................................... 2-27

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page i
3. Training and Education
3.1 Safety Training Policy ............................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Safety Training Requirements................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Worker Safety Orientation ......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Visitor Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Toolbox Meetings ....................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.5.1 Toolbox Meeting Guideline ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.6 General Safety Rules.................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.6.2 Behaviour......................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.6.3 Personal Protective Equipment ....................................................................................... 3-9
3.6.4 Equipment and Machinery ............................................................................................. 3-10
3.6.5 Smoking ......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.7 Specialized Training ................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.8 Follow-Up on Training .............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.9 Periodic Retraining of Employees .......................................................................................... 3-14
3.10 Discipline Policy ....................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.10.1 Safety Enforcement/Discipline ...................................................................................... 3-16
3.10.2 Safety Non-Compliance Consequences ....................................................................... 3-16

4. Supplementary Programs
4.1 Respectful Workplace – Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Prevention Policy .... 4-2
4.1.1 Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Procedures ................................................... 4-4
4.2 Hearing Conservation and Protection ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.1 Hearing Testing Recordkeeping ...................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.2 Hearing Protection Requirements Defined .................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3 Requirements for Noise-Exposed Workers.................................................................... 4-10
4.2.4 Environmental Noise Levels .......................................................................................... 4-11
4.3 Vehicle Management ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.1 Stuart Olson Responsibility ............................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.2 Supervisor Responsibilities ............................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.3 Worker Responsibilities.................................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.4 Seat Belt Use ................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.5 Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance ........................................................................ 4-13
4.3.6 Driver Records ............................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.7 Driver Licenses .............................................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.8 Transport of Dangerous Goods (TDG) ......................................................................... 4-15
4.4 Distracted Driving Policy ......................................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.1 Disciplinary Action .......................................................................................................... 4-17
4.5 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .......................................... 4-18
4.5.1 WHMIS Responsibilities ................................................................................................... 4-18
4.5.2 Supplier Label ................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.5.3 Workplace Label ............................................................................................................... 4-19
4.6 Working Alone Policy ............................................................................................................... 4-20
4.6.1 Developing a Working Alone Plan .................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.2 Checking the Wellbeing of a Worker Working Alone ........................................................ 4-21
4.7 Inexperienced Workers ............................................................................................................ 4-22
4.7.1 Employment of Young People .......................................................................................... 4-22
4.8 New Worker Mentoring Program ............................................................................................. 4-24
4.9 Musculoskeletal Injury Prevention Program .......................................................................... 4-28

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page ii
5. Inspections
5.1 Inspection Policy ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 Inspection Types ........................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 Informal Inspections............................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Formal Inspections ............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Management Inspections.................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Committee Inspections ....................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Preparing to Conduct an Inspection ........................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.1 Hazard Classification for Inspection Purposes ................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Performing an Inspection........................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 After an Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.6 Safety Audits ............................................................................................................................... 5-8

6. Hazard Assessment
6.1 Hazard Assessment Policy ........................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Hazard Assessments ................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) .................................................................................. 6-4
6.4 Project Hazard Assessment ...................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5 Conducting a Hazard Assessment ........................................................................................... 6-7
6.6 Reducing Hazard Risk................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.6.1 Hazard Control Measures ................................................................................................... 6-8
6.6.2 Engineering Control Measures ........................................................................................... 6-8
6.6.3 Administrative Control Measures ........................................................................................ 6-8
6.6.4 Personal Protective Equipment Measures ......................................................................... 6-9
6.7 Hazardous Environments ........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.8 Environmental Controls ........................................................................................................... 6-11
6.8.1 Recognition, Evaluation and Control ................................................................................ 6-11

7. Incident Investigation
7.1 Incident Investigation Policy .................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2 Immediate Notice of Incidents................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3 Incident Investigation .............................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3.1 Preserve the Scene ...................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.2 The Incident Investigation ............................................................................................................. 7-6
7.3.3 Interviewing Witnesses ................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.4 Writing the Incident Investigation Report ............................................................................................. 7-9
7.5 Provincial Authority Involvement ........................................................................................................ 7-10

8. First Aid
8.1 First Aid Policy......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 First Aid Service Requirements ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 First Aid Procedures ............................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.4 Serious Injuries ........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4.1 First Aid Kit ................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.5 Minor Injuries ........................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.5.1 Worker Responsibilities ................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.5.2 Supervisor Responsibilities .......................................................................................................... 8-7
8.6 Exposure to Blood-Borne Pathogens.................................................................................................... 8-8
8.6.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.6.2 Hepatitis B Vaccination Program .................................................................................................. 8-8
8.6.3 Blood-Borne Pathogens Standard Precautions ............................................................................ 8-8
8.6.4 Blood-Borne Pathogens Personal Protective Equipment ............................................................. 8-9
8.6.5 Clean-Up Procedures ................................................................................................................... 8-9

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page iii
9. HSE Committee
9.1 Health, Safety and Environmental Committee Policy .......................................................................... 9-3
9.2 Occupational HSE Committees .............................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Committee Responsibilities........................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Posting Information ....................................................................................................................... 9-5
10. Records and Statistics
10.1 Records and Statistics Policy .............................................................................................................. 10-3
10.2 Retaining Records ................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3 Monthly Forms Submittal ..................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 Summary Report .................................................................................................................................... 10-6

11. Personal Protective Equipment

11.1 Personal Protective Equipment Policy ................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2 Personal Protective Equipment ........................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 Clothing ...................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.2 Head Protection ......................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.3 High Visibility Vests .................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.4 Foot Protection ........................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.5 Eye Protection ............................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.2.6 Hearing Protection ..................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.7 Hand Protection ......................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.8 Respiratory Protection ............................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.9 Fall Protection ............................................................................................................................ 11-9
11.2.10 Manufacturer’s Specifications and Recommendations ............................................................ 11-10
12. Emergency Preparedness
12.1 Emergency Response Plan Policy ....................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Emergency Preparedness .................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.3 Emergency Level and Reporting.......................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.1 Emergency Definition .................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.3.2 Emergency Criteria ..................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.3 Level 1 Emergency ..................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.4 Level 2 Emergency ..................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.5 Level 3 Emergency ..................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.6 Serious Injury or Fatality ............................................................................................................. 12-5
12.3.7 Telephone Threat........................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.4 Posted Emergency Information ........................................................................................................... 12-7
12.5 Emergency Response Team................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.5.1 Emergency Response Team Duties ........................................................................................... 12-8
12.6 The Media ............................................................................................................................................. 12-10
12.6.1 Statements ................................................................................................................................ 12-10
12.6.2 Media Control ............................................................................................................................ 12-10
13. Maintenance
13.1 Maintenance Policy ............................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Equipment Inventory ............................................................................................................................. 13-3
13.3 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 Maintenance Records ........................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.5 Preventative Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.6 Defective Tools and Equipment ........................................................................................................... 13-7

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page iv
14. Fire Prevention
14.1 Fire Prevention....................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Fire Evacuation Planning...................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.3 Fire Extinguishers ................................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.3.1 Fire and Use of Fire Extinguishers ............................................................................................. 14-4
14.4 Fire Duties .............................................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.4.1 Fire Marshal (Office) .................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.4.2 Fire Marshal (Work Site) ............................................................................................................ 14-5
14.4.3 First Aid Attendant ...................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.5 Fire Discovery ........................................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.6 Fire Evacuation ...................................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.7 Hot Work ................................................................................................................................................. 14-9
14.7.1 Hot Work Responsibilities........................................................................................................... 14-9

15. Claims Management

15.1 Claims Management Policy .................................................................................................................. 15-2
15.2 Definitions .............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
15.3 Responsibilities ..................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.4 Procedures ............................................................................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.1 Medical Aid Reporting ................................................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.2 First Aid Reporting ...................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.4.3 Communicating with the Worker on Leave ................................................................................. 15-8
15.4.4 Modified Work Program .............................................................................................................. 15-9

16. Confined Space

16.1 Confined Space Policy .......................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.2 Confined Space Identification .............................................................................................................. 16-3
16.3 Definitions .............................................................................................................................................. 16-4
16.4 Hazards of Confined Space .................................................................................................................. 16-6
16.4.1 Oxygen Deficiency ...................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.4.2 Oxygen Enrichment .................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.4.3 Fire and Explosion ...................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.4.4 Toxic Substances ........................................................................................................................ 16-6
16.4.5 Materials Collapse and Falling Objects ...................................................................................... 16-6
16.4.6 Mechanical Equipment................................................................................................................ 16-7
16.4.7 Electric Shock ............................................................................................................................. 16-7
16.4.8 Visibility ....................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16.4.9 Temperature Extremes ............................................................................................................... 16-7
16.4.10 Noise .......................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16.5 Training of Workers ............................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.6 Means of Isolating the Confined Space .............................................................................................. 16-9
16.7 Ventilation of Confined Spaces.......................................................................................................... 16-10
16.8 Testing .................................................................................................................................................. 16-11
16.9 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) .............................................................................................. 16-12
16.10 Pre-job Safety Meeting ........................................................................................................................ 16-13
16.11 Confined Space Entry Permit ............................................................................................................. 16-14
16.12 Rescue Procedures and Equipment .................................................................................................. 16-15
16.13 Post Entry Procedures ........................................................................................................................ 16-16

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page v
17. Environmental Protection Program
17.1 Environmental Protection Policy ......................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2 Site Specific Requirements .................................................................................................................. 17-4
17.3 Notification ............................................................................................................................................. 17-5

18. Safe Work Practices

18.1 Safe Work Practices .............................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.2 Hazard Levels......................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.3 Asbestos Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 18-7
18.4 Assured Grounding Program ............................................................................................................... 18-9
18.5 Boom Truck .......................................................................................................................................... 18-11
18.6 Chainsaw .............................................................................................................................................. 18-15
18.7 Cleaning Solvents................................................................................................................................ 18-17
18.8 Combustion Engines Indoors ............................................................................................................ 18-19
18.9 Compressed Air Tools ........................................................................................................................ 18-23
18.10 Compressed Gas Cylinders................................................................................................................ 18-25
18.11 Concrete Grinding ............................................................................................................................... 18-27
18.12 Concrete Pump Trucks ....................................................................................................................... 18-29
18.13 Confined Space Entry ......................................................................................................................... 18-31
18.14 Coring ................................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.15 Critical Lifts .......................................................................................................................................... 18-35
18.16 Defective Tools .................................................................................................................................... 18-37
18.17 Demolition ............................................................................................................................................ 18-41
18.18 Explosive / Powder Actuated Tools ................................................................................................... 18-43
18.19 Fall Protection ...................................................................................................................................... 18-45
18.20 Fall Protection Equipment .................................................................................................................. 18-47
18.21 Fibreglass Insulation ........................................................................................................................... 18-53
18.22 Fire Protection and Prevention .......................................................................................................... 18-55
18.23 Flagging ................................................................................................................................................ 18-57
18.24 Forklifts................................................................................................................................................. 18-59
18.25 Formwork and Falsework ................................................................................................................... 18-61
18.26 Grinding ................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18.27 Guardrails ............................................................................................................................................. 18-69
18.28 Hand Held Circular Saw ...................................................................................................................... 18-71
18.29 Hand Tools ........................................................................................................................................... 18-73
18.30 HEPA (high efficiency particulate air) Vacuums .............................................................................. 18-75
18.31 Hoisting ................................................................................................................................................ 18-77
18.32 Hot Work Permit................................................................................................................................... 18-79
18.33 Housekeeping ...................................................................................................................................... 18-81
18.34 Jackhammering ................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.35 Extension Ladders .............................................................................................................................. 18-85
18.36 Stepladders .......................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18.37 Lightening Action Protocol ................................................................................................................ 18-89
18.38 Lock-out................................................................................................................................................ 18-91
18.39 Materials Handling and Storage ......................................................................................................... 18-95
18.40 Overhead Power Lines ........................................................................................................................ 18-97
18.41 Pneumatic Tools .................................................................................................................................. 18-99
18.42 Power Blower – Gas Operated ......................................................................................................... 18-101
18.43 Power Lines and Underground Hazards ......................................................................................... 18-103
18.44 Power Tools ....................................................................................................................................... 18-105
18.45 Propane .............................................................................................................................................. 18-107
18.46 Respiratory Protective Equipment................................................................................................... 18-109
18.47 Retractable Knife ............................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.48 Rigging .............................................................................................................................................. 18-117
18.49 Safe Driving ........................................................................................................................................ 18-119
18.50 Scaffolds (metal and wood) ............................................................................................................. 18-121

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page vi
18.51 Silica Exposure .................................................................................................................................. 18-123
18.52 Skid Steer ........................................................................................................................................... 18-125
18.53 Structural Steel Erection................................................................................................................... 18-127
18.54 Swing Stages ..................................................................................................................................... 18-129
18.55 Table Saw ........................................................................................................................................... 18-131
18.56 Temporary Power .............................................................................................................................. 18-133
18.57 Tiger Torches ..................................................................................................................................... 18-135
18.58 Utility Locates .................................................................................................................................... 18-137
18.59 Wire Rope ........................................................................................................................................... 18-143
18.60 Office Ergonomics – Chair Height ................................................................................................... 18-145
18.61 Preventing Slips, Trips & Falls ......................................................................................................... 18-147
18.62 Safe Lifting Practices ........................................................................................................................ 18-149
19. Safe Work Procedures
19.1 Safe Work Procedures .......................................................................................................................... 19-3
19.2 Hazard Levels......................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19.3 Chop Saw Safety.................................................................................................................................... 19-7
19.4 Concrete Work ....................................................................................................................................... 19-9
19.5 Contaminated Items (including Sharps) .......................................................................................... 19-13
19.6 Dedicated Evacuation Platform (DEP) .............................................................................................. 19-17
19.7 Excavation and Trenching .................................................................................................................. 19-21
19.8 First Aid ................................................................................................................................................ 19-27
19.9 Major Incident ...................................................................................................................................... 19-29
19.10 Material Handlers ................................................................................................................................. 19-31
19.11 Media ..................................................................................................................................................... 19-35
19.12 Propane and Natural Gas Heaters ..................................................................................................... 19-37
19.13 Radial Arm Saw ................................................................................................................................... 19-41
19.14 Scissor Lifts, Booms and Giraffes ..................................................................................................... 19-43
19.15 Traffic Control ...................................................................................................................................... 19-47
19.16 Wire Rope ............................................................................................................................................. 19-51
19.17 Working Alone ..................................................................................................................................... 19-55
19.18 Cut-off Saw ........................................................................................................................................... 19-57
20. Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policies and Procedures
Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace Policy .................................................................................................... 20-2
1.0 Purposes of the Alcohol and Drug Policy ........................................................................................... 20-3
2.0 The Alcohol and Drug Policy is Important .......................................................................................... 20-3
3.0 Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ................................................................................................................ 20-3
4.0 Implementation of the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ......................................................................... 20-5
4.1 Education .................................................................................................................................... 20-5
4.2 Self-Help ..................................................................................................................................... 20-5
4.3 Possession of Alcohol and Drugs ............................................................................................... 20-6
4.4 Observation of Employee Conduct ............................................................................................. 20-6
4.5 Incidents and Near Misses.......................................................................................................... 20-6
4.6 Site Access Testing .................................................................................................................... 20-7
4.7 Pre-Employment Testing ............................................................................................................ 20-7
4.8 Alcohol and Drug Testing ........................................................................................................... 20-7
4.9 Alcohol and Drug Testing Results ............................................................................................. 20-8
4.10 Assistance of a Representative .................................................................................................. 20-9
5.0 Consequences for Failure to Comply with the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ................................. 20-9
5.1 Company Responses to Violations ............................................................................................. 20-9
5.2 Violation of 3.1(b) of the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ............................................................... 20-9
5.3 Violation of 3.1(a), (c) or (d) of the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ............................................. 20-10
5.4 Owner Responses to Violations ................................................................................................ 20-11
5.5 Bargaining Agent or Labour Provider Responses to Violations................................................ 20-11
6.0 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................ 20-11

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page vii
Appendices
Appendix A – Alcohol and Drug Testing Procedures ................................................................................... 20-14
1.0 Alcohol Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 20-14
2.0 Drug Testing .......................................................................................................................................... 20-16
3.0 Drug Testing (oral fluids) ...................................................................................................................... 20-18

Appendix B - Substance Abuse Expert .......................................................................................................... 20-21

1.0 The Substance Abuse Expert ................................................................................................................ 20-21
2.0 The Evaluation and Assessment ........................................................................................................... 20-21
3.0 The Referral ........................................................................................................................................... 20-21
4.0 Follow-up Evaluation ............................................................................................................................. 20-22

Appendix C – Drug and Alcohol Testing Process......................................................................................... 20-23

1.0 Safety Supervisor .................................................................................................................................. 20-23
2.0 Human Resources Representative........................................................................................................ 20-24
Drug and Alcohol Testing Process ........................................................................................................ 20-26

Appendix D – Drug and Alcohol Flow Chart .................................................................................................. 20-27

Appendix E – Actions Required Flow Chart ................................................................................................. 20-28

Drug and Alcohol Testing Forms:

Conditions for Employment (Pre-Employment) – Form 70(b)
Conditions for Employment – Form
Determining Reasonable Cause – Form 76
Reasonable Cause Observation Checklist – Form 85
Manitoba and Ontario Addendum

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page viii
21. Forms
NOTE: Refer to the Index in Section 21 to locate forms alphabetically or numerically
Administration
07 Emergency Preparedness Checklist
08 Emergency Response Test Record
78 General Safety Rules (for posting)
75 Mock Evacuation Report
29 Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report
67 Safe Work Procedure Template
06 Site Emergency Plan
Safety Orientation and New Worker Forms
09 Employee Training Record
51 Hearing Test Waiver
16 Hepatitis B Vaccination Waiver
79 New Worker Evaluation Form
52 Safety Eyewear Authorization Form
48 Safety Orientation Quiz
33 Safety Orientation Workers
44 Voluntary Emergency Medical Information
50 Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation
Stuart Olson Meetings
15 Health and Safety Committee Meeting Minutes
22 Job Site Safety Committee Meeting Minutes
43 Safety Meeting Attendance List
42 Tool Box Safety Meeting (available as pre-printed booklet)
73 100% Safe Shift “Start” Meeting
74 100% Safe Shift “End” Meeting
Claims Management
25 Illness / Injury Report
28 Modified Work Program Offer
Safety Violation and Discipline
24 Lock-out Removal by Others
34 Notice of Safety Non-Compliance
35 Progressive Disciplinary Action Form
37 Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension
Trade Contractor Forms
26 Operator Competency Assurance Verification
71 Project Specific HSE Plan Acknowledgment Form
38 Trade Contractor Clean-Up Notice
41 Trade Contractor Employee Orientation List
36 Trade Contractor Formal Notice of Safety Non-Compliance
39 Trade Contractor Requirements
40 Trade Contractor Toolbox Meeting Record
60 Trade Contractor Start-Up Meeting / Agreement
Hazards
23 Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) (available as pre-printed booklet)
14 Hazard Assessment Report
54 WHMIS Inventory List

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page ix
 21. Forms, continued
Incident Reporting
Serious Incident Protocol
27 Damage Report
10 Environmental Project Release Report
55 Harassment, Violence, Discrimination Reporting Form
19 Incident Investigation
20 Incident Investigation Checklist
58 Incident Witness Statement
72 Near-Miss Report Form
12 Record of First Aid
66 Utility Strike Report
57 Vehicle Collision Form
Inspection Reports
05 Project Safety Inspection Report (available as pre-printed booklet)
30 Safety Inspection Report
30B Office Inspection Report
Safe Work Practices and Procedures
04 Critical Task Inventory
32 Dangerous Work in Progress
82 Equipment Maintenance Log
61 Excavation and Trenching Checklist / Hazard Assessment
11 Fall Protection Work Plan
80 Forklifts Daily Checklist
65 Ground Disturbance Permit
17 Hot Work Permit Control Sheet
18 Hot Work Permit
21 Job Safety Start-up List
63 Removal of an Injured Worker using D.E.P.
31 Refusal to Work Form
86 Respirator Use Screening Form
68 Request to Work After Hours or on Non-Working Days
81 Scaffold Inspection Checklist
62 Telephone Threat Report
31 Work Refusal Process and Record Form
46 Working Alone Plan (Job Site)
47 Working Alone Plan (Office)
Confined Space Entry
01 Air Monitoring/Testing and Entry Log
02 Confined Space Entry Permit
03 Confined Space Hazard Assessment
69 Confined Space Identification
Drug and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policy and Procedures (Section 20)
70(b) Conditions for Employment (Pre-Employment)
70 Conditions for Employment (Pre-Employment)
76 Determining Reasonable Cause
85 Reasonable Cause Observation Checklist
Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace - MB Addendum
Employment Application Form

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page x
Acronyms
Note: acronyms may be used with or without punctuation

CO Carbon Monoxide
COR Certificate of Recognition Program (occupational health and safety
accredited program)
CPR Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (A First Aid “life revival” technique)
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSO Construction Safety Officer
CSTS Construction Safety Training System
DEP Dedicated Evacuation Platform
EFAP Employee Assistance Program
EPZ Emergency Planning Zone
ERP Emergency Response Plan
ESD Emergency Shutdown Devices
EUB Alberta Energy and Utility Board
FLHA Field Level Hazard Assessment
FAPER First Aid Planning and Emergency Response
H2S Hydrogen Sulphide
HEPA High efficiency particulate air filter
HSE Health Safety and Environmental
IDLH Immediate danger to life and health
LEL Lower exposure limit
LSD Legal Sub-Division
LTA Lost Time Accidents
MCHQ Government Main Control Headquarters
ME & I Ministry of Employment and Immigration
MEMPR Ministry of Energy, Mines and Petroleum Resources
MRO Medical Review Officer

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Table of Contents Page i
 MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets
NCSO National Construction Safety Officer
NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
NO2 Nitrous Dioxide
OH&S Occupational Health and Safety
OIS Occupational Injury Service
OSCAR Oil Spill Cooperative
PASS Acronym to be applied to fire extinguisher use: Pull the pin,
Aim the nozzle at the base of the flames, Squeeze the trigger while holding
the extinguisher upright, Sweep the nozzle from side-to-side and outward to
extinguish the flames
PC Permissible Concentration
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
ppm parts per million
RAP Registered Apprenticeship Program
RCMP Royal Canadian Mounted Police
SAE Substance Abuse Expert
SAP Substance Abuse Professional
SCBA Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SFA Standard First Aid
SO2 Sulphur Dioxide
STEL Short term exposure limit
TDG Transportation of Dangerous Goods
TLV Threshold limit value
TWA Time weighted average
UEL Upper Explosive Limit
UFL Upper Flammable Limit
UPITFOS Upstream Petroleum Industry Task Force on Safety
WCB Workers’ Compensation Board
WHMIS Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
WHS Workplace Health and Safety

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page ii
Definitions

Air Contaminants: Substances in the air that may be harmful to health. Five major types are dusts,
mists, fumes, gases and vapours.
Alcohol: Any substance that may be consumed and that has an alcoholic content in excess of 0.5
percent by volume.
Alcohol and Drugs: Alcohol or drugs or both.
Alcohol and Drug Test: A test administered in accordance with 4.8.1 of the alcohol and drug policy
(see Section 20)
Asbestos: The generic name for a group of naturally occurring minerals characterised by a fibrous
structure that includes the following minerals: chrysotile (white asbestos), crocidolite (blueish asbestos),
amosite (brown asbestos) and fibrous varieties of anthophyllite, tremolite and actinolite
Blank: A solid plate installed through the cross-section of a pipe, usually at a flanged connection.
Blind: A blank installed at the end of a pipe or nozzle that has been physically disconnected from a
piping system.
Bonding: Electrically connecting the elements or an installation to each other so that differences in
electrical potential between the elements are minimized.
Boom truck: A vehicle that has a truck body and a remote articulating arm. It is used to lift objects that
do not require a crane
Claims Investigation: When conducting an injury investigation, it is not only important to determine the
cause(s) or mechanism of injury but also to determine if there:
 Is a pre-existing condition which would pre-dispose the worker to injury?
 Were any witnesses to the incident (obtain names and statements)
 Was any third party involvement (determine extent of involvement
 Are there any doubts or concerns regarding the legitimacy of the injury (e.g. did it happen at
work or because of work: is a layoff expected?)
When there is doubt, it is important to gather all 100% shift start and end cards and witness statements
pertaining to the claim.
Company: A corporation, partnership, association, join venture, trust or organizational group of
persons where incorporated or not; more specifically, the Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. group of
companies, herein referred to as Stuart Olson.
Company Workplace: Includes all real or personal property, facilities, land, buildings, equipment,
containers, vehicles, vessels, boats and aircraft whether owned, leased or used by the company and
wherever it may be located.
Competent Tester: A person capable of safely and accurately testing confined space atmosphere and
interpreting test results.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page iii
Confined Space: A space which, because of its construction, location, contents, or work activity
therein:
a) Provides limited means of entry or exit
b) Has poor natural ventilation
c) Is not designated or intended for human occupancy
d) Contains or may develop a hazardous atmosphere
e) May require the use of protective equipment including the capability for immediate rescue
of a worker who enters
COR : The Certificate of Recognition Program (COR™) is an occupational health and safety
accreditation program that verifies a fully implemented safety & health program which meets national
standards. The objectives of COR™ are to provide industry employers with an effective safety and
health management system to reduce incidents, accidents and injuries as well as their associated
human and financial costs.
Demolition: The destruction or removal of material to make way for new construction
Drug Paraphernalia: Includes any personal property which is associated with the use of any drug,
substances, chemical or agent, the possession of which is unlawful in Canada.
Drugs: Includes any drug, substance, chemical or agent, the use or possession of which is unlawful in
Canada or requires a personal prescription from a licensed treating physician, any non-prescription
medication lawfully sold in Canada and drug paraphernalia.
Emergency: An emergency will be considered as any incident or event, either resulting in or having the
potential to result in loss of life, serious injury, significant loss or damage to Company property,
environmental damage or a situation which may pose a threat to the safety of the general public.
Employee: A person who is hired for a wage, salary, fee or payment, to perform work for an employer,
and for whom the employer submits to EI and CPP on behalf of the employee. A person engaged in
work on a work site, or in a work location where these policies apply.
Employee Assistance Services Program: Services that are designed to help employees who are
experiencing personal problems such as alcohol and drug abuse.
Employer: A person who controls and directs the activities of an employee under an express or implied
contract of employment.
Enclosed Space: Any enclosed area, other than a confined space, in which ordinary job hazards may
be intensified.
Excavation: A man-made cavity or depression in the earth’s surface formed by earth removal that
includes a trench, deep foundation, tunnel, shaft or open excavation.
Falsework: Structural support for pouring concrete, used to hold up a suspended concrete floor
Forklift: Includes zoom booms, scissor lifts, lift trucks and powered pallet jacks. They can be electric,
gas or propane powered
Formwork: Structure support for pouring concrete, used as a mould to pour concrete into.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page iv
Fume: Solid particulate of metallic origin generated by heat or chemical treatment of metals that is point
one to one (.1 - 1) micron in size (welding fume)
Gas: Any substances that is in a gaseous state at room temperatures (carbon monoxide, chlorine, etc.)
Green Tag: Serviced equipment, ready for use
Hazardous Atmosphere: Any atmosphere that is oxygen-deficient or that contains a toxic or disease-
producing contaminant. The atmosphere may or may not be IDLH (Immediately Dangerous to Life and
Health). The levels of an air contaminant are greater than the permissible concentration.
Hot Work: Any work which produces a source of ignition including welding, torch cutting, grinding,
brazing, flame soldering, thawing pipes with torches, and other work where there is potential for fire
HEPA: High efficiency particulate air filter designed to remove small pollutants and particles through
interception, impaction and diffusion
IDLH (Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health): Level of exposure to an air contaminant which
would cause a person without respiratory protection to be fatally injured or would cause irreversible and
incapacitating effects on that person's health.
Incident: An occurrence, circumstance or condition that caused or had the potential to cause damage
to person, property, reputation, security or the environment.
Isolation: The separation of a confined space from sources of danger.
Jackhammering: Breaking up of concrete by mechanical means, can be electric or air-driven
(pneumatic)
Laboratory: A laboratory providing urine-based drug testing services or oral fluid-based drug testing
services must be certified by the United States Department of Health and Human Services under the
National Laboratory Certification Program. A laboratory providing oral fluid-based drug testing services
must ensure that the oral fluid testing be performed in such a manner that: (1) acceptable forensic
practices and quality systems are maintained; (2) specimen validity testing is deployed; (3) regular
independent audits occur; and (4) proficiency test samples are included.
LEL (Lower Explosive Limit): The concentration of a gas, vapour or dust below which a flame does
not occur on contact with a source of ignition. For gases and vapours, this is expressed as a
percentage in air by volume. For dust, this is expressed as weight of dust per volume of air.
Lockout or Lock-out: A specific set of procedures for ensuring that a machine or process shut down
for maintenance or repair or other reasons is secured against accidental start-up or movement of any
part for the duration of the shutdown.
Manager: Includes team leaders and other persons in authority.
Medical Review Officer (MRO): A licensed physician with knowledge of substance abuse disorders
and the ability to evaluate an employee’s positive test results who is responsible for receiving and
reviewing laboratory results generated by an employer’s drug testing program and evaluating medical
explanations for certain drug test results.
Mist: Suspended droplets of an atomized liquid (paint, etc.)
Modified Duties (AKA Light Duties, Sedentary Duties, and Restricted Work): Modified work helps
an injured worker return to work while recovering and provides the opportunity to contribute to the

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page v
workplace. Temporary modified work includes any changes to regular job duties, as a result of an
injury.
‘Near Miss: An incident or close call that had the potential to result in a medical aid or more serious
injury, or damage to property or to the environment.
Negative test result: A report from the medical review officer that the employee who provided a
specimen for alcohol and drug testing did not have an alcohol and drug concentration level equal to or
in excess of that set out in 3.1(b).
Owner: The person in legal possession of a site.
Oxygen-Deficient Atmosphere: An atmosphere where the oxygen content is less than 19.5%.
Oxygen-Enriched Atmosphere: An atmosphere where the oxygen content is more than 23%.
Particulate: Fine solid particulate, generated mechanically or by friction that is one to ten (1 – 10)
microns in size (drywall dust, grain dust, etc.)
Permissible Concentration (PC): The concentration of an airborne substance to which a worker is
permitted to be exposed.
Positive test result: A report from the medical review officer that the employee who provided a
specimen for alcohol and drug testing did have an alcohol or drug concentration level equal to or in
excess of that set out in 3.1(b).
PPE – Personal Protective Equipment: intended to safeguard workers against a variety of hazards,
PPE include but is not necessarily limited to clothing, head protection, high visibility vests, hand and
foot protection, eye protection, hearing protection, fall protection and respiratory equipment.
PPM: Expression of the concentration of a contaminant in a medium. 10,000 ppm equals 1%. Mg/m3
(milligrams per cubic meter) is presently the most common measurement of airborne particulate
Purging: Displacement of an atmosphere in a confined space by a fluid or gas.
Red Tag: Defective tool tag – defective equipment, restricted space, out of service
Reasonable grounds: Includes information established by the direct observation of the employee’s
conduct or other indicators, such as the physical appearance of the employee, the smell associated
with the use of alcohol or drugs on his or her person or in the vicinity of his or her person, his or her
attendance record, circumstances surrounding an incident or near miss and the presence of alcohol,
drugs or drug paraphernalia in the vicinity of the employee or the area where the employee worked.

Rehabilitation program: A program tailored to the needs of an individual which may include education,
counselling and residential care offered to assist a person to comply with the alcohol and drug work
rule.
Respirable (Compressed) Air: Compressed breathing air that meets the requirements of CSA
Standard Can #Z180.1 "Compressed Breathing Air."
Return to Work / Stay at Work: A proactive, comprehensive program for employees with injuries /
illness. It is a collaborative process designed to progressively return an employee to full work capacity
following any medically related incident / condition. The program utilizes a holistic case management

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page vi
approach and focuses on identifying an employee’s current abilities and matching these abilities to
intermediary transitional assignments.
Serious Injury: Understood to mean hospitalization for more than 2 days.
Sheathing: A continuous row of wood or steel sheets in close contact with the earth
Shoring: A construction procedure (includes a trench cage) used to maintain the stability of the walls or
ceiling of an excavation
Silica: A naturally occurring mineral found in concrete, grout, masonry block and other common
material such as sand, granite, aggregates, stone, shale, clay, slate and sandstone. Silica can become
a serious occupational hazard when silica dust is created in a workspace without proper PPE and other
control measures in place.
Site Management: Any Foreman, General Foreman, Supervisor, Superintendent or Project Manager
who is directly responsible for workers
Smoke: Solid particulate generated by heat or chemical that is point one to one (.1 – 1) micron in size
(airborne toxins from plastics, etc.)
STEL (short term exposure limited): The maximum permissible concentration of a material, generally
expressed in ppm in air, for a defined short period of time (typically 5 or 15 minutes, depending upon
the country). This "concentration" is generally a time-weighted average over the period of exposure.
These values, which may differ from country to country, are often backed up by regulation and
therefore may be legally enforceable.
Strut: A horizontal cross-member of a shoring system that directly resists pressure from a waler or
upright
Substance abuse expert (SAE): A licensed physician; a licensed or certified social worker; a licensed
or certified psychologist; a licensed or certified employee assistance expert; or an alcohol and drug
abuse counsellor. He or she has received training specific to the SAE roles and responsibilities, has
knowledge of and clinical experience in the diagnosis and treatment of substance abuse-related
disorders, and has an understanding of the safety implications of substance use and abuse.
Supervisor: The person who directs the work of others and may, depending on the nature of the
company’s structure, include the foreman, general foreman, supervisor, superintendent and team
leader.
Swing Stage: Work platforms that can be raised and lowered against a vertical surface. They are often
used as platforms for workers who clean windows of multi-storey buildings.
Tamper: To alter, meddle, interfere or change.
Threshold limit value (TLV): Permissible time-weighted concentrations of airborne substances that a
worker may be exposed to based on an eight (8) hour workday.
Time weighted average (TWA): Average concentration of toxic substances in air when continuously
tested for a specific period of time
Toxicity: The quantitative ability of a chemical agent to cause injury, sickness or other unwanted
effects on a person. Toxic materials can act on the body in three ways: ingestion, inhalation,
absorption
Trench: An excavation having a depth that exceeds its width measured at the bottom

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page vii
Upper Explosive Limit (U.E.L.): The concentration of a gas or vapour above which a flame does not
occur on contact with a source of ignition. Also called the Upper Flammable Limit (U.F.L.).
Uprights: The vertical members of shoring system placed in contact with the earth
Vapour: Gaseous state of a substance that is normally a solid or liquid at standard room temperature
(solvents or gasoline)
Waler: A horizontal member of the shoring system that is placed parallel to the excavation face
Watch Person: A person trained in emergency procedures and assigned to remain immediately
outside a confined space and in communication with persons inside.
WCB: A no fault disability insurance system designed to protect workers and employers from the full
impact of workplace injuries and illness. Solely funded by employers, the board provides benefits for
lost wages, health care treatments and other related costs to an injured worker.
WCB Employers Handbook: An information booklet that is distributed by the WCB informing
employers of their rights and responsibilities pertaining to WCB policies and procedures.
WCB Workers Handbook: An information booklet that is distributed by the WCB informing workers of
their rights and responsibilities pertaining to WCB policies and procedures.
WCB/Employers Report: Report submitted to the WCB advising them of a workplace injury or illness
specific to a worker.
WCB/Workers Report: Report submitted by WCB to the worker advising them of a workplace injury or
illness.
Worker: Includes all employees of the Company as well as any person employed by the Company
either on a full or part time basis as a dependent or independent contractor supplying services through
a corporate or other entity.
Wire Rope: Any stranded, braided cable made of metal. It can be used for hoisting, craning, towing
and guard rail construction
Work: Includes training and any other breaks from work while at a company workplace.
Work site: A place at which a person performs work for an owner or employer.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Acronyms and Definitions Page viii
Section 1. Policy and Administration

1.1 Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Policy ............... 1-2
1.2 Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Manual ............. 1-3
1.2.1 Health and Safety Program, Regular Review .................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Focus of the Review ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Provincial / Territorial Regulator Authority .................................. 1-5
1.4 Emergency Contacts ..................................................................... 1-6
1.5 Safety Performance Recognition .................................................. 1-7
1.5.1 Leadership in Safety Award ............................................................................. 1-7
1.5.2 Hourly Employee Safety Recognition .............................................................. 1-7

HSE Manual, Revision #5 – June 2015

Section 1. Policy and Administration Page i
1.1 Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Policy

Date Issued: June 18, 2001

Date of Revision: January 2, 2014
Revision #: 4
Authorization: Stuart Olson

Stuart Olson is fully committed to a strong Health, Safety and Environmental Program (the "HSE
Program") that protects its staff, its property, and the public from unwanted incidents. We believe
that every employee is entitled to work under the safest conditions possible for the construction
industry, and as such, every reasonable effort shall be made in the interest of incident prevention,
fire protection, and health and environmental preservation. As all Stuart Olson projects are
considered safety sensitive, a commitment to adhere to Stuart Olson standards of practice for
health, safety and environment is a condition of employment.

Occupational health & safety, environmental preservation, and the safety of the public come first.
No employee or trade contractor on a Stuart Olson site shall be expected, or knowingly allowed,
to work in a manner which contravenes the intentions and the spirit of this HSE Program, or in
contravention of any Federal or Provincial / Territorial Act, regulation or code (“legislation”).

The HSE Program is developed to protect our valued human resources, as well as reducing
costs associated with incidents, including injuries to employees, property damages, and incidents
involving the public and the environment.

Stuart Olson is committed to work in a spirit of consultation and cooperation with workers.
Furthermore, Stuart Olson recognizes and respects that workers have rights; The Right to
Refuse, the Right to Know, the Right to Participate, and the Right to Work without being subjected
to discriminatory action.
With the commitment and diligence of all our employees, trade contractors, suppliers, and clients,
we are confident that we can achieve our goal of incident free, quality construction.
Per:

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 1. Policy and Administration - Page 2
1.2 Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Manual

The Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Manual (HSE Manual) does not supersede
or replace the Workers’ Compensation Act, any federal, provincial or territorial legislation, any
federal or provincial / territorial regulations, or any Workplace Health and Safety regulations.
Stuart Olson employees and trade contractors must be familiar with the health and safety acts,
regulations and codes applicable to their province.
It is not a definitive guide to legislated health and safety requirements.
The purpose of the HSE Manual is to help Stuart Olson, and all associated companies, meet the
requirements of governmental health and safety legislation, meet the requirements of
governmental health and safety regulations, and protect the health and safety of workers.
The HSE Manual must be used in conjunction with the following:
 Workers’ Compensation Act or the equivalent regulations of the authority having
jurisdiction in the province in which the work is being done
 Workplace Health and Safety (WH&S) or Occupational Health & Safety (OH&S) as
applicable to the local jurisdiction
 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulation (TDG)
 Applicable provincial / territorial traffic safety act
 Electrical Protection Act and Regulations (EPA)
 Any additional rules, procedures, programs, or written instructions developed by Stuart
Olson that meet or exceed the provincial / territorial Certificate of Recognition (COR)
requirements.
This HSE Manual applies to all workers employed by Stuart Olson, regardless of the province in
which they are employed or the name of the operating company for whom they work and it
applies to all buildings and work sites.
1.2.1 Health and Safety Program, Regular Review

To ensure that the Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Program meets the evolving
health and safety needs of its workers, the Company will conduct a review of its HSE program
on a regular basis and at least annually.
This review will include all aspects of the Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental
program and will be done with the full support of Management.
The HSE program regular review has a number of purposes:
 Provide evaluation of health and safety programs
 Suggest corrections and additions as needed
 Assess incident trends
 Maintain and improve workers' awareness of health and safety programs
 Reduce incidents and compensation claims

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 1 Policy and Administration Page 3
 1.2.2 Focus of the Review

The focus of the HSE Program regular review is to determine the relevance of the material in
the Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Manual and note areas that can be
improved.
The review will focus on a number of items:
 Policy and administration
 Health and safety education and training
 Supplementary programs
 Workplace inspections
 Monitoring of hazardous conditions
 Incident investigation procedures
 First aid services and equipment
 Joint Workplace Health and Safety Committee
 Records and statistics
 Personal protective equipment (PPE)
 Emergency preparedness
 Maintenance program
 Health and safety program regular review
 Fleet risk management
 Disability management

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 1 Policy and Administration Page 4
 1.3 Provincial / Territorial Regulator Authority
Each province has its own health and safety legislation and regulations and its own regulatory
authorities for enforcement.
In British Columbia, injury and compensation issues and workplace health and safety is
regulated by WorkSafeBC.
In Alberta, the Workers’ Compensation Board looks after injury and compensation issues and
workplace health and safety is regulated by Occupational Health and Safety.
In Saskatchewan, the Workers’ Compensation Board looks after injury and compensation
issues, and workplace health and safety is regulated by Occupational Health and Safety, a
division of Saskatchewan Labour.
In Manitoba, the Workers Compensation Board looks after injury and compensation issues.
Workplace Safety and Health regulates workplace health and safety.
In Ontario, the Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB) and the Ministry of Labour (OML)
deal with worker safety.
In the Yukon Territory, the Workers’ Compensation Health and Safety Board looks after injury
and compensation issues under the jurisdiction of the Occupational Health & Safety Act.
In this manual, rather than list all provincial / territorial organisations with jurisdiction in a
particular matter, a phrase such as the authority having jurisdiction in the province / territory in
which the work is being done, the authority having jurisdiction, provincial / territorial authority, or
a similar phrase will be used.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 1 Policy and Administration Page 5
1.4 Emergency Contacts

In the event of an emergency, the Emergency Response Plan (Form 06) is essential to minimize
confusion and delay.
In accordance with Section 12: Emergency Preparedness, emergency contact numbers are to
be recorded on the Plan and posted in a common area visible to all workers.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 1 Policy and Administration Page 6
1.5 Safety Performance Recognition
1.5.1 Leadership in Safety Award

Each year, one Superintendent from each Stuart Olson Region shall be recognized with the “Leadership
in Safety Award” for superior achievements in safety.
a) The criteria for being selected as the recipient are as follows:
 LTAs/Medical Aids: No lost time accidents. Minimal medical aids. Where
accidents occur, the Superintendent complies with reporting and follow-up
procedures. Claims management through modified work implementation in
cooperation with the Regional Safety Manager.
 Hours Supervised: Number of man-hours supervised of own forces and trade
contractor forces on projects completed during the year, relative to total man-hours
supervised for the Division.
 Risk Factor: Relative degree of risk from specific jobsite hazardous conditions
including size of crew, nature of work, remoteness of project site, and number and
nature of potential hazards.
 Cooperation/Compliance: Level of cooperation, compliance and commitment to
the HSE Program. Peer and self-audit evaluation results. Cooperation with the
Regional Safety Manager.
 Safety Problems and Concerns: Cooperation and compliance with local
authorities, Occupational Health and Safety, WCB, and provincial /territorial
legislation. No negative reports on site.
 Corporate management reserves the right to revise the criteria for being selected
as the recipient of the award during the recipient review process. Revisions to the
award recipient criteria will be updated in the following year Safety Manual updates.
b) Each Superintendent shall be scored using the above-established criteria.
c) Division management, in consultation with the Chief Operating Officer (COO) and the Regional
Safety Manager, shall determine the "Leadership in Safety Award" recipient for the year, and
the award shall be presented annually to the recipient at a Company function.
1.5.2 Hourly Employee Safety Recognition

a) All current employees who surpass predetermined milestones in hours worked without a lost
time accident will be eligible for a safety award. Having an injury, lost time accident or a
property damage incident considered directly related to an “unsafe act” on their part will result
in the workers’ safe work hours being returned to zero.
b) Awards given shall be cumulative in nature. i.e.; 2000 Hours, 4000 Hours.
c) Specific company safety achievements may be recognized by a suitable safety award gift as
determined by management.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 1 Policy and Administration Page 7
 Section 2. Health, Safety and Environmental Responsibilities
2.1 Stuart Olson .............................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Worker Orientation ...................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.2 Posting of Information ................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.3 Proper Cleanup of a Work Site ................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Fire Prevention ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.5 Special Hazard Protection .......................................................................... 2-4
2.1.6 HSE Reporting ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.2 Executive ................................................................................... 2-6
2.3 Management .............................................................................. 2-7
2.4 Project Managers ...................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Regional Safety Manager ........................................................ 2-9
2.6 Project Superintendent........................................................... 2-11
2.7 Supervisors / Foremen ........................................................... 2-13
2.8 Site Safety Coordinator .......................................................... 2-15
2.9 Workers ................................................................................... 2-17
2.9.1 Worker’s Rights ......................................................................................... 2-18
2.10 Trade Contractors ................................................................... 2-20
2.10.1 Loss Control Management ....................................................................... 2-21
2.11 Visitors .................................................................................... 2-27

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities
2.1 Stuart Olson

Stuart Olson will establish a safe and healthy workplace and facilitate safe work practices and
procedures through the provision of safety training, safety equipment, safe work practices, safe
work procedures, and work direction.
Stuart Olson will ensure that all workers on their work sites comply with provincial / territorial
occupational health and safety regulations. Everyone on the work site, including Managers,
Supervisors, workers, and visitors share the responsibility for safety.
All levels of Management must work together to establish and maintain proper safety standards,
policies, practices, and procedures.
Stuart Olson will take a number of actions to enhance safety:
a. Develop, implement, and maintain a work site Health, Safety and Environmental
program
b. Provide written safe work practices and procedures for particular operations and job
sites
c. Make sure that Supervisors instruct all workers in the safe performance of their work
d. Ensure that hazards are eliminated, if possible
e. Ensure that hazards that cannot be eliminated are controlled
f. Ensure that, if hazards cannot be eliminated or controlled, workers will be instructed on
how to minimize hazards through safe work practices and procedures and personal
protective equipment (PPE)
g. Provide written hazard assessments monthly, or as processes change. At a minimum
hazard assessments are to be completed when required by occupational health and
safety regulations. Hazard assessments shall be located in a visible location within the
project site and all affected workers are required to sign off to acknowledge that they
have been informed of the hazard assessment before any work is commenced
h. Ensure buildings and equipment are maintained
i. Provide and maintain first aid services and equipment as required by provincial /
territorial occupational health and safety regulations
j. Report all work injuries and illness to the Regional Safety Manager and to the
appropriate legislative authority in the time frame required by regulations
k. Report serious injuries, situations, or deaths immediately (See section 7.2)
l. Investigate all incidents immediately
m. Maintain proper records of training, inspections, incidents and investigations
n. Conduct an annual review of the Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental
Program
o. Comply with all reporting and record keeping requirements specified in the Stuart Olson
Health, Safety and Environmental manual, in particular, records of inspections, incident
investigations, worker training, first aid, and injury reporting

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 2
2.1.1 Worker Orientation

Stuart Olson will provide all workers with a safety orientation and a site-specific orientation
before they begin work. General work site rules, safe work procedures, and job rules will be
written and available to all workers.
See Form 33. Project Safety Orientation for specific information on orientation.

2.1.2 Posting of Information

The following items will be posted in a common worker area:

 Names and locations of the HSE Committee members (if one exists locally)
 Minutes of HSE Committee meetings from the past year
 Current list of First Aid Attendants
 HSE policy documents, as required by provincial / territorial legislation:
1. Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Policy
2. Claims Management Policy
3. Drug and alcohol in the workplace Policy
4. Environmental Protection Policy
5. General Safety Rules
6. Incident investigation Policy
7. Inspection Policy
8. Personal protective equipment Policy
9. Respectful Workplace – Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Prevention
Policy
10. Safety Enforcement / Discipline Policy
11. Safety Training Policy
12. Working Alone Policy
 Field Level Hazard Assessments (FLHA)
 Site Emergency Plan (Reference: Form 06: Site Emergency Plan)
 Any project-specific information, posters, notices or other communications required by
authorities having jurisdiction in the area.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 3
2.1.3 Proper Cleanup of a Work Site

The Company will ensure that work site cleanup takes place as frequently as is needed to avoid
creating a hazard. Work areas must be cleaned at the end of a shift, immediately after finishing
a job, or as necessary. Work sites must be cleaned at least once a week.

2.1.4 Fire Prevention

Stuart Olson will take all reasonable precautions, such as proper cleanup, careful use of
electrical equipment, and proper training of workers to protect the work area from fire hazards.
The Company will provide fire extinguishers based on workplace health and safety or
occupational health and safety regulations. (Trade contractors must provide fire extinguishers
that meet workplace health and safety regulations.)
Fire blankets must be available and clearly displayed for spark control and worker protection
where required. The use of fire retardant overalls may be required based on hazard
assessments.
All work must be in compliance with the municipal fire codes.
See Section 14: Fire Prevention for more information regarding fire prevention.
2.1.5 Special Hazard Protection

Stuart Olson will ensure that special hazards receive the necessary attention.
Workers in situations where special hazards are present will be trained, observed, and
supervised.
Special hazard situations include, but are not limited to, the following:
 Lock-out (refer to definitions for clarification)
 Electrical contact
 Care and use of gas cylinders
 Safe and proper use of solvents and other chemicals
 Fall protection
 Confined space
 Forklift and scissor lift operation
 Pinch points
 Rotating or moving parts in equipment

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 4
2.1.6 HSE Reporting
All reports related to HSE will be reviewed and signed when necessary by Senior Management
and/or Middle Management.
These reports will include the minutes of committee meetings, injury reports, incident
investigations, and other items, as may be required.
To ensure that the Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental Program meets the evolving
health and safety needs of its workers, the Company will conduct a review of its HSE program
on a regular basis and at least annually.
This review will include all aspects of the Stuart Olson Health, Safety and Environmental
program and will be done with the full support of Management.
The HSE program regular review has a number of purposes:
 Provide evaluation of health and safety programs
 Suggest corrections and additions as needed
 Assess incident trends
 Maintain and improve workers' awareness of health and safety programs
 Reduce incidents and compensation claims

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 5
2.2 Executive
The Executive (COO and Vice Presidents) must establish and maintain proper safety standards,
policies, and work procedures.
Senior Management must do the following:
a. Ensure that the HSE program is developed, administered and maintained
b. Ensure that all Managers are trained to carry out their HSE responsibilities
c. Make sure that incident prevention policies and procedures are established in
consultation with all levels of Management and with workers
d. Ensure that safe and healthy work practices are monitored and, if necessary, modified to
safeguard workers
e. Make sure that Stuart Olson’s HSE program is communicated to all levels of
Management, Supervisors, trade contractors, and workers
f. Establish the mechanism to provide safety education programs for workers
g. Review safety records, statistics and reports for the purpose of evaluating activities for
future reference and course of actions.
h. Authorize the necessary resources for the Company HSE program
i. Ensure that the Company HSE program is maintained within Stuart Olson’s jurisdiction
j. Maintain buildings and equipment
k. Provide a safe working environment for workers and work site visitors
l. Provide support and accountability to employees and trade contractors on their safety
responsibilities and performance
m. Reviewing and directing the implementation of the workplace Health, Safety and
Environmental Policy and such amendment as may be necessary. This will be
completed annually or sooner if required.
n. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the Company
operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where there is
the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside the boundaries of
the Company property or project site perimeter.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 6
2.3 Management
Management (Senior Managers, Project Directors, Operations Managers, Field Managers and
Managers of Special Projects) must ensure that the workplace is healthy and safe and that work
is carried out in a safe manner.
Management has overall responsibility to:
a. Enforce the requirements of Stuart Olson’s HSE program
b. Enforce the regulations of the provincial / territorial authority having jurisdiction
c. Provide a safe and healthy workplace
d. Ensure workers are provided with appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE)
e. Correct any hazard identified promptly
f. Investigate incidents immediately in conjunction with the Regional Safety Manager
g. Maintain appropriate records and statistics and make them available to the Company
HSE Committee and to the provincial / territorial authority having jurisdiction
h. Establish and maintain a job site Joint HSE Committee(s) or an alternative, and do so in
accordance with provincial / territorial regulations, or as directed by the Officers of the
provincial / territorial authority having jurisdiction
i. Ensure that all members of the HSE Committee who require training receive appropriate
training to prepare them for the committee work they will do
j. Hold periodic Management meetings to review HSE practices and incident trends and
determine if any corrective action is necessary
k. Make sure that Supervisors have taken suitable Supervisor’s training (Reference Section
3: Training and Education)
l. Consult and co-operate with the Company HSE Committee and the provincial / territorial
authority having jurisdiction
m. Consult and abide by provincial / territorial occupational health and safety regulations
n. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the Company
operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where there is
the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside the boundaries of
the Company property or project site perimeter.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 7
2.4 Project Managers

The role of the Project Manager within the HSE Program is one of management support to the
field operations, as well as contract administration involving the HSE Program. The Project
Manager has responsibilities that encompass an understanding of the level of duty required by
Stuart Olson and its trade contractors that include, but are not limited to:
a. Being fully familiar with the HSE Program, as well as applicable legislation
b. Providing trade contractors with information and requirements of the HSE Program
c. Providing management support to the Project Superintendent regarding HSE Program
issues, which may arise, including issues involving trade contractors and owner
representatives
d. Participating in hazard assessments and planning related to their assigned projects
e. Setting a positive example towards health, safety and the environment
f. Coordinating with the site owner, workplace health and safety matters including the set-
up of a joint committee to ensure the safe execution of work between various work
forces.
g. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the Company
operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where there is
the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside the boundaries of
the Company property or project site perimeter.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 8
2.5 Regional Safety Manager
Regional Safety Managers apply Stuart Olson’s HSE program and provincial / territorial
occupational health and safety regulations to the workplace. Regional Safety Managers have
the responsibility to:
a. Implement the requirements of the legislative authority having jurisdiction
b. Inform management (including Supervisors) of safety concerns
c. Ensure that first aid services are provided in compliance with provincial / territorial
requirements
d. Inform supervisors of legislation, corporate policy, and safety procedures relevant to their
work
e. Ensure a copy of the Stuart Olson HSE Manual is kept at the work site and that it is
accessible to all workers
f. Ensure that a copy of the provincial / territorial health and safety regulations are kept on the
work site and that it is accessible to all workers
g. Ensure that Stuart Olson’s HSE policies are posted in a common area at the work site
h. In consultation with management and workers, develop site-specific safety procedures
i. Inform the manager/supervisor at each work site about any policy and procedural
amendments made to site-specific safety procedures
j. Attend courses and seminars to stay current with provincial / territorial legislation and “best
practice” industry standards
k. When necessary, attend courses that will include instructor certification or “Train the Trainer”
courses so Regional Safety Managers can certify Company workers in areas such as
WHMIS, forklift operation, Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG), confined space
safety, electrical safety, and fall protection
l. Facilitate training of Supervisors, Foremen, and workers regarding job safety duties
m. Ensure that all applicable recording and reporting procedures including, but not limited to,
the following are carried out:
o Incident investigations
o Lost-time injury reports
o Worker orientations
o Work site safety inspections
o Worker training records
o Incident analysis reports
o Emergency procedure development and maintenance
o Worker emergency procedure orientation
o New worker HSE program orientation
o Annual worker HSE program orientation

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 9
 n. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the Company
operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where there is the
potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside the boundaries of the
Company property or project site perimeter.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 10
2.6 Project Superintendent

Project Superintendents have overall responsibility for the safety of personnel, equipment,
property, and the public relative to their assigned project site, as well as the protection of the
environment which may be affected by construction activities. Specific responsibilities include,
but are not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Become fully familiar with the HSE Program as well as applicable legislation
b. Enforce the HSE Program and the applicable legislation on site
c. Coordinate process of hazard assessments and site specific HSE Program planning
related to their assigned projects
d. Set up the emergency procedure/evacuation plan on site and ensures it is well
communicated to site personnel
e. Coordinate a Company and site-specific HSE Program orientation for all new and/or
transferred Company employees
f. Provide trade contractor supervisors with an overview of the HSE Program, including
a site-specific orientation
g. Implement a plan to have project visitors check in at the site office prior to entry onto
the site, so that there can be a communication process of the general site rules and
emergency procedures (Reference Section 2.11: Visitors)
h. Coordinate and participate in start-up safety meetings
i. Develop and implement all Company site-specific safety procedures
j. Obtain and review safety procedures developed by trade contractors in advance of
the work to be done
k. Coordinate a system of regular safety meetings on the site, which includes
participation by all personnel on site
l. Conduct regular safety inspections, communicates their findings to affected site
personnel, and corrects unsafe acts and conditions in a timely fashion
m. Review safety inspections and/or audit reports prepared by the Safety Supervisor
and implements a plan to have corrective actions implemented immediately
n. Ensure that Company foremen are aware of their responsibilities under this HSE
Program, and that they frequently monitor and enforce the working conditions and
the work practices of their workers
o. Ensure that there are sufficient first aid personnel and equipment on the site,
appropriate to the size and scope of the project, and ensures trade contractors are
included in this requirement
 Investigate all incidents and ensure that such incidents are properly
investigated, recorded, reported to management and government
agencies, and that appropriate corrective action is taken. Ensure that the
scene of the incident is secured to prevent further injury or property

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 11
 damage and to not further alter the site until it is released by the
appropriate authorities and/or provincial / territorial inspectors.

p. Administer the Modified Work Plan of the HSE Program for Company employees
injured on their site
q. Maintain the WHMIS requirements on the site, including files of material safety data
sheets for ALL controlled/hazardous products brought to site. All such products or
materials shall be listed on the inventory list, and posted on the site
r. Implement and participate in a project safety committee on all large, or high hazard
projects
s. Not dismiss or take any other disciplinary action against a person by reason of that
person acting in compliance with this HSE Program or the applicable legislation
t. Set a positive example towards health, safety and the environment
u. Regularly monitor the work being conducted by young persons and persons recently
hired who are working on the jobsite to ensure that they have sufficient experience to
perform the work that they have been assigned in a safe manner
v. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the
Company operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down
where there is the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside
the boundaries of the Company property or project site perimeter.
Note: On projects where a Site Safety Coordinator has not been assigned by Stuart Olson, the
responsibilities noted under Section 2.8 become the Project Superintendent’s responsibility

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 12
2.7 Supervisors / Foremen
Supervisors / Foremen (supervisors may also include foremen, assistant or site
superintendents, lead hands or other site personnel with designated supervisory
responsibilities) supervise workers and ensure that they are performing their duties properly.
Supervisors must do the following:
a. Lead by example
b. Create safety awareness
c. Instruct workers regarding safety practices
d. Ensure that all workers are instructed in the safe performance of their work, including the
safe use of machinery and personal protective equipment (PPE)
e. Properly document all safety instruction given, describe it, and list the people who
received it
f. Make sure the safety instructions given to workers are understood and followed
g. Inform workers of any reasonably foreseeable HSE hazards at the work site
h. Conduct safety inspections
i. Correct unsafe acts or conditions immediately
j. Hold regular safety meetings and document what is discussed and who attended
k. Take immediate action to correct any existing or potential HSE hazard discovered or
reported
l. Understand the occupational health and regulations that apply to the workplace
m. Ensure that all work activity is done in accordance with occupational health and safety
requirements
n. Consult and co-operate with the Company HSE Committee and with provincial /
territorial authorities
o. Co-operate with Stuart Olson safety personnel
p. Conduct regular hazard assessments:
o Ensure all affected employees have been informed of the contents and sign off in
relation to a confirmation of the review of the job hazard assessment and/or Safe
Work Procedure.
o Report results to the Supervisor and Regional Safety Manager
q. Investigate all incidents or “near misses”
r. Be familiar with first aid reporting requirements
s. Submit the appropriate injury reports to the provincial / territorial authority having
jurisdiction within the time frame stipulated in the relevant legislation
t. Be familiar with provincial / territorial occupational health and safety regulations
u. Understand and enforce the Company HSE program
v. Ensure that the site is safe and secure during off-hours when no work is being done in
order to minimize danger to the public.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 13
 w. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the Company
operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where there is
the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside the boundaries of
the Company property or project site perimeter.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 14
2.8 Site Safety Coordinator
A Site Safety Coordinator, when one is required for a project, must do the following:
a. Become familiar with, promote, and implement Stuart Olson HSE policies and
procedures and the regulations of the legislated authority having jurisdiction
b. Co-operate with the officers of the legislative authority having jurisdiction
c. Show the officers of the provincial / territorial authority having jurisdiction that a copy of
the pertinent regulations and a copy of the Company HSE program are at the job site
and accessible to workers
d. Participate in incident investigations when asked to do so by a supervisor
e. Ensure Trade Supervisors provide certification of training
f. Inform workers of any potential or actual dangers to their health and safety
g. If qualified to do so, instruct workers adequately in the use of personal protective
equipment (PPE)
h. Ensure that workers use appropriate PPE to perform their assigned job safely
i. If qualified to do so, conduct safety orientations of new employees, transferred
employees, and trade contractor employees
j. Ensure the site safety plan is developed, maintained, and posted on site for review.
k. Ensure Safety Committee meetings and toolbox safety meetings are held regularly
l. Ensure that immediate remedial action is taken to correct any sub-standard conditions
that affect safety
m. Protect the public from hazards by the proper installation and maintenance of site
fencing and hoarding, traffic barriers, and traffic control on streets or public property
n. Make sure that fire safety is maintained during demolition and construction
o. Ensure that materials handling and hoisting alongside streets or over streets is done
safely to eliminate hazards to the public
p. Conduct full site inspections to identify / correct unsafe work practices and conditions
q. Inspect the site on a regular basis, forward copies of inspection reports through to the
Superintendent and others as appropriate and follow up to ensure effective corrective
measures have been undertaken
r. Inform Trade Supervisors of safety non-compliance
s. Ensure that action is taken to eliminate safety non-compliance as soon as possible
t. Post all bulletins, safety posters, emergency plans, rules and regulations, safety
inspections, safety meetings, and any other notices relevant to the HSE Program
u. Participate in investigations and report all incidents to the Superintendent, and provides
effective recommendations for prevention of recurrences
v. Ensure that the site is safe and secure during off-hours when no work is being done in
order to minimize danger to the public.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 15
 w. In consultation with the Senior On-Site Employee, force a portion or all of the Company
operation or project site work to be temporarily suspended or shut down where there is
the potential to endanger the safety of personnel, or the public outside the boundaries of
the Company property or project site perimeter.
Note: On projects where a Site Safety Coordinator has not been assigned by Stuart Olson, the responsibilities
noted under Section 2.8 become the Project Superintendent’s responsibility

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 16
2.9 Workers
Every worker must observe provincial / territorial occupational health and safety regulations,
observe Stuart Olson HSE regulations, work safely, and report any existing or potential safety or
health hazard to the first available Supervisor or HSE Committee member.
Workers must do the following:
a. Take responsibility for their own safety
b. Take responsibility for the safety of other workers by working in a manner so as not to
injure themselves or other workers
c. Comply with all of the Company’s HSE program regulations
d. Comply with provincial / territorial occupational health and safety regulations
e. Follow all safe work procedures and always cooperate with safety personnel
f. Follow the Company’s General safety rules
g. Be aware of potential hazards from adjoining work areas
h. Maintain a clean work area
i. Use personal protective equipment (PPE), clothing, and devices as required by
provincial / territorial occupational health and safety regulations and the Company’s HSE
manual (such as, but not limited to, eye protection, hearing protection, hard hats, and
safety boots, etc.)
j. Report unsafe acts and conditions to the Supervisor
k. Not arrive at the work site unfit for work due to the use of drugs (prescription or non-
prescription) or alcohol or under the influence of any other cause
l. Not operate machinery or equipment unless trained to do so and authorized to do so
m. Not remove guards from machinery or equipment except for maintenance when properly
trained to do so
n. Not engage in horseplay or in similar conduct that endangers others
o. Report all work-related injuries to the Supervisor immediately
p. Report any violation of the Company’s HSE regulations to the Supervisor or to a HSE
Committee member
q. Comply with provincial / territorial workers’ compensation requirements
r. Advise their supervisor of any relevant limitations or work restrictions, which could affect
the safe performance of work
s. Advise their supervisor of any medications being taken which may affect the safe
performance of work
t. Take immediate corrective action necessary to eliminate hazards to themselves, other
site personnel, public, equipment, and environment
u. Turn in, to appropriate personnel, all unsafe or defective tools, power cords, or other
equipment. In the event that the equipment is not able to be turned in, a lock-out or tag

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 17
 notice should be affixed to the item to warn other workers on future shifts not use the
item
v. Ensure that they do not direct inexperienced or untrained workers to engage in tasks for
which they are not properly trained

2.9.1 Worker’s Rights

Workers have the right to refuse, the right to know, the right to participate and the right to work
without being subject to discriminatory action. The parameters of these rights and the process
for exercising these rights depend on the legislation and provincial / territorial regulations in the
province in which the worker is working.
The right to refuse
A worker has the right to refuse to do work that the worker believes presents an unusual danger
to self or others.
An unusual danger may be one of the following:
 A danger that is not normal for the job
 A danger that would normally stop work
 A situation for which the worker is not properly trained, equipped, or experienced
This right may only be used for legitimate HSE concerns.
The worker can determine whether reasonable grounds exist for exercising the right to refuse
work by asking whether an average worker, with the same level of training and experience,
using normal and honest judgement, would agree that the work presents an unacceptable
hazard.
If the worker invokes this right, the worker cannot be punished, demeaned, or discriminated
against.
Form 31: Refusal to work form is to be used to document, investigate and resolve any issues
surrounding a worker’s refuse to work.
Note: Workers exercising this right must do so in accordance with the regulations prescribed by
the authority having jurisdiction in the province in which the work is being done.
The right to know
Workers have the right to know about the hazards of the job and the hazards at the work site,
for example, the WHMIS system.
The right to participate
Workers have the right to participate in the safety program, through safety training, safe work
procedures, safety inspections, and safety meetings.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 18
 The right to work without being subject to discriminatory action
Workers have a right to work without being subject to discriminatory action. A worker who
exercises their right to refuse, right to know and right to participate cannot be subject to
discriminatory action based upon exercising the previous three rights.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 19
 2.10 Trade Contractors
Notwithstanding the responsibility of the prime contractor, trade contractors are responsible for
their own health and safety program and the health and safety of their workers.
Trade contractors must comply with Stuart Olson’s HSE program, loss control program
(Reference Section 2.10.1: 2.10.1 Loss Control and Form 39: Trade Contractor
Requirements). If applicable, the terms and conditions of a trade contractor’s HSE program
shall contain equivalent provisions to this Policy or enhanced terms.
Trade contractors must develop a written HSE program when required to do so by the authority
having jurisdiction in the province.
Specific operations at the site may require that a written Code of Practice or procedure be
established (i.e.: confined space entry, respiratory equipment, and designated chemical) and
others as required under legislation. Such Codes of Practices / procedures shall be developed
by trade contractors, provided to Stuart Olson for review, and posted for all affected workers to
review.
In accordance with the contract agreement signed, each Contractor is required to clean up and
dispose of all debris generated by the performance of its work.
Failure to complete the clean up as notified will result in the work being done by Stuart Olson
and a deductive change order will be issued for the cost. Stuart Olson may issue a trade
contractor clean-up notice for non-compliance.
While on the work site, trade contractors must do the following:
a. Comply with all aspects of the regulations of the authority having jurisdiction
b. Attend Stuart Olson’s site safety orientation
c. Provide a language translator , as required, for its workers
d. Work safely in a manner that will not pose any hazard to any person
e. Ensure that trade contractor workers work safely, in a manner that will not pose a hazard
to any person
f. Report any unsafe conditions to the Project HSE Representative
g. Report all incidents, injuries, and near misses
h. Cooperation shall include the requirement that the trade contractor provide a copy of
their incident investigation report as prepared pursuant to the provisions of the
applicable provincial / territorial legislation and the trade contractor shall ensure that they
instruct their employee(s) to be available for the purpose of an interview in order to
assist Stuart Olson in completing a full investigation.
i. Provide emergency transportation for injured trade contractor workers
j. Co-operate with all safety representatives having jurisdiction at the site
k. Comply with Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS) regulations
l. Contact the Project Superintendent for special instructions regarding operating hazards
and safe work instructions particular to the work site before starting work

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 20
 m. Explain safety rules and regulations to their workers.

n. Comply with safety rules and regulations.

o. Follow Stuart Olson’s General safety rules

p. Provide appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) to trade contractor workers
and enforce its use
q. Hold toolbox safety meetings for all trade contractor workers (trade contractors may use
Form 40: Trade Contractor Toolbox Meeting Record) and provide Stuart Olson with
documentation of toolbox meetings
r. Immediately correct any unsafe conditions or practices reported or observed within their
jurisdiction
s. The trade contractor shall comply with all drug and alcohol testing requirements as may
be issued by a site owner/prime contractor and/or as provided by Stuart Olson’s Drug
and Alcohol Policy.
2.10.1 Loss Control Management

Trade contractors must read and understand their responsibilities regarding Stuart Olson’s Loss
control management plan as set out below:
Objective
To plan, execute, and control the work with active participation of all parties involved to ensure
that this project is a leader in the construction industry in the field of safety and loss control, in
order that all personal injuries are minimized and serious personal injuries are avoided totally;
and all incidents involving damage to the work, equipment, facilities, and to third parties are
prevented.
Introduction
1) As a trade contractor for this project, it is your responsibility to contribute to the loss
control program. This manual is a guide to the loss control performance requirements of
trade contractors during the contract period.
2) The procedures and standards set out in this manual are an integral part of each
subcontract and must be carried out as fully as any other specification for the work.
Trade contractors shall also conform to the terms of its Sub-Contract and all safety rules
and regulations prescribed by prudent construction practices, The Workers’
Compensation Act, Workplace Health and Safety Regulations, and Municipal,
Provincial, Territorial and Federal regulations relative to the work.
3) Trade contractors shall assume full responsibility and liability for the safety of their
employees and for the compliance of their sub-subcontractor(s) to this program and
applicable regulations. Anything contained in this manual shall not absolve or relieve
trade contractors of their responsibility and liability.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 21
 4) The trade contractor’s performance may be subjected to continuing review by Stuart
Olson, hereinafter called the Prime Contractor, and evaluation may be presented to the
trade contractor regularly, in written form.
5) When a violation of safety regulations by the trade contractor occurs, and is brought to
the attention of the Prime Contractor, a written notice of the violation shall be issued to
the trade contractor’s senior site representative. Trade contractors are accountable for
their performance in the incident prevention program. Compliance is mandatory and
upon formal notification by the Prime Contractor, all costs incurred to maintain the
required level of compliance will be to the trade contractor’s account and will be
withheld from progress invoice payments.

6) The trade contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Stuart Olson from any claims
arising from any breach or alleged breach of human rights legislation, privacy legislation
or workplace health and safety. This indemnity shall include costs on a solicitor/client
basis for any defence costs required.
Pre-job Loss Control Meeting
1) On the commencement of their of the work, the trade contractor shall have their senior
site representative (and a manager or someone who can speak with authority for the
trade contractor company) meet with the Prime Contractor’s Project Manager and
Project Superintendent, to discuss loss control policies and procedures for the period
of the contract.
2) Subjects to be reviewed at this initial meeting will include;
 Regular hours of labour
 Workers attending a site safety orientation
 Trade contractor to provide a language translator , as required, for its workers
 Joint health & safety committee, where required
 Trade contractor’s responsibility for loss control
 Special hazards of job site (i.e.: hot work requires a permit)
 Location of trade contractor and Prime Contractor’s facilities - trailers, shops,
tool crib, etc.
 Access and egress routes to and from the site
 Incident reporting procedures
 Trade contractor’s responsibility for work outside of regular hours of labour
 Copies of workers’ training tickets pertaining to work site
 Location of First Aid facilities, and trained First-Aid persons as per WH&S
 Provision of personal protective equipment
 Emergency telephone numbers
 Lock-out procedures
 Scaffolding requirements
 Location of fire protection equipment

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 22
  Review of Workers’ Compensation Board and other jurisdictional
requirements
 Construction procedures
 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
 Drug and Alcohol program policy and testing requirements
 Workplace Bullying and Harassment policy
Additional subjects
Additional subjects shall be reviewed as required by the nature of the trade contractor’s
work and operation.
Loss Control Program Procedures and Standards
1) Each trade contractor and their subcontractor(s) shall take all reasonable precautions
against the risks of loss of life or injury to their employees, the Owner’s employees, the
Prime Contractor’s employees, or any other person employed about the work, or to
authorized visitors, and to this end shall properly guard/protect and provide adequate
lighting for the work area. The trade contractor and their subcontractor(s) shall
furthermore take all reasonable precautions against interference with the work and the
loss or theft, from the site, of material, whether the property of the Prime Contractor or
of the trade contractor or their subcontractor(s).
2) The Prime Contractor may regularly inspect all work areas and report to the Owner
and all trade contractors the condition of the site, the quality of the work practices,
unsafe equipment, and other matters pertaining to the safety of workers and protection
of equipment. Any unsafe conditions and work practices reported shall be corrected by
the responsible trade contractor without delay.
3) Trade contractors are required to hold regular “toolbox” meetings and attend jobsite
scheduling and safety committee meetings to ensure the smooth flow of work and to
identify unsafe working conditions and unsafe work practices.
4) Trade contractors shall maintain a system of loss control indoctrination to inform new
employees of:
 The specific nature of their individual duties and responsibilities, with special
attention to safe work practices
 Location of first aid facilities, and incident reporting
 Location of drinking water, toilets, lunchrooms, etc.
 Personal protective equipment required by the trade contractor company, Stuart
Olson, the applicable provincial / territorial workers’ compensation authority and
provincial / territorial legislation
 Safety regulations pertinent to the Workers’ trade and work areas
 Special hazards of site
5) As required by legislation, every trade contractor shall retain a qualified Trades Safety
Coordinator whose responsibilities shall include full training of all persons working for
the trade contractor at the worksite in safe construction and installation practice, as

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 23
 applicable, and who shall provide certification respecting that training on request in
accordance with local by-laws or applicable Legislation
6) Trade contractors shall maintain a WHMIS program:
 Trade contractors shall maintain all material safety data sheets (MSDS) on site,
accessible to all workers, for all hazardous materials used on site. Copies of all
MSDS sheets shall be provided to the Prime Contractor prior to bringing material
on site
 Trade contractors shall notify the Prime Contractor prior to using or handling
hazardous materials on site
 Trade contractors shall train their employees on their WHMIS program
 Trade contractors shall ensure that their employees wear the proper protective
equipment for working with hazardous materials

 Trade contractors shall, where required by WHMIS, provide all job site labels to
hazardous materials
7) Housekeeping: Trade contractors shall be responsible for maintaining a high standard
of housekeeping, to be completed once per week as a minimum requirement, in all
their work areas; including, but not limited to:
 Stairways and walkways shall be kept clear of tripping and slipping hazards
 Waste material shall not be allowed to accumulate so as to constitute a hazard
 Materials for the work process shall be stored and maintained in a safe manner
 Electrical cords, welding cords, cutting torch lines, water and air hoses shall not
be strung across walkways or stairways
 Spillage of materials shall be cleaned up immediately
8) Fire Prevention: In addition to the facilities and equipment provided by the Prime
Contractor, trade contractors shall provide fire extinguishers and other fire-fighting
equipment required for the nature of their work. Trade contractors shall post the fire
department’s emergency number in their area(s) of work, shall instruct their employees
in the use of fire-fighting equipment and shall make their employees available for fire-
fighting duty if required
9) All flammable fluids shall be stored in and dispensed from a storage area designated
by the Prime Contractor. Smoking shall be prohibited in that area. The trade contractor
shall provide protection and post “No Smoking” signs as required
10) The Prime Contractor shall provide First Aid services, equipment, and supplies in
accordance with Occupational First Aid Regulations “A” hazard classification during
regular hours of labour. Trade contractors or their subcontractor(s) shall be
responsible for compliance with Occupational First Aid Regulations and the cost for
providing First-Aid attendants when working at the project site at times outside the
regular hours of labour. Each trade contractor or their subcontractor(s) shall notify the
Superintendent twenty-four (24) hours in advance from Monday to Friday and forty-

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 24
 eight (48) hours in advance for Saturday and Sunday, if intending to work outside the
regular hours of labour
Incident Reporting and Investigation
1) Personal Injury: All injuries on the site must be reported to the Stuart Olson First-Aid
Attendant without delay and, in no case, later than the end of the shift on which the
injury occurred. The First-Aid Attendant will complete the appropriate forms for the
injury that occurred, and forward them to the provincial / territorial authorities if
required
2) Should the injury require ambulance transportation or hospitalization of the worker,
the Prime Contractor should be notified at once
3) If a fatality occurs from natural or accidental causes, the victim shall not be moved
by STUART OLSON employees under any circumstances.
4) If a fatality and/or serious injury occurs, notify the following immediately:
o Prime Contractor
o Police
o appropriate provincial / territorial authority
o union (if worker is a member)
o worker’s business agent (if worker has one)
o human resources, who will be in contact with the worker’s family members
o Company insurers, if the person injured is not a worker or an employee of
Stuart Olson or if there is property damage
o project manager
o Regional Safety Manager
o The person designated by Stuart Olson as Company spokesperson who will
deal with the media
5) Property Damage: At the time of a loss to property involving damage in excess of
$1000, or in the event of an occurrence which would appear to affect the insurance
policies arranged by the Owner/Contractor, the trade contractor shall give immediate
notice to the Prime Contractor and as soon thereafter as practicable shall render a
statement to the Prime Contractor, signed by an officer or employee of the trade
contractor or their subcontractor(s), stating the worker’s knowledge and belief as to
the time, place, and extent of the loss or damage and names and addresses of the
injured and of available witnesses. Refrain from expressing a written opinion as to
cause. Report only known facts
6) A copy of the required loss report must be forwarded to the Prime Contractor within
twenty-four (24) hours of the loss
7) Trade contractors or their subcontractor(s) shall do everything possible to prevent
further loss and shall keep accurate records of all costs incurred in making repairs or
replacements. Do not make repairs or modify the scene until the police, provincial /
territorial investigators and the insurers have inspected the damage or have verified
that they do not wish to do so
8) Failure to follow these procedures may prejudice the Trade contractor’s ability to
make a claim of the insurance provided

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 25
 9)Third Party Liability: Damage to the property of others shall be reported immediately
to the site superintendent.
10) The trade contractor shall not take any corrective action on damage to property of
others unless he receives instructions to do so from the Prime Contractor who will
obtain the proper authorization. Under no circumstances should employees trespass
onto other people’s property, or repair property, which does not belong to the trade
contractor, without proper authority. Damage requiring immediate remedial action
shall not be an exception to this procedure unless lives are endangered. Insurers will
usually dispatch an adjuster immediately to view the situation and at that time will
authorize corrective action if required.
11) It is important in dealing with third parties that you do not assume or admit any
responsibility for an incident. Advise the injured party or the owner of any damaged
property that you are insured and will be reporting the incident to your insurers. In
case of bodily injury, you may, if necessary, arrange for immediate First Aid but no
more.
12) Incident Investigation: Injuries requiring ambulance transportation or hospitalization
of a worker or incidents involving damage to property or equipment shall be
investigated by no less than two members of the Safety Committee and a written
report shall be sent to the Prime Contractor and the appropriate provincial / territorial
authority.
13) Similarly, a “near miss” incident, which had the potential for causing significant
personal injury or damage to property or equipment, shall be investigated by two
members of the Safety Committee.
14) News Releases: Statements to the news media regarding any incident occurring on
this site shall be made only by personnel authorized to speak on behalf of Stuart
Olson. Reference Sections 12.4: the Media and Section 19.11: Safe Work
Procedure - Media
Security
Each trade contractor will be responsible for providing reasonable protective structures
for their personal and employee’s tools and equipment.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 26
 2.11 Visitors

All visitors to a work site must do the following:

a. Receive a full safety orientation or receive a Visitor safety orientation and be escorted by
a designated guide who has received a full worker orientation.
b. Comply with the Stuart Olson’s HSE regulations
c. Wear the proper personal protective equipment (PPE) which will include safety boots,
safety glasses, hard hats and other specialized PPE as may be required depending on
the site
Any injury sustained on the work site by a visitor must be reported to the Work Site Safety
Representative.

Reference: Form 33 – Safety Orientation Workers

Form 135 – Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 2 HSE Responsibilities Page 27
 Section 3. Training and Education
3.1 Safety Training Policy .............................................................. 3-2
3.2 Safety Training Requirements ................................................. 3-3
Supervisor’s Training Responsibilities ............................................................. 3-3
3.3 Worker Safety Orientation ........................................................ 3-4
3.4 Visitor Orientation .................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Toolbox Meetings .................................................................... 3-6
Toolbox Meeting Guideline ................................................................................. 3-7
3.6 General Safety Rules ................................................................ 3-8
3.6.1 General ............................................................................................ 3-8
3.6.2 Behaviour ....................................................................................... 3-9
3.6.3 Personal Protective Equipment .................................................... 3-9
3.6.4 Equipment and Machinery .......................................................... 3-10
3.6.5 Smoking ........................................................................................ 3-10
3.7 Specialized Training ............................................................... 3-11
3.8 Follow-Up on Training ............................................................ 3-12
3.9 Periodic Retraining of Employees ......................................... 3-13
3.10 Discipline Policy ..................................................................... 3-15
3.10.1 Safety Enforcement / Discipline.................................................. 3-15
3.10.2 Safety Non-Compliance Consequences .................................... 3-16

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 1
 3.1 Safety Training Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2010

Date of Revision: January 7, 2011
Revision #: 1
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson Construction recognizes and accepts its responsibility to provide adequate
health, safety and environmental training to its employees.
Safety training will be provided to Supervisors, Management, and workers on an ongoing
basis.
Stuart Olson understands, and will comply with, its legal responsibility to ensure that
every worker is adequately qualified, suitably trained, and has sufficient experience to
perform work safely.
Safety training will be provided to all new employees. If it is not practical to give a new
employee safety training immediately, the work performed by that new employee will be
done under the direct supervision of a competent worker.
Records will be maintained for each employee, documenting the safety training or
education received by that employee, as well as the dates that training or education was
completed.
Each Supervisor will be held accountable for ensuring that employees receive the
training required by Stuart Olson’s safety standards and provincial / territorial safety
standards.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 2
 3.2 Safety Training Requirements

Workplace safety and health orientation begin on the first day of initial employment or
job transfer. Each employee has access to a copy of this safety manual, through their
supervisor, for review and future reference. Supervisors shall ask questions of
employees and answer employees questions to ensure knowledge and understanding of
safety rules, policies, and job-specific procedures described in our workplace safety
program manual.
All employees shall be instructed by their supervisors that compliance with the safety
rules described in the workplace safety manual is required.
Supervisor’s Training Responsibilities

Supervisors shall initially ensure employees are trained on how to perform assigned job
tasks safely.
• Supervisors shall carefully review with each employee the specific safety
rules, policies, and procedures that are applicable and that are described in
the workplace safety manual
• Supervisors shall give employees verbal instructions and specific directions
on how to do the work safely
• Supervisors shall observe employees performing the work. If necessary,
the supervisor shall provide a demonstration using safe work practices, or
remedial instruction to correct training deficiencies before an employee is
permitted to do the work without supervision
• All employees shall receive safe operating instructions on seldom used or
new equipment before using the equipment and a record of such training
shall be documented
• Supervisors shall review safe work practices with employees before
permitting the performance of new, non-routine, or specialized procedures
• Supervisors shall ensure employees are provided with a copy of the Health,
Safety and Environment Handbook (HSE Handbook) and receive
instructions that they are to thoroughly familiarize themselves with the
content of the HSE Handbook

Stuart Olson will establish a safe and healthy workplace and facilitate safe work
practices and procedures through the provision of safety training, safety equipment, safe
work practices, safe work procedures, and work direction.
Stuart Olson will ensure that all workers on their work sites comply with provincial /
territorial occupational health and safety regulations. Everyone on the work site,
including Managers, Supervisors, workers, and visitors share the responsibility for
safety.
All levels of Management must work together to establish and maintain proper safety
standards, policies, practices, and procedures.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 3
 3.3 Worker Safety Orientation

Stuart Olson will ensure that all workers are properly oriented to the work site before
they begin work. General work site rules, safe work procedures, and job rules will be
written and made available to workers.
The work site orientation given to workers must include a number of topics:
 An overview of the contents of the Stuart Olson HSE Manual
 A description of the responsibilities of management, superintendents,
supervisors/foremen, trade contractors, workers, and visitors
 General safety and health rules
 A briefing that points out hazards, dangerous areas, restricted areas, and jobs
where personal protective equipment (PPE) is required
 Specific instruction in the proper use of PPE
 The basics of the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
Program
 How to report hazards properly
 How to report personal injury properly
 Form 06: Site Emergency Plan review
 The location of all first aid stations
 Form 44: Voluntary Medical Emergency Information review
 The work site orientation of all workers must be documented.
Workers must sign Form 33: Safety Orientation, which will be kept as part of the records
maintained by Stuart Olson.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 4
 3.4 Visitor Orientation

All visitors to a work site must:

 Receive a full safety orientation, or a visitor safety orientation and be escorted by
a designated guide who has received a full worker orientation.
 Comply with Stuart Olson’s HSE Policies and Procedures
 Wear the proper personal protective equipment (PPE) which will include safety
boots, safety glasses, hard hats and other specified PPE as may be required
depending on the site
Any injury sustained on the work site by a visitor must be reported to the Work Site
Safety Representative.

Reference: Form 33 – Safety Orientation Workers

Form 135 – Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 5
 3.5 Toolbox Meetings

Toolbox meetings are safety-oriented meetings held with all site workers.
Toolbox meetings must be held a minimum of once per week at a specified date and
time for discussion of health, safety and environmental matters, the identification,
prevention, and correction of unsafe conditions, and the maintenance of interest in the
safety of the work force.
Each Trade contractor must conduct toolbox meetings with its workers. Toolbox
meetings should be held a minimum of once a week, at a set time, or as required for
specific upcoming potential hazards.
Toolbox meetings are one of the most effective ways for Supervisors or Foremen to
display a personal commitment to safety and display Stuart Olson’s commitment to
safety. They should be conducted with a specific topic for discussion, such as a new
safety rule, a new procedure, or a recent incident.
All workers must attend toolbox safety meetings.
Use Form 42: Toolbox Safety Meeting Record to document workers attending the
toolbox meeting, topics discussed, safe work practices, potential hazards, suggestions
and/or unanswered questions for later comment, and corrective actions recommended
or taken.
The following are examples of toolbox meeting topics:
 Floor and roof openings
 Overhead high-voltage electricity
 Concrete pouring and pumping
 Job-built ladders
 Personal protective equipment (PPE)
 Qualified First Aid Attendants
 Reporting incidents and hazards
 Emergency preparedness
 Scaffold safety
 Tagging out equipment
 Fall protection (a written site-specific fall protection plan)
 Trenches and excavations
 Health, safety and environmental responsibilities
 Guards on equipment
 Pinch points
 Unauthorized use of equipment
 Hazard assessments, including updating, especially where there is a change in
work situation or condition

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 6
 3.5.1 Toolbox Meeting Guideline
When conducting a toolbox meeting, use the following guideline to make sure the
meeting is successful:
1. Choose a safety topic
 Choose a topic relevant to the work that the workers are doing
2. Prepare
 Inspect the job site for hazards related to the chosen topic
 Read over the material you plan to cover
 Familiarize yourself with any regulations, guidelines, and Stuart Olson
rules related to the meeting’s topic
 Review reports of recent incidents on the site, including “near misses”
3. Get the workers actively involved in the meeting
 Choose a real-life example (a case study) to talk about
 Invite the workers to ask questions and make suggestions related to the
topic
 Respond to questions that you can answer and offer to find the answers
to questions you cannot answer
 Allow time at the end of the meeting for questions and suggestions on
any safety issue
 Ask the workers for feedback on the meeting
 Involve the workers in preparing for and/or leading future safety meetings
4. Follow-up
 Look into complaints, concerns, and suggestions that the workers brought
up during the meeting
 Report back to the workers to let them know what will be done
5. Keep records
 Use Form 42: Toolbox Safety Meeting Record to document workers
attendance, topics discussed, safe work practices, potential hazards,
suggestions and/or unanswered questions for later comment, and
corrective actions recommended or taken

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 7
 3.6 General Safety Rules

General safety rules must be posted at each job site: Form 78. General Safety Rules
3.6.1 General
The following general safety rules must be followed:
1. Workers must provide information to their supervisor as to any prescription
medication use which may affect their ability to work, operate tools, machinery or
equipment. Where necessary, employees shall provide a letter from their doctor
confirming their fitness to execute their work.
2. Consuming, or being in possession of, alcohol or illegal drugs on any Stuart
Olson job site, or arriving for work or remaining at work when unfit to perform
work safely is prohibited and may result in immediate dismissal.
3. Workers must attend all toolbox meetings.
4. Use of hazardous materials must conform to Workplace Hazardous Materials
Information System (WHMIS) recommendations. (A binder of Material Safety
Data Sheets (MSDS) is available on the job site.)
5. If you have any doubt regarding a job procedure or the safety involved in a job
procedure, consult your immediate Supervisor before proceeding with the task.
6. Maintain good housekeeping in your immediate work area.
7. Read the safety program posted on site.
8. Your participation in the safety program is encouraged. Ways to get involved
include these:
 Become familiar with Stuart Olson’s safety program
 Attend a safety oriented first aid (SFA) course
 Write the Project Safety Committee with suggestions for improving safety
on the job
9. Use of radio or headphones is not permitted.
10. In accordance with provincial / territorial legislation, smoking is permitted only in
designated locations.
11. Use of wireless communication devices must be in compliance with Section 4.10:
Distracted Driving Policy. Wireless communication devices are not be used when
in high risk areas and are only to be used by supervisors while on the project
(unless extenuating circumstances exist).
12. All incidents that result in damage or injury, no matter how slight, must be
reported to the Supervisor and First Aid Attendant immediately.
13. All sub-standard acts and conditions, including “near miss” incidents, are to be
reported to appropriate supervision promptly.
14. All hazardous conditions must be immediately corrected and/or reported to your
immediate Supervisor.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 8
 3.6.2 Behaviour
The following general safety rules regarding behaviour must be followed:
1. Fighting, abusive language, horseplay, practical jokes, or otherwise interfering
with other workers is prohibited
2. Theft, vandalism, or any other abuse or misuse of Stuart Olson property is
prohibited
3. Observe and obey all warning signs
4. Unsafe shortcuts will not be permitted
5. Use of designated washroom facilities is mandatory
3.6.3 Personal Protective Equipment

The following general safety rules pertaining to personal protective equipment (PPE)
must be followed (reference Section 11: Personal Protective Equipment):
1. Hard hats must be worn in the proper configuration and at all times on the project
site.
2. Eye protection must be worn at all times on the project site.
3. A face shield must be worn for any task that could produce flying particles
(grinding, chipping, blowing, burning, drilling, welding, concrete pouring, etc.)
4. Hearing protection devices must be worn when there is excessive noise and
when directed by your Supervisor.
5. Safety footwear must display a green triangle, indicating that it is a class 1 toe
cap with puncture resistant sole and must be worn at all times in work areas.
(Sandals, sneakers, etc. will not be permitted.) Footwear must also be in good
condition.
6. Personal flotation devices (life jackets) must be worn zippered, buckled, or tied
on when working over or near water.
7. Every employee must wear clothing appropriate for work. (No shorts, running
shoes, or sleeveless shirts).
8. Where an employee may be exposed to asbestos fibres, toxic mould, chemicals
or toxic gases or fumes, approved breathing devices must be worn.
9. High visibility vests are to be worn when required on the worksite and in areas
with poor lighting or traffic movement.
10. Appropriate cell phone or other communication devices are to be provided in
vehicles where individuals are traveling to or from remote site locations,
especially in winter conditions.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 9
 3.6.4 Equipment and Machinery

The following general safety rules regarding equipment and machinery must be followed:
1. Only authorized personnel may operate Stuart Olson vehicles, equipment,
and tools.
2. Do not operate equipment or machinery for which you are not trained.
3. Heed all safety guards, barriers, signs, and tags
4. Never render safety devices inoperable.
5. A worker shall inspect all equipment and machinery, including power cords
and welding cables, prior to use to ensure that they are safe and free from
any obvious damage.
6. Any equipment or machinery which is defective or is not working properly
should be affixed with a tag out or lock-out card and de-energized to
ensure that it is not utilized until it has been replaced or safety repaired.
For a copy of the General safety rules suitable for posting at a job site, use Form 78:
General Safety Rules.

3.6.5 Smoking

Smoking is only permitted in designated areas and in accordance with provincial

legislation.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 10
 3.7 Specialized Training

Stuart Olson will provide additional training for employees involved in special tasks.
This training must be documented on the Employee training record form.
Depending on the special task the worker is doing, this training may include, but not be
limited to, the following:
 Site-specific safety requirements
 Emergency procedures for harmful substances
 Safe use, handling, and storage of harmful substances
 Emergency procedures for substances under pressure
 Radiation procedures for workers exposed to radiation
 Recognizing the symptoms of heat disorder
 Using respiratory protection
 Electrical safety
 Lock-out of machinery and equipment such as electrical, steam, or pressurized
water systems
 Use of powder actuated tools
 Operation of mobile equipment such as forklifts and scissor lifts
 Hazards of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
controlled products
 Content of WHMIS labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) materials
 Procedures for the safe use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous
materials
 Safe handling, packaging, and documentation procedures of products controlled
by Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) legislation
 Fall protection
 Training on other PPE when required

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 11
 3.8 Follow-Up on Training
Supervisors will observe workers in their area of responsibility in order to ensure safe
work procedures are being used.
Workers who require correction or additional training will receive it and Stuart Olson will
keep a record of this correction and this additional training.
Certain types of training will be reviewed on an ongoing basis as per provincial /
territorial legislation and regulations:
 WHMIS training
 Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) training
 Forklift and aerial platform training
 Fall protection training
 First aid training
 Other specialized training

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 12
3.9 Periodic Retraining of Employees

All employees shall be retrained periodically on safety rules, policies and procedures, and when
changes are made to the workplace safety manual.
Individual employees shall be retrained after the occurrence of a work-related injury caused by
an unsafe act or work practice, and when a supervisor observes employees displaying unsafe
acts, practices, or behaviors.
Stuart Olson recognizes that in order to maintain qualified and competent workers, training in all
levels of construction safety is an ongoing and very necessary requirement of our industry.
Therefore, Stuart Olson urges and supports the attendance of any seminars, symposiums, and
extension training which it deems beneficial to the HSE Program. The following identifies levels
of safety training by position within the organization:
1. Project Manager Safety Training
• Completion of CSO/ NCSO program
• Alcohol and Drug Policy
• Violence in the Workplace Policy
2. Project Superintendent Safety Training
• Completion of the CSO / NCSO program
• First Aid, Standard Level
• Fall Protection End User
• Aerial Platform
• Alcohol and Drug Policy
• Violence in the Workplace Policy
3. Foremen Safety Training
• Completion of the CSO / NCSO program
• Site-specific safety orientation
• Stuart Olson Safety Orientation
• First Aid, Standard Level
• Fall Protection End User
• Aerial Platform
• Alcohol and Drug Policy
• Violence in the Workplace Policy
4. Worker Safety Training
• Construction Safety Training System (CSTS), Safety Construction
Orientation Training (SCOT) or other equivalent training recognized in the
province/territory where the work is being completed.
• WHMIS Training, (Site-specific)
• Site-specific Safety Orientation
• Stuart Olson Safety Orientation
• Fall Protection End User, as required

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 13
 • Aerial Platform, as required
• Alcohol and Drug Policy
• Violence in the Workplace Policy
• First Aid (as required)

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 14
3.10 Discipline Policy

Date Issued: August 23, 2010

Date of Revision: January 2, 2012
Revision #: 1
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson expects all employees to conduct themselves in a professional manner at all times.
In addition, Stuart Olson believes in assisting the development and growth of our employees, an
important part of professional performance development. Progressive discipline is a process for
dealing with job-related behaviour that does not meet expected and communicated performance
standards.
The primary purpose for progressive discipline is to assist the employee to understand that a
performance problem or opportunity for improvement exists. This guideline is provided for
employees to understand and be aware of the disciplinary process.
If an employee behaves in an inappropriate manner and/or if their job performance declines,
his/her Supervisor may elect to take progressive disciplinary action depending on the
seriousness of the situation.
We believe that most employees want to do what is expected of them and as such managers
will provide feedback and take corrective action(s) as required to address unacceptable or
inappropriate professional behavior.
Progressive disciplinary action may take the form of verbal or written warning(s).
Verbal warnings are to be documented and must include: the date, individuals present, items
discussed, corrective actions assigned, follow-up plan details, and consequences.
Written warnings should be completed on the Progressive Disciplinary Action Form located on
soxnet.
Disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment, will be taken if the
unacceptable/unprofessional job-related behaviour or job performance continues.
At any time, employment can be terminated without notice or payment in lieu of notice where
there is reason which constitutes ‘cause’. This includes but is not limited to theft of property,
wilful misconduct, deliberate neglect of duties, or breach or non-compliance with Company
policies.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 15
 3.10.1 Safety Enforcement / Discipline

As part of the Stuart Olson HSE program, the Company ensures that workers receive
orientation and training regarding rules, regulations, practices, and procedures.
The Company has implemented a system to consistently enforce the policies of its safety
program.
Supervisors must administer Stuart Olson safety policies as follows:
 When the unsafe act or breech of safety legislation is committed/observed, the direct
Supervisor must consult with the worker(s) involved to determine if the worker(s) is/are
aware of the safety legislation / Stuart Olson policy contravened and determine the
reason for the unacceptable action (retraining and/or skill practice may be required)
 Supervisors must ensure that subjects dealing with legislated safety requirements are
used in toolbox talks with their own workers and with workers of the direct trade
contractors.
 In order to make workers aware of the necessity for a safe work site, where possible, the
Supervisor must get statements from other workers regarding the observed unsafe acts
or conditions where action is taken
 Supervisors must enforce Stuart Olson’s discipline policy regarding the unsafe behaviour
of workers
 Written documentation must be kept of all disciplinary actions

3.10.2 Safety Non-Compliance Consequences

The following consequences will result if safety regulations are breached:

First offence - Verbal warning (written record)
Second offence - Written warning/1-2 day suspension
Third offence - Dismissal
Safety program violations will be recorded on Form 34: Notice of Safety Non-Compliance.
Non-safety related violations will be recorded on Form 35: Progressive Disciplinary Action.
Note: Disregard for any safety rules and practices by an individual may result in the immediate
removal of that individual from the job site.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 3 Training and Education Page 16
 Section 4. Supplementary Programs
4.1 Respectful Workplace – Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Prevention
Policy .................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1 Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Procedures ................................................... 4-4

4.2 Hearing Conservation and Protection ......................................................... 4-7

4.2.1 Hearing Testing Recordkeeping ......................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.2 Hearing Protection Requirements Defined ..................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3 Requirements for Noise-Exposed Workers ..................................................................... 4-10
4.2.4 Environmental Noise Levels ............................................................................................. 4-11

4.3 Vehicle Management ............................................................................. 4-12

4.3.1 Stuart Olson Responsibility ............................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.2 Supervisor Responsibilities ............................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.3 Worker Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.4 Seat Belt Use ....................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.5 Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance .......................................................................... 4-13
4.3.6 Driver Records .................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.7 Driver Licenses ................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.8 Transport of Dangerous Goods (TDG).............................................................................. 4-15

4.4 Distracted Driving Policy........................................................................ 4-16

4.4.1 Disciplinary Action ............................................................................................................. 4-17

4.5 WHMIS ............................................................................................... 4-18

4.5.1 WHMIS Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 4-18
4.5.2 Supplier Label ..................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.5.3 Workplace Label.................................................................................................................. 4-19

4.6 Working Alone Policy ............................................................................ 4-20

4.6.1 Developing a Working Alone Plan..................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.2 Checking the Wellbeing of a Worker Working Alone ...................................................... 4-21

4.7 Inexperienced Workers .......................................................................... 4-22

4.7.1 Employment of Young People ............................................................................................ 4-22

4.8 New Worker Mentoring Program ..............................................................4-24

4.9 Musculoskletal Injury Prevention Program ................................................. 4-28

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 1
 4.1 Respectful Workplace – Harassment, Violence and Discrimination
Prevention Policy

Date Issued: July 30, 2007

Date of Revision: January 2, 2012
Revision #:2
Authorization: Stuart Olson

Stuart Olson’s Violence and Harassment Prevention Policy (the "Respectful Workplace
Policy"), implemented by its parent company, Stuart Olson Inc., will be adhered to and
strictly enforced. This policy expressly prohibits harassment or abusive behaviour and
applies to all persons working at job sites and in offices including, but not limited to
employees, supervisors and managers, trade contractors, suppliers and project owners.
The Policy supports provincial legislation and changes to such legislations will take
precedence over documents herein. For supporting procedures refer to Working @ Stuart
Olson, then choose Legal Policies on soxnet.
Harassment is a form of discrimination which is prohibited by law. “Harassment” means
any inappropriate conduct, comment, display, action or gesture by a person that
constitutes a threat to the health and safety of the worker, and is either:
• Based on race, creed, religion, colour, sex, sexual orientation, marital status,
family status, disability, physical size or weight, age, nationality, ancestry or
place of origin; or
• Adversely affects the worker’s psychological or physical well-being and that
the person knows, or ought reasonably to know, would cause a worker to be
humiliated or intimidated.
Discrimination includes the communication of any limitation, specification or intention,
including harassment, indicating the preference for one worker over another, or the
shunning or limitation on employment or advancement of a worker, except for such
limitation, specification or intention that is based upon a bona fide occupational
requirement. In such cases Stuart Olson will accommodate the employee to the extent
required under law. This policy is not intended to discourage or prevent the complainant
from exercising any other legal rights pursuant to any other law.
Workplace violence is any act in which a person is abused, threatened, intimidated or
assaulted psychologically or physically in their place of employment, including, but not
limited to intimidation, threats, physical attack, domestic violence or property damage and
includes any act of violence committed against individuals in the workplace that causes or
is likely to cause physical injury.
Stuart Olson is committed to providing a positive work environment which is free from
abusive behaviour, and one in which everyone is treated with dignity and respect. In order
to fulfill our responsibility to employees and others who are at our workplace, any form of
conduct that may be considered abusive behaviour will not be tolerated. To protect our
employees and others who are at our workplace or are affiliated with this organization
from the potential hazards associated with abusive behaviour, Stuart Olson is committed
to:

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 2
 • Investigating reported incidents of Abusive Behaviour in an objective and timely
manner;
• Taking the necessary corrective action if potentially violent or harassing situations
arise;
• Providing appropriate support for those who have been subjected to Abusive
Behaviour; and
• Protecting the identity of those involved and the confidentiality of the
circumstances, except where disclosure is necessary for the purposes of
investigating or taking disciplinary action in relation to the complaint, or where
such disclosure is required by law.

All workers have a responsibility to maintain a workplace free of Abusive Behaviour. Any
person who is a witness to, or is a victim of, Abusive Behaviour in the workplace should follow
the process outlined in the Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Procedures which
includes reporting such incidents to any Supervisor, Regional Safety Manager or Human
Resources personnel.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 3
 4.1 .1 Harassment, Violence and Discrimination Procedures

Dealing with Abusive Behaviour

Abusive Behaviour can victimize both men and women, and may be directed by or towards
Stuart Olson employees, and employees of trade contractors, supply, consulting and project
owner companies.

Abusive Behaviour is considered to have taken place if a person knows, or ought reasonably
to know, that his or her behaviour or actions constitutes harassment, violence, or harm to
people under the Policy (a person who is accused of Abusive
Behaviour is herein referred to as the "Alleged Harasser").

When an individual feels Abusive Behaviour is taking/has taken place, he/she should take
the following steps:
 Immediately, make it clear to the Alleged Harasser that such behaviour is unwelcome
and offensive and ask that it stop immediately. (Any person who finds it difficult to
bring the matter directly to the attention of the Alleged Harasser should seek assistance
from one of the designated Advisors)
 In the case of a violent act, protect him or herself from bodily harm and leave or ask
others for help with the situation as soon as practicable
 Keep a record of incident(s) (date, time, nature of the behaviour, location and names
of any persons who may have witnessed the behaviour)
 If the offensive or disrespectful behaviour continues after the Alleged Harasser has
been asked to stop, notify one of the designated Advisors;
 Complaints may also be filed with the Human Rights Commission, or the Occupational
Health and Safety Board in the province in which you are employed
 Employees may contact their confidential Employee Assistance Program provider at
any time, if needing additional support and/or counseling
 Pursue their concerns in accordance with the above guidelines, as the Employee feels
is appropriate
Dealing With Violence or Threats of Violence
Any employee who considers that he or she has been subjected to violence or threats of
violence should take the following steps:
 Leave the immediate area if possible and call for assistance from co-workers, your
supervisor or call 911 immediately
 Immediately report any incident of violence or threats of violence to a designated
Advisor
 Keep a record of the incidents(s) (date, time, nature of the behaviour, location and
names of any persons who may have witnessed the behaviour)
 If injured, contact the first aid attendant in your office
 Contact your confidential Employee Assistance Program provider for additional
support and/or counseling, if needed

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 4
 Reporting a Complaint
In cases of violence or threats of violence or persistent harassing or disrespectful behaviour,
a formal written complaint should be completed by the Employee who has experienced the
Abusive Behaviour. A formal written complaint may also be completed for other situations.

All complaints should be filed as soon as possible and within a reasonable time frame following
the occurrence of the event. In the case of harassment/disrespectful behaviour, Stuart Olson
requests that all formal written complaints be filed as soon as practicable and, in any event
within 12 months of the alleged incident.

All complaints will be kept strictly confidential and will be investigated promptly and fairly by
Human Resources or by an independent investigator designated by Stuart Olson in a prompt,
confidential and effective manner, to the extent reasonably possible in the circumstances.

If requested by the Complainant, reasonable efforts will be made to refrain from identifying the
Complainant. However, this may not be possible in all circumstances.

Once a complaint has been received, the Alleged Harasser will be advised that there is an
allegation of Abusive Behaviour and will be given an opportunity to respond.
The investigator will interview the Complainant, the Alleged Harasser and identified witnesses
or persons who may be able to provide relevant information.

If Abusive Behaviour is found to have occurred, corrective actions will be taken, including
disciplinary action against the Alleged Harasser. Discipline may include but is not limited to
counselling, re-deployment, reduction in job status, suspension and/or dismissal.

Records will be kept of the Abusive Behaviour and the Alleged Harasser’s personnel file will
reflect the incident(s) fully.

Certain forms of violence, harassment, assault and battery are crimes which fall under the
Criminal Code (Canada) and may be reported to local law enforcement authorities.

If, upon investigation Stuart Olson concludes that Abusive Behaviour has not taken place, no
disciplinary action will be taken and no documentation will be placed on the Alleged Harasser’s
file.

Regardless of the outcome of an Abusive Behaviour complaint made in good faith, Stuart
Olson will take all reasonable measures to ensure that a Complainant or a person who is
providing assistance in the investigation is protected from any retaliation. No documentation
will be placed on the Complainant’s file.

If an investigation results in finding that the Complainant falsely accused another person of
abusive or harassing behaviour (harassment or disrespectful behaviour or violence) knowingly
or in a malicious manner, the Complainant will be faced with disciplinary action which may
include but is not limited to counseling, re-deployment, reduction in job status, suspension or
dismissal. Documentation will be placed on the Complainant’s file.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 5
 Confidentiality
All complaints and infractions related to the complaint shall remain strictly confidential. It is
the responsibility of any individual who becomes aware of an incident of violence not to
disclose details of the incident to any third party without prior consultation with the victim.
Stuart Olson's privacy policy procedures shall be followed.

Alternative Forms of Recourse

Conduct that is the subject of a complaint under the Respectful Workplace Policy may also
be addressed:
 By the appropriate Human Rights agency, board or tribunal in the province in which
the employee is employed
 By the Occupational Health and Safety Regulator in the province in which the
employee is employed
 Under the Criminal Code (Canada) (in the case of physical attacks or violence)
Management Responsibilities
For the purpose of the Respectful Workplace Policy all managers and supervisors are
responsible for:
 Promoting a respectful and non-violent workplace
 Developing workplace arrangements to minimize and effectively control the potential
hazard of workplace violence and abusive behaviour
 Ensuring that the Respectful Workplace Policy is clearly communicated to all
employees
 Providing a means of communication to ensure that pertinent information about
workplace violence is conveyed to all Employees
 Identifying specific training needs for all Employees as it relates to the Respectful
Workplace Policy
 Providing immediate intervention when required
 Co-operating with any efforts to investigate and resolve matters arising under the
Respectful Workplace Policy
 Keeping all information received in connection with a complaint confidential, to the
extent reasonably possible in the circumstances
 Ensuring that Employees who report Abusive Behaviour or participate in the
investigation of a complaint do not suffer retaliation
Employee Responsibilities
For the purpose of the Respectful Workplace Policy Employees are responsible for:
 Ensuring their own physical safety by practicing principles of prevention
 Treating all co-workers, consultants, project owners and others with respect and dignity
 Calling for assistance when needed
 Attending required workplace violence/harassment training and education sessions
 Reporting incidents of Abusive Behaviour as outlined in the Respectful Workplace
Policy
 Co-operating with any efforts to report, investigate and resolve matters under the
Respectful Workplace Policy
 Upon witnessing harassment, stop it immediately, do not let it continue
 Reference: Employee Handbook: Policies and Procedures
 Form 55: Harassment, Violence, Discrimination Reporting Form

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 6
 4.2 Hearing Conservation and Protection
Stuart Olson has developed an Audiometric Testing Program to address the legislative
requirements for the testing of noise exposed workers in a transient work force. The goals of
the program are to facilitate the ability for employers to be in compliance with the legislation,
and to maintain a central database to determine when testing is required.
This program provides mandatory coverage for commercial and industrial construction. The
central service provider will be custodian of the database.
It should be noted that this program is a testing and central data base program and does not
address all aspects of a noise management system such as noise level testing and noise
management / noise reduction in the workplace, as required by legislation. These remain the
responsibility of the employer at each site.
A Noise Management Program consists of the following 6 components:
a) Noise Measurement: Identifying the problem by measuring noise levels in the
workplace.
b) Noise Management: Noise levels or noise exposure reduced through engineering,
personal protective devices or administrative controls.
c) Audiometric Testing: Testing monitors the effectiveness of the noise management
efforts.
d) Record Keeping: Tracking the success of the program through data gathered.
e) Education: Providing both the worker and employer with information regarding the
hazard of noise exposure and how to reduce the risk.
f) Program Evaluation: Determining the effectiveness of all aspects of the program in
reducing hearing loss.
Refer to provincial legislation regarding the structure of such programs.
The hearing test also offers the opportunity to present a major portion of the education component.
As a part of the hearing test the worker will have test results and proper use of hearing protection
explained by the technician. The hearing test will normally require 10 to12 minutes, including the post-
test counselling.
Test results will be sent to a central database managed, maintained and tracked by our provider.
Records will be stored for each employee in an industry wide database containing all tests conducted.
Reports of the testing program will be generated from the central record system.
Scheduling of the hearing testing will be coordinated through the Regional Safety Manager and our
provider.
The database will include required case history information as well as test data. Data will be stored
on a secure system that does not have direct online access. Records will be maintained for each
worker as per legislation.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 7
 4.2.1 Hearing Testing Recordkeeping

The name, address and phone number for each worker will be the unique identifier to allow accurate
tracking for the worker regardless of where or for whom the worker may be employed. This system
will allow an employer to easily determine the need for any testing.
Reports of the testing program will be provided to Stuart Olson and, if required, to provincial authorities
in a timely manner following testing. The reports provided to Stuart Olson will include statistical data
to assist in evaluation of the effectiveness of the program. No confidential medical information will be
included in these reports.
In the event a worker’s compensation claim for hearing loss occurs, our provider will provide hearing
test and case history information to the appropriate provincial authority as required. Our provider will
also provide an argument if the loss does not appear to be work related.
Purpose:
a) To protect employees from hearing loss caused by exposure to high noise levels.
b) This procedure is to be used by all projects as per provincial legislation.
 When employees are exposed to noise levels exceeding those listed in the
Permissible Noise Exposure table (below), administrative or engineering controls
shall be established. While these controls are being evaluated and implemented,
personal protective devices shall be used as an interim control.
 Engineering controls are feasible when similar controls have been used
elsewhere, and the exposures are being kept within permissible levels.
Engineering controls are not feasible when they interfere with or change the
operations to an intolerable degree or create additional safety or health hazards,
or when corrections from an engineering approach are not applicable.
 Engineering controls include maintenance, modifying equipment, substitution of
equipment, isolation and the use of acoustic material.
 Administrative controls include rotation of employees, limiting time of certain
operations, and restricting operations.
 If feasible engineering or administrative controls cannot be accomplished,
personal protective devices must be used to reduce sound levels to the
permissible noise exposures listed below. Personal protective devices shall also
be used during non-routine, infrequent operations that do not warrant special
engineering controls. Signs or other means of notification can be used to inform
the employee that hearing protection is required when entering an area. The type
of hearing protection depends on the operation.
 Employees shall be required to wear earplugs when operating tools or equipment
which creates high noise levels, and while working in areas designated as high
noise level areas.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 8
  High noise level tasks and activities where hearing protection may be required
include, but are not limited to, the following:
o Truck Picker - Operator and Passenger
o Front End Loader – Operator
o Generators and Compressors
o Backhoe - Operator
o Dozer - Operator
o Compactor - Operator
o Skid Steer - Operator
o Sand Tamper and Jumping Jack - Operator
o Grinder Use
o Arc Gouging
o Chipping Gun Use
o Powder-Activated Gun Use
o Jack Hammer Use
o Impacting Bolts
o Blow down Operations
o Sandblasting
o Circular Saw
o Table/Radial Arm Saw Use
 New employees will be trained in the proper use and care of hearing PPE prior to
being released to their respective work areas. Earplugs will be made available at
all project site tool rooms / designated areas. The need for any additional types of
hearing protection equipment will be determined by the Stuart Olson Safety
Department / HSE Representative.

Permissible Noise Exposures

TABLE 1 - OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR NOISE:

Exposure level (dBa) Exposure Duration

82 16 hours
83 12 hours & 41minutes
84 10 hours & 4 minutes
85 8 hours
88 4 hours
91 2 hours
94 1 hour
97 30 minutes
100 15 minutes
103 8 minutes
106 4 minutes
109 2 minutes
112 56 seconds
115 d greater O

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 9
 4.2.2 Hearing Protection Requirements Defined

TABLE 2 - SELECTION OF HEARING PROTECTION DEVICES

Maximum CSA Class of Hearing CSA Grade of Hearing

Equivalent Noise Protection Protection
Level (dBa Lex)
<90 C, B or A 1,2,3, or 4
<95 B or A 2,3 or 4
<100 A 3 or 4
<105 A 4
<110 A earplug +A or B earmuff 3 or 4 plug + 2,3, or 4
earmuff
>110 A plug + A or B earmuff and 3 or 4 earplug + 2,3 or 4
limited exposure time to keep earmuff and limited
sound reaching the worker’s exposure time to keep
eardrum below 85 dBa sound reaching worker’s
eardrum below 85 dBa
a) Class: Ear plugs and ear muffs are classified as class A, B, or C depending on the level of
protection they provide. Class C provides the least protection while Class A provides the
most protection.
b) Grade: The grading system is based on a scale from 0 to 4, with “0” providing the least
protection and “4” providing the most protection.
Note: Both class and grade may be found on the packaging of hearing protection.

4.2.3 Requirements for Noise-Exposed Workers

Stuart Olson will provide workers exposed to noise above the levels prescribed in the table
above, with the following, as outlined in Table 2:
a) Hearing protection that complies with the current CSA Standard Z94.2
b) Ensure workers are informed of the hazards associated with exposure to noise and
the purpose and limitations of protective equipment
c) Workers will undergo audiometric testing as follows:
 within 6 months of becoming employed
 not more than 12 months after the initial baseline test and,
 at intervals, in accordance with provincial legislation, after the initial testing,
for as long as the worker remains a noise exposed worker
d) Audiometric testing will be carried out by a qualified technician in accordance with
provincial legislation
The hearing test also offers the opportunity to present a major portion of the education
component. As a part of the hearing test the worker will have test results and proper use of

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 10
 hearing protection explained by the technician. The hearing test will normally require 10 to
12 minutes, including the post-test counselling.
Scheduling of the hearing testing will be coordinated through the Regional Safety Manager,
using information gathered from the Superintendent responsible for that particular site.

4.2.4 Environmental Noise Levels

On-site testing

Tool/Action Decibels
Air nailer 90
Band saw 80
Circular hand saw 120
Bench grinder 98
Hand drill 85
Chop saw 120+
Palm sander 99
Block cutting saw 120
Plate tampers:
- Small plate 108
- Large plate 115
Skid Steer 90
Zoom-Boom 78
Open-flame heater 90
Backhoe 85
Loader 87
Generator 108
JLG 79
Scissor lift 79
Genset light tower 95
Talking 40

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 11
 4.3 Vehicle Management

The Company believes that a fleet loss-prevention program will reduce the number of
accidents its vehicles are involved in and will reduce the costs related to the purchase,
maintenance, and repair of its vehicles.
Reference: Company Vehicle Policy

4.3.1 Stuart Olson Responsibility

Stuart Olson values the safety of drivers and lease operators who work for us.
Accordingly, the Company will do the following:
 Strictly adhere to a maintenance program, following the manufacturers’ specifications
 Enforce a progressive disciplinary program applicable to drivers who do not comply
with laws of the road and with any Company policy.
Reference: Section 3.10.1: Safety Non-Compliance Consequences)
 Ensure drivers are qualified to drive commercial vehicles
 Ensure drivers are properly trained to drive the vehicles they are assigned
 Ensure drivers are educated in fatigue management
 Ensure vehicles are safe
 Ensure goods are properly handled

4.3.2 Supervisor Responsibilities

Supervisors must do the following regarding motor vehicle safety:
 Ensure drivers are trained, qualified, and certified to operate the motor vehicles they
operate
 Ensure all workers are familiar with motor vehicle safety policies and procedures, and
with incident reporting requirements
 Ensure only authorized personnel are allowed to operate vehicles
 Maintain all vehicles adequately for safe operation
 Ensure unsafe vehicles are not driven until safety deficiencies have been corrected
and they are safe to drive
 Review each incident report to determine if the actions of the worker involved were
consistent with the Company’s policies and procedures
 Determine what additional training or other positive action is required to deal with any
driver error
 Maintain complete records on fleet vehicle incidents
Reference: Form 57: Vehicle Collision Form

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 12
 4.3.3 Worker Responsibilities

Workers driving Stuart Olson vehicles must do the following:

 Provide a copy of a current drivers license to Management
 Operate motor vehicles in a safe and responsible manner
 Become familiar with and obey all motor vehicle safety policies and procedures, and
all provincial highway traffic rules and regulations
 Inspect a vehicle before driving it
 Report to the Supervisor, in writing, any defects noted during the inspection of a
vehicle before driving it
 Report to the Supervisor, in writing, any defects noted during the use of a vehicle
 Report all motor vehicle incidents immediately, in accordance with incident reporting
procedures
 Report any suspension of driving privileges to the Supervisor immediately and cease
to operate any fleet vehicle until driving privileges are reinstated

4.3.4 Seat Belt Use

Stuart Olson recognizes that seat belts are extremely effective in preventing injuries and loss
of life.
Wearing a seat belt can reduce the risk of dying in a traffic crash by 45 percent in a car and
by as much as 60 percent in a truck or SUV.
The Company cares about its workers, and wants to make sure that no one is injured or
killed in a tragedy that could have been prevented by the use of seat belts.
All Company workers must wear seat belts when operating a vehicle owned by the Company
or any vehicle on Company premises or on Company business.
All vehicle occupants must wear seat belts when riding in a Company-owned vehicle or in a
personal vehicle being used for Company business.
All workers and their families are strongly encouraged to use seat belts and proper child
restraints whenever they are driving or riding in any vehicle.

4.3.5 Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance

(Vehicles with GVWR Greater than 11000kg)

Operation
 All operators of Stuart Olson motor vehicles must comply with local laws,
driving speed may have to be lowered to reflect road conditions.
 Managers and supervisors must familiarize themselves with their obligations
with respect to the timeframe for operating motor vehicles and ensure that
vehicles have maintenance logs and time logs for trips.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 13
  While operating a Company vehicle, all employees must conduct themselves
in a professional defensive manner
 Daily logs are to be completed and reviewed by the driver’s immediate
supervisor on a regular basis
 All cargo on a Company vehicle must be secured so that it does not come free
 All occupants in the vehicle must have their seat belts secured before the
vehicle is put in drive
 If drivers feel fatigued, for whatever reason, they should not operate any motor
vehicle. The operator should pull over in a safe spot and rest as needed.
Driver’s Responsibilities
 New drivers will be shadowed by an experienced driver to establish
competency (two and four lane highways are to be used as well as parking
and reversing, a checklist form will be implemented and kept in the operator’s
personal file).
 Written daily trip inspections must be completed before every trip.
 A driver of a Company vehicle that has a GVWR of greater then 11000kg must
maintain less than 8 demerits. If the driver cannot, driving privileges are
revoked.
 A driver of a Company vehicle that has a GVWR of greater then 11000kg must
immediately disclose in writing all details of collisions, as required by
legislation.
 A driver of a Company vehicle that has a GVWR of greater then 11000kg will
report any and all driving convictions resulting from the operation of a motor
vehicle to Stuart Olson. This will be done in writing and at the time of
conviction.
 Work shift limits: No operator of a commercial vehicle shall operate the
vehicle longer than 12 hours in a shift or operate the vehicle after working a
twelve hour shift (the worker is required to take eight consecutive hours off
duty after a twelve hour shift before the driver is eligible to drive).
 Driving time: a driver may continuously drive a commercial vehicle for four
consecutive hours, if at the conclusion of that drive; the driver takes at least
ten consecutive minutes of off duty time. Or a driver may continuously drive a
commercial vehicle for six consecutive hours if, at the conclusion of that drive,
the worker takes at least thirty consecutive minutes of off duty time.
 If the driver drives further then 160 km from home base, log books must be
kept.
 Maintain records of all convictions and administrative penalties for provincial
and federal legislation relating to the Company’s operation of a commercial
vehicle with GVWR of more than 11000 kg.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 14
 4.3.6 Driver Records

Stuart Olson is required to keep a number of records on the people who drive its vehicles:
 Completed application form
 Record of three year employment history
 Driver’s licenses
 Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) Training Certificates (if applicable)
 Driver abstracts, as required, dated within 30 days of hire and every twelve months
thereafter
 Record of all collisions involving any motor vehicle
 Record of all training completed
 Copy of current medical certificate stating fitness for duty
4.3.7 Driver Licenses

Supervisors must make sure that every driver who works under their supervision has the
following:
 A valid license of the proper class for the vehicle the driver operates
 The necessary restrictions and endorsements, for example an air brake endorsement
4.3.8 Transport of Dangerous Goods (TDG)

Supervisors must check the Federal Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA) and
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (TDGR) for the laws and regulations
related to transporting dangerous goods.
Note: This information is not included in the provincial motor vehicle legislation.
Supervisors must do the following regarding driver qualifications for transporting dangerous
goods:
 Ensure that every driver who transports dangerous goods has the required training
 Keep a copy of each driver’s current Transport of Dangerous Goods (TDG) certificate
 Keep a copy of each driver’s expired TDG certificate for two (2) years after it expires

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 15
 4.4 Distracted Driving Policy
Date Issued: August 23, 2010
Date of Revision: January 22, 2013
Revision #: 2
Authorization: Stuart Olson
PURPOSE

The purpose of Stuart Olson’s Distracted Driving Policy is to reduce drivers from focusing on
secondary tasks while driving, and promote a safe driving culture within the organization.
CODE OF CONDUCT
The expected professional conduct will include compliance with all provincial traffic legislation, be
conscious of road safety and demonstrate safe driving and other good road safety habits when
driving on Stuart Olson business (Reference: Employee Handbook – Policies and Procedures:
Company Vehicle Policy).
The actions listed below are prohibited while operating a Stuart Olson vehicle, including Stuart
Olson owned vehicles, rented or leased vehicles, and personal vehicles being used for Stuart
Olson business, including outside working hours. These actions will be viewed as serious
breaches of conduct and will, at a minimum, result in a suspension of Stuart Olson driving
privileges, and may result in further disciplinary action:
 The use of any hand-held Wireless Communication Device (“WCD”) including cell phones,
BlackBerry, iPhones, MP3 players, laptops, two-way radio and any other device used to
send and receive messages
 Reading, writing, entering information into a GPS system or texting
 Attending to personal grooming
 Smoking
 In accordance with, and if allowed by provincial/territorial legislation, answering of cellular
phones in hands-free mode is permitted as long as the device is voice activated or requires
only one touch to initiate, accept or end a call. After answering the call, the driver will pull
over, when safe to do so, to continue the call.
 EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITIES
Employees are required to use Bluetooth technology if the need arises while driving a Stuart Olson
vehicle or using a Stuart Olson provided WCD.
Employees without Bluetooth technology are expected to pull off the road and stop in a safe place
before participating in the above mentioned activities.
All drivers must adhere to the applicable provincial legislations at all times while driving.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 16
 4.4.1 Disciplinary Action

The Company will enforce a progressive disciplinary program applicable to drivers who
do not comply with this Company policy.
Trade contractor employees who do not comply with these policies may be removed
from the project.
Reference: Section 3.10.2 – Safety Non-Compliance Consequences

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 17
 4.5 WHMIS

The Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS) is designed to inform

workers about controlled products and hazardous materials and to protect them from
controlled products and hazardous materials.
Supervisors must understand and implement all WHMIS requirements.
The Company will ensure that the following essentials regarding WHMIS are provided:
 Worker education on controlled products
 Workplace labelling and identification
 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
4.5.1 WHMIS Responsibilities

Stuart Olson Responsibilities

Stuart Olson will make information concerning Workplace Hazardous Materials
Information System (WHMIS) controlled products available to workers. This information
will include the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and the appropriate methods and
safeguards required for dealing with the product.
The Company will ensure that workers are trained in the following areas:
 The WHMIS hazardous products they are working with
 How to protect themselves
 What to do in the event of an exposure
 Where to go for first aid
 How to clean up the spilled material
Regional Safety Manager Responsibilities
Regional Safety Managers are responsible for the following:
 Ensure a current MSDS binder
 Ensure the MSDS binder accessible to all workers
Superintendent Responsibilities
Superintendents will do, or designate, the following:
 Ensure all hazardous products used within their area are properly labelled and
stored
 Make sure the appropriate MSDS are available at all work site locations
 Ensure all workers who handle hazardous or controlled products are properly
trained to recognize and understand the hazardous labels

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 18
  Make sure written safe work procedures and emergency procedures for all
hazardous materials are available and that workers are properly trained in these
procedures
 Provide proper personal protective equipment (PPE)
 Make sure the use of PPE is understood
 Provide necessary materials such as spill kits
 Maintain an MSDS binder
Worker Responsibilities
Workers are responsible for following:
 Using safe work procedures
 Reporting any containers that lack labels or have unreadable labels
4.5.2 Supplier Label

The supplier label on a product must have the following information on it:
 Product identification
 Hazard symbols representing the classes and divisions into which the product
falls
 Risk phrases
 Precautionary statements
 First aid measures
 A statement advising that an MSDS is available
 Supplier identification
4.5.3 Workplace Label

If a controlled product is transferred from a larger container into a workplace container, a

workplace label will be supplied for the workplace container that the controlled product
was transferred to.
The workplace label must have the following information on it:
 Product identification
 Information for safe handling
 Statement that a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) is available

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 19
 4.6 Working Alone Policy

Date Issued: January 2, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
It is the policy of Stuart Olson that, before a worker is assigned to work alone or in isolation,
the Company will identify any existing or potential hazards that worker may be exposed to.

If a hazard is identified, the Company will take measures regarding that hazard before the
worker begins the work assignment.

These measures will include the elimination of the hazard or, if elimination of the hazard is
not practicable, reduction of the risk posed by the hazard to the lowest level possible.

The Company will reduce the risk posed by the hazard by using engineered controls,
administrative controls, or substitution, or by a combination of these methods.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 20
 4.6.1 Developing a Working Alone Plan

When a worker will be working alone a working alone plan must be developed.
When the worker will be working alone at a job site, Form 46: Working Alone Plan – Job
Site must be used to develop the working alone plan.
When the worker will be working alone in an office setting, Form 47: Working Alone Plan
– Office must be used to develop the working alone plan.
4.6.2 Checking the Wellbeing of a Worker Working Alone

To ensure that a worker working alone is safe, Stuart Olson will develop and implement,
in consultation with the Joint Occupational Health and Safety Committee and/or the
Regional Safety Manager, a written procedure for checking the wellbeing of a worker
working alone or in isolation.
The working alone procedure developed will have a number of elements:
 A time interval between checks set in consultation with the worker
 A procedure to follow if the worker cannot be contacted
 Provisions for emergency rescue of the worker
The Company will designate a person to check on the wellbeing of the worker working
alone. This designated person will be trained to follow the written procedure for monitoring
the safety of the worker and to contact the worker at predetermined time intervals,
including a check at the end of the work shift, and record the results of the contacts.
If contact cannot be made with the worker, the person monitoring the wellbeing of the
worker will follow the procedure for dealing with such an eventuality.
The working alone procedure will be reviewed annually.

Reference: Section 19.17: Safe Work Procedure - Working Alone

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 21
 4.7 Inexperienced Workers

An inexperienced worker is a young person who is 16 or 17 years of age (or as

designated by the provincial / territorial authorities), anyone new to construction or a
temporary worker performing a small task for a short period of time. An inexperienced
worker may also be a person lacking the ability to demonstrate the skills to perform the
task required.
The Inexperienced Workers policy, along with supporting procedures, is included in the
Employee Handbook provided to each employee when they join the company.
Young workers suffer a higher than average workplace injury frequency.
In the construction industry, the hazards inherent in some construction activities,
combined with the inexperience of young workers, can increase the risk of injury.
The Company has adopted policies to ensure the safety of young workers and to reduce
the liability to the Company associated with this employment classification.
Trade contractors employing workers under the age of 18 but 16 years of age or older
must present a safety plan before such persons commence work that details how they
will protect these workers from injury. This safety plan must include work activities,
experience, supervision, and training. Such workers may be refused work on the site
based on the lack of a safety plan, or the lack of compliance with the safety plan.
Warning: Workers under the age of 18 are not permitted to take part in high risk
activities including, but not limited to, demolition, excavation, confined space activities or
working at heights.
Project Managers and/or Superintendents are responsible for communicating the
Company’s policy on young workers to trade contractors employed on their projects and
for enforcing it.
4.7.1 Employment of Young People

Adolescents (12, 13, 14, 15 years old)

 Adolescent employees are not permitted to work in any capacity on Company
construction projects.
 Adolescent employees of trade contractors are not permitted to work in any
capacity on Company construction projects.
 Visits and/or tours to the construction sites by Adolescents must be planned
through the Superintendent, and conducted by way of guided tour by
competent persons.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 22
 Young Persons
 Any person applying for work and appearing less than the age of 21 must first
provide proof of age to the hiring supervisor.
 Young persons, hired as employees of the Company, shall be required to
complete C.S.T.S. training PRIOR to commencing work on a construction
project.
 Young persons may work only while under “direct supervision” of competent
adult individuals (direct supervision means a relationship between a
competent worker and a worker who is not competent whereby there is
personal and visual supervision of the worker who is not competent and the
two workers are readily and clearly able to communicate with each other.)
 Young persons are only to be permitted to conduct low hazardous type work.
 Any trade contractor employing a young person on a Company construction
site must advise the Superintendent accordingly and the Superintendent shall
be authorized to impose such conditions, as deemed appropriate in order to
ensure the safety of such young people while on the construction site.
Where applicable, Registered Apprenticeship Program (R.A.P.) Students
 Must not be less than 16 years old to work on Company construction sites.
 Must complete C.S.T.S. training prior to commencing work.
 All R.A.P. authorization forms and procedures must be in place prior to the
apprentice/student commencing work on a construction site.
 R.A.P. students who are 16 and 17 years old must be considered ‘young
persons,’ therefore the section of Young Persons applies to them as well.
Exceptions to this Policy
 Any exceptions or possible exceptions to this Policy shall be requested in
writing and approved in writing by the Chief Operating Officer of the
Company.
Reference: Employee Handbook – Policies and Procedures Hiring of Inexperienced
Workers Policy
Section 4.13: New Worker Mentoring Program

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 23
 4.8 New Worker Mentoring Program

Introduction
Everyone is entitled to work in a safe work environment.
Worker health and safety must be a part of every business decision and every operating
decision. Nothing can take precedence over safety.
Stuart Olson is committed to a strong health, safety and environmental program that
protect its workers, customers, property, and the environment from incidents. Stuart
Olson considers its workers a valued part of the organization and strives to help young,
new or inexperienced workers gain experience in a safe work environment.
The Company’s objective of an accident free, injury free workplace can be achieved if
we focus on safety and work together.
To achieve this objective, Stuart Olson has developed a New Worker Mentoring
Program. This program will include:
• Young / New workers under 25 years of age
• Student workers
• 1st year apprentices
• Any worker who has less than one year’s direct experience in construction
Note1: the selection of a worker who qualifies for the mentor program will be completed
by the manpower field coordinator, assistant field manager where appointed, or the
project superintendent at the time of hiring.
Note2: For the purpose of this program, Young / New workers under the age of 25,
Student workers and 1st year apprentices will be referred to as “New Worker” unless
otherwise defined.
Purpose
The purpose of this program is to introduce New Workers to the Construction Industry by
providing direct quality instruction, demonstration and supervision of the safe
performance of their duties.
Adopting Implementation of this program can help reduce the number of injuries,
develop a positive safety culture, and recognize experienced workers.
Definitions
For the purpose of this mentoring program
Superintendent: The person charged with the responsibility of overseeing the project.
The project Superintendent, or on projects where there are multiple Superintendents,
each individual Superintendent is responsible for implementing this program in their area
of responsibility.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 24
 Mentor: A role model, a seasoned worker chosen by the field manager or the
Superintendent who has demonstrated the appropriate skills and has the ability to
instruct a New Worker in the assigned tasks. In cooperation with the Superintendent,
the Mentor may be changed at any time.
Young / New Workers: Is a young / new employee who is new to the construction
industry and under the age of 25.
Student Workers: A worker who is attending a school / work program sponsored by the
local government or any summer students, whom have not completed this mentoring
program
1st Year Apprentices: Any Stuart Olson 1st year trade apprentice, who has not
completed this mentoring program.
Inexperienced worker: A worker who does not have one year of experience in the
construction field.
Responsibilities
Regional Safety Manager:
• The Regional Safety Manager is responsible to oversee and ensure
compliance with the implementation of this Mentoring Program in their area of
responsibility.
• Any deficiencies found in the implementation of this program will be identified
on the project inspection report, and copies of the report forwarded to the
Project Superintendent and Field Manager.
Superintendent:
• Implement the Company Mentoring Program on their respective project,
when applicable.
• Choose a seasoned worker whom they consider a Role Model and has the
attributes to be a Mentor for a New Worker.
• Outline the roles and responsibilities.
• Be familiar with applicable provincial legislation regarding Young / New
workers.
• Review all New worker evaluation forms provided by the Mentor and give
advice of take action as required.
• The Superintendent may change Mentors at their discretion.
Mentor:
• As a Mentor, you are a Role Model for our New Worker.
• Your responsibilities will also include being a supervisor.
• You will be the immediate supervisor of the new worker that has been
assigned to you.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 25
 • All supervisors are directly responsible for their worker’s safety, they are
responsible to ensure that the area where they are sending their worker to
work is safe, and the worker has the proper instruction and personal
protective equipment to do the job safety.
• Mentor must be familiar with applicable provincial legislation regarding Young
/ New workers.
• The Mentor shall complete the New Worker evaluation form on a bi-weekly
basis and review this form with the Project Superintendent and the New
Worker.
• Wear a gold Stuart Olson hard hat sticker to signify this role.
Reference: Form 79: New Worker Evaluation Form
Young / New Worker / Student Workers / 1st Year Apprentice:
• Arriving at the project each day ready, willing and able to start work.
• Report promptly to their Mentor.
• Taking instruction from their Mentor and the Superintendent only! Unless an
unsafe act or condition exists, then any person may advise the worker to
STOP WORK.
• Advising their Mentor of any task they feel uncomfortable performing.
• Understanding that they have the right and responsibility to refuse unsafe
work.
• Complete any training courses the Superintendent or Mentor deems
necessary.
• Wear a green Stuart Olson hard hat sticker to signify their participation.
Implementation
 All Stuart Olson new hires will be given a company safety orientation at head
office before they report to their assigned sites. Any New Worker must be
identified during the company orientation and must not proceed with any on site
work activities until the Superintendent has chosen a Mentor and reviewed this
program with both the Mentor and the New Worker. The Mentor will wear a gold
sticker to identify them as being approachable and knowledgeable in this
program and applicable safe work practices.
 At the beginning of a work shift / day the New Worker will immediately report to
the assigned Mentor. The New Worker will stay with the Mentor at all times until
the end of the shift.
 Where feasible, the New Worker shall always work within a direct line of sight of
the Mentor; if the Mentor must leave for any reason then the New Worker must
ONLY work with tools, equipment or on processes that they have been trained
on, until the Mentor returns.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 26
  During this program the New Worker must not be exposed to any high-risk jobs
(e.g. confined space entry, working at high elevation). Any questions on the
duties allowed shall be addressed with the Superintendent.
 The Mentor shall give quality instructions, demonstrations, and answer any
questions in a positive manner.
 On a bi-weekly basis the Mentor will complete a New Worker evaluation form and
submit this form to the Superintendent for review with the New Worker.
 When the mentoring period expires, the Mentor shall determine if the New
Worker has demonstrated the skills necessary to leave the Mentoring program. If
not, the Mentor may recommend to the Superintendent that additional time is
required until the New Worker demonstrates the skills necessary to leave the
program.
 When the New Worker has successfully completed the mentoring program, they
may remove the green hardhat decal. The Mentor may also remove the gold
hardhat decal at this time.
 The minimum duration of this program is one month.
Temporary labour agencies

On occasion, the Company may utilize temporary labour agencies to supply casual
labour to our construction sites. All agencies must be notified that temporary labour
agency workers sent to a Stuart Olson project to work for Stuart Olson must have a
minimum of 6 months of construction experience.
During orientation, any temporary agency worker identified as not having 6 months of
construction experience will be sent back to their agency.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 27
 4.9 Musculoskeletal Injury Prevention Program

Stuart Olson Construction is committed to prevent musculoskeletal injury (MSI).

Supervisors must conduct a risk assessment and implement control measures to
eliminate or reduce, so far as reasonably practicable, the risk of MSI to the employee.
They must provide employees with instruction and training respecting any control
measures implemented.
Musculoskeletal injury (MSI) as an injury or disorder of the muscles, tendons, ligaments,
joints, nerves, blood vessels or related tissue, including a sprain, strain or inflammation.
This may be caused or aggravated by any of the following:
 A repetitive motion;
 A forceful exertion;
 Vibration;
 Mechanical compression;
 Sustained or awkward posture
 A limitation on motion or action.
The symptoms of musculoskeletal injury:
 May be pain in the hands, arms, shoulders, neck, back, legs or feet;
 May include swelling, numbness, tingling and a feeling of heaviness and/or
tiredness in the affected area; and
 May be multiple symptoms due to more than one injury.
Severity of symptoms varies from person to person:
 Stage 1 — Dull aching pain/fatigue which disappears with rest.
 Stage 2 — Recurrent aching/fatigue which begins after work starts and continues
after work ceases. Fatigue often present due to intermittent night pain. Reduced
capacity to perform repetitive daily tasks.
 Stage 3 — Inability to perform daily tasks. Persistent aching and fatigue.
Weakness while at rest as well as pain even with non-repetitive movement.
At the first signs of Stage 1 symptoms notify your supervisor. Then:
 Ensure that you complete an incident report.
 See a physician, chiropractor or physiotherapist. Be able to describe in detail
your workplace and work practices to assist in a diagnosis. Ensure that your
healthcare provider fills out a section 4 of Form 25: Illness / Injury Report.
To prevent musculoskeletal injury, the Company will provide, as far as reasonably
practicable:
 An analysis of the ergonomics of the work you perform
 Ergonomically designed work stations and tools

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 28
  Training in lifting and carrying procedures

To prevent musculoskeletal injury you will, as far as reasonably practicable:

 Follow the Safe Work Procedure for the task.
 Avoid periods of repetitive motion lasting longer than 10 minutes - take frequent
short breaks.
 Avoid sitting for long periods (e.g. computer terminal) – change task or position
for 10 minutes each hour.
 Use wrist rests for both the keyboard and the mouse when using a computer
workstation.
 Use safe lifting and carrying techniques, and get assistance for lifting more than
23 kilos (50 lbs) or 30% of your body weight, whichever is less.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 4 Supplementary Programs Page 29
 Section 5. Inspections
5.1 Inspection Policy......................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Inspection Types ......................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1 Informal Inspections ...................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Formal Inspections ........................................................................ 5-3
5.2.3 Management Inspections .............................................................. 5-3
5.2.4 Committee Inspections .................................................................. 5-3
5.3 Preparing to Conduct an Inspection .......................................... 5-5
5.3.1 Hazard Classifications for Inspection Purposes ......................... 5-5
5.4 Performing an Inspection ........................................................... 5-6
5.5 After an Inspection ...................................................................... 5-7
5.6 Safety Audits ............................................................................... 5-8

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 1
 5.1 Inspection Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2010

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
It is the policy of Stuart Olson Construction that: Managers, Supervisors, and workers
are accountable for reporting unsafe conditions in the workplace as soon as practicable.
Workplace inspections are proactive approaches to safety and will be used to educate
workers, evaluate work practices and procedures, and, if necessary, modify work
practices and/or work procedures to increase safety.
Planned inspections will occur, at minimum, on a weekly basis and will be supplemented
by informal inspections. Each Supervisor is responsible for helping the Safety
Committee with scheduled inspections.
The inspections will consider items relevant to safety such as premises, job site,
buildings, temporary structures, excavations, tools, equipment, machinery, work
practices, and work procedures.
The Supervisor or Manager involved in an inspection will be responsible and
accountable for ensuring corrective action is taken to eliminate or control any unsafe
conditions or behaviour discovered. All items found to require correction will be corrected
to acceptable Company and provincial safety standards.
Managers, Supervisors, and workers involved in inspections will receive training in
responsibilities, legal requirements, recognition of hazards, and the use of inspection
forms and reports.
All completed inspection reports will be evaluated and monitored by the appropriate
committee.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 2
 5.2 Inspection Types

Inspections of Stuart Olson workplaces will be conducted as follows:

5.2.1 Informal Inspections

Informal inspections shall be conducted by supervisors on an ongoing basis in their areas of

responsibility. Such inspections may or may not be documented.

5.2.2 Formal Inspections

Documented inspection reports that include action items must be attended to in a timely manner
as noted on Form 05: Project Safety Inspection Report.
Daily
Where specified by local municipal/provincial legislation or in accordance with the contractual
requirements, a “daily” inspection of the entire workplace will be conducted by the Project
Superintendent or designate. Such inspections will be documented using Stuart Olson’s Form
05: Project Safety Inspection Report.
Monthly
Once per month, the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Site Safety Coordinator and a
worker representative will conduct a planned formal inspection of the workplace. Such
inspections will be conducted using Stuart Olson’s Form30: Monthly Site Safety Inspection
Report. Copies of such inspections must be forwarded to the Regional Safety Manager for
review. Reference: Form 29: Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report.
“Stuart Olson will conduct formal inspections of its branch offices and shop/yard where one
exists. Branch offices will be inspected “quarterly” by the branch Office Manager. The Regional
Safety Manager and/or HSE Committee may participate in such inspections. Shop/Yard facilities
will be inspected “monthly’ by the Equipment Manager. The Regional Safety Manager may also
participate in or conduct such inspections. Inspections will be documented using the Safety
Inspection Report – Form 30 and posted in the workplace”.
5.2.3 Management Inspections

During periodic, or at a minimum quarterly, visits to various projects, management will conduct
formal inspections of those projects. Reference: Form 30: Safety Inspection Report
Copies of corporate inspection reports will be left with the Project Superintendent to review and
to follow up on corrective action items where noted.
5.2.4 Committee Inspections

Safety Committee inspections provide another level of inspections that can be employed to
identify uncontrolled site hazards. It strengthens the total HSE effort and assists everyone in
meeting legal obligations.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 3
 Where specified by provincial legislation, experienced and knowledgeable safety committee
members will conduct formal inspections of the work place at periodic intervals. Such
inspections will be documented using the formal inspection report form.

The results of these inspections will be forwarded to the Project Superintendent and reviewed at
the next Joint Health and Safety Committee meeting.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 4
 5.3 Preparing to Conduct an Inspection

To prepare to conduct an inspection, do the following:

1. Review the Inspection report that details the inspection done the previous month
2. Use a checklist of common hazards that you have developed using the
experience of previous inspections
3. Obtain the proper form for the type of inspection that you will do
5.3.1 Hazard Classifications for Inspection Purposes

Workplace hazards are divided into three classifications:

 Class A (High) (3-5)
Unsafe conditions or unsafe acts with the potential for permanent disability, loss
of life or body part, and/or extensive loss of structure, equipment, material or
environmental damage
Immediate corrective action is required for Class A hazards.
 Class B (Moderate) (6-10)
Unsafe conditions or unsafe acts with the potential for serious injury or property
damage that is disruptive to production, process, or environmental damage, but
less severe than Class “A” Hazards
Corrective action is required within four calendar days for Class B hazards.
 Class C (Low) (11-15)
Unsafe conditions or unsafe acts with the potential for minor injury, occupational
illness, non-disruptive property or environmental damage, but less severe than
Class “B” Hazards
Note: Corrective actions and/or follow-up activities are required within one calendar
week for Class C hazards.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 5
 5.4 Performing an Inspection
Inspection teams will tour the workplace, noting safety concerns related to the physical
work areas, equipment, structures, hazardous materials, work practices, and work
procedures.
When performing an inspection, do the following:
 Ensure that you have the proper form for the inspection (Form 05: Project Safety
Inspection Report or Form 30: Safety Inspection Report)
 Examine the area to be inspected systematically
 As you move through the inspection, ask yourself questions, such as the
following:
o Is the workplace tidy?
o Is personal protective equipment (PPE), such as hearing protection,
safety glasses, and steel-toed boots, being used?
o Is the workplace environment hazardous?
o Is the workplace environment unhealthy?
o Are the controlled products clearly marked?
o Are the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the controlled products
available?
o Are workers familiar with the instructions for their jobs?
o Are first aid provisions in place?
o Is a worker with the appropriate level of first aid training identified on the
work site?
o Is lighting adequate at all work site areas?
 Ask workers questions about the job to make sure they have been properly
instructed
 Note all instances of unsafe acts or unsafe conditions
 Have the unsafe condition corrected immediately
 Take defective machinery or tools out of use
 Look for patterns of hazards, such as improper use of fall protection equipment
 Make sure all hazards are addressed in the appropriate report

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 6
 5.5 After an Inspection
 The results of inspections must be recorded on the inspection form as required
when the results are observed.
 The Supervisor will review all items on the inspection form to ensure that the
problems are corrected.
 Results of the inspections must be communicated to all workers, either by
posting or discussion at toolbox meetings, and must be communicated to the
Project Health and Safety Committee.
 Inspection forms must be forwarded to the respective Project Director / Project
Manager.
 Inspection reports, recommendations, and corrective action responses (if any)
must be reviewed by the Division Safety Supervisor. Any deficiencies not
addressed must remain on the Safety Minutes under “Outstanding Items” until
corrected.
 A monthly summary and analysis of inspection report results will be produced by
the Regional Safety Manager and forwarded to all Managers.
 The Regional Safety Manager will bring any ongoing or recurring safety or health
problems to Senior Management for further action, if necessary.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 7
 5.6 Safety Audits

The purpose of the safety audit is to evaluate the overall effectiveness of the Stuart
Olson’s HSE program, to make recommendations aimed at improving safety
management systems, and to monitor the overall progress.
Safety audits will be conducted in accordance with COR requirements.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 5 Inspections Page 8
 Section 6. Hazard Assessment
6.1 Hazard Assessment Policy ......................................................... 6-2
6.2 Hazard Assessments .................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) .................................... 6-4
6.4 Project Hazard Assessment ....................................................... 6-6
6.5 Conducting a Hazard Assessment............................................. 6-7
6.6 Reducing Hazard Risk ................................................................ 6-8
6.6.1 Hazard Control Measures .............................................................. 6-8
6.6.2 Engineering Control Measures ..................................................... 6-8
6.6.3 Administrative Control Measures ................................................. 6-8
6.6.4 Personal Protective Equipment Measures ................................... 6-9
6.7 Hazardous Environments ......................................................... 6-10
6.8 Environmental Controls ............................................................ 6-11
6.8.1 Recognition, Evaluation, and Control ........................................ 6-11

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 1
 6.1 Hazard Assessment Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2010

Date of Revision: December 2010
Revision #: 1
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson Construction will maintain a comprehensive program of hazard assessment
at all facilities and job sites.
Project Managers are responsible for ensuring that the proper environmental site
assessments have been completed. These assessments will identify any hazardous
conditions that exist on the site from previous uses.
Superintendents are responsible for directing formal hazard assessments on the job
sites that they control and for involving Regional Safety Managers, First Aid Attendants,
Safety Coordinators, and workers in those hazard assessments.
Supervisors and Foremen are responsible for conducting ongoing informal hazard
assessments of areas where their crews are working or will be working.
Workers are responsible for participating in, and contributing to, the Hazard assessment
program.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 2
 6.2 Hazard Assessments

Stuart Olson’s HSE program is designed to identify, assess, and control hazards in order
to reduce the risk of harm to workers, equipment, and property.
A hazard is a thing or condition that may expose a person to a risk of injury or
occupational disease.
A risk is the likelihood that the hazard will lead to injury or the probability of harm
actually occurring.
A hazard assessment is an examination of an operation, (job site, shop, office, etc.)
done to identify the hazards and potential hazards that are present or could occur during
the operational activity and the risks to workers. It examines the potential for loss
inherent in a dangerous workplace condition or an HSE program failure.
Management has the responsibility to assess the risk that hazards pose to the health
and safety of all workers and to identify, evaluate, and eliminate or control all hazards in
the workplace.
Note: A project hazard assessment should be done before a project starts and
thereafter monthly or more frequently as the project dictates. This assessment should be
documented using Form 14: Hazard Assessment Report.
Each worker has a duty to report, as soon as possible, any hazardous conditions.
If possible, Stuart Olson will eliminate hazards and thereby eliminate the need for
personal protective equipment (PPE). If hazard elimination is not possible, where there
is a need for PPE, workers will be required to use PPE such as clothing, devices, and
materials.
Hazard assessments are an ongoing component of Stuart Olson’s HSE program. At
certain times throughout a project, certain tasks may increase the risk to workers or
property and a job/task hazard assessment will be required to identify these hazards.
As work site conditions change, new hazard assessments will be required, particularly at
project milestones. A thorough examination of the tasks involved in an existing function
often requires a new hazard assessment.
Hazard assessments should precede the design of a new job procedure because they
are helpful in developing or modifying safe work procedures.
Only people trained to perform a hazard assessment should do so. If possible, a team
consisting of the Regional Safety Manager and/or a member of the Health and Safety
Committee if a local committee is in place, the Superintendent, and a worker
representative involved in the process being assessed should do a hazard assessment.
Anyone doing a hazard assessment should use Form 14: Hazard Assessment Report.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 3
 6.3 Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)

Stuart Olson requires completion of Form 23: Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)
before starting new tasks or moving into different work site conditions.
Working together, foremen and their crews complete the FLHA by outlining job tasks,
identifying hazards and controls, and creating safe work procedures for the tasks or work
site conditions.
The FLHA form allows the hazards at a site to be detailed and must be filled in before
work starts.
The following questions should be considered before starting a new task or moving to
different work site conditions:
1. Is the area safe to work in?

2. Will the activities of other crews interfere with safe operations?

3. Has a job hazard analysis been completed and do workers understand their work
assignments?

4. Have the proper tools and equipment been provided?

5. Are tools and equipment in safe operating condition?

6. Has the proper personal protective equipment (PPE) been provided?

7. Does the crew understand how to properly use all PPE?

8. Can the crew communicate effectively with each other, or are there restrictions
due to high noise, restricted vision, or language barriers?

9. If chemical products or compounds are being used, is the crew aware of the
hazards and safety controls required to safely complete work assignments?

10. Is the crew aware that the Pre-job safety instruction (FLHA) is there to assist
them in getting the job done safely?

11. Have workers been encouraged to make suggestions to assist in completing job
assignments safely?

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 4
 12. Has the crew been advised to report any unsafe acts or unsafe conditions to their
supervisors?

FLHA’s must be reviewed with workers, who will sign off on the FLHA to acknowledge
completion of such review.
The completed and signed FLHA is to be posted and displayed at the job site in a
common area visible to all workers

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 5
 6.4 Project Hazard Assessment

Prior to the start of a project, there will be two hazard assessments completed:
 When the project is being estimated, the Project Manager, Estimator and Safety
Supervisor should be involved in completing a hazard assessment such that they
can anticipate hazards that may be encountered during construction and make
allowances for actions that must be taken to minimize those hazards.
 At the start of the project, a hazard assessment must again be conducted and
documented.
 Form 14: Hazard Assessment Report is to be used to complete hazard
assessments during estimating and project start-up.
The following should be considered when conducting a hazard assessment:
 Engineered plans, drawings, and specifications
 Complexity of the project
 Initial site tour by the project team
 Site photographs
 Regional weather conditions, both normal and extreme (temperature, high winds,
hurricanes, flooding, etc.)
 Geographic location
 Distance to nearest medical facility
 Population density
 Access to project
 Remoteness of the project location
 Availability of skilled labour
 Environmental risk, such as the proximity to waterways
 Existing services in the area of the project
 Expertise of available trade contractor services
 Public interface / security

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 6
 6.5 Conducting a Hazard Assessment

When conducting a hazard assessment, keep in mind that every workplace consists of
four major components:
 The people at the work site, such as workers, trade contractors, suppliers, client,
and visitors
 The environment the people work in
 The materials the people work with
 The equipment and tools the people use

When conducting a hazard assessment, focus on the following:

 Identification
What are the hazards of the task?
 Severity
What are the worst possible consequences of an incident due to the hazard?
 Frequency
How often will the workers be exposed to the hazard that could cause an
incident?
 Probability
What is the likelihood that the hazard will lead to an undesired consequence?
After the hazard assessment is done, do the following:
1. Using a scale of 1-5 (with 1 being the highest and 5 being the least degree of
danger), determine risk based on the severity, frequency and probability of
occurrence of worksite hazards. Reference, Form 14: Hazard Assessment
Report.
2. Total the risk evaluation to prioritize and classify risks as A (3-5 high), B (6-11
medium) or C (12-14 low).
3. Give priority to the most dangerous.
4. Document a plan of action that deals with all of the hazards.
5. Develop written work procedures that deal with all of the hazards. Reference
Safe Work Procedure 19.2: Hazard levels
Supervisory Staff on a project are responsible for following up to ensure that all hazards
have been eliminated, minimized, or controlled.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 7
 6.6 Reducing Hazard Risk

Hazard risk can be dealt with in a number of ways.

6.6.1 Hazard Control Measures

After a hazard assessment has been completed, Stuart Olson will develop practicable
procedures to eliminate, minimize, or control the risk to its workers.
A number of hazard control measures can be considered to reduce or eliminate hazard
risk:
 Elimination
Is the task redundant? Does it duplicate work? Can it be avoided? Does it have to be
done to achieve the desired result? Can it be done in a way that workers are not
exposed to the hazard?
 Substitution
If the task cannot be avoided, can it employ less hazardous methods? Can less
hazardous materials be substituted to reduce the risk? Can different work practices
be developed to reduce exposure to risk?
6.6.2 Engineering Control Measures

Engineering controls are physical arrangements, designs, or alterations of workstations,

equipment, materials, production facilities, or other aspects of the physical work
environment.
Engineering controls can be used to reduce hazards in the following way:
 Redesign
Can workstations/processes be redesigned to reduce exposure to the hazard using
such measures as barriers, shields, scrubbers, area fans, or local exhausts?
6.6.3 Administrative Control Measures
Administrative controls are the provision, use, and scheduling of work activities and
resources, including planning, organizing, staffing, and co-ordinating.
Administrative control measures can be used to reduce hazards:
 Work activities and resources
Can the work be scheduled to provide regular breaks away from the hazard? Can
the job be expanded to provide greater range of duties in order to allow time away
from the hazard? Can the task be planned and organized to reduce the risk by, for
example, working shifts?

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 8
 6.6.4 Personal Protective Equipment Measures
Personal protective equipment (PPE) includes physical equipment that protects workers
and the instruction in its use. PPE should only be used when all other methods of
eliminating, reducing, or controlling risk are not practicable or effective.
PPE can be used to reduce the threat of hazards to workers:
 As a substitute
If engineering or administrative controls are not practicable, PPE must be used.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 9
 6.7 Hazardous Environments

Where noise, heat, dangerous substances, lack of oxygen, or any other factor creates a
hazardous environment at a work area, the hazardous environment must be monitored.
When workers are in situations that could result in heat stress or cold stress, Stuart
Olson will monitor the temperature and provide written procedures for removing or
minimizing the risk of heat stress or cold stress.
Workers must not enter environments contaminated beyond regulated limits or be
permitted to work in them unless all of the following are true:
 The workers have been trained for the situation
 A Supervisor gives prior approval
 The proper PPE is worn
 The workers follow established procedures

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 10
 6.8 Environmental Controls

Environmental Controls include, but are not limited to, the WHMIS program.
Regarding environmental controls, Stuart Olson will ensure the following:
 A chemical inventory for products used or stored at the work site is available
 Controlled products at a work site are identified with proper supplier or workplace
labels
 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the controlled products at a work site
are made available to workers
 Tanks, piping systems, or other storage containers are labelled or identified as to
contents, hazards, and precautions for handling and disposal of controlled
materials
 Workers receive education and training to safely store, handle, use, and properly
dispose of controlled materials
6.8.1 Recognition, Evaluation, and Control

The key elements of workplace environmental control are recognition, evaluation, and
control of hazards:
 Recognition
Workers exposed to hazardous material or conditions must be trained to recognize
hazards in the following areas:
o Waste products
o Maintenance operations
o Storage practices
o Work processes that involve noise or hazardous materials
 Evaluation
A recognized hazard must be regularly monitored to ensure proper procedures
and/or protective equipment is used to reduce it to an acceptable level.
 Control
Hazard control must include the following:
o Good housekeeping
o Adequate supply of required protective equipment
o Education and training to ensure workers are aware of, and able to
respond to, hazardous materials and conditions

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 6 Hazard Assessment Page 11
 Section 7. Incident Investigation
7.1 Incident Investigation Policy ...................................................... 7-3
7.2 Immediate Notice of Incidents.................................................... 7-4
7.3 Incident Investigation ................................................................. 7-5
7.3.1 Preserve the Scene ........................................................................ 7-5
7.3.2 The Incident Investigation ............................................................. 7-6
7.3.3 Interviewing Witnesses ................................................................. 7-8
7.4 Writing the Incident Investigation Report.................................. 7-9
7.5 Provincial Authority Involvement ............................................ 7-10

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 1
 7.1 Incident Investigation Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2010

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. requires that the proper investigation into all incidents,
near misses, and occupational health issues take place.
Incident investigation must take place when the following occur: incidents that result in
equipment damage or environmental damage, injuries requiring medical aid, structural
failure or fire, and lost-time injuries.
Stuart Olson requires that workers must report all incidents and incidents that result in
injury or property damage to their Superintendent immediately. “Near-miss” incidents or
close calls that had the potential to cause serious injury or property damage must be
reported.
Whenever possible, an incident investigation will take place during the shift in which the
incident occurred, and the investigation will be carried out by a Safety Committee
Member, the Superintendent in charge, and/or other appropriate personnel.
All investigations will be documented on the proper forms and those forms will be
forwarded to the Manager and Regional Safety Manager for review and action.
All incidents, property damage, injuries requiring first aid, and injuries requiring medical
aid must be reported to the Superintendent immediately.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 3
 7.2 Immediate Notice of Incidents

Stuart Olson must immediately notify the appropriate provincial authority of the
occurrence of any incident, such as those with, but not limited to, the following
characteristics:
 Serious injury to a worker
 Death of a worker
 Major release of a hazardous substance
 Collapse of a building, bridge, tower, crane, hoist, temporary construction support
system, or excavation
 Unplanned or uncontrolled fire or explosion
 Regulations require it be reported
Except as otherwise directed by an officer of the provincial authority having jurisdiction, a
peace officer, or the Regional Safety Manager, a person must not disturb the scene of
an incident except so far as is necessary to do the following:
 Attend to persons injured
 Prevent further injuries or death
 Protect property that is endangered as a result of the incident

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 4
 7.3 Incident Investigation

Proper incident/near-miss investigation techniques are an important part of an effective

HSE program. In this section, the term incident refers to accidents and near-misses
unless otherwise noted or obviously not the case.
All incidents must be investigated as soon as possible. Form 19: Incident Investigation
and Form 20: Incident Investigation Checklist must be used during the investigation.
Examination of the work site must take place before anything is moved in order to
facilitate the discovery of the cause of the incident. Interviews with workers and
witnesses should take place the same day, if at all possible.
The Superintendent of the area in which the incident occurred and/or the Site Safety
Coordinator /Regional Safety Manager will form part of the investigation team, together
with a worker representative familiar with the work process.
The purpose of the investigation should be to prevent future occurrences.
Note: The purpose of the investigation is not to “find fault”
The goals of proper investigation are the following:
 Prevent a recurrence of the incident
 Identify the cause or causes of the incident
 Recommend the action needed to correct the hazardous situation
 Ensure that a process is established to make the corrections quickly
In the case of a fatal incident or serious injury, the incident scene must not be disturbed
except to attend to the fatally injured individual, to attend to any other seriously injured
worker, to protect an individual from further injuries, or to protect property from damage.
Refer to Section 8.4 Serious Injuries for additional procedures involving serious injuries
or fatalities.
An investigation will begin immediately in the case of an incident that resulted in an
injury requiring medical attention or that had a potential for causing injury.
The investigation will have the following characteristics:
 Be carried out by someone who has knowledge of the type of work involved,
typically, the immediate Superintendent
 Involve, where possible, one Worker Representative and one Employer
Representative
 Determine the cause or causes of the incident
 Identify any unsafe conditions, acts, or procedures that contributed to the incident
 Develop appropriate corrective action to prevent similar incidents
7.3.1 Preserve the Scene
A primary concern in an incident investigation is to preserve the incident scene as much
as is possible until the investigation is complete.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 5
 7.3.2 The Incident Investigation

A Safety Committee Member, the superintendent in charge, and/or other appropriate

personnel familiar with the work activity, will collect and consider any written or
photographic information about the incident using Form 19: Incident investigation and
Form 20: Incident investigation checklist while doing so.
When investigating an incident, do the following:
1. Activate the Site Emergency Plan (Form 06)
2. Notifications
 In the case of a fatality, a 911 emergency call must be placed
immediately
 If they have not yet been notified, contact the site superintendent and the
Regional Safety Manager
 If there is a critical injury or fatality, a call to the provincial authority with
jurisdiction is required.
 Contact the appropriate Stuart Olson spokesperson to deal with media
relations
 Contact the appropriate human resources personnel to deal with family
notification of death or injury
 Consider the need to retain appropriate experts, such as an engineer or
accident reconstruction expert
3. Documentation
Copy the data that will be requested immediately by the provincial authority
having jurisdiction. This will typically include:
 Personnel file of the worker
 Job hazard assessments relating to this work
 Safety procedures
 The HSE Manual
 Equipment Manual
 Any training records
 Daily safety meeting minutes
 Equipment servicing and/or maintenance records
 Employee records of the worker’s relevant work history over the last
several weeks address fatigue
4. Visit the incident location and examine it carefully

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 6
 5. Collect all relevant information
 Photograph the scene as soon as possible
 Develop a sketch
 Take measurements
 Develop a timeline of material events
 Get names and contact information of witnesses
6. Complete Form 19: Incident Investigation. Make additional notes and comments
as necessary. If in doubt, record the information
When investigating an incident, take a number of factors into account:
7. Consider the pre-incident situation.
 What was the general status of the work site (supervision, safe work
procedures, maintenance programs, etc.)?
 What was the general status of the injured worker (age, gender,
occupation, years of experience, training, etc.)?
8. Evaluate the immediate incident situation.
 What work was being done?
 Did the particular situation have written safe work procedures, and if so,
were they being followed?
 Was the work being done in a normal procedure?
 Were there any special conditions?
 What materials and equipment were involved?
 Was the necessary personal protective equipment (PPE) available and
was it being used and worn in the proper way?
 What other workers were present and what was their role?
 What sequence of events preceded the incident?
 Was there anything special or different about these events?
 Was the worker doing work for the employer at the time of the incident?
 What was the workplace environment like (temperature, noise, lighting,
dust, chemicals, humidity, ventilation, weather, working surfaces, etc.)?
9. Consider the post-incident stage:
 What factors increased or decreased the risk or the actual injury?
 Was PPE being worn?
 Was the machine guarded?
 Was the first aid response time good?
 Was the transportation to the hospital fast?

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 7
 7.3.3 Interviewing Witnesses

When interviewing witnesses and any other people who can contribute to the
investigation, do the following:
 Interview in a controlled, comfortable private environment such as a room
 Arrange for an interpreter, if needed
 Put the person at ease
 Explain who you are and what your interest is in the investigation
 Make sure the person understands that the purpose of the interview is to gather
information, not to place blame
 Let the person answer the questions
 Do not lead the person to any conclusions you may have
 Do not discuss other views or opinions regarding the incident
 Confirm what you have heard by repeating the person’s version of what
happened, and clarify your understanding with questions, if necessary
 If there are apparent inconsistencies, tactfully try to clear these up
 Do not argue with the person
 Ask the person if anyone else may have information to provide regarding the
incident
 Explain what will happen next and when the report will be complete
 Thank the person for assisting with the investigation
Reference: Form 58: Incident Witness Statement

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 8
 7.4 Writing the Incident Investigation Report

The appropriate Superintendent or Safety Coordinator must complete Form 19: Incident
Investigation and send it to the appropriate Manager and Regional Safety Manager as
soon as possible.
The Incident investigation report must contain the following items:
 Place, date, and time of the incident
 Names and job titles of persons injured in the incident (the names of the injured
may be deleted from published report)
 Names of the witnesses
 A brief description of the incident
 A statement of the sequence of events which preceded the incident
 Analysis of data for the purposes of establishing contributing and non-
contributing factors, unsafe conditions, acts, or procedures which contributed to
the incident
 Prepare recommendations to reduce or eliminate the potential for similar
incidents to occur in the future
 The names of the individuals who investigated the incident
If appropriate to do so, and when there is a fatality or serious injury, it is desirable to
have the Incident Investigation Report signed off by a senior officer from the provincial
authority
The results of the incident investigation and the corrective actions necessary to prevent
recurrence of similar incidents must be communicated to all workers.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 9
 7.5 Provincial Authority Involvement

Stuart Olson recognizes that the provincial authority having jurisdiction in the province in
which the work is being done has the right to interview workers and any other individuals
with information about the incident.
Stuart Olson also recognizes that it is an offence to withhold information or to obstruct or
interfere with an officer of a provincial authority with jurisdiction making enquiries.
Individuals being interviewed by an officer from a provincial authority may wish to have
their union representative or legal counsel present.
If an incident results in a medical injury, the appropriate reports must be completed and
submitted to the provincial authority having jurisdiction. This takes priority over any
internal incident investigation, but it can be done in conjunction with an internal
investigation.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 7 Incident Investigation Page 10
 Section 8. First Aid
8.1 First Aid Policy ............................................................................ 8-3
8.2 First Aid Service Requirements ................................................. 8-4
8.3 First Aid Procedures ................................................................... 8-5
8.4 Serious Injuries ........................................................................... 8-6
8.4.1 First Aid Kit ..................................................................................... 8-6
8.5 Minor Injuries............................................................................... 8-7
8.5.1 Worker Responsibilities ................................................................ 8-7
8.5.2 Supervisor Responsibilities .......................................................... 8-7
8.6 Exposure to Blood-Borne Pathogens ........................................ 8-8
8.6.1 Scope .............................................................................................. 8-8
8.6.2 Hepatitis B Vaccination Program.................................................. 8-8
8.6.3 Blood-Borne Pathogens Standard Precautions .......................... 8-8
8.6.4 Blood-Borne Pathogens Personal Protective Equipment .......... 8-9
8.6.5 Clean-Up Procedures..................................................................... 8-9

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 1
 8.1 First Aid Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. is committed to providing and maintaining a First Aid
policy to minimize the effects of job-related injuries and illnesses.
The Company will provide and maintain first aid services, supplies, and equipment as
required by occupational health and safety regulations. First aid services, supplies, and
equipment will be made available to all workers during working hours.
Management will ensure compliance with all Stuart Olson regulations and all provincial
regulations regarding maintaining proper first aid certification representation among
workers.
Workers who sustain a job-related injury or illness, regardless of seriousness, must
immediately report to a first aid attendant for treatment. They must immediately report
any injuries occurring at the work site to their supervisor.
Workers certified in first aid will properly attend to all injuries and complete the
appropriate documentation required.
The first aid attendant will be in complete charge of all first aid treatment of injured
workers until medical aid is available.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 3
 8.2 First Aid Service Requirements

In addition to provincial occupational health and safety regulations for first aid, all first aid
attendants will follow universal precautions including the following:
 Use appropriate PPE such as facemasks, latex gloves and safety glasses when
a worker is bleeding.
 Make sure that any cuts or abrasions on the first aider do not come in contact
with the injured worker.
 Use a bag and mask or a pocket mask for artificial respiration.
 Clean up blood carefully and, with a suitable disinfectant and using proper
precautions, clean all areas contaminated with blood.
 Carefully dispose of blood-soaked materials in double-wrapped plastic bags.
Where required by legislation, bio-hazardous bags must be used.
 If deemed appropriate, a contract cleaner may be hired to clean up blood at a
worksite.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 4
 8.3 First Aid Procedures

Go to a first aid attendant immediately in the event of an injury

The first aid attendant will provide first aid and be in charge of all first aid treatment until
medical help arrives. After the first aid attendant has provided treatment, the first aid
attendant will record the necessary information on Form 12: Record of First Aid.
First aid records must be available at all times for inspection by the supervisor and
Regional Safety Manager. First aid reports, by regulation, must be made available to
provincial authorities to review upon request.
All first aid records and incident data fall under the protection of provincial freedom of
information and protection of privacy legislation and must be considered confidential.
Reference: Safe Work Procedure 19.8: First Aid

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 5
 8.4 Serious Injuries

If a worker is injured and unable to continue working, the Supervisor or a worker must do
the following:
1. Follow the emergency response procedure as outlined in Section 12: Emergency
Preparedness.
2. Call for emergency first aid from the first aid attendant.
3. Notify the superintendent and / Regional Safety Manager of the details (who,
what, when, where, and how).
4. If outside emergency service is requested, assist by watching for its arrival and
directing it, as required.
In addition, the Superintendent and/or Regional Safety Manager must ensure the
following:
 The injured worker gets prompt attention (first aid and/or medical)
 Transportation to a physician, clinic, or hospital, if appropriate, is arranged
 An ambulance is called if the first aid attendant requests it
 Proper reporting and investigation procedures are followed
 Provincial regulations regarding when to inform the provincial authorities about
an injury are followed
8.4.1 First Aid Kit

Management will, at a minimum, maintain its first aid facilities in accordance with the
guidelines of the provincial authorities.
In addition to meeting those requirements, management will ensure that a portable first
aid kit is available. This kit will be kept with a designated person in a designated area of
the work site so that the kit can be immediately obtained and brought to the scene of the
injury.
In the event of an injury so serious that the injured worker cannot walk to the first aid
station, the designated first aid attendant will be notified and required to bring the first aid
kit and other necessary equipment to the scene of the incident.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 6
 8.5 Minor Injuries

A minor injury is an injury of a level of severity that, after sustaining it, a worker can
continue working or return to work following on-the-job first aid.
8.5.1 Worker Responsibilities

A worker has the following responsibilities following a minor injury:

 Obtain first aid from the First Aid Attendant
 Notify the Supervisor of the details of the incident (who, what, when, where, and
how).
8.5.2 Supervisor Responsibilities

A Supervisor has the following responsibilities if a worker sustains a minor injury:

 Ensure that the worker gets proper attention (first aid or medical treatment)
 Follow the reporting and investigation procedures by filling in all necessary forms,
including those required by the provincial authority, if additional medical
information is necessary
 Ensure that the injured worker fills out the required reports for the appropriate
provincial authority

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 7
 8.6 Exposure to Blood-Borne Pathogens

The Blood-borne pathology exposure control plan is meant to ensure that workers are
protected against disease-causing micro-organisms present in human blood and/or
human body fluids.
8.6.1 Scope

The Blood-borne pathogens procedure is designed for the health and safety of First Aid
Attendants, persons performing CPR, and workers who must deal with waste removal.
Universal health precautions will be practised at all times to reduce the risk of first
responders and other workers being exposed to infectious material.
All blood, body fluid, or potentially infectious material will be considered infectious
regardless of the perceived status of the source individual.

8.6.2 Hepatitis B Vaccination Program

All workers and first aid attendants identified as having possible exposure to blood or
other potentially infectious materials will be offered the Hepatitis B vaccine at no cost.
The vaccine will be offered at the time of initial training or within ten (10) working days of
the initial assignment of a worker to work that involves the potential for exposure to
potentially infectious materials.
A worker who initially declines the vaccine, but later wishes to have it, will have the
vaccine provided at no cost.
All vaccination authorization records, date of immunization records, blood-borne
pathogen education records, training records, incident post-evaluation documentation,
and incident follow-up documentation will be kept secure by the Regional Safety
Manager.
Note: A worker who refuses to take the Hepatitis B vaccine must sign Form 16: Hepatitis
B Vaccination Waiver

8.6.3 Blood-Borne Pathogens Standard Precautions

To minimize the risk from blood-borne pathogens in cases where a blood-borne

pathogen is or may be present, do the following:
 Wash hands with antiseptic wipes if there is any possibility there has been
contact with blood, body fluids, or human tissue
 Wash hands with soap and water as soon as possible

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 8
  Wear latex gloves if there may be contact with blood, body fluids, tissues,
mucous membranes or contaminated surfaces, or if skin breaks are present
 Wear an apron approved for use with blood spatter if splattering is likely
 Wear a mask and eye protection if splattering is likely
 Use a mouth piece or other resuscitation device with a one-way valve where
there is a risk of inhaling bodily fluids during artificial respiration
 Handle sharp objects with care
 Dispose of all sharp objects into a container impervious to puncture
 Dispose of all spills that may contain contaminants in accordance with policies for
hazardous waste disposal
 Until cleanup is complete, rope off the affected area
 Report all potential contamination of open wounds immediately
8.6.4 Blood-Borne Pathogens Personal Protective Equipment

All required personal protective equipment (PPE) will be provided to the worker without
cost and chosen based on the anticipated exposure to potentially infectious materials.
The PPE provided for use when blood-borne pathogens are present or may be present
will include the following:
 Latex gloves
 Safety glasses or other eye protection
 Disposable masks
 Aprons impervious to blood spatter
 One-way valve CPR masks for use as a mouth shield when performing artificial
respiration
All used disposable PPE will be contained in biohazard disposal bags until removed from
the work site.
All non-disposable PPE will be replaced or repaired as needed.

8.6.5 Clean-Up Procedures

If a blood-borne pathogen is, or may be, present, do the following to clean up:
1. Put on latex gloves.
2. Sprinkle approved absorbent on the spill and let it set until all fluid is absorbed.
3. Using the pick-up spatula or absorbent towels, scoop the congealed liquid into
the biohazard bucket.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 9
 4. Using the hand broom and dustpan, sweep up all traces of the approved
absorbent and soil in a manner that does not stir up dust.
5. Place the sweepings into the biohazard bucket.
6. Spray appropriate disinfectant on the hand broom, dustpan, and spatula, let it set
for 10 minutes, and then wipe it away with an absorbent towel.
7. Place the soiled towel into the biohazard bucket. (If you suspect person of having
AIDS, hepatitis, or any infectious disease, discard the dustpan, broom, and
spatula into the biohazard bucket, and notify the First Aid Attendant so that a new
kit can be ordered.)
8. Close the opening of the biohazard bucket.
9. Remove the disposable gloves and place the gloves in the biohazard bucket.
10. Wash your hands with antiseptic alcohol rinse and allow them to air dry.
11. Spray approved aseptic on the spill area to eliminate any lingering odour and as
a final step in disinfecting the area.
12. Allow the surface to air-dry.
13. After all handling and cleaning has been completed, clean your hands with
antiseptic alcohol rinse, and allow your hands to dry.
14. In the event that a disposable artificial respiration mouth shield must be
discarded, place it into the biohazard bucket in the first aid room.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 8 First Aid Page 10
 Section 9. HSE Committees
9.1 Health, Safety and Environmental Committee Policy ............... 9-3
9.2 Occupational HSE Committees .................................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Committee Responsibilities .......................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Posting Information ....................................................................... 9-5

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 9 HSE Committees Page 1
 9.1 Health, Safety and Environmental Committee Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Where mandated by legislation or where the size of the project warrants the necessity it is
policy of Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. to establish and maintain effective workplace HSE
Committees.
The purpose of an HSE Committee is to encourage a unified effort between Management
and workers to identify and resolve health, safety and environmental issues.
The HSE Committee will have appropriate representation from Management and workers
and will develop safe work programs and procedures and maintain a safe workplace. It will
also promote compliance with the Company’s HSE program and recommend any changes
necessary.
Management will ensure that the HSE Committee Co-Chairs receive adequate occupational
health and safety training.
Stuart Olson will support the functions of the HSE Committees and will allow them to meet
a minimum of quarterly.
Minutes of HSE Committee meetings will be made available to all parties and posted in a
common area for review.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 9 HSE Committees Page 3
 9.2 Occupational HSE Committees

HSE Committees will be established as per the provincial regulations in the province in
which the work is being done.
The Company will ensure that HSE Committees are given the opportunity to meet and
that they function effectively. At least half of each HSE Committee must be workers.
Meetings will be held quarterly, or as required, at a regular time and location. The Safety
Committee Co-Chairperson(s) will decide whether meetings are to be cancelled or
rescheduled, or if special meetings are to be called.
There will be an agenda for the monthly committee meetings prepared by the Safety
Committee Co-Chairperson(s).
Workers wishing to have safety concerns discussed by a HSE Committee must be
encouraged to talk to any member of the committee.
The purpose of each HSE Committee on the work site is to help create a safe
workplace. This will be done by recommending actions that will improve the
effectiveness of the Company’s HSE program and by promoting compliance with
occupational HSE guidelines and regulations.
The work site Division HSE Committee is responsible for the continuing co-ordination of
the Division HSE activities when there are 20 or more workers at the workplace or more
than one employer.
Each Co-chair of an HSE Committee will receive appropriate occupational HSE training
courses.
The HSE Committees will assist the Regional Safety Manager in maintaining the
Company’s HSE program.
9.2.1 Committee Responsibilities

An HSE Committee has the following responsibilities:

 Identify situations that may be unhealthy or unsafe for workers
 Advise on effective systems for responding to situations that may be unhealthy or
unsafe for workers
 Consider and expeditiously deal with complaints relating to the health and safety
of workers
 Consult with workers and the employer on issues related to occupational health
and safety. and the occupational environment
 Make recommendations to the Company and to workers for the improvement of
the occupational health and safety and the occupational environment of workers
 Make recommendations to the Company regarding educational programs
promoting the health and safety of workers and compliance with occupational
health and safety regulations

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 9 HSE Committees Page 4
  If working in occupied buildings, the need for client representation on the HSE
Committee may be advisable
 Monitor the effectiveness of educational programs promoting the health and
safety of workers and compliance with occupational health and safety regulations
 Advise the Company on programs and policies required under the regulations for
the workplace and monitor their effectiveness
 Advise the Company on proposed changes to the workplace or the work
processes that may affect the health and safety of workers
 Ensure that incident investigations and regular inspections are carried out as
required by regulations
 Participate in inspections, investigations, and inquiries as provided by regulations
 Carry out any other duties and functions prescribed by regulations
9.2.2 Posting Information

At each workplace where the workers of an employer are regularly employed, the
employer will post, and keep posted, the following:
 The names and work locations of the Division HSE Committee members
 The reports of the three most recent Division HSE Committee meetings

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 9 HSE Committees Page 5
 Section 10. Records and Statistics
10.1 Records and Statistics Policy..................................... 10-3
10.2. Retaining Records ....................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Five-year Retention ...................................................................... 10-4
10.2.2 Twenty-year Retention ................................................................. 10-4
10.2.3 Permanent Retention ................................................................... 10-4
10.3 Monthly Forms Submittal ............................................ 10-5
10.4 Summary Report.......................................................... 10-6

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 10 Records and Statistics Page 1
 10.1 Records and Statistics Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. requires the development and maintenance of statistical
recording procedures within the Company HSE program in order to provide current and
comparative information for Management, Supervisors, and workers.
The Company will compare the year to year performance of its HSE program.
The Company will keep records and statistics relating to safety and this information will
be used to identify problem areas and to maintain and improve health and safety.
Supervisors will review statistics related to their areas of responsibility, HSE Committee
minutes, and recommendations. Where necessary, they will take action to correct any
safety problems identified.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 10 Records and Statistics Page 3
 10.2. Retaining Records

Safety records pertaining to projects will be kept for the following time periods after the
project closes. Safety records pertaining to program administration will be retained for
the time periods noted below.
10.2.1 Five-year Retention

 Worker orientation records (5 years after the worker leaves our employment)
 Positive alcohol and drug tests (5 years after the worker leaves our employment)
 Planned inspection reports
 Tool box meeting records
 Safety Committee meeting minutes
 Subcontractor orientation records
 Records of Subcontractor safety violations
 Provincial authority inspection reports, compliance reports, and assessments
 Emergency preparedness documented drills
 Hot Work Permits
 Monthly injury records
 Provincial authority claim cost statements
 First aid treatment reports
 Incident investigations
 Provincial authority incident investigation reports
 Equipment records to be retained after the life of the equipment
10.2.2 Twenty-year Retention

 Contaminated inventory reports

10.2.3 Permanent Retention

 Worker safe practice training records

 Records of worker safety violations
 Records resulting from worker refusal to work
 First aid training and certification records
 Monitoring data and worker exposure records
 Medical surveillance records

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 10 Records and Statistics Page 4
 10.3 Monthly Forms Submittal

The following forms shall be sent to the Regional Safety Manager monthly (there may
be other items to send):
 Formal inspections summary
 HSE Committee meeting minutes
 Hazard assessments
 Provincial regulatory body inspections
 Violations
 Monthly safety activity summary reports
 Toolbox Talks
 Records of First Aid
 Near Miss Report Forms

All safety documentation will be archived with the project files at the end of a project.
This will be completed in a hard copy format or electronic filing format. Project team
members will be responsible for archiving the project files.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 10 Records and Statistics Page 5
 10.4 Summary Report

Statistics on claim costs, type of injury or illness, frequency of incidents, severity of

incidents, and work site locations of incidents will be recorded and analyzed. These
statistics will be recorded on the Form 29: Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report by
members of the Safety Committee and submitted to the Manager for review.
The HSE Committees will review and discuss these records and statistics at its monthly
meetings. The Committees will make recommendations based on these reviews to
Management and to the appropriate Supervisors.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 10 Records and Statistics Page 6
 Section 11. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
11.1 Personal Protective Equipment Policy ................................... 11-2
11.2 Personal Protective Equipment ............................................... 11-3
11.2.1 Clothing ......................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.2 Head Protection............................................................................ 11-3
11.2.3 High Visibility Vests .................................................................... 11-4
11.2.4 Foot Protection............................................................................. 11-4
11.2.5 Eye Protection .............................................................................. 11-4
11.2.6 Hearing Protection ....................................................................... 11-5
11.2.7 Hand Protection ........................................................................... 11-6
11.2.8 Respiratory Protection ................................................................ 11-7
11.2.9 Fall Protection .............................................................................. 11-9
11.2.10 Manufacturer’s Specifications and Recommendations ......... 11-10

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 1
 11.1 Personal Protective Equipment Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
It is the policy of Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. to provide and maintain safe and healthy
working conditions and to follow operating practices that will safeguard all workers.
In keeping with this policy, Stuart Olson requires that all workers use the proper personal
protective equipment (PPE) when and where required.
All workers, Management, Supervisors, trade contractors, and visitors will wear
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) standard safety boots, long trousers, safety
glasses or prescription safety glasses complete with side shields, sleeved shirts, CSA or
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard hard hats, and any other PPE
required for the job site.
All PPE used by Stuart Olson will meet the requirements of provincial health and safety
regulations. All PPE must comply with CSA or ANSI standards.
All PPE will be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions,
specifications, and requirements. No PPE will be modified or changed contrary to the
manufacturer’s instructions, specifications, or requirements.
Workers are required to follow the rules concerning PPE at all times, without exception.
Deliberately refusing to wear PPE or removing protective equipment, such as machine
guards, will be considered an act of insubordination, and subject to corrective
disciplinary action. (Reference Section 3.10.1: Safety Non-Compliance Consequences)
This policy establishes the requirements regarding the PPE necessary to insure that all
workers are properly protected from specific hazards in the workplace.
Stuart Olson considers deliberate safety violations that put workers or co-workers at risk
very serious and penalties for such violations may include suspension or termination.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 2
 11.2 Personal Protective Equipment

Personal protective equipment (PPE) is intended to safeguard workers against a variety

of hazards.
It must be available and used properly.
PPE is not intended to replace the need for other incident control measures such as
machine guards, proper equipment maintenance, or safe working procedures.
The particular demands of the job may require additional PPE, as per provincial
occupational health and safety regulations.
Supervisors are responsible to ensure the use of proper safety equipment is enforced at
all times.
Where a danger of injury exists, it is the responsibility of each supervisor to ensure that
every employee wears personal protective equipment which meets or exceeds minimum
provincial safety requirements.
Employees requiring specialized personal protective equipment will require training on its
use, limitations and car
11.2.1 Clothing

Every worker must wear suitable clothing, adequate for protection in their normal work.
The removal of shirts or wearing of shortened pants is not allowed.
Shirtsleeves must extend below the shoulder to mid upper arm.
Clothing that is loose, ragged or torn, bracelets, necklaces or neckties must not be worn
near rotating or moving equipment.
Welders must wear fire retardant work wear.
11.2.2 Head Protection

All workers, at all times, in all work areas, on all Stuart Olson work sites, must wear
safety headgear. All safety headgear must meet approved CSA or ANSI standards.
Headgear can provide protection in situations where there is a danger of head injuries
from impact, flying, falling of thrown objects, splashes from chemicals or harmful
substances, or contact with energized objects and equipment.
Workers exposed to electrical hazards must wear non-conductive safety headgear.
Most head protection is made of two parts:
 The shell (light and rigid to deflect a blow)
 The suspension (with a ratchet assembly to absorb and distribute the energy of a
blow)
Both parts of the headgear must be compatible and maintained according to
manufacturer’s instructions. The service life of headgear is affected by many factors
including temperature, chemicals, sunlight, and ultraviolet radiation (welding).

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 3
 Hard hats must be worn properly at all times and in all work areas.
Hard hats are to be worn with the brim of the hat forward unless the hardhat is designed
to be worn in the reverse position and the job, task or work environment necessitates
wearing headwear backwards.
Where there is deemed to be significant risk of a lateral (side) impact to a worker’s head,
side impact hard hats shall be worn.
11.2.3 High Visibility Vests

A high visibility vest will be supplied, and it must be worn if specified in work site
requirements or in a site-specific safety plan.
11.2.4 Foot Protection

Class 1 safety footwear must be properly worn at all times in all areas and must provide
adequate protection appropriate to the nature of the work hazard and must be approved
under CSA standards.
The safety footwear shall have steel toes and shanks and afford adequate foot and ankle
protection.
Safety running shoes or other types of work shoes do not afford adequate foot or ankle
protection and are not recommended in most circumstances. Permission must first be
obtained from the Project Superintendent to use this type of footwear. Permission will only
be granted when foot and ankle hazards do not exist.
Rubber work boots and winter footwear must comply with Class 1 safety standards.
Only the Green Triangle grade of footwear is approved for Stuart Olson work sites.
11.2.5 Eye Protection

Eye protection shall be worn by all Stuart Olson employees, trade contractors and visitors
at all times.
Eye protection PPE is designed to protect eyes from flying objects, flying particles,
molten metals, splashing liquids, infrared radiation, and ultraviolet radiation (welding).
Supervisors are responsible to enforce compliance.
There are two types of eye and face protection:
 Basic Eye Protection
Basic eye protection is to conform to the requirements of the current CSA
Standard CAN/CSA Z94.3 “Eye Protectors” or the equivalent ANSI standards.
 Face Protection
Face protection includes metal mesh face shields for radiant heat or hot and
humid conditions, chemical and impact resistant (plastic) face shields, and
welder’s shields or helmets with specified covers, filter plates, and lenses.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 4
 When safety glasses are used, the following criteria must be met:
 All safety glasses must have side shields
 Regular workers must not wear clip-on glasses over prescription lenses in lieu of
approved safety glasses
 Additional eye and face protection, such as face shields and goggles, must be
worn during grinding and chipping
Prescription Safety Eyewear
Prescription safety eyewear must meet the requirements of the current CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-Z94.3, “Industrial Eye and Face Protectors”
Contact Lenses
Contact lenses are not an acceptable substitute for proper eye protection.
Workers should not wear contact lenses in the following situations:
 Gases, vapours, or other materials are present that, when absorbed by contact
lenses, may harm the eyes
 Dusts or other materials are present that may harm the eyes or cause distraction
that may expose the worker to other injury
Warning: Hard contact lenses may break into the eye when hit.
11.2.6 Hearing Protection

Hearing protection is designed to reduce the level of sound energy reaching the inner
ear.
Hearing protection is to be worn as required by the local jurisdiction, when noise levels
exceed set limits for an 8 hour duration, or whenever noise levels are simply
uncomfortable. CSA Class B ear protection is to be worn when noise levels exceed set
limits of 85dBA. CSA Class A ear protection is to be worn when noise levels exceed set
limits of 95dBA. Audio headsets do not provide adequate hearing protection and are not
permitted.
Use hearing protection when you cannot carry on a normal voice volume conversation
with another person who is three (3) feet (.914m) away.
The most common types of hearing protection are earplugs and earmuffs. If you want to
use the other types of hearing protection, contact the Supervisor.
Different styles of hearing protection must be available to allow workers a better chance
of a good fit because one style may not fit everyone in a crew. A good fit is important for
two reasons:
 If hearing protection does not fit properly or is painful to use, a worker might not
use it
 If hearing protection does not fit properly, it will not supply the level of protection
it was designed to deliver
 Note: A worker shall not wear muff-type hearing protectors or headsets that have
been designed or modified to accept AM or FM radio or other signals.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 5
 A worker is responsible for wearing hair and personal apparel in a way that the muff of
muff-type hearing protection maintains an effective seal around the ears.
If, for some medical reason, an individual should not wear hearing protective devices,
the employer, after being advised of this situation, can reassign the worker or contact the
provincial authority with jurisdiction and follow the directions given.
For further information refer to the current CSA Standard Z94.2, Hearing Protectors.
Workers must receive a hearing test as/where required by provincial regulations.
See Section 4.7: Hearing Conservation and Protection for additional information and
requirements.
11.2.7 Hand Protection

Where a risk of hand injury exists, all workers will wear the appropriate hand protection
for the task to be undertaken. This hand protection will be provided by the employer.
Suitable hand protection must be in the possession of workers at all times. Workers
should be aware of the tasks they are to perform and ensure that they bring the
appropriate gloves for the task.
If uncertain which type of protection to use, the worker should consult the safe work
procedures, or ask the supervisor.
Choose hand personal protective equipment (PPE) that will protect against the job
hazard.
PPE for the hands comes in many forms, each designed to protect against certain
hazards, and includes finger guards, thimbles, hand pads, mitts, gloves, and barrier
creams.
Gloves may have to protect against chemicals, scrapes, abrasions, heat and cold,
punctures, and electrical shocks. The most commonly used gloves in the construction
industry are made from leather, cotton, rubber, synthetic rubbers, other man-made
materials, or combinations of materials. Vinyl coated gloves or leather gloves are good
for providing protection while handling wood or metal objects. Gloves should fit well and
be comfortable.
When selecting hand PPE, keep the following in mind:
 All hand protection selected and provided to workers must properly guard against
the identified hazard
 All workers handling chemicals must wear appropriate hand protection, as
recommended by the chemical manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS)
 All workers working with glass, knives, or other sharp objects must wear gloves,
such as Kevlar gloves, that guard against cuts
 All workers who provide first aid or emergency medical services or who may
come in contact with body fluids must wear gloves and eye protection that guard
against the transmittal of blood-borne pathogens

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 6
 11.2.8 Respiratory Protection

Every work site must evaluate its need for respiratory protection based on a hazard
assessment.
The most common reasons for needing respiratory protection are the following:
1. Oxygen deficiency
2. Toxic airborne contaminants such as these:
 Gas
Any substance that is in gaseous state at room temperature (carbon
monoxide, chlorine, etc.)
 Fume
Solid particulate of metallic origin generated by heat or chemical
treatment of metals that is point one to one (.1 - 1) micron in size (welding
fume)
 Vapour
Gaseous state of a substance that is normally a solid or liquid at standard
room temperature (solvents or gasoline)
 Smoke
Solid particulate generated by heat or chemical that is point one to one (.1
– 1) micron in size (airborne toxins from plastics, etc.)
 Mist
Suspended droplets of an atomized mist (paint, etc.)
 Particulate
Fine solid particulate, generated mechanically or by friction that is one to
ten (1 – 10) microns in size (drywall dust, grain dust, etc.)
Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere
No one may enter any confined space until a proper air quality test has been performed,
at which time the need for ventilation will be assessed
Respiratory Terms
The following respiratory terms are relevant to work site safety:
TLV (threshold limit value)
The permissible time-weighted concentrations of airborne substances that a
worker may be exposed to based on an eight (8) hour workday
TWA (time weighted average)
The average concentration of a toxic substance in air when continuously tested
over a specific period of time
PPM (parts per million)
Mg/m3 (milligrams per cubic meter) is presently the most common measurement
of airborne particulate

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 7
 STEL (short term exposure limit)
The maximum contaminant concentration in air to which workers can be exposed
for a period of up to 15 minutes continuously without suffering any of the
following:
 Irritation
 Chronic or irreversible tissue damage
 Narcosis or impairment
HEPA (high efficiency particulate air)
High efficiency air filter designed to remove small pollutants and particles through
interception, impaction and diffusion
IDLH (immediately dangerous to life and health)
A substance that is IDLH can cause health damage or death immediately
Toxicity
Describes the quantitative ability of a chemical agent to cause injury, sickness, or
other unwanted effects on a person
Toxic materials can act on the body in three ways:
 Ingestion
 Inhalation
 Absorption
Respiratory Equipment
Respiratory equipment will be provided whenever there is a contaminated atmosphere or
an oxygen-poor atmosphere.
The Supervisor must determine the proper type of respirator (filter type, air supplied, or
self-contained) for the conditions, the section of which will be based on provincial
occupational health and safety regulations and MSDS information.
As defined in Safe Work Practice 18.44: Respiratory Protective Equipment, workers
must be clean shaven when using respiratory equipment. It is imperative that clean
smooth skin be in contact with the respirator face piece. Even a mild growth of whiskers
may interfere with the equipment and cause leakage.
Respiratory equipment will be selected in consultation with the Supervisor and/or
Regional Safety Manager and the worker(s) who will use the equipment.
Caution: The respirator must be properly fitted to the worker and the seal must be tested.
A qualified technician or an outside company must perform the respirator fit test.
If there is doubt about a worker's ability to use a respirator due to medical factors, the
worker must be examined by a physician who will advise Stuart Olson about the
worker’s ability to wear the respirator.
Reference: Safe Work Practice 18.44: Respiratory Protective Equipment
Form 86 - Respirator Use Screening Form

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 8
 11.2.9 Fall Protection

Fall protection consists of guardrails, fall restraint, and fall arrest. Fall protection must meet
provincial standards.

A fall protection system must be used where a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or
where a fall of less than 3 m (10 ft) involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury
from the impact on a flat surface.

Many construction site areas such as scissor lifts, scaffolds, openings, holes in floors, or
holes in roofs require fall protection. The work heights at which fall protection is mandated
are outlined in the regulations of the authority having jurisdiction in the province in which
the work is being done.

Rules of Fall Protection

Identify the fall hazards before beginning work and, if a site-specific fall protection plan is
required, complete Form 11: Fall Protection Work Plan.
 Remove or minimize the fall hazard, if feasible, by:
o completing part of the work from the ground
o relocating work to a no-climb level
o using articulated or drop-on platforms
o using a permanent ladder that incorporates a fall protection system
o using an elevated work platform
 Prevent falling, if feasible by:
o Using guardrails and barriers
o Using personal travel restrict/restraint systems
 Arrest the fall and minimize its consequences by:
o Using safety nets
o Using permanent fall protection systems on ladders and structures
o Using temporary fall arrest systems with height rescue systems and site-
specific training
 Ensure workers are trained in emergency fall rescue procedures.
 Never work with worn or damaged equipment. Destroy and replace:
o All worn or damaged fall protection equipment
o Any equipment involved in a fall
 Always refer to the manufacturer’s manual for detailed maintenance and use
instructions and the Regulations for province/territory where work is being
completed.

Reference: Safe Work Practice 18.18: Fall Protection

Safe Work Practice 18.19: Fall Protection Equipment
Form 11: Fall Protection Work Plan

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 9
 11.2.10 Manufacturer’s Specifications and Recommendations

The manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for any required personal

protective equipment (PPE) must be reviewed and complied with in addition to any
supplementary requirements enforced by the Stuart Olson’s policy and provincial health
and safety regulations.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 10
 Section 12. Emergency Preparedness
12.1 Emergency Response Plan Policy ............................................ 12-2
12.2 Emergency Preparedness ......................................................... 12-2
12.3 Emergency Level and Reporting ............................................... 12-4
12.3.1 Emergency Definition .................................................................. 12-4
12.3.2 Emergency Criteria ...................................................................... 12-4
12.3.3 Level 1 Emergency ...................................................................... 12-4
12.3.4 Level 2 Emergency....................................................................... 12-5
12.3.5 Level 3 Emergency....................................................................... 12-5
12.3.6 Serious Injury or Fatality ............................................................. 12-5
12.3.7 Telephone Threat ......................................................................... 12-6
12.4 Posted Emergency Information ................................................ 12-7
12.5 Emergency Response Team ..................................................... 12-8
12.5.1 Emergency Response Team Duties ........................................... 12-8
12.6 The Media ................................................................... 12-10
12.6.1 Statements .................................................................................. 12-10
12.6.2 Media Control ............................................................................. 12-10

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 1
 12.1 Emergency Response Plan Policy

Date Issued: February 1, 2005

Date of Revision: August 23, 2010
Revision #: 2
Authorization: Stuart Olson
All accidents / incidents, or events, which occur during Stuart Olson’s operations, may
have the potential to have impact on several departments within Stuart Olson.
Therefore, it is essential that all emergency situations are quickly addressed and
assessed. Stuart Olson has considerable resources, which can be, if necessary,
mobilized to provide direction and support to personnel during emergency situations.
The Stuart Olson policy requires that all accidents / incidents, regardless of the
magnitude, must be reported immediately to the senior on-site Stuart Olson employee or
representative at the incident site.
The senior on-site Stuart Olson employee or representative will assume the on-scene
commander’s role and the responsibility of initiating the Emergency Response Plan by
communicating the details of the emergency to the appropriate emergency response
team leader. The urgency will depend on the severity of the situation.
For Level 1 (Minor Emergency), which can be controlled entirely by personnel within the
immediate vicinity of the accident / incident, notification must be made within 24 hours
for information purposes. Level 2 (Serious Emergency) or 3 (Major Emergency), which
force operations to be temporarily suspended or shut down indefinitely, must be reported
immediately.
The Regional Safety Manager will assume the emergency response team leader’s role,
and maintain the overall responsibility for supervising and verifying that the appropriate
procedures are implemented to control and minimize the effects of the emergency
situation. The emergency response team leader must immediately notify the Chief
Operating Officer (COO) of any situations of large magnitude (Level 2 or 3 Emergency).
Depending on the severity of the situation as determined by the COO, additional Stuart
Olson personnel from other departments or disciplines will be assembled to provide
direction and support to the emergency response team members.
Once the emergency situation has been brought under control, and all internal and
external investigations have been completed, the emergency response team leader will
conduct a debriefing with the participants.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 2
 12.2 Emergency Preparedness

An emergency response plan is essential to minimize confusion and delay in handling an

emergency.
Procedures will be developed for the care, reporting, and corrective follow-up of all
injuries and serious incidents.
Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. will develop a written emergency response plan for each
project, at the time the job is being set up, using Form 07: Emergency Preparedness
Checklist and Form 06: Site Emergency Plan.
The Emergency response plan should be tested periodically, and at least quarterly,
when it is practical to do so, throughout the duration of the project and recorded on the
Form 08: Emergency Response Test Record.
In addition, emergency response plans will be developed for and posted in Stuart Olson
branch offices and shop/yard facilities.
Employees will receive training on the location specific emergency response plans at the
initial hire-on orientation process and at the site specific orientation before beginning
work on site. The Regional Safety Manager will provide Emergency Response
information and training for office and shop/yard staff. The Superintendent / Foreman or
Site Safety Coordinator will conduct the project specific orientation and instruct workers
on their roles and responsibilities in the event of an emergency. Emergency plans will be
posted on site and available to workers for review.
The Emergency response plan should be tested periodically, and at least quarterly,
when it is practical to do so, throughout the duration of the project and recorded on the
Form 08: Emergency Response Test Record.
Stuart Olson branch offices will test the emergency response plan (I.e. fire / evacuation)
annually as a minimum. The shop/yard will test the emergency response plan on a
quarterly basis.
In the event a telephone threat is received involving issues such as extortion, bomb
threats or acts of vandalism or terrorism, the procedure, as outlined in Section 12.3.7
Telephone Threats is to be followed.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 3
 12.3 Emergency Level and Reporting

12.3.1 Emergency Definition

An emergency will be considered as any incident or event, either resulting in or having

the potential to result in loss of life, serious injury, significant loss or damage to
Company property, environmental damage or a situation which may pose a threat to the
safety of the general public. Examples include:
 An incident, including a vehicle incident, which results in, or could result in loss of
life or serious injury
 Plant, pipeline and facility fires, explosions, damage to Company property or
equipment
 Significant hazardous product releases or other chemical spills which are harmful
to personnel or the environment
 Toxic gas releases or leaks (e.g. H2S or SO2)
 Security related incidents involving issues such as extortion, bomb threats or acts
of vandalism
 Natural occurrences such as severe weather conditions including earthquakes,
floods, forest fires and tornadoes
 Business interruptions involving loss of process
12.3.2 Emergency Criteria

The Emergency Response Plan is implemented using the following three Emergency
Levels. These may be implemented in sequence or at any level, depending on the
magnitude of the situation.
12.3.3 Level 1 Emergency

Level 1 Emergencies must be reported within 24 hours

A Level 1 Emergency is a MINOR EMERGENCY, which can be controlled entirely by
personnel and facilities, located within the immediate vicinity of the incident site. The
types of events that could be described as Level 1 Emergencies are those which cause
minor property or equipment damage that are non-disruptive to operations and do not
pose a safety risk to personnel or property outside of the boundaries of the Company
property. The following are examples of Level 1 Emergencies:
 Minor injury
 Minor vehicle incident
 Small contained fire
 Small spill

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 4
 12.3.4 Level 2 Emergency

Level 2 Emergencies must be reported immediately

A Level 2 Emergency is a SERIOUS EMERGENCY, which is disruptive but not
extensive, and forces a portion of the Company operation to be temporarily suspended
or shut down. Events or conditions which describe Level 2 Emergencies are incidents
that have the potential to endanger the safety of personnel or the public outside of the
boundaries of Company property and would require the notification of external support
services (regulatory/government agencies, police or others). The following are examples
of Level 2 Emergencies:
 Minor injury or illness resulting in temporary disability
 Property or equipment damage which is disruptive to operations
 Fire or explosions which have the potential to endanger the safety of personnel
or cause damage to property and equipment
 Spill or hazardous product release which has the potential to cause harm to
personnel or the environment
 Weather conditions which could cause damage to property or equipment, or
which could threaten the safety of personnel
12.3.5 Level 3 Emergency

Level 3 Emergencies must be reported immediately

A Level 3 Emergency is a MAJOR EMERGENCY that forces the indefinite shut down of
Company operations. Safe operating control has been lost causing, or having the
potential to cause: serious injuries or fatalities among employees, contractors or the
public; extensive damage to Company property or equipment; or serious harm to the
environment. The following are examples of Level 3 Emergencies:
 Serious injury or fatality
 Major fire or explosion
 Uncontrolled spill or hazardous product release
 Weather conditions which have caused structural damage to property or
equipment
 Bomb threats or extortion
12.3.6 Serious Injury or Fatality

See also Section 12.4, Emergency Response Team

If a serious injury or fatality occurs, the following actions must be taken:

 Administer first aid and keep the victim warm and calm until medical aid arrives
 Do not move the victim and ensure there is no disturbance of the incident scene,
unless it is necessary to prevent further injury

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 5
  Notify the senior Stuart Olson representative on site who will:
o Dispatch the on-site safety personnel to the scene
o Notify local emergency services [ambulance, helicopter (medivac) or
hospital] and request assistance as necessary
o Enact the Site Emergency Plan
o Notify:
 Regional Vice President
 Regional Safety Manager
 Field Manager
 Chief Operating Officer of Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.(only
if the Regional Safety Manager has not acknowledged immediate
receipt of the notification and their intent to notify the Chief
Operating Officer)
 President of Stuart Olson Inc.(only if the Regional Safety Manager
has not acknowledged immediate receipt of the notification and
their intent to notify the President of Stuart Olson Inc.)
 The Regional Safety Manager will provide notification to the appropriate
regulatory/government agencies and senior Stuart Olson Management as
follows:
o RCMP or Local Police
o Workplace Health & Safety / Occupational Health & Safety
o Other regulatory / government agencies as may be required
o The Chief Operating Officer of Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
o The President of Stuart Olson Inc.
 The Regional Vice President will notify Executive members and, depending on
the nature of the incident, and as advised by local authorities/police, the next of
kin
12.3.7 Telephone Threat

If a telephone threat is received involving issues such as extortion, bomb threat or acts
of vandalism or terrorism, record as much information as possible using Form 62:
Telephone Threat Report while following procedures noted below:
 Listen
 Be calm and courteous
 Do not interrupt the caller
 Obtain as much information as possible
 Initiate call trace action (if available) while the call is ongoing
 Using a pre-arranged signal, while the call is still ongoing, have someone contact
Building Security or the local police service
 Complete Form 62: Telephone Threat Report and provide to senior management
on site

Reference: Form 62: Telephone Threat Report

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 6
 12.4 Posted Emergency Information

Emergency information must be posted and displayed in a common area visible to all
workers:
 An area map of the work site that highlights all emergency exits, fixed structures,
and the post-evacuation muster points or meeting areas must be posted in at
least one common area
 Specific instructions, including the appropriate emergency contact telephone
numbers, must be posted using the Emergency plan – site form along with every
area map. The contact telephone numbers must include, at a minimum:
o Fire
o Ambulance
o Police / RCMP
o Hazardous materials
o Provincial safety authority
o Nearest hospital
o Poison control centre
o Gas company
o Water company
o Power company
o Provincial environmental authorities
o Federal environmental authorities
o Utility locate contact numbers
o Workers’ compensation authorities
o Stuart Olson Regional Safety Manager and senior officials including the
Company media spokesperson
 Brief step-by-step instructions, posted with the area map and the contact
numbers, that detail the following:
o Contact person for initial internal notifications (Supervisor, Regional
Safety Manager, Receptionist, etc.)
o Immediate external notifications (911- emergency, fire, ambulance,
poison control centre, etc.)
o How to proceed to the appropriate muster point
 The names of the members of the Emergency Response Team
Reference: Form 06: Site Emergency Plan

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 7
 12.5 Emergency Response Team

Stuart Olson will establish an Emergency Response Team consisting of, at a minimum,
the Project Superintendent, the Site Safety Coordinator, the Regional Safety Manager,
the Project Director, and any outside specialists required.
Alternate members will be assigned for each team member in case that team member is
not available.
12.5.1 Emergency Response Team Duties

Each member of the Emergency Response Team will have a number of duties.
Superintendent Responsibilities
The duties of the Superintendent in the event of an emergency are the following:
 Call the 911 emergency response number
 Restrict access to/secure the area where the incident occurred
 Evaluate the potential for a secondary incident
 Account for all workers through their Superintendent/Foremen
 Identify any injured person(s)
 Call the Regional Safety Manager
 Delegate tasks to be done on the scene until the Regional Safety Manager
arrives
 Limit media and outsider access in and out of the scene (noting that only the
designated Stuart Olson spokesperson is allowed to make statements to the
media)
 Brief the Regional Safety Manager on arrival
 Assist authorities (provincial authority having jurisdiction, coroner, medical
examiner, police, crisis counsellor)
 Assist in gathering witness statements
Site Safety Coordinator Responsibilities
The duties of the Site Safety Coordinator, in the event of an emergency, are the
following:
 Contact the Emergency Preparedness Support Team
 Attend the scene of the incident as soon as possible
 Assist, or take control of the emergency response on arrival
 Assess the incident-site inspection
 Assess the general well-being of site personnel
 Contact outside agencies (if necessary)
 Gather witness statements and complete witness interviews
 Assist authorities (provincial authority having jurisdiction, coroner, medical
examiner, police, crisis counsellor)
 Ensure the area is secured

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 8
  Assess and arrange for additional site security as required
 Complete safety reports for all agencies

Regional Safety Manager Responsibilities

The duties of the Regional Safety Manager, in the event of an emergency, are the
following (site specifics will determine appropriate response):
 Contact the provincial authority having jurisdiction and outside agencies as
required
 Attend the site as soon as possible (ASAP)
 Inform appropriate personnel in corporate, branch, other site offices of the
incident
 Ensure the scene is preserved without compromising health and safety
 Contact outside agencies (provincial authorities)
 Conduct investigation
 Co-ordinate with outside experts
 Accompany outside experts as required
 Assist Management with other duties as required
Project Director Responsibilities
The duties of the Project Director, in the event of an emergency, are the following:
 Inform the corporate office of developments
 Gather family contact information if required (payroll or human resources)
 Recruit outside specialists (if required)
 Refer the media to the designated Stuart Olson spokesperson
 Be the contact person for consultants, lawyers, and insurance
 Arrange off-site crisis counselling for office and field employees
Site inspection engineer Responsibilities (if required)
If there is an incident involving a collapse, a structural engineer must investigate the
scene as soon as possible to identify potential causes of the incident.
The duties of the site inspection engineer are the following:
 Where possible, inspect the site within 24 hours after the incident
 Inspect all structural failures, such as those related to buildings, cranes, hoists,
excavations, or temporary structures
 Unless there is immediate danger of further collapse, do not remove materials or
equipment from the scene of the incident until receipt of written instructions from
the provincial authority having jurisdiction
 Send engineering reports to the Regional Vice President

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 9
 12.6 The Media

If a serious incident occurs, it is likely that the media (television, radio, and newspaper)
will cover it.
It is important for Stuart Olson, its workers, and the family of any injured worker that the
media is dealt with skillfully and professionally.
All media requests must be referred to the designated Stuart Olson spokesperson.
All workers are to be made aware of this requirement.
Reference: Section 19.11: Safe Work Procedure - Media.
12.6.1 Statements

Form 06: Emergency Response Plan designates the Stuart Olson representative
authorized as the media spokesperson in all cases.
If questioned by the media and it is impossible to avoid comment:
 ensure that you are aware of the backdrop behind you during interviews where
television cameras are present
 exercise your right to be interviewed where you want to be interviewed
 the only acceptable approach is to say that an investigation into the incident will
be completed by internal personnel, as well as investigators having
authority/jurisdiction, and it would be inappropriate at the present time to answer
their questions
 Never speculate on the facts or offer comments to the media that are “off the
record”
12.6.2 Media Control

The Emergency Response Team must ensure that the media is restricted from having
access to the job site.
Ensure that the media does not approach any worker for a statement.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Page 10
 Section 13. Maintenance
13.1 Maintenance Policy .................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Equipment Inventory .................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Inspection ................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 Maintenance Records ................................................................ 13-5
13.5 Preventative Maintenance ......................................................... 13-6
13.6 Defective Tools and Equipment ................................................ 13-7

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 1
 13.1 Maintenance Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
It is the policy of Stuart Olson Construction Ltd. that all tools and equipment must be
properly maintained to reduce the risk of injury and/or property damage.
The Company requires all managers, superintendents, foremen and workers to ensure
that maintenance programs are completed to the required schedules. Any safety
concerns regarding equipment must be reported as soon as is practical.
Supervisors must ensure that all preventive maintenance is carried out by qualified
personnel based on the required maintenance schedules and that proper records are
maintained.
All workers are responsible for checking the tools and equipment they are working with.
Tools or equipment that pose a hazard due to a need for repair must be tagged
immediately to avoid accidental usage and removed from service.
All equipment brought onto work sites must meet or exceed provincial occupational
health and safety regulations and CSA or industry standards.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 2
 13.2 Equipment Inventory

The Company must maintain an accurate inventory list of all tools and equipment.
The inventory list may include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items:
 Gas unit heaters
 Fire equipment
 Personal protective equipment (PPE)
 Ladders
 Mobile equipment
 Cranes
 Power tools (pneumatic, electric, and hydraulic)
 Hand tools
The inventory list should include the make, model, and serial number of each item, as
well as the quantity and location.
An internal identification number may be necessary for some equipment.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 3
 13.3 Inspection

When equipment rented from the Company, or by the Company, arrives at a job site, it is
the responsibility of the Superintendent to:
 Check for the equipment logbook (if required)
 Visually inspect the equipment
Note: If equipment certification is required before starting work, the equipment must be
certified.
Each item on the inventory list must be inspected regularly. The equipment
manufacturer's recommendations stated in its operating manual will determine the
minimum frequency of inspection.
Inspections will be daily, weekly, monthly, or at any frequency deemed necessary by the
manufacturers.
If the manufacturer does not specify the frequency of inspection, it will be determined by
the classification of the item as critical or non-critical equipment.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 4
 13.4 Maintenance Records

Any inspection or maintenance performed on equipment must be recorded on an

Equipment maintenance record form.
Inspection forms must contain the following, at minimum:
 Critical parts of the equipment that must be inspected
 Identified problems with any component of the equipment
 Date of the inspection
 Name/Signature of the person performing the inspection
Any service performed on critical or non-critical equipment must be recorded on Form
82: Equipment Maintenance Record, which includes, at minimum, the following:
 Department
 Name and serial number or identification numbers of the equipment serviced
 Part of the equipment serviced
 Action taken
 Date maintenance was, or is being, completed
 Name/Signature of person who performed the maintenance
Note: Inspection, maintenance and/or service work outsourced will be documented and
records kept on file.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 5
 13.5 Preventative Maintenance

Major equipment must have a preventative maintenance schedule in addition to regularly

scheduled inspections and recording procedures for service and repairs.
Major equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following:
 Mobile equipment
 Cranes
 Specialized personal protective equipment (PPE)
 Fall protection equipment
The operating manual of the equipment will specify the need for preventative
maintenance as well as the required frequency of maintenance and service.
All preventative maintenance performed requires retained documentation. Stuart Olson’s
equipment & rental facility, or the job site, will retain records of preventative
maintenance.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 6
 13.6 Defective Tools and Equipment

When a tool or piece of equipment is found to be faulty, a "Defective tool tag" must be
immediately affixed to that tool or piece of equipment.
All tools and equipment found defective must be documented on a maintenance form as
per Section 13.4: 13.4 Maintenance Records.
The Defective Tool tags are colour-coded.
The colour codes have the following meanings:
 Red tag — defective equipment, out of service
 Green tag — serviced equipment, ready for use
A defective tool tag and/or lock-out mechanism may not be removed until the equipment
or tool has been repaired and the service performed is documented and dated.
A Defective Tool Tag may not be removed from tools or equipment by anyone other
than authorized maintenance personnel.
Removal of a tag by unauthorized personnel will result in disciplinary action.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 13 Maintenance Page 7
 Section 14. Fire Prevention
14.1 Fire Prevention ........................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Fire Evacuation Planning ........................................................... 14-3
14.3 Fire Extinguishers ...................................................................... 14-4
14.3.1 Fire and Use of Fire Extinguishers ............................................. 14-4
14.4 Fire Duties ................................................................................... 14-5
14.4.1 Fire Marshal (office) ..................................................................... 14-5
14.4.2 Fire Marshal (work site) ............................................................... 14-5
14.4.3 First Aid Attendant ....................................................................... 14-6
14.5 Fire Discovery............................................................................. 14-7
14.6 Fire Evacuation........................................................................... 14-8
14.7 Hot Work ..................................................................................... 14-9
14.7.1 Hot Work Responsibilities ........................................................... 14-9

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 1
 14.1 Fire Prevention

All work site activities must be carried out in a manner that minimizes the risk of fire to
the greatest extent possible.
All workers must be given adequate instruction in the fire prevention and evacuation
procedures applicable to their workplace.
All fire prevention and response duties must be assigned to qualified persons.
Workers must be trained in the use of fire extinguishers.
All required maintenance of fire prevention systems, fire alarm systems, and fire
extinguishing systems must be carried out at the proscribed intervals.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 2
 14.2 Fire Evacuation Planning

Fire evacuation instructions detailing how all workers, contractors, and visitors are to
evacuate an existing facility in the event of a fire must be created and conveyed to all
concerned.
The responsibilities for fire evacuation management must be determined and conveyed
to all concerned.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 3
 14.3 Fire Extinguishers

Fire extinguishers must be placed in accessible locations throughout a work site.

Fire extinguishers must be chosen according to the type of fire that could occur.
Workers must be instructed annually regarding the proper use of fire extinguishers, the
types of fire extinguishers available, and the locations of the fire extinguishers.
A monthly inspection of all fire extinguishers must be conducted.
Annual inspections are to be completed by certified personnel.
14.3.1 Fire and Use of Fire Extinguishers
General
Good housekeeping is essential in the prevention of fires. Fires can start anywhere and
at any time. This is why it is important to know which fire extinguisher to use and how to
use it. Always keep fire extinguishers visible and easy to get at. Fire extinguishers must
be property maintained to do the job. Where temperature is a factor, ensure that care is
taken in selecting the right extinguisher.
Types of Fires
Class A: These fires consist of wood, paper, rags, rubbish and other ordinary combustible
materials.
Recommended Extinguishers:
o Water from a hose
o Pump type water can
o Pressurized extinguisher
o Soda acid extinguisher
Fighting the Fire
o Soak the fire completely – even the smoking embers.
Class B: Flammable liquids, oil and grease
Recommended Extinguishers:
o ABC units
o Dry chemical extinguisher
o Foam extinguisher
o Carbon dioxide extinguishers
Fighting the Fire
o Start at the base of the fire and use a swinging motion from left to right, always
keeping the fire in front of you.
Class C: Electrical Equipment
Recommended Extinguishers:
o Carbon dioxide
o Dry chemical (ABC units) extinguishers.
Fighting the Fire
o Use short bursts on the fire.

Remember extinguishers have a very short duration of discharge–usually less than 60 seconds.
Note: When fighting a fire, aim the nozzle at the base of the fire and direct the spray back and forth
in a rapid sweeping motion until the fire is extinguished. The idea is to extinguish the flames at their
source. Once the fire is extinguished, report the incident to your supervisor.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 4
 14.4 Fire Duties

Fire Marshals and First Aid Attendants have responsibilities regarding fire prevention
and fire response.
14.4.1 Fire Marshal (office)
A Fire Marshal has a number of duties in an office environment:
 Maintain documentation of the floor evacuation routes
 Maintain documentation of the locations of disabled persons for the use of the
fire department
 Conduct and document bi-annual fire drills
 Arrange for someone to assume Fire Marshal duties if he/she is not on site
If a fire breaks out at an office, a Fire Marshal must do the following:
1. Summon emergency assistance (call 911)
2. Assist in evacuating people and directing people to the muster area
3. If it is safe to do so, check all offices and washrooms in the assigned area of
responsibility and close any open doors
4. Proceed to the muster area and confirm the head count
5. Wait for the fire department or assign someone to meet them.
6. Inform the fire department about the head count, any visitors, any missing
persons and their probable locations, and any other important issues
7. Only allow re-entry after the “All Clear” has been given by the fire department
14.4.2 Fire Marshal (work site)
A Fire Marshal has a number of responsibilities at a work site:
 Know the evacuation routes, the alternate evacuation routes, and the muster
points that will be used in the event of a fire
 Create a checklist of workers in their assigned area of responsibility for use
during a head count
 Arrange for someone to assume Fire Marshal duties if he/she is not on site
If a fire breaks out at a work site, a Fire Marshal must do the following:
1. Summon emergency assistance (call 911)
2. Assist in evacuating people and directing people to the muster area
3. Assign someone to meet the fire department at the entrance to the site
4. Perform a head count at the muster are. (Get trade contractor head counts from
trade contractor Foremen)
5. Prevent any worker from re-entering the site to search for missing workers
6. Inform the fire department about the fire location and/or source
7. Inform the fire department about the head count, any visitors, any missing
persons and their probable locations, and any other important issues
8. Only allow re-entry after the “All Clear” has been given by the fire department

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 5
 14.4.3 First Aid Attendant

If a fire breaks out, a first aid attendant should do the following:

1. Provide first aid to anyone requiring it
2. Check with the Fire Marshal to see if anyone else requires first aid
3. Assist with other duties as directed by Fire Marshal

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 6
 14.5 Fire Discovery

If you discover a fire, do the following:

1. Sound the alarm
2. If you can safely attempt to extinguish the fire, you may do so
3. If you think that you cannot extinguish the fire safely, isolate it by closing the
doors
4. Leave the area

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 7
 14.6 Fire Evacuation

The following general evacuation procedures should be followed in the event of fire in an
existing facility:
1. At the sound of the alarm, leave the building by the shortest and safest route
available
2. If you have visitors, assist them when evacuating
3. If there is the potential that visitors will be alone in the building or separated from
their group, tell them where to find both the emergency exits and the assembly
area to which they should report when they evacuate the building
4. Once clear of the building, go to the designated assembly area/muster area so
the Fire Marshal can do a head count and confirm that everyone is out of danger

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 8
 14.7 Hot Work
Hot work refers to any temporary operation that involves open flames or produces heat
and/or sparks.
Hot work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
 Brazing
 Cutting
 Grinding
 Soldering
 Thawing pipe
 Torch applied roofing
 Welding
These procedures, if done improperly, can result in loss of life and property by fire and/or
explosion.
14.7.1 Hot Work Responsibilities

The following personnel have responsibilities regarding hot work:

Supervisor Responsibilities
Supervisors must do the following regarding hot work:
 Ensure Contractors working in their respective work areas have a valid Form 18:
Hot Work Permit and are complying with the Stuart Olson safety policies
 Determine the combustible materials, hazardous areas, and hazardous
atmospheres present or likely to be present in the work location
 Ensure that combustibles are protected from ignition by taking the following
measures:
o Move the hot work to a location free from dangerous combustibles
o If the hot work cannot be moved, move the combustibles to a safe
distance from the work or shield them adequately against ignition
o Schedule all hot work so that any operation that might expose
combustibles to ignition is not done during hot work
 Ensure that a person performing hot work secures approval that conditions are
safe before performing any hot work
 Determine that appropriate fire protection and fire extinguishing equipment are
properly located at the site
 Designate a trained watcher or trained watchers to observe when necessary (fire
watch)
 Inspect the work area to determine it is safe regarding fire, verify all precaution
checklist items, and sign Form 18: Hot Work Permit before hot work is authorized

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 9
  As welding consumes oxygen at a very high rate, the supervisor is to be
conscious of a potential oxygen deficient atmosphere
 Ensure that the person performing the hot work and the person performing the
fire watch understand the precautions necessary for hot work and the permit
procedures required for it
Worker Responsibilities
A worker performing hot work must do the following:
 Be trained in making a work area safe for hot work
 Understand how to make a work area fire safe before obtaining a hot work permit
from the Supervisor
 Obtain approval from the Supervisor before starting any hot work operations
 Obtain Form 18: Hot work permit before starting any hot work operations
 Make the work area fire safe
 Eliminate explosive hazards by purging pipes, vessels, etc. with air or inert gas
 Employ venting or continuous ventilation, where necessary
 Ensure hot work equipment is in good repair and safe for use
 Wear all the personal protection equipment (PPE) required for hot work
 Perform only hot work he/she is qualified to perform
 Conduct hot work only in the area specified by Form 18: Hot work permit
 Conduct hot work only where conditions are safe
 Handle the equipment safely and use it in a way that does not endanger lives
and property
 Continue to do hot work only as long as the conditions do not change from those
under which approval for hot work was granted
 Cease hot work if conditions become unsafe
 Cease hot work during a work site emergency
Responsibilities of the fire watch
It is the responsibility of the fire watch to do the following:
 Be trained in the use of fire extinguishing equipment
 Have appropriate fire extinguishing equipment ready for use
 Watch for fires in all exposed areas
 Sound the alarm immediately if there is a possibility that a fire is beyond the
firefighting capacity of the firefighting equipment available
 Wear all the required PPE
 Monitor the hot work zone for a minimum of 30 minutes, or as per project
requirements, after completion of the hot work. Monitor hot work area for 2 hours
after job completion when the subject of insurance is substantially of work frame
construction. When all is well, sign the permit
Reference: Section 18.31: Safe Work Practice - Hot Work Permit

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 14 Fire Prevention Page 10
 Section 15. Claims Management
15.1 Claims Management Policy ....................................................... 15-2
15.2 Definitions ................................................................................... 15-3
15.3 Responsibilities .......................................................................... 15-5
15.4 Procedures ................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.1 Medical Aid Reporting ................................................................. 15-7
15.4.2 First Aid Reporting ....................................................................... 15-7
15.4.3 Communicating with the Worker on Leave ................................ 15-8
15.4.4 Modified Work Program ............................................................... 15-9

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 1
 15.1 Claims Management Policy

Date Issued: January 2, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #:0
Authorization: Stuart Olson Construction Ltd.
POLICY
Stuart Olson is committed to providing and maintaining a safe and healthy environment for our
employees, subcontractors, clients and members of the general public. Our commitment extends
to the continuous improvement of injury prevention and disability management systems in the
unfortunate event of a workplace incident.
The disability management program will provide work opportunities for those who have sustained
disabling injuries / illness as soon as their medical condition will permit without compromising the
health and safety of anyone.
Our disability management process combines proactive and preventative initiatives, early illness
intervention, medical and rehabilitation management, return to work planning and access to a
network of specialty service providers in a coordinated manner to optimize the likelihood of
success and make the best use of available resources.
PURPOSE
 To promote a culture of accident and illness prevention and accountability
 To ensure the optimum conditions for supporting early intervention, expedient return to
work and accommodation.
 To minimize the costs associated with illness, WCB premiums and disability
management.
SCOPE
The policy applies to all employees of Stuart Olson, including support staff, administration, the
executive groups and other individuals as deemed by the jurisdictional board to be in an
employment relationship with the organization.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 2
 15.2 Definitions

Return to Work / Stay at Work

 A proactive, comprehensive program for employees with injuries / illness. It is a
collaborative process designed to progressively return an employee to full work
capacity following any medically related incident / condition. The program utilizes a
holistic case management approach and focuses on identifying an employee’s
current abilities and matching these abilities to intermediary transitional assignments.

Site Management
 Any Foreman, General Foreman, Supervisor, Superintendent or Project Manager
who is directly responsible for the injured worker.
WCB
 A no fault disability insurance system designed to protect workers and employers
from the full impact of workplace injuries and illness.
 Solely funded by employers, the board provides benefits for lost wages, health
care treatments, and other related costs to an injured worker.
WCB Employers Handbook
 An information booklet that is distributed by the WCB informing employers of their
rights and responsibilities pertaining to WCB policies and procedures.
WCB Workers Handbook
 An information booklet that is distributed by the WCB informing workers of their
rights and responsibilities pertaining to WCB.
WCB/Employers Report
 Report submitted to the WCB advising them of a workplace injury or illness
specific to a worker.
WCB/Workers Report
 Report submitted to WCB by the worker advising them of a workplace injury or
illness.
Modified Duties (AKA Light Duties, Sedentary Duties, Restricted Work)
 Modified work helps an injured worker return to work while recovering and
provides the opportunity to contribute to the workplace.
 Temporary modified work includes any changes to regular job duties, as a result
of an injury.
CLAIMS INVESTIGATIONS
 When conducting an injury investigation, it is not only important to determine the
cause(s) or mechanism of injury but also to determine if there:
• Is a pre-existing condition which would pre-dispose the worker to injury?
• Were any witnesses to the incident (obtain names and statements)

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 3
 • Was any third party involvement (determine extent of involvement), and
• Are any doubts or concerns regarding the legitimacy of the injury?
• When there is doubt, it is important to gather all 100% shift start and
end cards and witness statements pertinent to the claim.

OCCUPATIONAL INJURY SERVICE (OIS)

 OIS is an early intervention service in Alberta consisting of medical and physical
therapy clinics that provide timely and appropriate medical care as well as
expedited diagnostic testing such as MRI’s, CT scans & specialty consultations.
The physicians associated with these clinics have agreed to give priority to injured
workers within participating companies.
 Our workers will have timely access to a facility staffed by physicians who are
experienced in the assessment, treatment, and rehabilitation of occupational
injuries. Our workers will become educated on future prevention, injury
management and return to work planning. Treating physicians are familiar with our
work environment as well as modified work opportunities and thus will facilitate an
open flow of communication between all parties.
 This service will eliminate long waiting periods in medi centers and emergency
rooms. This is not a walk in service, an appointment is required. Designated
clinics are equipped to handle issues such as musculoskeletal injuries, injuries
requiring sutures, treatment of burns, fractures as well as foreign body removals.
These clinics are not equipped to handle severe medical life threatening
emergencies.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 4
 15.3 Responsibilities

Senior Management
• Review of incidents.
• Review of appeals
Site Management
• Completes Illness/Injury Report and sends to Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration
(in the absence of HS&E site personnel)
• Notifies the Regional Safety Manager.
• Assist the onsite HS&E personnel with incident investigation
• Assigns appropriate duties as per the work restrictions and prepares and offers
modified work program to the employee.
• Provides the worker with the WCB Worker’s Report of Injury.
• Reporting all modified work cases to the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration,
including the date when the modified work is no longer needed and the worker
has returned to full duties.
• Advise the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration of all medical assessments and
amendments to the modified work offer.

Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration (also referred to as Injury Management

Coordinator)
• Submit WCB Employer‘s Report of injury or occupational disease.
• Keeps Regional Safety Manager, updated on status of all WCB claims.
• Forwards copy of modified work offer to WCB.
• Keeps WCB apprised of worker’s status, including return to regular work date.
• Coordinates pending diagnostics with site personnel.
• Appeals decisions where applicable, including work-relatedness, and cost relief
application.
• Monitors WCB’s case management of worker.
• Coordinates a return to work date and modified duties with the Regional Safety
Manager and/or site management, for a worker requiring modified work after
missing time from work, if available.
• Inform WCB of the modified work offer or the return to regular duties.
Site Safety Coordinator
• Transport injured worker to medical treatment.
• Complete the Illness and Injury report.
• Facilitates the development of modified work plan
• Complete the modified work offer.
• Conduct incident investigation.
• Maintain communication with the worker, site management and the Mgr. Safety &
WCB Administration.
• Provides guidance to front line supervision.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 5
 Regional Safety Manager
• Monitors WCB case management and reports to the senior management.
• Assists in coordination of modified work if modified work is not available directly
on site.
• Reviews all appeal files prior to submittal
Worker
• Complete the Workers Report of Injury and fax it to the WCB.
• Regularly report to the site management on the progress of rehabilitation, and
provide copies of the medical reports.
• Inform site management of any issues or concerns.
• Ensure compliance with assigned modified work duties and conditions.
• Obtain a medical clearance when ready to return to regular duties.
• Report to the WCB immediately upon returning to work and on resumption of
regular duties.
• Schedule any medical treatment appointments or physiotherapy so as not to
interfere with the daily work schedule, whenever possible. If it must be during
work hours, the appointment should be made as early or as late in the day as
possible, to minimize the time away from work.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 6
 15.4 Procedures

15.4.1 Medical Aid Reporting

1. A worker requiring medical treatment will inform site management immediately.

2. Prior to the workers’ departure, the worker, together with the site safety
coordinator or site management advisor will complete page 2 of the Illness/ Injury
Report Form to include a list of available onsite modified work opportunities
suitable to the anticipated restrictions to be approved by the physician. (When in
doubt regarding anticipated work restrictions, error on the side of caution and
provide sedentary level tasks). Ensure the worker signs the document authorizing
the release of medical information. The worker must be directed to provide this
form to the health care provider.
3. The worker will be accompanied by site management or designate while leaving
the site to attend to a health care provider. The site safety coordinator or a
company designate will transport the worker to the nearest medical facility. OIS is
the provider of choice; use Medi clinics only when OIS is unavailable. Provide
page 2 of the Illness/ Injury report to the worker for presentation to the physician.
4. Site management will notify senior management within 15 minutes of the report of
injury.
5. The site safety coordinator or site management will notify the Regional Safety
Manager of the incident within 15 minutes of incident notification.
6. Prior to departure from the medical services facility, the site safety coordinator or
site management will ensure that all pertinent documentation has been provided.
(Ensure collection of the WCB physicians invoice & completed Illness/Injury
report). In the event that a physician requests compensation, the company
designate will compensate the physician and submit the receipt for
reimbursement.
7. Where the physician deems the injured worker capable of returning to work, the
worker will return to the site the same day, if possible. If a worker cannot return to
site on the same day, the worker’s direct supervisor (site management) will be
responsible to contact the worker prior to the start of the next scheduled shift to
discuss commencement of modified work. A worker who is cleared by a physician
to return to the work the same day, and fails to do so, will be contacted by site
management immediately and could be subject to disciplinary action.
8. Employees eligible to accept modified work duties must return all forms to the site
safety coordinator / site management.
9. The site safety coordinator in conjunction with the worker and site management
will complete the Offer of Modified Work Form and have the worker sign off on the
agreement. If the worker refuses the offer, record the reasons for not participating
and have the employee sign, even if the offer has been refused.
10. If there is any doubt regarding responsibility for the claim, notify the Mgr. Safety &
WCB Administration immediately. All supporting documents should be forwarded
to the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration.
11. Site Management will follow up with the Regional Safety Manager, if required.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 7
 13. The Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator will complete the WCB Employers Report
and submit to the WCB within 72 hours of report of injury.
14. The site safety coordinator/site management will maintain communication with the
worker and the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration for any changes to the worker’s
medical condition, pending diagnostics, and any issues of non-compliance.
15. A letter of clearance supporting fitness for regular duties must be validated prior to
the worker being eligible to resume regular work duties.
16. When a clearance has been provided, the site safety coordinator/site
management will submit to the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration who will
communicate with the WCB to deactivate the claim.
15.4.2 First Aid Reporting
1. A worker requiring first aid treatment will notify the site safety coordinator or site
management.
2. The worker will be escorted to the onsite treatment center or provided first aid.
3. The site safety coordinator/site management will complete the first aid report and
submit to the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator within 24 hours of injury
notification.
4. If restrictions are assigned by the onsite medical facility, the illness / injury report
and a modified work offer must be completed and submitted to the Mgr. Safety &
WCB Administrator within 12 hours of incident notification.
15.4.3 Communicating with the Worker on Leave

One of the most important ingredients in the successful management of injury and
illness cases is early and sustained contact with the employee by the manager
during the leave. This contact allows the employee to stay connected to the
workplace and enables the manager to make sure that the employee is getting
needed support and assist if there are problems.
 The Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration or a designated alternate, will initiate
contact with the injured worker as soon as is reasonable, given the individual
situation. This could be as soon as the following day, but no later than three
days following the injury.
 Contact will be handled in a sensitive manner and in the form best for all
parties involved.
 After initial contact has been made, the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration will
maintain weekly contact with the injured worker until a return to work date has
been established.
 Site Management / site safety advisor will encourage the worker on a biweekly
basis to stay connected to work through participation in tool box meetings,
committee meetings, training and/or special events until return to work is
possible.
 With the consent of the injured worker co-workers will be encouraged to stay
connected and provide support to the employee throughout the employee's
absence.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 8
 15.4.4 Modified Work Program

The modified work program provides alternative work duties for workers who are injured
while at work. The intent is to provide for meaningful work opportunities during the
rehabilitation process until a worker is able to resume regular work duties.
The modified work program benefits the worker by:
 Creating a sense of attachment with their co-workers, giving them a feeling of
value, purpose and self confidence
 Avoiding the negative effects of long-term absences
 Minimizing disruption to the worker’s normal routine
The employer benefits from the modified work program through:
 Reduced costs associated with training a replacement worker
 Establishing good employee/employer relations
 Reducing the number and cost of time-loss injuries
Modified work can include changes in:
• Tasks or functions
• Workload (e.g. hours or schedules)
• Environment or work area
• Equipment
Modified work needs to be:
• Achievable – Does it meet the workers current functional abilities?
• Safe – your modified work plan should not endanger their recovery or safety or
the safety of others.
• Productive – your worker’s duties should be meaningful to the organization.
Under the terms of the modified work program:
1. The company will make every reasonable effort to provide suitable, temporary
work for an injured worker.
2. Only suitable modified work compliant with the worker’s restrictions and
abilities will be offered.
3. The company will comply with all guidelines of the WCB Act and Policies to
ensure fairness, compliance and consistency.
4. Immediately (1 day) following placement in a modified work program, the Mgr.
Safety & WCB Administration will contact Site Management & the injured
worker. Communication with all parties will continue twice per week for the
initial two weeks of placement or until the injured worker has successful
integrated into the program. Contact thereafter will continue on a weekly basis
for the duration of the program

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 9
 5. The company will encourage the worker to return to regular duties as soon as
practical.
6. A qualified health care worker must provide a medical clearance indicating
that the worker is fit for regular work prior to the workers’ return to regular
work.
7. Once a medical clearance has been provided, Site Management will fax it to
the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administration who will inform WCB and deactivate
the claim.
References: Form 25: Illness or Injury Report
Form 28: Modified Work Program Offer
Form 12: First Aid Report

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 10
 INJURY/ILLNESS OCCURS

Site management/site safety coordinator will complete the Illness/Injury report

Injury. Transport worker to medical facility & present physician with
Illness/Injury report. Complete modified work offer. Fax all documentation to
the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator at
(780-465-2246) or e-mail holly.connolly@stuartolson.com

Site management will notify senior management within 15 minutes of

notification. Site safety coordinator will notify the Regional Safety
Manager, within 15 minutes of notification.

Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator will complete the Employers Report and submit it to
WCB within 72 hours of the workers report of injury.

Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator will maintain communication with WCB,
Site Management, worker and the Regional Safety Manager for the duration
of the claim.

When site receives medical clearance or progress reports from the worker,
they are to be faxed to the Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator. A worker
will not return to full duties without a medical clearance.

Mgr. Safety & WCB Administrator will notify WCB, site management and
Regional Safety Manager, of the workers return to regular duties.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 15 Claims Management Page 11
 Section 16 Confined Space
16.1 Confined Space Policy ............................................................... 16-2
16.2 Confined Space Identification ................................................... 16-3
16.3 Definitions ................................................................................... 16-4
16.4 Hazards of Confined Space ....................................................... 16-6
16.4.1 Oxygen Deficiency ....................................................................... 16-6
16.4.2 Oxygen Enrichment ..................................................................... 16-6
16.4.3 Fire and Explosion ....................................................................... 16-6
16.4.4 Toxic Substances......................................................................... 16-6
16.4.5 Materials Collapse and Falling Objects ...................................... 16-6
16.4.6 Mechanical Equipment ................................................................ 16-7
16.4.7 Electrical Shock ........................................................................... 16-7
16.4.8 Visibility ........................................................................................ 16-7
16.4.9 Temperature Extremes ................................................................ 16-7
16.4.10 Noise ............................................................................................. 16-7
16.5 Training of Workers.................................................................... 16-8
16.6 Means of Isolating the Confined Space .................................... 16-9
16.7 Ventilation of Confined Spaces ............................................... 16-10
16.8 Testing ...................................................................................... 16-11
16.9. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ................................... 16-12
16.10 Pre-job Safety Meeting ........................................................... 16-13
16.11 Confined Space Entry Permit ................................................ 16-14
16.12 Rescue Procedures and Equipment ..................................... 16-15
16.13 Post Entry Procedures ........................................................... 16-16

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 1
 16.1 Confined Space Policy

Date Issued: September 1, 2012

Date of Revision: N/A
Revision #: 0
Authorization: Stuart Olson
This policy governs the entry of confined spaces on Stuart Olson Construction projects.
All Stuart Olson employees and/or employees of trade contractor firms shall use it unless they
have approved procedures, which provide equal or better protection for their workers. Each
supervisor is responsible for ensuring that all employees reporting to him are familiar with and
work within the requirements of the policy at all times.
This Code of Practice, or procedure, is intended as a supplement to existing provincial
legislation.
Note: All confined spaces are to be treated as hazardous confined spaces until determined
otherwise.

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 2
 16.2 Confined Space Identification

Confined space identification can be defined as an enclosed or partially enclosed space having
restricted access and egress and which, due to its design, construction, location, atmosphere,
the materials or substances in it or other conditions, is or may become hazardous to a worker
entering it or does not have an easy means of escape for or rescue of a worker entering it.
Some confined spaces are: tanks, diked areas, tunnels, silos, digesters, sewers, storage bins,
barges, shafts, hoppers, holds of ships, process vessels, pits, underground utility vaults,
cisterns, vats, boilers, ducts, manholes, stacks, pipelines, steam condensers, trenches and
excavations, bunkers, pumping or lift stations, equipment housings.
It is impossible to list each and every confined space, therefore use Form 69: Confined space
identification to determine if the work area is a confined space. The following rules apply to
confined spaces:
 they have few ways in or out
 they are difficult to get in or out of
 they are not intended for human occupancy
 they contain, or may develop, a hazardous atmosphere
 they contain other safety or health hazards
NOTE: All of these conditions do not have to present to constitute a confined space. Any
one or combination of criteria can result in the need for a confined space plan.
Reference Form 69: Confined Space Identification

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 3
 16.3 Definitions

Air Contaminants - Substances in the air that may be harmful to health. Five major types are
dusts, mists, and fumes, gases and vapours
Blank - A solid plate installed through the cross-section of a pipe, usually at a flanged
connection
Blind - A blank installed at the end of a pipe or nozzle that has been physically disconnected
from a piping system
Bonding - Electrically connecting the elements or an installation to each other so that
differences in electrical potential between the elements are minimized
Competent Tester - A person capable of safely and accurately testing confined space
atmosphere and interpreting test results
Confined Space - A space which, because of its construction, location, contents, or work
activity therein:
a) Provides limited means of entry or exit
b) Has poor natural ventilation
c) Is not designated or intended for human occupancy
d) Contains or may develop a hazardous atmosphere
e) May require the use of protective equipment including the capability for
immediate rescue of a worker who enters
Enclosed Space - Any enclosed area, other than a confined space, in which ordinary job
hazards may be intensified
Hazardous Atmosphere - Any atmosphere that is oxygen-deficient or that contains a toxic or
disease-producing contaminant. The atmosphere may or may not be IDLH (Immediately
Dangerous to Life and Health). The levels of an air contaminant are greater than the
permissible concentration
Hot Work - Any work which produces a source of ignition
IDLH (Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health) - Level of exposure to an air contaminant
which would cause a person without respiratory protection to be fatally injured or would cause
irreversible and incapacitating effects on that person's health
Isolation - The separation of a confined space from sources of danger
LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) - The concentration of a gas, vapour or dust below which a flame
does not occur on contact with a source of ignition. For gases and vapours, this is expressed
as a percentage in air by volume. For dust, this is expressed as weight of dust per volume of air
Lockout - A specific set of procedures for ensuring that a machine or process shut down for
maintenance or repair or other reasons is secured against accidental start-up or movement of
any part for the duration of the shutdown
Oxygen-Deficient Atmosphere - An atmosphere where the oxygen content is less than 18%

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 4
 Oxygen-Enriched Atmosphere - An atmosphere where the oxygen content is more than
23.5%
Parts Per Million (PPM) - Expression of the concentration of a contaminant in a medium.
10,000 ppm equals 1%
Permissible Concentration (PC) - The concentration of an airborne substance to which a
worker is permitted to be exposed
Purging - Displacement of an atmosphere in a confined space by a fluid or gas.
Respirable (Compressed) Air - Compressed breathing air that meets the requirements of CSA
Standard Can #Z180.1 "Compressed Breathing Air"
STEL (Short Term Exposure Limit) - the maximum permissible concentration of a material,
generally expressed in ppm in air, for a defined short period of time (typically 5 or 15 minutes,
depending upon the country). This "concentration" is generally a time-weighted average over
the period of exposure. These values, which may differ from country to country, are often
backed up by regulation and therefore may be legally enforceable
Upper Explosive Limit (UEL) - The concentration of a gas or vapour above which a flame does
not occur on contact with a source of ignition. Also called the Upper Flammable Limit (UFL)
Watch Person - A person trained in emergency procedures and assigned to remain
immediately outside a confined space and in communication with persons inside

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 5
 16.4 Hazards of Confined Space

16.4.1 Oxygen Deficiency

Normal air contains about 21% oxygen. Air is considered oxygen deficient at levels
below 18%. Exposure to levels between 14% and 17% is likely to result in impaired
judgment, euphoria and fatigue. Unconsciousness and death will occur in minutes
at levels below 6%. Deficiency may result from:
 oxygen consumption due to rust formation, bacterial action,
combustion or absorption; and,
 oxygen displacement by other gases
16.4.2 Oxygen Enrichment

Oxygen-enriched atmospheres increase the flammability of materials. Enrichment

can be caused by improper isolation of oxygen lines, accidental ventilation of the
space with oxygen instead of air or leaks from welding equipment.
16.4.3 Fire and Explosion

Fire or explosion can occur when a source of ignition makes contact with a
flammable material in the air. Ignition sources include flames; welding arcs, hot
surfaces and sparks from metal impact, motors or static electricity. Flammable
materials include gases and vapours that are between their upper and lower
explosive limits and concentration of dust above the lower explosive limit.
16.4.4 Toxic Substances

Hazardous atmospheres may result from the presence of toxic air contaminants that
can cause adverse health effects if inhaled by workers. Safe limits or exposure
(Permissible Concentrations) are provided for many substances by regulations.
These toxic substances can be produced from such sources as:
 the process that normally occurs in the confined space
 work activity in the confined space
 waste materials in the confined space
 sources outside the confined space
16.4.5 Materials Collapse and Falling Objects

Granular materials such as sand, cement and other normally loose materials (ice)
can form bridges that can collapse if jarred. There may be a danger of being struck
by falling objects, particularly where other workers or an access-way are located
above a worker.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 6
 16.4.6 Mechanical Equipment

Equipment such as agitators, mixers, blenders, pumps or augers can be dangerous.

Even when the power is shut off and locked-out, unsecured equipment has the
potential to move if stood upon or used as a brace for leverage. Maintenance
procedures being completed on equipment also have the potential to create an
imbalance, resulting in equipment movement.
16.4.7 Electrical Shock

Electrical shock can result from defective cords, welding cables or other electrical
equipment. Work done in confined spaces constructed of metal or in wet conditions
is particularly dangerous.
16.4.8 Visibility

Poor visibility may result from work such as sandblasting, steam cleaning, spray
painting or welding. It increases the risks of incidents and reduces the ability of a
standby person to see a worker in distress.
16.4.9 Temperature Extremes

Equipment such as boilers and reactor vessels may require special precautions.
16.4.10 Noise

Noise produced in confined spaces can be particularly harmful because of

reverberation from nearby walls. It can also interfere with communication with
standby personnel. Noise from a source inside a small confined space will be four
to ten times greater (6 to 10 decibels) than if the source is outside.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 7
 16.5 Training of Workers

Any worker who works in a confined space must be:

 Trained in confined space entry
 Trained in confined space rescue
 Informed of:
 the hazards that may be encountered
 precautionary measures required
 rescue methods needed in case of an emergency
 Familiar with the confined space policy and procedures
 Aware of the hazards that may be encountered
 Familiar with fire and accident prevention requirements and with first-aid measures

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 8
 16.6 Means of Isolating the Confined Space

Before a confined space is entered, it shall be isolated by:

 blinding or blanking
 double blocking and bleeding or other equally effective means to ensure that no
hazardous agents will be introduced to the confined space
Piping that has been blanked or blinded will be marked to indicate that a blank or blind has been
installed.
All power-driven internal equipment (i.e. agitators) and any power sources shall be locked in the
OFF position at the point of supply, tested to ensure that the power source is de-energized and
tagged.
It may be necessary to physically restrain some machinery inside the confined space to prevent
injury.
Lockout must comply with Section 18.37: Safe Work Practice - Lock Out.
All personnel who will enter a confined space must personally check to ensure that adequate
isolation methods have been used. They must not take someone else's word for it.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 9
 16.7 Ventilation of Confined Spaces

Before any work commences in a confined space, consideration must be given to ventilation.
This may be natural through clean-out doors, nozzles, and other openings or by mechanical
means. The openings should never be closed or the mechanical ventilators shut down while
work is going on inside as a hazardous atmosphere may develop from the work.
Pneumatic air-movers are the preferred method of mechanical ventilation and electric fans are
the next common method, but the fans must be explosion proof if there is any chance of
flammable or combustible substances in the space.
Care must be taken that exhaust air is not introduced into another confined space where other
work is going on.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 10
 16.8 Testing

Testing must be completed regardless of obvious natural or mechanical ventilation within the
confined space.
For most vessels, using portable instruments that test for combustible gases and oxygen
content will be sufficient, but more specific tests may have to be made in some areas. Check
with the Safety Department to ensure you are testing for the right contaminant.
All testing must be done from outside the confined space unless a Self Contained Breathing
Apparatus (S.C.B.A.) or Supplied Air Breathing Apparatus (S.A.B.A.) is worn by the tester.
For construction purposes the following values MUST be used:
Oxygen 02 more than 19.5% and less than 23%
Carbon Monoxide CO 25 ppm (8 hour exposure limit)
Lower Explosive Limit L.E.L. 10%
Hydrogen Sulphide H2S 10 ppm (8 hour exposure limit)
Ongoing tests will be conducted and the applicable Chemical Hazards Regulations will
determine the Permissible Concentrations (PC). Atmospheric hazards can develop while work
is being conducted in the confined space so testing must be an ongoing process.
Any person who tests the confined space must be trained in the use of the tester and the
interpretation of the test results.
NOTE: Testing must be done by the Contractor entering the confined space.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 11
 16.9. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Appropriate protection shall be worn to meet the job requirements.

Where concentration of combustibles is clearly below 0% of the lower explosive limit (LEL) entry
into a confined space is allowed provided the appropriate respiratory and skin protective devices
are used.
Proper respiratory protection may range from simple chemical cartridge respirators to self-
contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied-air breathing apparatus (SABA). Applicable
provincial legislation must be followed when using respiratory protective equipment.
Personal or portable monitors may be required to warn workers of hazardous atmosphere.
A safety harness with a lifeline shall be used based on the current hazard classification.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 12
 16.10 Pre-job Safety Meeting

Prior to entry for work or testing, involved personnel are required to attend a pre-job safety
meeting. The meeting shall place emphasis on the following:
 Outline, scope and limitations of work to be performed.
 Hazards which may be encountered upon entry or while performing work in the
confined space:
o restricted movement
o use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
o alarm warnings
o rescue and entry procedures
o communication signals
o steps to be taken for safe entry
o review of safe work permit for "Confined Space Entry" in accordance with
provincial legislation
o personnel duties and responsibilities

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 13
 16.11 Confined Space Entry Permit

A work permit for "Confined Space Entry" shall be required for work to be performed in areas
designated as confined spaces as required by applicable provincial legislation.
The Senior On-Site Stuart Olson Representative is the only person who has the authority to
issue the required work permit. When completing the work permit the issuer shall:
1. Check off the requirements as they appear on the permit. Each item should be
read carefully and understood before checking.
2. Be specific in listing work limitations, and in outlining safety precautions to be
followed.
3. Verify that the work permit has clearly designated time limits.
4. Verify that safety precautions and procedures indicated have been fulfilled.
5. Verify that the workers understand the permit, and that all precautions are listed
and explained.
6. Have the receiver sign the permit, and instruct the person to have the permit
available at the job site.
7. Any extension of the permit must include the same requirements as issued
previously, and each work site-specific task requires a work permit. For
example, moving to another area will require issuance of another permit.
8. Determine the necessary atmospheric tests to be conducted and verify that the
individual who will perform the tests is thoroughly briefed on the specific hazards
of performing the test, and is knowledgeable about the properties and
characteristics of the substance being tested.
9. Witness the necessary gas tests.
10. Advise the receiver to shut down the job if any conditions change making the
safety of the task in doubt.
11. Advise the receiver that the permit must be returned upon completion of the
task, or at the end of the time stated on the permit, whichever comes first.
12. Verify that the "buddy" system is implemented for all confined space entries.
This requires one person doing the work or entering the restricted area, to be
accompanied, or backed up by another designated person outside of the
confined space equipped with safety equipment appropriate to the task.
13. New work permits are to be issued at the beginning of each workday or shift,
regardless of the stage of task completion.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 14
 16.12 Rescue Procedures and Equipment

If the tests of the atmosphere of the confined space indicate that it is hazardous, all of
the confined space work must be done with a qualified watch person on the outside of
the confined space. The watch person will tend the lifeline or radio and be in constant
communication with the workers inside. The standard for lifeline communication is the
fire fighters O.A.T.H. code, which is as follows:

Tugs Code Meaning Used For

1 O OK Everything is all right.

2 A Advance Going ahead, wearer will pull line, watcher lets

the line advance.
3 T Take-up
Backing up, retreating, or changing position.
Watcher keeps slack out of line.

4 H Help Emergency assistance is needed immediately.

If the signal is given from inside send in two
masked-up personnel. If the signal is given from
outside, those inside are to evacuate
immediately.

The responsibilities of the watch person include:

 Keep track of all entries and exits to the confined space.
 Maintain communication with workers in the confined space at all times.
 Remain on station at all times unless relieved by another qualified person.
 Perform a rescue when required.
 Have access to some means to summon additional help if needed.
Each confined space entry will require the planning and preparation of emergency
rescue activities prior to entry of the confined space. Some of these are:
 Communication and alarm equipment
 Alarm signals
 Number of rescue personnel, training needed and rescue equipment breathing
apparatus
 First aid equipment
 Firefighting equipment
This emergency plan will be in writing and shall be practiced prior to vessel entry.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 15
 16.13 Post Entry Procedures

Upon completion of the Confined Space Entry, the Senior On-site Stuart Olson Representative
shall verify that all daily work has been completed, all personnel are accounted for, and trade
contractors have completed all tasks and removed all blinds and locks.
A post entry meeting shall be held with all personnel to determine:
 If unexpected hazards were encountered
 If revisions to the guidelines, work methods, or safe work practices are required
in order to assist with pre-planning of the next entry

Reference: Safe Work Practice 18.12: Confined Space Entry

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 16 Confined Space Page 16
 Section 17 Environmental Protection
17.1 Environmental Protection Policy .............................................. 17-3
17.2 Site Specific Requirements ....................................................... 17-3
17.3.Notification ................................................................................. 17-5

HSE Manual, Revision #6 - June 2015

Section 17 Environmental Protection Program Page 1
 17.1 Environmental Protection Policy

Date Issued: November 7, 2003

Date of Revision: January 2, 2012
Revision #2
Authorization: Stuart Olson
Stuart Olson pledges to act in an environmentally responsible manner. We affirm our
commitment to protecting human health and the environment through regulatory compliance
and where practical and feasible we will reduce the environmental impact associated with our
construction operations. Stuart Olson will achieve this commitment through continual
improvement.

 Complying with all applicable environmental laws and regulations.

 Implementing systems for environmental protection and enhancement.
 Identifying and applying reasonable options to minimize the negative and
maximize the positive environmental impacts of our operations.
 Mitigating risks to the environment.
 Pursuing opportunities to continually improve our environmental performance.

NOTE: For additional information refer to Stuart Olson’s Environmental Protection

Program Manual

Arthur Atkinson
Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Stuart Olson Buildings Group Ltd.
June 1, 2015

HSE Manual, Revision #6 - June 2015

Section 17 Environmental Protection Program Page 3
 17.2 Site Specific Requirements
A Site-Specific Environmental Plan (SSEP) is required for all projects undertaken by SODCL.
The intent of the SSEP is to provide a consolidation of all applicable environmental requirements
for a specific project, including:
 Relevant components of the Environmental Protection Program Manual
 Relevant Environmental Practices
 Regulatory permit, approval or contractual environmental requirements specific to the
project; and
 Environmental requirements or obligations resulting from pre-construction assessments
and investigations.
Reference: Site Specific Environmental Plan (SSEP) - Environmental Protection Program
Manual, Appendix “F”.

Release Response

In the event of a spill or airborne release of a dangerous substance, refer to Environmental

Practice 001.
Reference: Environmental Practice EP001: Emergency Response and Reporting -
Environmental Protection Program Manual, Section 5
.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 - June 2015

Section 17 Environmental Protection Program Page 4
 17.3 Notification
According to WHMIS and provincial guidelines, a number of measures must be taken to meet the
legal requirements regarding the prevention of personal over-exposure to hazardous products
and contaminants in the workplace. This includes notifying the appropriate government authority
of any environmental contamination when required to do so.
24 Hour provincial emergency contact numbers:
 British Columbia 1-800-663-3456
 Alberta 1-800-222-6514
 Saskatchewan 1-800-667-7525
 Manitoba 204-944-4888
 Ontario 1-800-268-6060
 Yukon Territory 1-867-667-7244

NOTE: For additional information refer to the Environmental Protection Program Manual.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 - June 2015

Section 17 Environmental Protection Program Page 5
18. Safe Work Practices
18.1 Safe Work Practices .............................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.2 Hazard Levels......................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.3 Asbestos Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 18-7
18.4 Assured Grounding Program ............................................................................................................... 18-9
18.5 Boom Truck .......................................................................................................................................... 18-11
18.6 Chainsaw .............................................................................................................................................. 18-15
18.7 Cleaning Solvents................................................................................................................................ 18-17
18.8 Combustion Engines Indoors ............................................................................................................ 18-19
18.9 Compressed Air Tools ........................................................................................................................ 18-23
18.10 Compressed Gas Cylinders ................................................................................................................ 18-25
18.11 Concrete Grinding ............................................................................................................................... 18-27
18.12 Concrete Pump Trucks ....................................................................................................................... 18-29
18.13 Confined Space Entry ......................................................................................................................... 18-31
18.14 Coring ................................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.15 Critical Lifts .......................................................................................................................................... 18-35
18.16 Defective Tools .................................................................................................................................... 18-37
18.17 Demolition ............................................................................................................................................ 18-41
18.18 Explosive / Powder Actuated Tools ................................................................................................... 18-43
18.19 Fall Protection ...................................................................................................................................... 18-45
18.20 Fall Protection Equipment .................................................................................................................. 18-47
18.21 Fibreglass Insulation ........................................................................................................................... 18-53
18.22 Fire Protection and Prevention .......................................................................................................... 18-55
18.23 Flagging ................................................................................................................................................ 18-57
18.24 Forklifts ................................................................................................................................................. 18-59
18.25 Formwork and Falsework ................................................................................................................... 18-61
18.26 Grinding ................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18.27 Guardrails ............................................................................................................................................. 18-69
18.28 Hand Held Circular Saw ...................................................................................................................... 18-71
18.29 Hand Tools ........................................................................................................................................... 18-73
18.30 HEPA (high efficiency particulate air) Vacuums .............................................................................. 18-75
18.31 Hoisting ................................................................................................................................................ 18-77
18.32 Hot Work Permit................................................................................................................................... 18-79
18.33 Housekeeping ...................................................................................................................................... 18-81
18.34 Jackhammering ................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.35 Extension Ladders .............................................................................................................................. 18-85
18.36 Stepladders .......................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18.37 Lightening Action Protocol ................................................................................................................ 18-89
18.38 Lock-out................................................................................................................................................ 18-91
18.39 Materials Handling and Storage ......................................................................................................... 18-95
18.40 Overhead Power Lines ........................................................................................................................ 18-97
18.41 Pneumatic Tools .................................................................................................................................. 18-99
18.42 Power Blower – Gas Operated ......................................................................................................... 18-101
18.43 Power Lines and Underground Hazards ......................................................................................... 18-103
18.44 Power Tools ....................................................................................................................................... 18-105
18.45 Propane .............................................................................................................................................. 18-107
18.46 Respiratory Protective Equipment................................................................................................... 18-109
18.47 Retractable Knives ............................................................................................................................ 18-115
18.48 Rigging .............................................................................................................................................. 18-117
18.49 Safe Driving ........................................................................................................................................ 18-119

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page i
18.50 Scaffolds (metal and wood) ............................................................................................................. 18-121
18.51 Silica Exposure .................................................................................................................................. 18-123
18.52 Skid Steer ........................................................................................................................................... 18-125
18.53 Structural Steel Erection ................................................................................................................... 18-127
18.54 Swing Stages ..................................................................................................................................... 18-129
18.55 Table Saw ........................................................................................................................................... 18-131
18.56 Temporary Power .............................................................................................................................. 18-133
18.57 Tiger Torches ..................................................................................................................................... 18-135
18.58 Utility Locates .................................................................................................................................... 18-137
18.59 Wire Rope ........................................................................................................................................... 18-143
18.60 Office Ergonomics – Chair Height ................................................................................................... 18-145
18.61 Preventing Slips, Trips & Falls ......................................................................................................... 18-147
18.62 Safe Lifting Practices ........................................................................................................................ 18-149

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page ii
18.1 Safe Work Practice Guidelines

Safe work practices are guidelines established to help workers perform a task that may not
need a step-by-step procedure.
Stuart Olson strives to complete work safely, efficiently, and on time. To accomplish this, the
Company has developed specific safe work practices for common construction site activities.
To promote safe work practices, Stuart Olson will do the following:
 Put our safe work practices in writing
 Make safe work practices available to all workers by keeping a copy at each work site
 Provide safe equipment and material to work with
 Provide Management support for safe work practices
 Require that Supervisors enforce use of, and compliance with, these safe work practices
Note: The following safe work practices are for reference only. Safe work practices should be
site specific. Should any of the following activities be planned for a Company project, it is
encouraged that the proper procedure be developed and/or modified as necessary for the
specific situation.
In compiling these safe work practices, the following reference material was consulted:
 The regulating provincial authorities having jurisdiction regarding safety legislation
 Recognized safety procedures manuals
 Health hazard data books
 Worker input and contributions
All Supervisors are required to be familiar with safe work practices and procedures and
understand the different hazard levels as detailed in Section 18.2: Hazard Levels.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 3
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 4
18.2 Hazard Levels

Job hazards can be classified according to level of danger and assigned a letter that
corresponds to the danger level as detailed in Table 1: Job hazard levels:
Table 1: Job hazard levels
Hazard Danger level Danger type
class
Class A High A condition or practice with the potential for permanent
disability or loss of life and/or extensive property damage
Class B Medium A condition or practice with the potential for serious
injury/illness or non-disruptive property damage
Class C Low A condition or practice with potential for minor injury/illness
or non-disruptive property damage

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 5
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 6
18.3 Asbestos Safety

Division Safety Supervisors, Project Managers, and Project Superintendents are responsible for
the Asbestos program.
If any material is suspected of being asbestos, do not attempt to remove it.
If any material is suspected of being asbestos, do the following:
1. Leave it alone. (Do not attempt to remove it)
2. Contact the Supervisor immediately
3. Cordon off or isolate the area
Samples of any material suspected of being asbestos will be taken by a qualified person and
analyzed. If a material is determined to be asbestos, a qualified Contractor will be employed to
remove it and store it.
Note: Only qualified personnel will be used to remove and dispose of hazardous materials.
See Section 18.3: Safe Work Practice - Asbestos for more information.

Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Asbestos is the generic name for a group of naturally occurring minerals characterised by a
fibrous structure that includes the following minerals:
 Chrysotile (white asbestos)
 Crocidolite (bluish asbestos)
 Amosite (brown asbestos)
 Fibrous varieties of anthophyllite, tremolite and actinolite
In the past, asbestos has been used in electrical insulation, asbestos cement products, pipe
covering, floor tiling, drywall joint filler, roofing materials, and asphalt.
Asbestos may cause lung scarring (asbestosis), lung lining scarring (pleural scarring), cancer of
the lung lining (mesothelioma), and/or lung cancer. The time lapse before disease becomes
evident may be 20-40 years. Workers who smoke have a 10-15 times greater risk of lung
cancer from asbestos exposure than workers who do not smoke.
A good measure of the hazard posed by asbestos is its friability, which is the ease with which it
can be crumbled or pulverized. Products with “bound” asbestos do not pose a hazard unless
they are cut, sawn, ground, or sanded.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 7
Asbestos Safe Work Practices

These safe work practices should be followed regarding asbestos:

 Before beginning work on an existing structure suspected of containing a hazardous
material such as asbestos, an assessment and written report by professional consultants
trained in the identification and treatment of hazardous materials must be obtained for
the site
 The Company must contract out the abatement and/or removal of hazardous materials
such as asbestos to qualified contractors
Note: The Company will not use its workers to remove hazardous materials.
 Before Company workers enter parts of buildings that contained hazardous materials, a
written clearance must be obtained from the consultant monitoring the hazardous
material removal
 If workers discover a material they believe to be asbestos, they must cease work
immediately, leave the area, and notify their Supervisor
 Upon notification of the possible presence of a hazardous material, the Supervisor must
take a number of actions, including:
o Alerting workers to the presence of the material
o Removing workers from the environment where exposure may occur
o Contact Management to arrange inspection and removal of suspect material by
qualified professionals
 Management must arrange for asbestos removal professionals to inspect the hazard and
provide written instructions as to the required abatement and safe work practices
 Workers who may be required to work near asbestos must be provided with written
procedures and training. Appropriate protective clothing and appropriate protective
equipment must be provided.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 8
18.4 Assured Grounding Program

NOTE: This Assured Grounding Program may only be used in jurisdictions where acceptance
of such programs is permissible. Some jurisdictions may not allow the implementation of such
programs; as such the use of Ground Fault Circuit Interceptors (GFCI’s) is the only acceptable
means.
As an alternative to using ground fault circuit interrupters for portable equipment as required by
provincial legislation, a Contractor must use the Assured Grounding Program. This program is
meant to assure proper installation, maintenance, inspection, and testing of the portable
electrical equipment on a construction site. In order to use this Assured Grounding Program,
each Project must have a variance letter from the appropriate Safety Authority.
The “portable electrical equipment” referred to in this program includes temporary power
distribution panels, extension cords, and power tools used on a 120 volt system, 20 amps or
less, and not connected to a permanent electrical system.
Training
Stuart Olson employees and trade contractor workers using the Assured Grounding Program
must be orientated about this program. The orientation must include an explanation of the
following:
 Daily visual inspections of portable electrical equipment
 Testing frequency of portable electrical equipment
 Testing procedures of portable electrical equipment
 Testing identification and colour coding
Workers
Workers must visually inspect portable electrical equipment before each shift. They must
inspect for external defects, such as deformed or missing ground pins and insulation damage
that might indicate internal damage. Cords or equipment found to be damaged must not be
used and must be brought to the Supervisor.
Designated person
The Stuart Olson Superintendent has the overall responsibility for ensuring the provisions of this
program are followed and all portable electrical equipment is inspected and tested. The
Superintendent may inspect the equipment personally or appoint a designated person. Each
employer using the Assured Grounding Program must designate a responsible person who is
knowledgeable about all components of the program and able to answer questions regarding
program testing and procedures.
Visual inspection
All portable electrical equipment and extension cords must be inspected before each shift by the
person who will be using it. The inspection must include attention to the following:
 Missing ground pins on power tools or electrical cords
 Insulation damage (no electrical tape splicing)
 Indications of possible internal damage
 Broken, cracked, or burned receptacles

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 9
 Testing Frequency
Testing is required at the following times:
 Before first use.
 Before equipment or a cord is returned to service after repairs.
 After any incident in which equipment can be reasonably be suspected of being
damaged (for example, a cord being run over).
 Intervals not to exceed quarterly (January to March, April to June, July to September,
October to December). During the last week of each quarter, all equipment and cords
must be inspected and new colour coding tape applied. On the first day of the new
quarter, all equipment cords must have the new colour coding.
Testing Procedure
The following testing procedure must be followed:
1. All equipment grounding conductors must be tested for continuity, and must be
electrically continuous.
2. The equipment grounding conductor must be connected to its proper terminal.
3. All receptacles mounted on portable power distribution panel must be inspected and
tested.
4. On power cords, a 3 light ground testing device must be used to check for proper
function and correct polarity.
5. An ohmmeter or continuity tester must be used on hand-held electrical power tools to
check the continuity between the ground pin and equipment casing.
Testing Identification/Colour Coding
All cord sets and power tools must have a colour-coded taped band made from coloured
electrical tape approximately 4 inches from the male plug that indicates when it was tested.
The colour coding must be as follows:
Colour coding
Tape Colour Dates
Red January-March
White April-June
Blue July-September
Green October-December
Double Insulated Tools
Double insulated equipment does not have a ground connection. It must be visually inspected
for cord damage and receive colour coding.
Signage
Signage must be posted at each Project to indicate the Project is using an Assured Grounding
Program. The signage can be ordered through the Stuart Olson Shop.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 10
18.5 Boom Truck
Safe Work Practice
Hazard ranking: A

A boom truck is a vehicle that has a truck body and a remote articulating arm. It is used to lift
objects that do not require a crane.
Boom Truck Safe Work Practices
Safe operation of boom trucks is dependent on the operator, the mechanical condition of the
unit, and the loads being lifted.
For safe operation of a boom truck, all operating regulations, manufacturer recommendations,
maximum load lift capacities, and safe work procedures must be observed.
Follow these safe work procedures when working with a boom truck:
Equipment Check Procedures
Complete a visual check of the entire boom truck and document the results.
4. Look for cracks, deformity (damage), pools of leaking fluids, or outrigger creep
5. Check that the tires are properly inflated
6. Check the engine oil, radiator coolant, and hydraulic reservoir levels
7. Check the brake lights, flashers, turn signals, headlights, horn, and windshield wipers for
proper operation
8. Extend the outriggers and operate the boom through two complete cycles to check the
operation of the controls and the hydraulic cylinders
9. Check the load line cable in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and
lubricate where called for
Equipment Familiarization Practices
A boom truck operator should be thoroughly familiar with a number of aspects of the equipment:
 Location and operation of the controls
 Correct operating procedure
 Maximum lifting capacities
 Proper rigging practices
 Safety precautions applicable to the unit before operating it
 Emergency procedures to be followed in case of equipment failure or incident
 Location of emergency procedures
 Last entries in the equipment logbook
Warning: Lift capacities are greatly reduced if the boom truck is not level.
Note: Maximum loads shown on the boom truck capacity chart are based on a level position of
the machine/unit.
Positioning Practices
Always seek the best possible position when parking the boom truck for work:

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 11
  An ideal job site parking location is firm, level, dry ground or thick pavement that will not
sag on a hot day
 Avoid uneven terrain, rocky terrain, muddy terrain, steep grades, or locations with
unnecessary overhead obstructions such as structures or power lines
 If the unit must be operated on a slope, use outrigger pads or timbers to level the truck
 If the truck must be positioned in an area that is not level, work from the rear of the truck
 If the truck must be used across an incline, always work with the boom on the uphill side
of the truck
 Set the truck parking brake securely before using the crane
Warning: Lift capacities are greatly reduced if the boom truck is not level.
Note: Maximum loads shown on the boom truck capacity chart are based on a level position of
the machine/unit.
Operation Practices
Do the following when operating a boom truck:
 Make sure all workers, particularly spotters and inexperienced workers, are instructed to
stand clear of the outriggers while they are being lowered
 Ensure that outriggers are down and on firm ground before using the lifting unit (to
ensure stability)
 Before operating the boom truck, consult the load chart to ensure that the unit has the
capacity for the loads to be lifted
 Before lifting a load, ensure that you make straight pulls
 Before lifting a load, ensure that the boom and load lines form a straight line to prevent
side pulls that can damage the boom and/or tip the unit over
 Do not allow people to ride on the hook or on loads
 Do not move loads over people
 Do not lift a load until all people are clear
 Do not allow the hook or load block to pull tight against the boom tip when lowering or
extending boom (this can cause the load line to break)
 Properly attach the load lines to the winch drum
 Make sure at least two wraps remain on the drum at all times
 Do not modify the machine or add attachments, unless they are manufacturer approved
 Keep the load close to the ground whenever possible
 Do not operate the crane during electrical storms or high wind conditions
 Do not perform any maintenance work on the unit unless it is immobilized or blocked up
in place and you are trained to do so

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 12
  Do not attempt service or repair while the crane is operating
 Do not disconnect hydraulic operating components when there is pressure in them
 Maintain at least a 3.05 m (10’) safety area between the crane tip and any obstructions
or power lines
 Ensure that maintenance and lubrication is done according to manufacturers
specifications
 Never reposition or move the unit when the boom is in a raised position
Completion of Work Procedure
After completion of the work, do the following:
 Return the boom to the road travel position
 Make sure that the load line hook is tied down so it cannot swing freely
 Retract the outriggers
 Return the engine throttle to the idle position, depress the clutch, disengage the power
take-off, and release the hand brake on the vehicle
 Remove and stow the wheel chocks
 Release the parking brake before moving the unit
 Bring the unit’s log book up-to-date by making the daily entry

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 13
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 14
18.6 Chainsaw
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Chainsaws can be electric powered or gasoline-powered and are mainly used to cut wood.
Workers must be trained in safe chainsaw use before using a chainsaw.
Chainsaw Safe Work
The following safe work practices must be followed when working with a chainsaw:
 Use the proper personal protective equipment (PPE) as set out by the manufacturer and
by provincial legislation
 Inspect the chainsaw before starting it or using it
 Ensure that the guide bar is tight and the chain fits snugly without binding
 Ensure that the chain brake is functioning properly and adequately stops the chain
 Make sure the chain is sharp, has the correct tension, and is adequately lubricated
 Ensure that the chain is clear of obstructions before starting the chainsaw
 Do not use a damaged chainsaw
 Understand the controls before starting a chainsaw
 If the chain continues to turn after the throttle is released, stop it and adjust the idle as
detailed in the owner’s manual
 Use the correct, manufacturer recommended, methods of starting, holding, carrying,
storing, and using the chainsaw
 When carrying or transporting a chainsaw, make sure that the bar guard is in place, the
chain bar is toward the back, and the motor is shut off
 Use a chainsaw only in a well-ventilated area
 Do not use the chainsaw for cutting above shoulder height
 Do not fuel a chainsaw when it is running or hot
 Store fuel in an approved container
 Use a funnel when refuelling a chainsaw
 Wipe off spilled fuel
 Mix fuel in a well-ventilated area

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 15
  Fuel the saw in a well-ventilated area
 Do not smoke when fuelling a chainsaw
 Place fire extinguisher nearby when fuelling a chainsaw
 Use an approved container for storing the fuel
 Warm up a chainsaw before cutting with it
 Chain saws must comply with the most current CSA Standard Z62.1
Before Use
 When the saw is running, check to make sure it idles smoothly without the chain turning
 If the saw runs rough or if the chain turns, stop the saw and adjust the idle or have it
repaired
 Then run the saw at top speed, without cutting. "Kick in" the chain break to make sure it
works – if it doesn’t kick in, have the saw repaired before using it
Starting a Chainsaw
When starting a chainsaw, do the following:
 Hold the chainsaw firmly on the ground.
 Point the chainsaw away from your body and nearby obstructions.
 Pull the starter cord with a quick, sharp motion.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 16
 18.7 Cleaning Solvents
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Cleaning solvents are used to clean tools and equipment, and care must be taken to protect
workers from hazards that may be created by them. Wherever possible, the solvents used
should be non-flammable and non-toxic.
The Supervisor must be aware of all solvents/flammable materials used on the job and make
sure that all workers who use these materials are instructed in their proper use and any hazards
they pose.
Cleaning solvents safe work practices
Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific directions regarding specific
chemicals.
Use the following safe practices when working with cleaning solvents and flammable solvents:
 Use non-flammable solvents for general cleaning
 Be familiar with the toxic hazards of all solvents before use (MSDS)
 When flammable liquids are used, make sure that no hot work is permitted in the area
 Store flammable materials and solvents in special storage areas away from heat, spark,
flame, and direct rays of the sun
 Provide adequate ventilation where solvents and flammable materials are being used
 Follow all personal protective equipment (PPE) direction from the MSDS for the solvent
used. Where needed, use the following:
o Use goggles/face shields to protect the face and eyes from splashes or sprays
o Use rubber gloves to protect the hands
o Wear protective clothing to prevent contamination of clothing
o When breathing hazards exist, use the appropriate respiratory protection
 Do not leave solvents in open tubs or vats
 Return solvents to storage drums or tanks
 Ensure that proper containers are used for transportation, storage, and field use of
solvents and flammable material
 When the solvents are controlled products, ensure that all workers using them and all
workers in the vicinity of their use or storage are trained and certified in the Workplace
Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
Ensure all WHMIS requirements regarding controlled products are met

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 17
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 18
18.8 Combustion Engines Indoors
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Combustion engines are powered by petroleum (gasoline, diesel, and propane) and are used in
different types of equipment (bobcat, concrete saw, quick cut saw, etc.).
Combustion Engines Indoors Safe Work Practices
If petroleum powered equipment will be used in an indoor environment or confined space, a risk
assessment must be conducted to determine if there is a potential for harmful gases, including
carbon monoxide and nitrogen dioxide to build up.
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
When combustion engines are used in indoor environments or confined spaces there is
always a risk of elevated Carbon Monoxide (CO) levels, which can be deadly.
Carbon monoxide is a product of incomplete combustion. It is a toxic, odourless, invisible
gas that produces adverse effects by interfering with the ability of the blood to carry oxygen
to tissues and the brain.
When CO poisoning symptoms are mild, the victim may not link them to CO poisoning.
If there is a risk of CO build-up, the following practices should be followed:
 Avoid engine use indoors if at all possible; if the use of combustion engines is
required indoors exhaust scrubbers should be used.
 Ensure that there is adequate ventilation
 Use a continuous CO monitoring instrument to ensure that workers are not exposed
to elevated levels of CO
 If the CO monitor indicates elevated CO levels, evacuate the area until the levels
return to normal
 If possible, use local exhaust ventilation systems to remove the equipment exhaust
to the outside
 Use dilution ventilation (force fresh air in to the work area), to reduce the build-up
Carbon Monoxide Poisoning Symptoms
The symptoms associated with CO poisoning are the following:
 Headache
 Nausea
 Feeling of intoxication

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 19
 More severe poisoning symptoms include the following:
 Severe headache
 Severe nausea
 Progression to mental confusion
 Progression to coma and death
Carbon Monoxide First Aid
In the event of CO poisoning, the following procedures should be followed:
10. Move the victim to fresh air.
11. If the victim is not breathing, start artificial respiration (CPR).
12. Keep the victim warm and at rest. (Activity may worsen the effects of CO by increasing
the demand for oxygen.)
13. Take victim to the hospital. (The victim will receive enriched oxygen to accelerate the
removal of CO from the blood.)
14. If the victim has no pulse, start CPR and have someone call for medical assistance
(911).
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
Nitrogen dioxide is very toxic and can be encountered in welding operations as well as in the
combustion of fuels or nitrogen-containing materials. NO2 emissions are also a serious environmental
concern because of their role in the smog formation.
If there is a risk of NO2 build-up, the following practices should be followed:
 When diesel equipment is not in use, the engine should not be allowed to idle.
 Conduct routine maintenance of engines to minimize emissions.
 Equipment that is producing visible, smoky exhaust should be removed from service until
the condition has been corrected. · Vehicles should be fitted with emission controls (e.g.
collectors, air cleaners, ceramic particle traps, etc.).
 Emissions controls should be checked regularly and replaced when necessary.
 Where possible, replace diesel engines with propane engines. Propane burns more
completely with fewer emissions than diesel fuel.
 If you cannot replace your diesel engine, diesel exhaust can be removed by using local
exhaust ventilation. Local exhaust ventilation should include both intake and exhaust fans
that remove diesel exhaust at its source. General ventilation air movement by opening
doors, windows, roof vents, roof fans and floor fans is helpful, but not as effective as local
exhaust ventilation.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 20
Nitrogen Dioxide Poisoning Symptoms
The symptoms associated with NO2 poisoning are sometimes mild but may progress over the following
72 hours to life-threatening respiratory distress including:
 NO2 is one of the most insidious gases. Initially, inflammation of the lungs may cause only
slight pain or go unnoticed. The onset of symptoms may be delayed for up to 30 hours.
 Inhalation exposures are the most common manifestation of NO2 toxicity. They include,
but are not limited to the following:
o Coughing or choking
o Fever
o Difficulty in breathing (dyspnea)
o Mucoid frothy sputum
o Chest pain
o Bluish discoloration of the skin and mucous membranes (cyanosis)
o Rapid breathing
o Rapid heartbeat
 Exposure to Eyes
o Redness
o Pain
o Severe deep burns
 Dermal exposure
o Fluid Seepage
o Redness
o Pain and burns
 Other acute symptoms may include:
o Light-headedness
o Loss of consciousness
o Restlessness
o Agitation
o Confusion
o Irritation of mucous membranes, including the eyes
o Conjunctival infection
o Weakness
o Fatigue
o Nausea
o Abdominal pain
o Skin burns, in cases of liquid N2 O4 exposure
 Delayed symptoms include:
o Rapid breathing
o Headache
o Fever, chills
o Insomnia
o Muscle pain
o Coughing up blood
o Palpitations
o Cyanosis
o Coma

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 21
 Nitrogen Dioxide First Aid Prior to Arrival at a Health Care Facility
 For ocular exposures, flush exposed eyes with running water for 15 minutes
 For dermal exposures, rinse with plenty of water and then remove contaminated clothing
and rinse again.
 For inhalation exposures, move the patient from the toxic environment to fresh air at once.
Monitor for respiratory distress. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen.
 Oral exposure normally does not occur. Follow treatment as for inhalation.
Special note to first responders:
 Wear a positive-pressure Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)
 Wear chemical protective clothing that is specifically recommended by the manufacturer.
It may provide little or no thermal protection. Be aware of the risk of exposure when
treating patients and wear a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), when indicated.
Note: NO2 exposure may result in permanent damage or death. Additional treatment must be
provided, as soon as possible, at a health care facility.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 22
18.9 Compressed Air Tools
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Compressed air tools are powered by compressed air, for example stapling guns, air nailers,
and jack hammers.
Compressed air safe work practices:
Follow these safe work practices when using tools powered by compressed air:
 Follow manufacturer’s instructions
 Use only quick-disconnect pressure-release type hose connectors with a “safety
chain/cable”
 Wear personal protective equipment (PPE), such as eye protection and a face shield
 Before disconnecting the hose or changing tools connected to the hose, ensure that the
air pressure is off and the line pressure is relieved
 Ensure workers in the area are made aware of, or have restricted access to, the hazard
area where compressed air is being used
 Ensure workers are strictly warned against pointing tools at other workers
 Check hoses on a regular basis for cuts, bulges, or other damage
 Ensure that defective hoses are repaired or replaced
 Make sure that a proper pressure regulator and relief device is in the system to ensure
that correct pressure is maintained
 Use the correct air supply hose for the tool/equipment being used
 Maintain the equipment properly according to the manufacturer’s requirements
 Comply with legislated safety requirements
 Do not use compressed air to blow debris or dirt from clothing or skin
Air pressure should be released before disconnecting tools

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 23
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 24
18.10 Compressed Gas Cylinders
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Compressed gas cylinders are attached to equipment used for cutting, welding, and heating.
Compressed gas cylinders may contain acetylene, oxygen, or propane.
Compressed Gas Cylinder Safe Work Practices
The following safe work practices should be used when working with compressed gas cylinders:
 Strap or chain cylinders at all times to prevent them from falling over
 Do not allow cylinders to drop or bump together during transport
 Keep cylinders on end (where practical)
Note: Acetylene cylinders placed in a horizontal position must stand in a vertical position
for at least one (1) hour before use
 Do not place cylinders near excessive heat
 Do not allow sparks, molten metal, electric current, or flames to come in contact with
cylinders or cylinder attachments
 Do not allow oxygen cylinders or their fittings to come in contact with grease or oil,
including grease or oil from hands, gloves, or clothing
 Do not use oxygen as a substitute for compressed air
 Regulators are to be turned off when not in use
 Empty cylinders must have the pressure regulator removed, the valve closed tightly, the
protecting cap put on (unless integral guards are provided), and be marked “Empty”
When required, follow hot work regulations

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 25
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 26
18.11 Concrete Grinding
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Concrete is ground to finish concrete forms, finish concrete surfaces, and remove unwanted
concrete protrusions.
Concrete Grinding Work Safe Practices
All workers involved in concrete grinding must have proper respiratory equipment that meets the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) and/or the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) Standards, have it fit tested, and be trained in its use and maintenance. If
required to wear respirators, workers must be clean-shaven, in accordance with applicable
provincial legislation.
Workers involved in concrete grinding must also wear proper eye protection, such as goggles or
safety glasses, proper hearing protection, and gloves.
Workers are responsible for properly maintaining all personal protective equipment such as
goggles, face shields, and respirators.
The Supervisor is responsible for ensuring that the work area is roped off and/or barricaded off
before any concrete grinding is done to prevent unprotected workers from entering the work
area during grinding operations.
Any worker working within the area barricaded off must wear the same respiratory equipment
worn by the worker who is grinding concrete.
Concrete Grinding within Enclosed Areas
When grinding concrete is done within an enclosed area, one of the following procedures must
be executed:
Practice “A”
When executing Practice “A”, the following safe work course of action must be followed:
 The work area must be roped off and signs must be posted that warn other workers of
the hazard and detail the type of personal protective equipment required to work within
the area
 The worker grinding concrete must wear a half-mask type respirator, such as 3M 8511
N-95 or equivalent, to protect against silica and pneumoconiosis producing dust, as
defined in the WHMIS requirements
 Only grinders equipped with a localized exhaust or vacuum system can be used
Practice “B”
When executing Practice “B”, the following safe work course of action must be followed:
 The work area must be roped off and signs posted prohibiting workers not involved in
the grinding operation from entering the work area.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 27
  Exhaust fans must be installed to remove dust particles from the work area and
positioned in a way that ensures that the dust removed by the fans does not enter other
work areas and become a hazard to other workers
 The workers grinding concrete must wear an airline or air-hose type respirator as
specified by provincial regulations and the worker must ensure that the generator and/or
air pump providing the fresh air source is located away from the contaminated area
 Standard type concrete grinders may be used under these conditions
Dust Control for Concrete Work
Airborne concrete dust can be created by cutting, drilling, grinding, or coring.
To prevent over exposure to concrete dust, control measures must be considered before
beginning each phase of construction. Awareness and planning are the keys to the prevention
of problems.
If it is not possible to eliminate dust from the workplace, the dust must be controlled to prevent
overexposure. Reviewing the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) is an important step in
identifying hazards and understanding the manufacturer’s recommendations on care and control
of the product.
Dust Control Safe Work Practices
The three basic options for controlling dust are the following:
 Control the source of the dust
 Control the path of the dust between its source and the worker
 Control the dust at the location of the worker
One or more of the following control measures can be used when work is being done that may
result in the creation of airborne concrete dust:
 Redesign to use non-silica material were practicable
 Alter the process to reduce or eliminate dust production (wet saw, wet floor, or floor
sweeping compound)
 Install vacuum attachments on tools to capture dust
 Enclose or isolate the process
 Use engineered ventilation fans to induct or exhaust the dust in compliance with
regulatory requirements
 Schedule concrete dust generating activities to minimize workforce exposure (off-hours)
 Post warning signs to identify areas where concrete dust exposure could occur
 Wear a disposable suit and dispose of it before breaks and at the end of each shift
 Wear an appropriate respirator if exposed to a procedure that creates concrete dust
 Practice proper housekeeping (slurry clean up, etc.)
 Practice good personal hygiene before eating
Note: A worker who is required to wear a respirator while performing this type of work must be
clean-shaven and be fit-tested for the respirator to be used.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 28
18.12 Concrete Pump Trucks
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

When operating concrete pump trucks, the following practice is to be followed:

 Prior to commencing work, a FLHA should be done to assess and control all hazards
 Prior to work commencing, obtain operator training verification and documentation to
show pump truck has undergone non-destructive testing
 The pump has to be set up on stable ground and pads to be put under the outriggers
 Ensure that no workers are working under the boom at any time
 Keep all body parts clear of discharge hose, and always know where the hose is to avoid
getting struck by any swinging action that may take place
 Ensure there is a designated signaller. The operator and signaller are to go over their
procedure prior to concrete arriving on site
 Barricade area as required
 If required, follow provincial legislation regarding the use of concrete pump trucks
 The operator must be able to see the end of the hose or be in constant contact with a
competent worker who is in control of the hose
 In the event of a lightning storm or an eminent lighting storm, the pump truck should be
shut down and the boom retracted
Note: The auger must be placed in a zero-energy state when being cleaned. There is a danger
that the auger will reactivate itself if not placed in this position.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 29
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 30
18.13 Confined Space Entry
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A
Where a worker works in a confined space on a regular basis, the employer shall develop a
code of practice in accordance with the requirements of this work plan and the applicable
provincial legislation.
Note: Specific confined space entry procedures must be developed for each case where an
entry is required.
 A confined space is any space that:
o Is enclosed or partially enclosed
o Has restricted access and/or egress
o Due to its design, construction, or location contains, or may contain an
atmosphere that may be hazardous to a worker entering it
 Before entry into a confined space, a specific code of practice must be developed for that
particular job. This code of practice must address the following:
o A means of clearly identifying confined spaces at the work site.
o The qualifications and training needed by workers who will enter the confined
space
o The means of isolating the confined space
o The means of ventilating the confined space
o The tests and/or measurements that will be taken to determine the presence of
harmful substances or oxygen deficiencies
o Information on the availability and proper use of personal protective equipment
o The rescuer procedures and a list of rescue equipment
o The identification of other hazards that may be present in the confined space any
may compromise the safety of workers
 Once the code of practice has been prepared, train and retrain the personnel on the
procedure.
 Post the procedure on the site.
 The Superintendent is responsible to enforce the procedure.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 31
 Confined Space Entry Checklist
Reference: Form 03: Confined Space Hazard Assessment
Preplanning your entry into confined spaces is a must in preventing downgrading incidents.
Areas that have to be considered and discussed prior to entry are defined on the Confined
Space Hazard Assessment. The checklist presents a number of questions that must be asked
prior to entry. There may, however, depending on the particular type of operation, be many
more areas that require attention. The time it takes to pre-plan your entry is well worth the effort
in order to avoid a fatality or injury.
Confined Space Entry Approval
Reference: Form 70: Confined Space Entry Approval
For additional information, refer to Section 16: Confined Space Entry

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 32
18.14 Coring
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Coring is used in new construction to make openings in concrete to accommodate pipes where
sleeving was not done or if plans have been revised. It is used in renovation work to make
openings to change pipes or add new ones to the system.
Any time coring is done there is danger because, unless scans or x-rays are performed, it is
“coring blind.” In renovation work in particular, as-builts may not be accurate or lines put in place
in concrete may not be recorded because they may have been “temporary” but are still active.
Coring Safe Work Practices
The following safe work practices must be followed when coring:
 Obtain and consult as-builts of the area to be worked on
 Identify present lines and sources
 Do a task hazard assessment
 Set out proposed drill/core locations
 Where possible, use a locator or x-ray to pinpoint existing lines
 Erect warning signs to advise of the operation
 If done in a slab or wall, identify what is on the other side of the slab/wall
 Plan emergency procedures based on findings
 Conduct a pre-job meeting to warn of hazards and assign specific tasks
 Where water is being used, ensure that all workers in the area are advised of what is to
take place and the hazards presented by the introduction of water into the operation
(disposal of water, cores, etc.)
 Water must be kept away from any electrical
 When coring vertically, have a spotter present below and secure the drop area
 Ensure all electric, gas, water, steam, sewer and other services are not interfering with
any of the coring procedure, x-raying or scanning may be required
 Ensure dust/slurry barriers are in place to protect all equipment from damage
 Ensure PPE requirements are being followed including eye protection, steel toe boots,
hearing protection; face shield may be required if coring overhead
 Coring Request must be obtained and approved by Engineer, especially if coring
through pre cast concrete and concrete with post tensioning cables
 Do not wear gloves, jewellery or loose fitting clothes
Caution: Be prepared for unexpected movement and snagging on “Q” decking, re-bar, and
stones.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 33
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 34
18.15 Critical Lifts
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A
Lift Classification and Controls:

Classification Controls
Critical Lift
 Any lift in a confined space or restricted area  In depth hazard assessment,
where the load or any part of the structure and review Job Hazard
will come within 24 inches of the crane boom Assessment with all personnel
and has the potential for getting closer. involved.
 Any lift that may present a real or significant  Engineered diagrams and lift
risk to existing structures/operation study.
processes.
 Pre-lift meeting and review with
 Any lift over live or operating all personnel involved
equipment/processes.
 Any lift within the approach limits of live
electrical power lines.
 Single crane lift where the load will represent
more than 75% (check site specific
definition) of the manufacturer’s rating chart
at the working radius for a mobile crane.
 Multi-crane lifts involving two or more cranes
lifting the same load simultaneously or any
tailing crane operation.
 Any lift where the weight of the load is
unknown or where special lifting/rigging
equipment or non-standard crane
configuration is used.
 Any crane lift where the crane is set up over
underground installations (sewers, sinkholes,
excavations, etc.)
 Any lift deemed by site supervision or lift
coordinator to be categorized as such.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 35
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 36
18.16 Defective Tools

Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Defective tools can cause serious and painful injuries.

If a tool is defective in some way, DON’T USE IT.
Be aware of problems like:
 Chisels and wedges with mushroomed heads
 Split or cracked handles
 Chipped or broken drill bits
 Wrenches with worn out jaws
 Tools which are not complete, such as files without handles
To ensure safe use of hand tools, remember:
 Never use a defective tool
 Double check all tools prior to use
 Ensure defective tools are red-tagged and taken out of service
 Inform supervisor
Air, gasoline or electric power tools, require skill and complete attention on the part of the user
even when they are in good condition. Don’t use power tools when they are defective in any way.
Watch for problems like:
 Broken or inoperative guards
 Insufficient or improper grounding due to damage on double insulated tools
 The on/off switch not in good working order
 Tool blade is cracked
 The wrong grinder wheel is being used
 The guard has been wedged back on a power saw

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 37
 Electrical Safety
Only licensed electricians and qualified technical personnel are authorized to repair or make
alterations to electrical equipment.
Safety-related work practices must be employed to prevent electrical shock or other injuries
resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts when work is performed on or near
equipment/circuits that may be energized.
The specific safety-related work practices must be consistent with the nature and extent of the
associated electrical hazards.
De-energized Parts
Live parts, that workers may be exposed to, must be de-energized before the workers work on
them or work near them, unless the employer can demonstrate that de-energizing introduces
additional or increased hazards or that de-energizing is not feasible due to equipment design or
operational limitations.
Examples of increased or additional hazards include the following:
 Deactivation of emergency alarm systems
 Shutdown of hazardous locations ventilation equipment
 Removal of illumination for an area
Live parts that operate at less than 50 volts-to-ground do not need to be de-energized if there
will be no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs.
Energized Parts
If the exposed live parts are not de-energized due to increased or additional hazards that would
result from de-energizing, the lack of feasibility of de-energizing, or some other valid reason,
other safety-related work practices must be used to protect workers who may be exposed to the
electrical hazards involved.
These safety-related work practices must also protect the workers against contact with
energized circuit parts indirectly through some other conductive object.
The safety-related work practices used must be suitable for the conditions under which the work
will be performed and for the voltage level of the exposed electric conductors or circuit parts.
Lock-Out Procedures for Electrically Energized Equipment
Each Company work site must have lock-out procedures in place to prevent the accidental re-
energization of electrically energized equipment or machinery.
The lock-out system must ensure that locked-out machinery or equipment cannot be engaged.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 38
 The lock-out procedures must have the following characteristics:
 Exist in writing in the procedures section
 Be understood by all workers affected by them
 Be reviewed regularly with all workers affected by them
 Ensure that a locked-out piece of equipment or machinery cannot be engaged under any
circumstances
 Be strictly enforced
 Use Form 24: Lock-out Removal by Others to document proper procedures.
Lock-Out
During the time that a worker is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electrical equipment or
circuits which have been de-energized, the circuits energizing the parts must be locked-out.
The circuits and equipment to be worked on must be disconnected from all electric energy
sources. Control circuit devices, such as push buttons, selector switches, and interlocks must
not be used as the sole means for de-energizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks for electric
equipment must not be used as a substitute for lock-out.
Stored electrical energy that might endanger personnel must be released. Capacitors must be
discharged and the high capacitance elements must be short-circuited and grounded if the
stored energy might endanger personnel.
Stored non-electrical energy in devices that could re-energize electric circuit parts must be
blocked or relieved to the extent that the circuit parts cannot be accidentally energized by the
device.
Reference: Section 18.38: Safe Work Practice - Lock-Out

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 39
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 40
18.17 Demolition
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Demolition is the destruction or removal of material to make way for new construction.
Demolition is inherently dangerous and must be left to competent workers. Planning and
supervision are of extreme importance. Before any work starts supervisors and workers must
know if any dangerous substances are in or around the area that are being demolished e.g.
asbestos, lead paints, flammable liquids, unidentified drums or packages, live electrical, live
plumbing or live sprinklers etc.
Before demolition is started, a thorough hazard assessment of the site must be carried out. This
hazard assessment must focus on the following:
 Equipment and structure to be demolished
 Existing utilities (tanks, piping systems, plumbing, electrical, etc.)
 Site conditions
 Presence of hazardous or toxic products (lead paint, asbestos, mouse droppings,
corrosives, etc.)
 Need for hot work
 Order and type of demolition
Demolition safe work practices
The following safe work practices must be followed when demolition is done:
 Demolition work must be carried out according to the hazard assessment (usually in
reverse order of construction)
 Any adjoining structures or access ways that may be affected by the demolition must be
cordoned off, barricaded, or shored to protect workers and the public
 All demolition work must be carried out in a safe manner to ensure the health and safety
of workers
 Control measures such as ventilation or isolation must be used to protect workers from
exposure to hazardous products, dusts, or contaminated air where necessary
 Workers must wear protective footwear and hardhats at all times (mandatory regulation)
 Workers must always wear safety glasses
 Workers must wear other personal protective equipment (PPE) (hearing protection, hand
protection, respiratory protection, fall protection, etc.) as warranted

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 41
  Workers under the age of 16 are not permitted on demolition sites (mandatory
regulation)
 All services known to exist must be individually marked for clear identification
 All services not required during demolition must be capped off where practical, and
diverted, protected, or supported as necessary
 All electrical equipment and devices must be de-energized and locked-out before
beginning demolition on such equipment
 Walls or other building components must not be left standing in unstable condition
 Any drop-offs exceeding 3 m (10 ft) must be barricaded
 All demolished material and rubble must be removed as quickly as practicable and not
be allowed to accumulate on floors or outside areas
 Materials may only be dumped in areas designated for such purposes and those areas
must be barricaded to prevent worker access and public access
 Practice proper housekeeping at all times
 Enclosed chutes may be used for debris removal if they are properly secured, properly
guarded, and empty safely into containers or designated areas
 Any hot work (welding, cutting, grinding, soldering, etc.) is to be performed by permit
only, and the Hot work permit must be signed by the Supervisor (or Project Manager)
and the worker performing the task
 The demolition hazard assessment and this safe work procedure must be reviewed by
all persons employed in demolition projects before beginning demolition work

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 42
 18.18 Explosive/Powder Actuated Tools
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

A number of tools use an explosive charge to drive fastenings. The manufacturers of these
devices provide detailed instructions and certification regarding their use, and the instructions
must be followed at all times.
Explosive/Powder Actuated Tools Safe Work Practices
Observe the following safe work practices when using explosive/powder actuated tools:
 Only properly trained and qualified operators may use explosive/powder actuated tools
 The operator of an explosive/powder actuated tool must possess proof of training issued
by the manufacturer, authorized dealer/distributor, or other legitimate source
 The operator of an explosive/powder actuated tool must be familiar with the provincial
regulations governing its use
 The explosive/powder actuated tool must be CSA standard approved for “Explosive
Actuated Fastening Tools”
 The explosive/powder actuated tool must be loaded just prior to use with the correct load
for the job anticipated
 Do not load an explosive/powder actuated tool and let it sit while loaded
 Do not move a loaded explosive/powder actuated tool to another site
 Do not point an explosive/powder actuated tool at anyone, regardless of whether it is
loaded or unloaded
 Keep hands clear of the muzzle end of an explosive/powder actuated tool at all times
 Do not use an explosive/powder actuated tool in an explosive or flammable atmosphere
 Hold an explosive/powder actuated tool firmly at right angles to the surface being driven
into
 Wear eye and hearing protection when using an explosive/powder actuated tool
 Where there is a danger of fragments flying, wear full-face protection
 Wear hearing protection at all times

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 43
  To prevent free-flying studs, ensure that the material being driven into will not allow the
stud to completely pass through it
 Make sure that no one is working behind the material that the fasteners are being driven
into
 The manufacturer’s recommendations should be consulted and followed whenever
there is a doubt about the material being driven into, the load strength to be used, or the
maintenance procedures
 A worker must be authorized by the Foreman or Supervisor to operate an
explosive/powder actuated tool
 Unqualified persons are not permitted to repair explosive/powder actuated tools
 Used powder cartridges must be disposed of in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications and applicable provincial legislation. Do not leave used cartridges lying
around the work area.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 44
 18.19 Fall Protection
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A
Fall protection consists of guardrails, fall restraint, and fall arrest. Fall protection must meet
provincial standards.
A fall protection system must be used where a fall of 3 m (10 ft) or more may occur, or where a
fall of less than 3 m (10 ft) involves a risk of injury greater than the risk of injury from the impact
on a flat surface.
Many construction site areas such as scissor lifts, scaffolds, openings, holes in floors, or holes
in roofs require fall protection. The work heights at which fall protection is mandated are outlined
in the regulations of the authority having jurisdiction in the province in which the work is being
done.
When a site-specific fall protection plan is required, complete Form 11: Fall protection work
plan.
Fall protection safe work practices
 Inspect harnesses and lanyards daily for wear and tear of straps and buckles
 Take harnesses and/or lanyards out of service if any damage is found
 Workers using fall protection must be trained in its use
 Use, at minimum, a 5-point CSA safety harness complete with CSA approved lanyard
 The length of the lanyard must meet provincial regulations
 Lifelines must meet provincial regulations
 Fall protection is required when riding in, or working from, an aerial device or elevated
work platform
 Workers in man-baskets (hoisted by cranes) must secure their lanyard to the crane
cable above all other attachments
 Workers on a flat roof must be protected from falling if the work is within 2 m (6.65 ft) of
the edge
 Work at a distance greater than 2 m (6.56 ft) from the edge of a flat roof requires a
warning system indicating the 2m edge
 Openings and holes through roofs or floors must have a guardrail and a toe board, or be
covered with a cover strong enough to support any load placed on it, must be anchored
and secured, and must be marked with a warning sign indicating nature of hazard (but
the cover will not be considered a solid surface)

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 45
  Safety harnesses, shock absorbing lanyards, and lifelines exposed to a fall must be
removed from service and all components must be destroyed
 Before each use, all fall arresting/restraint protection equipment must be inspected by
the user and documented
 All fall arresting/restraint protection equipment must be inspected completely as per
manufacturer’s specifications, or every year, whichever is more frequent

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 46
 18.20 Fall Protection Equipment
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

A fall protection system must be used when work is done where a fall of 3 m (9.84 ft.) or more
may occur, when a fall from a height of less than 3 m involves a risk of injury greater than the
risk of injury from the impact on a flat surface, or when using a scissor lift, man lift, etc.
Equipment Inspection
All equipment must be inspected:
 Prior to each use
 At regular intervals (monthly, every 6 months, or annually)
Records of regular interval inspections must be kept.
Donning Full Body Harness

1. Hold harness by 2. If chest, leg, 3. Slip straps over 4. Pull leg strap 5. Connect chest 6. After all straps
back D-ring and and/or waist straps shoulders so D-ring between legs and strap and position in have been buckled,
shake harness to are buckled, release is located in middle connect to opposite mid chest area. tighten all buckles
allow all straps to straps and unbuckle of back between end. Do the same Tighten to keep so harness fits
fall in place. at this time. shoulder blades. with second leg shoulder straps taut. snug, but allows full
strap. range of movement.
Pass excess strap
through loop
keepers.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 47
 Installing Connecting Equipment
Connecting equipment must include the following items:
 Lifeline
 Rope grab
 1.22 m (4 ft) web lanyard
 Cable lanyard (for use with temporary anchorages only)
Note: At no time shall a knot or hitch be used to attach personal fall protection equipment to
anchorage locations.
After the lifeline has been connected to the anchor location, the remainder of the equipment
must be installed.
This equipment must be assembled as follows:
 The rope grab must be placed on the lifeline with the proper
orientation. “UP” must be oriented to the anchor.
 One snap hook on the 1.22 m (4 ft) web lanyard must be
connected to the back D-ring of the harness (fall arrest
attachment point), and the snap hook on the other end must
be connected to the rope grab.
 The lifeline must be installed in the rope grab so that the rope
length is short enough to restrict worker travel to the
unguarded edge.

Note: If the worker can reach the edge and face a free fall situation, a plan is to be developed
for restraint or arrest. A written Fall Protection Work Plan must be prepared for this work.
Inspection Information (from Miller Fall Protection)
Harness Inspection
1. Webbing: Grasp the webbing with your hands 152 mm
(6 in) to 203mm (8 in) apart. Bend the webbing in an
inverted “U” as shown. The surface tension resulting
makes damaged fibres or cuts easier to detect. Follow
this procedure the entire length of the webbing,
inspecting both sides of each strap. Look for frayed
edges, broken fibres, pulled stitches, cuts, burns, and
chemical damage.
2. D-rings/Back pads: Check D-rings for distortion, cracks,
breaks, and rough or sharp edges. The D-ring should
pivot freely. D-ring back pads should also be inspected
for damage.
3. Attachment of buckles: Inspect for any unusual wear,
frayed or cut fibres, or broken stitching of the buckle or
D-ring attachments.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 48
Harness Inspection, continued.
4. Tongue/Grommets: The tongue receives heavy wear
from repeated buckling/unbuckling. Inspect for loose,
distorted, or broken grommets. Webbing should not have
additional punched holes.
5. Tongue buckles: Buckle tongues should be free of
distortion in shape and motion. They should overlap the
buckle frame and move freely back and forth in their
socket. Roller should turn freely on frame. Check for
distortion or sharp edges.
6. Friction and mating buckles: Inspect the buckle for
distortion. The outer bars and centre bars must be
straight. Pay special attention to corners and attachment
points at the centre bar.
Web Lanyard Inspection
Hardware (snaps): Inspect closely for hook and eye
distortions, cracks, corrosion, or pitted surfaces. The keeper
(latch) should seat into the nose without binding and should not
be distorted or obstructed. The keeper spring should exert
sufficient force to firmly close the keeper. Keeper locks must
prevent the keeper from opening after the keeper closes.
Thimbles: The thimble must be firmly seated in the eye of the
splice. The splice should have no loose or cut strands. The
edges of the thimble must be free of sharp edges, distortion, or
cracks.
Web lanyard: While bending webbing over a pipe or mandrel,
observe each side of the webbed lanyard. This will reveal any
cuts or breaks. Swelling, discoloration, cracks, and charring are
obvious signs of chemical or heat damage. Observe closely for
any breaks in stitching.
Rope Grabs and Lifelines
Frequency of inspection:
 A qualified Supervisor must inspect the rope grab and lifeline at least annually. Record
the results of each formal inspection in the equipment inspection log
 Before each use, visually inspect the equipment by following steps listed in the following
inspection sections

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 49
 Rope Grab Inspection Step (see figure on right)
 Inspect action of locking roller. It should be free to travel the full length of the guide slots.
 Inspect the lanyard connection handle for
freedom of motion. There should be no
binding or sticking. Inspect for wear on the
nose of the handle where it contacts the
roller. The level must push the roller into
the rope.
 Inspect handle spring. It should be in its
correct place and undamaged.
 Inspect the detent pin. The top button
should spring back up when pushed down.
The pin should easily slide through the
rope grab body and hinge.
 The rope grab hinge must pivot freely and close completely. Check that the gravity lock
on the hinge works freely. When the rope grab is held upside down, the gravity lock
should drop down and prevent the hinge from fully closing. Inspect the hinge for signs of
rope wear. There should be no dips or depressions worn into the rope channel.
 Inspect labels and markings. All labels and markings must be present and fully legible.
 Inspect each system component or subsystem following the associated manufacturer’s
instructions.
 Record the inspection date and results on the equipment inspection log in the forms
section of this program
Carabiner inspection
Carabiners may be used from time to time in fall protection systems and require inspection
before use.
The following items should be checked prior to using a carabiner:
 Check that there is a locking mechanism – non-locking carabiners are not permitted with
fall protection equipment
 Check the gate and the closure to ensure that they are not damaged and operate
smoothly and clean as required. Blow out mechanisms with an air hose
Caution: Do not lubricate with oil or grease-based lubricants, as they will attract dirt and
grit.
 Check that spring-loaded closures are operating as required. Discard any that do not
close as designed
 Check the gate to ensure it is not bent from use
 Check the latch mechanism to ensure it is not broken
 Check that the carabiners are not bent or misaligned
 Check to ensure that carabiners are not cracked or fractured

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 50
Important safety considerations
Take the following important safety considerations into account:
 Personal fall protection equipment subjected to fall arrest or impact forces must be
immediately removed from service, tagged DO NOT USE, and destroyed
 A professional engineer must inspect anchors involved in a fall arrest situation
 Do not alter, repair, or make substitutions to fall protection equipment or components
 Remove equipment found to be in defective condition from service and destroy it
 Only the manufacturer or those authorized by the manufacturer in writing may perform
repairs on fall protection equipment (Refer to manufacturer’s specifications for further
details.)
 Extreme working conditions (harsh environments, prolonged use, etc.) may require
increasing the frequency of inspections
Cleaning
Basic care of all safety equipment will prolong its durable life and contribute toward the
performance of its vital safety function. Proper storage and maintenance after use are as
important as cleansing the equipment of dirt, corrosives, or contaminants. Storage areas should
be clean, dry, and free of exposure to fumes or corrosive elements and sunlight.
Nylon or Polyester: Remove all surface dirt with a sponge dampened in plain water. Squeeze
the sponge dry. Dip the sponge in a mild solution of water and commercial soap or detergent.
Work up a thick lather with a vigorous back and forth motion, then wipe with a clean cloth. Hang
freely to dry, but away from excessive heat.
Drying: Equipment should dry thoroughly without close exposure to heat, steam, or long
periods of sunlight.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 51
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 52
18.21 Fibreglass Insulation
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Fibreglass insulation is used for acoustic and thermal insulation, and comes in many different
shapes: blowing wool, rolls, foil back, rigid board, and residential fibreglass insulation.
When handled, fibreglass releases glass fibres that can cause irritation of the throat, eyes, and
skin. The glass fibres can be inhaled into the lungs, and there is evidence that associates
exposure to glass fibres with lung cancer.
The following fibreglass safe work practices should be followed:
Protection
Protective equipment should be used as necessary to prevent irritation to the throat, eyes, and
skin:
 Goggles - Safety goggles or safety glasses with side shields must be used to keep dust
and fibres out of the eyes
 Gloves - Leather or cotton gloves must be used to prevent contact and irritation
 Respirator - Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator to protect against nuisance
dust and fibres (Approved disposable dust/mist respirators for this type of exposure are
the 3M9900 or equivalent)
 Ventilation - Local exhaust should be used in areas of cutting to remove airborne fibre
concentrations and general dilution ventilation should be used to keep airborne fibre and
dust to lowest possible limits
 Clothing - Workers should wear loose fitting, long sleeved, long legged work clothing.
(Where practical, use vacuum equipment to clean contaminated clothing at the end of
the work period, wash the clothing separately from other clothing, and rinse the machine
before using it for other clothing.)
Warning: Do not wear contact lenses while installing, blowing, or removing fibreglass
insulation.
First Aid Information
These fibreglass first aid practices should be followed:

Eye contact - Flush the eye with flowing water for at least 15 minutes, and if symptoms
persist, seek medical attention
 Skin contact - Wash skin with mild soap and cool running water
Worker education
Workers must be trained and educated regarding the hazards of exposure to glass fibres and
the dust released from fibreglass insulation. Workers must understand how to work with
fibreglass and what precautions to take while doing so.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 53
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 54
18.22 Fire Protection and Prevention
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Fire hazards exist in almost all areas of construction and fire prevention requires proper
planning, precautions, and equipment.
Good housekeeping is essential to the prevention of fires.
(See Section 14, Fire Prevention)
Fire protection and prevention safe work practices
Follow theses safe work practices to lessen the danger of fire:
 Do not smoke outside of designated smoking areas
 Maintain fire equipment in working condition
 Ensure that fire equipment is always accessible
 Do not obstruct aisles, passageways, doorways, and stairways
 Make sure workers know the locations and types of fire extinguishers in their work area
Warning: Tampering with fire protection equipment is a serious offence and may result in the
violator being removed from the site.
If a fire occurs, do the following:
 If it is possible to extinguish the fire with the equipment and personnel at hand, you may
try to do so
 If there is any possibility that the fire cannot be extinguished with the equipment and
personnel at hand, raise the alarm, call 911, and implement evacuation procedures
 The worker who first reported the fire must inform the Supervisor of the circumstances of
the fire
Fire extinguishers
Fire extinguishers are important to fire prevention and protection, and workers must be trained
to use them properly. The acronym PASS can be used to assist workers in recalling the correct
operation of the device:
P - Pull the pin
A - Aim the nozzle at the base of the flames
S - Squeeze the trigger while holding the extinguisher upright
S - Sweep the nozzle from side to side and outward to extinguish flames
Always keep fire extinguishers where they are visible and easy to reach. Maintain them
properly, especially in areas where temperature is a factor.
Select the right fire extinguisher for the area. It is important to know which type of fire
extinguisher to use for a particular fire type.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 55
 There are four general fire classifications: Class A, Class B, Class C, and Class D.
Certain types of fire extinguishers are optimal for use on certain types of fires.
Combination type fire extinguishers, such as ABC units, are effective on different types of fires.
 Class A
Class A fire extinguishers should be used on Class A fires such as wood, paper,
rag, rubbish, or other ordinary combustible material fires.
A number of types of fire extinguishers are recommended for dealing with a
Class A fire:
o ABC type units
o Water from a hose
o Pump type
o Water can or pressurized extinguisher
o Soda acid extinguisher
To fight a Class A fire, do the following:
o Soak the fire completely, even the smoking embers
 Class B
Class B fire extinguishers should be used on class B fires, such as flammable
liquid, oil, or grease fires.
A number of types of fire extinguishers are recommended for dealing with Class
B fires:
o ABC type units
o Dry chemical
o Foam
o Carbon dioxide
To fight a Class B fire, do the following:
o Start at the base of the fire and use a sweeping motion from left to right
and always keep the fire in front of you
 Class C
Class C fire extinguishers should be used on Class C fires, such as electrical
equipment fires.
ABC type units (Carbon Dioxide and dry chemical) are the extinguishers
recommended for use against this type of fire
To fighting a Class C fire, use short bursts from the extinguisher on the fire.
Warning: When the electrical current is shut off on a Class C fire, it can become
a Class A fire if the materials around the electrical fire are ignited.
 Class D
This class of fire uses combustible metals such as sodium and magnesium as
fuel.
Note: The most common fire extinguisher on a construction site is an ABC type, which can
deal with A, B, and C Class fires.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 56
 18.23 Flagging
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Flagging operations are a necessity in construction and must be done correctly; several flagging
related fatalities can be attributed to incorrect operations. To make the operation as safe as
possible confusion should be minimized and all of the proper equipment should be used. Prior
to set up and use, Form 23: Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) should be completed to
assess and control all hazards
 All workers involved in flagging operations must have formal training from a certified and
competent flagging instructor.
 High visibility vest, safety glasses, steel-toed boots and a hard hat must be worn by the
flagger at all times, a flagger must also have a clean stop/slow paddle, logbook and
whistle at all times. Additional PPE such as hearing protection should be worn as
required
 In a multiple flagger situation each flagger should have a 2-way radio or other equally
effective communication device
 Ensure required signage and traffic cones are available before commencing work
 Never wave a paddle as this will confuse drivers; instead use your free hand for direction
 Never hold a paddle in front of your face as this will block your vision and create a
potentially dangerous situation for the flagger
 Never turn your back to traffic or walk in front of approaching traffic
 Never leave your flagging station unattended; another trained and competent flagger
must relieve you for any breaks
 Allow drivers time to react given current weather and road conditions (the flagger should
be visible from 150m (492 ft) away)
 Set out required signage and buffer zone prior to the flagging on a roadway (for required
signage and buffer length refer to your local jurisdiction’s flagging manual)
 Ensure the paddle is held high enough so that approaching vehicles can easily see your
sign
 Always plan an escape route; never position yourself in a place where you will be
blocked in such as beside a jersey barrier or a vehicle
 Ensure traffic cones are adequately spaced for speed of traffic on roadway
 If flagging in low-light conditions, ensure all reflective striping on your high visibility vest,
paddle, night cones (as required) and traffic cones are clean
 Record any incident(s) in your logbook when it is safe to do so and notify your immediate
supervisor
 Always be prepared for emergency vehicles

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 57
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 58
18.24 Forklifts
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Forklifts include zoom booms, scissor lifts, lift trucks, and powered pallet jacks. They can be
electric, gas, or propane powered.
Forklift operators must follow all applicable vehicle and mobile equipment safety rules, provincial
requirements, and manufacturers operating instructions. Manufacturer’s instructions must be
available where the forklift is being used. Equipment modifications are not allowed.
Forklift Safe Work Practices
A number of safe work practices must be followed when operating a forklift:
 Forklift operators must be qualified to operate the forklift
 Forklift operators must possess current certification
 Load materials and equipment onto the forklift in a way that prevents any movement of
the load
 Restrain loads that could shift during transportation, causing forklift instability
 Carry loads as low as is possible
 Do not drive with arms, head, or legs outside the confines of the forklift
 A Signal Person must be used by an operator who cannot see the load, the off-load
points, or the full path of travel to be used
 Make sure that all workers, particularly spotters, signal persons and inexperienced
workers, are instructed to stand clear of the forklift
 Sound the horn and slow down when approaching pedestrians, corners, doorways,
ramps, and other forklifts
 Move a forklift that is being used indoors outside before refuelling it
 Shut down forklifts indoors when not in use to minimize emissions into the work area
 Observe and obey the load capacity of the forklift
 When shutting a forklift down, level and lower the forks, apply the parking brake, and put
the controls in neutral
 Do not elevate anyone on the forks unless the person is inside an engineered and
approved man cage that is secured to the forklift
Reference: Form 80: Forklifts daily checklist

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 59
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 60
18.25 Formwork and Falsework
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Formwork and falsework is constructed to provide a structural support for pouring concrete.
Formwork is used as a mould to pour concrete into. Falsework is used to hold up a suspended
concrete floor.
All formwork and falsework design and construction must comply with provincial regulations.
Formwork and falsework safe work practices
A number of safe work practices must be followed when designing and constructing formwork
and falsework.
Design
Design formwork and falsework in accordance with applicable standards and in compliance with
provincial regulations.
All falsework and fly forms must be designed, constructed and braced in accordance with the
current CSA Standard S269.1 and the applicable provincial / territorial legislation.
Falsework must be certified by a professional engineer in accordance with provincial / territorial
legislation.
Make sure that the plans and specifications for formwork and falsework contain the following:
 Vertical and horizontal loads for which the formwork has been designed
 Load-bearing capacity required of the material on which the sills will be placed and,
where applicable, details of procedures to be followed to develop this required capacity
 Provisions, where necessary, for the acceptance of additional loads resulting from the
temporary storage of materials or equipment
 Size, type, grade, location, and connection of all components
 Minimum dimensions of sills and pad materials
 Description of any proprietary items, including fittings, that permits accurate field
identification
 Information necessary to build the structure to meet the design requirements without the
need for verbal clarification
 Construction tolerances for accurate placement of the components with particular regard
to:
o Eccentricity of loading
o Variation from plumb of vertical load carrying members
o Bracing and bracing attachment points
o Position of posts on mud sills

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 61
  Sequence, method, and rate of concrete placement, to preclude overloading of any part
of the formwork
 Special construction, erection, and dismantling procedures
 Formwork and falsework drawings and supplementary instructions must be available on
the project site during erection and use of the formwork and falsework
 Re-shoring plans, where used, must be submitted to the permanent structure designer
for approval
 Where structural components are connected together, connections designed and
detailed to prevent accidental displacement and/or rotation of the components
If required by provincial regulations, a professional engineer registered in the province of the
project site must seal the formwork and falsework drawings.
Fabrication and Erection
Before fabrication and erection of formwork and falsework begins a ‘falsework coordinator’
should be appointed for the erection and dismantling of all falsework. The falsework coordinator
must be competent in the erection and dismantling of falsework and be trained in the safety of
falsework.
Prior to set up and use, Form 23: Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) should be completed
to assess and control all hazards.
When fabricating and erecting formwork and falsework, follow these safe work practices:
 Instruct workers in proper safe work practices and procedures for fabricating and
erecting formwork and falsework
 All workers involved in constructing falsework must wear a hard had, safety glasses,
steel toed boots; additional PPE such as hearing protection and fall arrest equipment
must be worn as required by the hazard assessment and legislation
 Construct formwork and falsework in the manner specified by the plans and with the
materials specified by the plans
 A professional engineer must authorize deviations from the original plans in writing
 Use and maintain manufactured formwork components in the manner specified by the
manufacturer
 Protect foundation load-bearing capacity from deterioration resulting from weather or
other causes
 Install guardrails in the areas that meet the provincial requirements, as specified in
Section 18.26: Safe Work Practice - Guardrails
 Prior to set up and use, a FLHA should be completed to assess and control all hazards
 A ‘Falsework Coordinator’ should be appointed for the erection and dismantling of all
falsework. The falsework coordinator must be competent in the erection and dismantling
of falsework and be trained in the safety of falsework

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 62
  All falsework and fly forms must be designed, constructed and braced in accordance
with the current CSA Standard S269.1, Falsework for Construction Purposes
 Falsework must be certified by a professional engineer if:
o It consists of shoring greater than 3.7m (12.14 ft) in height
o May transmit loads to another part of the structure that may not provide adequate
support or,
o Is designed to act as a unit composed of parts so when connected one to one
another that a load applied to any part of it may alter the stresses induced in
other parts.
 Make sure that workers immediately report any unstable formwork, (flyforms,
cantilevered beam soffit forms) they discover to their Supervisor
Inspection
Immediately prior to a pour, the formwork and falsework for the pour must be inspected.
If required by provincial regulations, a professional engineer who will certify in writing that the
specifications have been met must do this inspection.
The certificate the engineer completes and signs must contain the following:
 The specific area inspected
 Certification that the formwork is substantially in accordance with the latest approved
drawings and specifications
 Certification that any specific re-shoring is in place
Keep copies of the signed inspection at the work site.
Post the certificate of inspection at the job site.
Concrete Placement
During concrete placement, follow these safe work practices:
 Do not allow to be workers underneath formwork during a pour or to be under areas
where concrete has been placed
 Guard protruding reinforcing rod ends to prevent tripping and impact hazards
 Stop pouring concrete or placing other loads when any weakness, undue settlement, or
distortion of the formwork occurs
 Restart pouring only after suspect formwork has been repaired or strengthened in a
manner specified by a professional engineer
 Do not place loads other than those specified on uncured concrete structures
Dismantling formwork
The dismantling of formwork must follow the directions in the plans and specifications when
dismantling formwork and stack or store it in a manner that meets proper housekeeping safe
work practices.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 63
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 64
 18.26 Grinding
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Grinding is the removal of unwanted material, usually concrete or metal. Injury may occur if
properly maintained protective equipment and guards are not used.
Grinding safe work practices
Abrasive wheels can cause severe injury. Proper storage of new wheels, proper use of wheels
and proper maintenance of wheels must be observed.
Portable Grinders
 Familiarize yourself with the grinder operation before commencing work.
 Ensure proper guards are in place and that safety glasses, face shields, gloves and safety
boots are worn when using portable grinders. Safety glasses must be worn under a face
shield.
 Never exceed the maximum wheel speed (every wheel is marked). Check the speed
marked on the wheel and compare it to the speed on the grinder.
 When mounting the wheels, check them for cracks and defects, ensure that the mounting
flanges are clean and the mounting blotters are used. Do not over tighten the mounting
nut.
 Before grinding, run newly mounted wheels at operating speed to check for vibrations.
 Do not use grinders near flammable materials.
 Never use the grinder for jobs for which it is not designed, such as cutting.
 Check the tool for correct distance from the abrasive wheel-maximum 3mm (1/8”)
 Replace the grindstone when adjustment of the rest cannot provide 3 mm (1/8”) distance
from the abrasive wheel
 If the wheel has been abused and ground to an angle or grooved, reface the wheel with
the appropriate surfacing tool
 Protect your eyes with goggles or a face shield
 Remove hanging jewellery
 Tie or confine long hair
 When a grinding wheel is mounted, check the maximum approved speed stamped on
the wheel bladder against the shaft rotation speed of the machine to ensure the
peripheral speed is not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation
 Ensure that the flanges supporting the grinding wheel are a maximum of 1/3 the
diameter of the wheel and fit the shaft rotating speed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendation

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 65
  Do not grind material on bench grinders on the side of the wheel (they are designed for
peripheral grinding)
 Do not stand directly in front of grinding wheel when it is first started
 Unplug or lock out the grinder before doing adjustments or repairs
 Do not leave a grinder unattended while the wheels are turning
 Use pliers or a vice grip to hold small items
 Allow the object you are grinding to cool before handling it
Pedestal Grinders
Severe injury may occur if proper protective equipment is not used and properly maintained.
 Check the tool rest for the correct distance from the abrasive wheel, maximum 3mm (1/8”).
 Replace the grindstone when adjustment of the rest cannot provide 3 mm (1/8”) clearance.
 If the wheel has been abused and ground to an angle or grooved, reface the wheel with
the appropriate surfacing tool.
 Protect your eyes with goggles or a face shield at all times when grinding.
 Each time a grinding wheel is mounted, the maximum approved speed stamped on the
wheel bladder should be checked against the shaft rotation speed of the machine to
ensure the safe peripheral speed is not exceeded. A grinding wheel must not be operated
at peripheral speed exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation.
 The flanges supporting the grinding wheel should be a maximum of 1/3 the diameter of
the wheel, and must fit the shaft rotating speed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
 Bench grinders are designed for peripheral grinding. Do not grind on the side of the wheel.
 Do not stand directly in front of grinding wheel when it is first started.
Dustless Grinders
 Familiarize yourself with grinder operation before commencing work. Only properly
trained operators will be permitted to use grinders.
 Ensure guards, glasses, handles, face shields, steel toed boots and gloves are in place
when using portable grinders.
 Never exceed maximum RPM’s of the grinder. Check the maximum speed on the wheel
and compare it to the grinder, reference manufacturer specification on both the grinder
and the wheel.
 When mounting the wheel check for cracks and defects and do not over tighten the
mounting nut.
 Before grinding run newly mounted wheels and check for any vibrations.
 Do not use grinders near flammable materials.
 Never use a grinding wheel for a job that it not intended for i.e.; cutting.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 66
  Secure dust attachment and make sure the seal is in good working order.
 Ensure the vacuum canister is empty and cleaned before each use.
 Clean filters and brushes (with air compressor, observing proper pep requirements) each
time the grinder is used.
 Because the grinder plugs into the vacuum, ensure the amperage on the grinder does
not exceed the amperage on the vacuum.
 If required set the vacuum to filter vibration mode.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 67
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 68
18.27 Guardrails
Safe Work Practice
Hazard ranking: A

Guardrails are the first and best component in a fall protection system and must be used
wherever practical. They can be made of wood or metal and either manufactured at the work
site or pre-engineered.
Consult provincial regulations for details. In general, follow these guardrail safe work practices:
 Install guardrails wherever there is a hazard of falling 1.22 m (4 ft) or more from a
permanent level or 3.05 m (10 ft) or more from a temporary level
 Install guardrails for work over water if a drowning hazard exists (Ask the Supervisor to
contact the appropriate provincial authorities if you have a concern in this regard)
 Guardrails must have top rails, mid-rails, and toe boards that meet provincial
requirements. Unless legislation dictates more stringent requirements, the following is
recommended:
o Install top rail at 1.06m (42”) high. (Dressed 2x4)
o Install mid rail in between platform and top rail.
o Install toe boards so they extend 152.4 mm (6”) above the working surface
o Vertical supports must be spaced no further that 2.4 m (8 ft) over center
 If wire rope is used as an alternative to rails, it must meet provincial requirements
 If it is impractical to use fall-prevention devices such as guardrails, use fall-arresting
devices
 If fall-prevention devices must be removed for work to proceed, obtain permission to
remove them from the Supervisor
 When fall-prevention devices are temporarily removed, workers must be protected by
fall-arresting equipment
 Replace guardrails and barricades that have been temporarily removed as quickly as
possible
 Openings and holes through roofs or floors must have a guardrail and a toe board or be
covered with a cover (strong enough to support any load placed on it) that is anchored,
secured, and marked with a warning sign indicating the nature of the hazard (but the
cover will not be considered a solid surface)
When the rail is down, workers must be in fall protection

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 69
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 70
 18.28 Hand Held Circular Saw
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

This type of power hand tool is one of the most commonly used in construction. Because of this
common use, there are numerous accidents due to thoughtless acts.
The following are the minimum accepted practices to be used with this saw.
 Approved safety equipment such as safety glasses or a face shield is to be worn.
 Where harmful vapours or dusts are created, approved breathing protection is to be used.
 The proper sharp blade designed for the work to be done must be selected and used.
 The power supply must be disconnected before making any adjustments to the saw or
changing the blade.
 Before the saw is set down be sure the retracting guard has fully returned to its down
position.
 Both hands must be used to hold the saw while ripping.
 Maintenance is to be done according to the manufacturer’s specifications.
 Ensure all cords are clear of the cutting area before starting to cut.
 Before cutting, check the stock for foreign objects or any other obstruction which could
cause the saw to “kick back.”
 When ripping, make sure the stock is held securely in place. Use a wedge to keep the
stock from closing and causing the saw to bind.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 71
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 72
18.29 Hand Tools
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C
Hand tool is a generic term used to cover non-powered tools such as hammers, screwdrivers,
wrenches, and pliers.
Do not use a hand tool without training or familiarity with that tool. All tools must be checked to
ensure they are in proper working order and free of defects.
Hand tools safe work practices
Follow these safe work practices when using hand tools:
 Only use tools for the job they are intended to be used for
 Do not apply excessive pressure on tools
 Do not carry sharp tools in pockets
 Carry sharp tools in a heavy belt or apron
 Hang tools at your sides, not behind your back
 Carry tools in a way that allows you to use both hands when climbing a ladder or
climbing on a structure
 Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) (safety glasses, gloves, etc.)
 Inspect tools for defects prior to use
 Maintain tools carefully (keep them clean and dry and store them properly after use)
 Replace cracked and broken handles on files, hammers, sledges, and screw-drivers
 Re-dress burred or mushroomed heads of striking tools
 Exercise extreme caution when using tools near live electrical circuits
 Do not use cushion grip handles as a replacement for insulated handles
 Pull on wrenches and pliers
 Do not push on wrenches and pliers unless you are using an open hand
 Face an adjustable wrench forward and turn the wrench so the pressure is against the
permanent jaw
 Do not increase leverage by adding sleeves to increase tool length
 Do not cut or chip towards yourself when using cutting tools or chisels
 Do not re-dress, grind, weld, or heat-treat hammer heads
 Do not use one hammer to strike another
 Do not use a dull chisel
 Re-dress heat-treated tools with a whetstone, not a grinder
 Do not use C-clamps to construct scaffolds or platforms for workers
 Do not hoist with C-clamps
 Use special lifting clamps to hoist

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 73
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 74
18.30 HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) Vacuums
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

HEPA filters do a great job filtering hazardous contaminants out of the air to protect workers,
however improper cleaning and use of HEPA filters in vacuums and other ‘dustless’ equipment
creates an additional hazard to the worker.
 Prior to set up and use, a FLHA should be completed to assess and control all hazards
 Always inspect filters, canisters and bags to ensure everything is correctly attached,
clean and ready for use.
 Check the canister regularly, an overfilled canister in some ‘dustless’ tools and HEPA
vacuums may pose a fire hazard.
 Improper connection of the filter or bag turns a dust collector into a dust spreader
creating a hazard for unprotected workers in the workplace.
 Always use the same control measures and PPE (safety glasses, steel toed boots, hard
hat and respirator) as you would when working with the hazardous product (mould,
silica, etc.) as you would when cleaning the dustless tools and vacuums.
 Use barricades and/or signs when cleaning out equipment to ensure unprotected
workers are not at risk.
 When using a HEPA filter for a hazardous product (mould, silica, etc.), the material must
not remain in the vacuum during storage as other workers may not be aware of the
hazard.
 Any waste from a dust collection system should be disposed of into a sealed, labelled,
heavy-duty garbage bag to avoid exposure to anyone in the vicinity of the waste bin.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 75
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 76
18.31 Hoisting
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A
Hoisting is the process of lifting any object by crane, boom truck, or winch.
Hoisting Safe Work Practices
Follow these safe work practices when hoisting:
 Determine the weight of the object or load prior to a lift to make sure that the lifting
equipment can operate within its capabilities (as per legislation, a load calculation must
be completed if the load is within 75% of the lifting capacity of the crane). Position the
lifting device immediately above the estimated centre of gravity or the point of balance
 Estimate the center of gravity or point of balance. The lifting device should be positioned
immediately above the estimated center of gravity.
 Prepare a place to land the load
 Lower the load gently
 Make sure the load is stable before slackening the sling or chain
 Make sure a tagline of non conductive synthetic rope is used to control the load, unless
there is a situation where their use could increase danger to the worker
 Select only slings appropriate for the lift
 Do not exceed the working load limits
 Use slings of proper reach
 Do not shorten a line by twisting or knotting with chain slings
 Do not use bolts or nuts as a shackle
 Do not permit anyone to ride the lifting hook or the load
 Make sure all personnel stand clear from the load being lifted
 Do not allow anyone to work under a suspended load
 Do not leave a load suspended when the hoist or crane is unattended
 Inspect all slings thoroughly at specified intervals
 Maintain all slings in good condition
 Inspect each chair or sling for cuts, nicks, bent links, and other damage before each use
 Remove damaged or frayed slings from service

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 77
  Install safety latches on all sling hooks where there is a danger of dislodgement of the
load
 Ensure that safety latches on hooks are in good working condition
 Ensure that the Signaller is properly identified
 Make sure the Signaller understands the techniques of proper signalling
 Make sure a tagline is used to control the load where appropriate
 Refer to the safe work practice 18.46:Rigging

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 78
18.32 Hot Work Permit
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A
Hot work includes welding, torch cutting, grinding, brazing, flame soldering, thawing pipes with
torches, and other work where there is potential for fire.
A Hot work permit may be required in advance of any work requiring heat or open flame within a
facility under the management of Stuart Olson.
Hot work permit safe work practices
These hot work practices apply to all employees or subcontractors carrying out or assisting in
the above noted type of work on any Company work site. They outline the requirements for the
issuance of Form 18: Hot work permit prior to undertaking of any cutting, welding, soldering, any
work requiring open flame within a facility under the management of The Company.
The Supervisor is charged with the direct responsibility for ensuring that this policy is known to
and complied with by employees and persons subcontracted to The Company.
Supervisory staff at the site must complete a hazard assessment and review. Advise all
Supervisors and their workers prior to the beginning of their workday that a permit is required.
A Company Supervisor or representative will issue all permits.
These safe work practices regarding Form 18: Hot work permits must be followed:
 Permits must be issued before performing a hot work procedure
 No work shall begin until the proper permits are issued
 Permits will be issued daily to cover inside work
 Permits may be issued for longer periods for outside work
 The permits must be retained by the Contractor throughout the duration of the working
hours and must be available for inspection by any Company representative
 A Hot work permit must be displayed in the work location and be available to workers
 Only a Company representative can grant permit extensions
 Verbal permission to continue work by unauthorized personnel will be seen as a breach
of the health and safety regulations
 The contractor’s representative and a Company representative must sign the permits

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 79
  Precautions for fire prevention in areas where hot work is being done will include
isolating hot work activities and removal or control of hazards in the vicinity, and may
include providing a Fire watch
 As required, fire watch/Hot work area monitoring may include some or all the following:
o Fire watch will be provided during and for 30 minutes after work including any
coffee or lunch breaks
o Monitor hot work area for 2 hours after job completion when the subject of
insurance is substantially of wood frame construction
o Fire watch will be supplied with suitable extinguishers
o Fire watch will be trained in use of fire extinguishers
o Fire watch will know the procedure for sounding the alarm if there is a fire
o Fire watch will know the procedure for notifying occupants, Company personnel,
and the fire department if there is a fire
o Fire watch may be required for adjoining areas, above, and below an area where
hot work is being done
o Hot work area must be checked for 4 hours after job is completed
o If a fire occurs, and it is safe to do so, the Fire watch should attempt to extinguish
the fire

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 80
18.33 Housekeeping
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Housekeeping includes the proper storage and maintenance of materials, supplies, and tools,
as well as maintaining general site order and cleanliness. Good housekeeping is important for
safety and improves on site productivity.
Housekeeping safe work practices
Follow these safe work practices regarding work site housekeeping:
 Plan the site so that adequate storage areas are available, including areas allocated to
trade contractors
 Keep work areas clean and free from obstructions at all times
 Keep work areas organized so that vehicle and pedestrian traffic can move freely
 Do not leave tools, loose objects, oil, grease, or other materials lying around (they may
cause slipping and tripping incidents)
 Ensure stairways and exits are clear of all hazards and obstructions
 Clean work areas at the end of a shift, immediately after finishing a job, or as necessary
 Clean up spilled toxic, flammable, or corrosive materials immediately using the method
described in the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
 Keep roads, walks, and yard areas clean by depositing refuse in designated containers
 Place garbage containers in convenient locations
 Ensure proper use of garbage cans
 Do not allow the build-up of combustible garbage
 Materials, tools, and equipment must not be stored in stairways, corridors, passageways
, exits, on catwalks, ramps, or overhead
 Keep electrical cords and hoses tied above, or to one side of, stairways and work areas
 Do not dispose of broken glass and other “sharps” in regular trash containers
 Stack and secure all material properly to prevent sliding, falling, or collapse
 Store pipe, conduit, and bar stock in racks or stacked and blocked to prevent movement
 Stack or store all materials in a manner that permits safe entry to, and exit from, the
work area
 Maintain a spill kit at the work place for spilled material
 Consult the MSDS and the manufacturer’s instructions for the cleanup of (WHMIS)
controlled or toxic materials

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 81
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 82
18.34 Jackhammering
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Jackhammering is the breaking up of concrete by mechanical means. This type of concrete

demolition job is commonly seen on a construction site and can be electric or air driven
(pneumatic).
Jackhammering safe work practices
Follow these safe work practices when jack hammering:
 Familiarize yourself with the jackhammer operation prior to commencing work – use the
right size jackhammer for the task.
 Ensure the correct bit is used for the job and that the clip is in good working order to hold
the bit in place. Discard any broken or damaged bits.
 Jackhammers can be heavy, to minimize strain on the body, use good ergonomics when
lifting and moving a jackhammer, always lift a jackhammer by the handles and use
storage racks to avoid picking up a jackhammer off the ground.
 Jackhammers can strain our joints and contribute to muscle fatigue after prolonged use,
ensure operators trade off every 30 minutes of continuous use or at the first sign of
numbness or tingling in the extremities.
 Where reasonably practicable, jackhammers or similar vibratory equipment will be fitted
with anti-vibration devices to help mitigate repetitive strain-type injuries.
 Workers will wear anti-vibration gloves when operating such equipment
 Use approved safety equipment such as safety glasses or face shield, work gloves, and
hearing protection
 Control dust levels or wear respiratory protection, such as a dust mask or respirator
 Determine the locations of any services that could be damaged from demolition
 Make sure that workers using jack hammers are fully trained to perform the operation
 Make sure the working surface is safe

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 83
 When using an electric jackhammer, do the following:
 Check extension cords, switches, and other components before use
 Use only the extension cord gauges that suit the tool amperage and cord length
 Use power feed cords that are three-wire cords with three-prong plugs and use
grounded three-pole receptacles
 Use a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) in wet areas
When using air tools, do the following:
 Use approved safety equipment such as safety glasses or a face shield, gloves, and
hearing protection
 Tie air hoses together
 Secure quick-couplers with wire to prevent disconnecting
 Always shut off the air supply and release the air in the lines before disconnecting fittings
 If using a pneumatic jackhammer, the operator must be familiar with the use and
inspection of the air compressor, couplings and hoses
When using a Skid steer-mounted hydraulic concrete breaker, do the following:
 Ensure that the operator is trained in its operation
 Use approved safety equipment such as safety glasses or a face shield and hearing
protection

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 84
18.35 Extension Ladders
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B
Ladders are used to access heights or as a temporary work platform for short periods. Before
using, ensure ladders are in good condition and it is the right ladder for the job.
Ladders (Portable/Extension) Safe Work Practices
When using a portable ladder or an extension ladder, do the following:
 Inspect the ladder for defects prior to use
 Remove from service all ladders with broken rungs, split rails, worn or broken safety
feet, or frayed or damaged ropes
 When setting up a ladder, secure the base and “walk” the ladder up into place
 Set the ladder at the proper angle, a ratio of 1 horizontal to every 4 vertical
 Place the ladder feet on a firm surface
 Make sure the ladder is secured at top and bottom against movement
 Do not work from the top 2 rungs of a ladder
 Only 1 person at a time should use a ladder
 Extend ladders used for ascending or descending from one level to another at least 1 m
(39”) above the upper landing
 Do not overreach to the side while on a ladder (climb down and move the ladder over a
few feet to a new position)
 Always face the ladder when using it
 Grip the ladder firmly and use the three-point contact method when moving up or down
 The minimum overlap on an extension ladder should be 1 meter (3.28 ft.) unless the
manufacturer specifies the overlap
 Keep both metal and wood ladders away from electrical sources
 Lock or block doors when ladders are used in front of them
 Do not use ladders in horizontal position as runways or scaffolds
 Do not carry anything while ascending or descending a ladder
 Keep hands free for 3-point contact at all times while climbing
 Use only CSA approved ladders
 Observe the following ladder length limits:
o Trestle ladders, extension sections, or base sections of extension trestle ladders
– 4.88m (16 ft)
o Single ladders – 9.14m (30 ft)
o Extension ladders (two sections) – 14.6m (48 ft)
o Minimum lap for ladders up to 10.97m (36 ft) - .914m (3 ft) lap
o Minimum lap for ladders 11m (36 ft) to 14.6m (48 ft) - 1.22m (4 ft) lap

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 85
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 86
18.36 Stepladders
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Stepladders are used to access objects or work areas that are out of reach.
Ladders (Stepladders) Safe Work Practices:
Follow these safe work practices when using a stepladder:
 Make sure that the stepladder is the correct ladder for the job to be done
 Make sure that the stepladder is in good condition
 Only use stepladders on clean and even surfaces
 Do not do work from the top 2 steps of a stepladder (count the top platform as a rung)
 When the stepladder is in the open position ready for use, the incline of the front step
section must be a ratio of 1 horizontal to 4 vertical
 Only use a stepladder in the fully opened position with the spreader bars locked
 Do not use the top of a stepladder as a support for a scaffold
 Do not overreach to the side while on a stepladder (climb down and move the ladder
over to a new position)
 Use only CSA standard ladders
 When working from a stepladder beside a raised floor perimeter, use a harness and tag
line securely attached to the building structure at all times
 Observe ladder length limit of 6.10m (20 feet)

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 87
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 88
18.37 Lightening Action Protocol
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Lightning is a natural occurrence that affects our day to day operation typically in the warm
months. The idea behind having a plan is so that all affected workers are adequately educated
with regard to the risk of lightning strike and the best way to mitigate this risk. Workers that are
most at risk are working in or on towers, tanks, large open areas or cranes (riggers); this plan will
encourage awareness on where to go in the event of a lightning storm. The key individuals who
will be involved in invoking this plan will be the Company superintendent, Foreman, safety
coordinators or any worker who feels that an unsafe condition exists due to an impending storm;
these people will be responsible to notify any other effected workers in the area.
When to act:
At the first sign of an impending storm, towering thunderheads, darkening skies, increasing wind the
onsite designate (or any worker affected by lightning) will follow the 30/30 guideline to determine when
to execute the lightening action plan. If clouds are developing with an anvil shaped head, they see
lightning or hear thunder, there is an immediate danger of a strike and the lightning action plan must be
implemented.
30/30 guideline
 If there is a flash of lightning, use the “Flash to Bang” or “30/30’ rule for assessing the
risk. The rule of thumb is that every three seconds of delay between a lighting flash and
the audible thunder associated with the flash equates to a distance of approximately one
kilometer. This is recognized as a considerable risk and the next strike could be at the
weather watchers location, there for the work that is being done in at risk areas should
be suspended and workers moved to the designated safe areas.
 Wait at least 30 minutes after the last flash before leaving the sheltered area. NOTE:
Research indicates that 50% of lightning related deaths occur after the storm has
passed and most people think the storm is over.
Safe and not so safe locations during a thunderstorm
No place is absolutely safe from lightning strikes; however some places are safer than others.
Safe structures:
Large, enclosed structures (substantially constructed buildings) tend to be much safer than
smaller or open structures. A building with electric and telephone wiring and plumbing provide a
safe pathway for the current to the ground. The risk of lightning injury depends on whether the
structure incorporates lightning protection, construction materials used and the size of the
structure. In general, fully enclosed metal vehicles ─ such as cars, trucks,

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 89
 buses, vans and fully enclosed farm vehicles ─ with the windows rolled up provide good shelter
from lightning. Avoid contact with metal or conducting surfaces outside or inside the vehicle.
Unsafe locations and situations:
High places and open fields, isolated trees, unprotected gazebos, rain or picnic shelters,
communications towers, flagpoles, light poles, seating bleachers (metal or wood), metal fences,
open ground or any object that increases an individual’s height.
When inside a building avoid:
• Use of the telephone other than mobile/cordless (80 per cent of persons injured during
electrical storms have been using the telephone)
• Taking a shower
• Washing your hands
• Doing dishes
• Contact with conductive surfaces with exposure to the outside such as metal door or
window frames, electrical wiring or conduit, telephone, TV wiring, plumbing, steel studs
etc

Desperation position
This is a suggested position to increase the survivability of receiving a lightning strike. When no other
safe option exists and you are completely isolated from protection and you feel the hair on your arms
and the back of your neck stand up, or if you feel a tingling sensation, this is a indicator that lightning is
about to strike nearby. This position will enhance survivability by encouraging lightning to strike your
back (avoiding your heart and head) and travel to the ground through the balls of your feet.
 Drop to the kneeling position
 Bend forward keeping your head very low
 Place your hands over your ears and close your eyes
 Rest as much body weight as possible on the balls of your feet, while keeping your feet
together (touching)
 Do not allow any other body parts to touch the ground
 Never lay flat on the ground.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 90
18.38 Lock-out
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Lock-out is the physical disabling of electrical, mechanical, plumbing, or steam systems to

prevent them from being inadvertently energized during maintenance or repair.
A lock-out policy protects personnel who are working on equipment and protects equipment
from damage. Before the start-up/operation of any machinery or equipment, measures must be
taken to prevent accidental movement that could endanger workers.
There may be a variance in specific procedures for specific equipment on specific sites, which
makes it absolutely essential that Owner, Contractor, and worker act as a team to accomplish
certain jobs.
Lock-out requirements come into effect when a system or pieces of equipment represent a
potential hazard to life and property. It applies to all energy sources, such as compressed air,
hydraulics, steam, gravity, electricity, piping, and vessels.
Lock-out equipment consists of a number of items:
 Scissor type "gang lock"
 Individual worker lock(s) (locks to be individually identified)
 Keyed lock(s) (combination locks must not be used)
 Log book (contains the number of the lock and the worker it was issued to)
 Information tags with the notification of work written on it
Lock-out safe Work Practices
Follow these lock-out safe work practices:
 No personnel will work on equipment that represents a safety hazard unless it is locked
out
 The Superintendent must determine what has to be locked out
 The Superintendent must designate a responsible worker to assist in locating the
necessary switches, drives, etc. that must be locked out
 A pre-job meeting with the Superintendent and all workers involved in the operation must
take place
 A Supervisor working on the equipment or the designate will install a scissor type gang
lock on the isolating device
 The Supervisor or the designate must satisfy themselves that the equipment is correctly
locked-out

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 91
  Each worker working on the equipment must place their own lock on the isolating
device(s)
 Information tag(s) which have the company name, the Supervisor’s name, and the date
must be attached to the equipment to advise others that the equipment has been
isolated and locked out
 Workers must remove the lock they placed on a piece of equipment when they are no
longer working with it
 After the work is completed and after personal locks have been removed, the Supervisor
must make a final check of the equipment before removing the Supervisor’s lock to
assure that it is safe to operate before proceeding with the clearing of lock-out
 If a worker has left the site (quit, discharged, or injured), the personal lock(s) of that
worker must be removed from service until the keys are recovered
 No one may remove a personal lock that is not their own
 The unauthorized removal of a lock will result in immediate dismissal of the
worker who removed the lock from the work site
 A master key for all personal locks must be kept by the Company Supervisor in a secure
location and may only be used by that Supervisor or a designate
 If double-shift work is being done, the workers leaving the site must remove their locks
and the workers coming on shift must immediately replace those locks with their own
locks
Lock Removal by Others
If you are in doubt about lock-out practices or procedures, contact your Supervisor or the
Company Safety Representative. When another person removes a personal lock, the following
must be done:
 The owner of the personal lock must be identified
 All reasonable efforts must be made to contact the worker who placed the lock and have
that worker come back and remove the lock
 If the worker cannot be contacted or is incapable of removing the lock, the Company
representative must ensure that no process or machinery will be damaged by the
removal of the lock
 A representative of The Company must be present when locks are removed
 Lock removal should be done with the master key
 Do not cut the lock off if there is another way to remove the lock
 All information regarding personal lock removal must be documented on the Lock
removal form, which can be obtained from the Safety Supervisor
Note: Inform the worker who placed the lock of the lock removal prior to that worker’s return to
work

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 92
 These requirements are intended to supplement, but not replace, any provincial requirements or
contractor's contractual requirements.
In some cases, the client will require that their existing lock-out procedure be used, but in no
case are Company workers to work to a lesser standard than is set out in this procedure.
Lock-out Log
The Lock-out log must be used in conjunction with the lock-out procedures. The log is to be kept
by the Supervisor in a secure location and only the Supervisor or someone designated by the
Supervisor may make entries.
Follow these practices regarding lock-out logs:
 Make all entries in ink
 Do not erase or make corrections over existing writing
 Do not remove spoiled pages

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 93
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 94
18.39 Materials Handling and Storage
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Every worker and Supervisor has a role to play in the safe handling and storing of materials.
Good housekeeping, proper lifting and loading procedures, and proper packaging are important.
Provincial legislation and regulations cover material handling and storage and should be
referred to for further information. Where required, a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must
be readily available at the work site.
Materials Handling and Storage Safe Work Practices
Follow these material handling and storage safe work practices:
 Refer to the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) and Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) if uncertain regarding the proper handling procedures for a
material
 Determine how the material will be transported
 Do not exceed the recommended load limits of vehicles used in handling material
 Wherever possible, use trucks, boom trucks, forklifts, dollies, carts, wheelbarrows, and
hoists when moving material
 Ensure the vehicle operator is skilled enough for the job at hand and has good visibility
 Where possible, palletize material
 Do not pile material too high in order to prevent toppling over or instability
 When material arrives at a job site, check it for breakage or spillage before unloading it
 If there a fire risk due to the material type, keep the material away from potential ignition
sources
 Check for power line hazards
 Search for dangers along the route that the material has to move through (tight corners,
stairs, obstructions, etc.)
 Instruct workers on the objectives and procedures of materials handling
 Ensure that there are enough workers to do the job correctly
 Ensure that there is a safe working space for workers, equipment, and material
 Ensure that appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) is used

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 95
  When lifting by hand, do the following:
o Lift heavy objects with your legs, not your back, and bend your knees, keep your
back straight, and avoid twisting
o Do not attempt to lift items that are too heavy or bulky
o Plan before you lift, considering weight, size, shape, path of travel, and set-down
location
o Get help with lifting if help is needed or indicated
o Check the object to be lifted for slivers, nails, and sharp edges
o Ensure that you have a clear view and a path for carrying materials
o Ensure that your grip is firm

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 96
18.40 Overhead Power Lines
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

ACTION
 Inspect work site.
o Determine location(s) and hazard potential of all power lines
o Wherever possible, have lines de-energized
Obtain Permit for Work to be Performed
 The Owner must obtain a permit to cross or work near power lines
 The permit will show the names and phone number of contacts
 Prior to starting work, obtain a copy of the permit
Determine the Distance Between Ground
 Power company will provide the level and lowest sag point power line(s) service and the
voltage of each line
 Project Superintendent is responsible to contact the power company
Communicate Details of the Potential Hazard
 To be carried out at Pre-job Orientation with all workers present. Repeat at safety
meetings
NOTE: If any part of “the machine” (mobile crane, truck, derrick, drilling machine, earth
moving equipment, excavating machine or any other equipment) may come within 7 meters
of any electrical transmission or distribution system: notify the power utility or authority that
has control over the electrical system in the area and receive written confirmation from the
power utility or authority that if the voltage is sufficient to endanger the life and safety of an
operator(s) the electrical system is de-energized; effectively guarded against contact; or
rerouted or displaced from the work area.
Determine Size of Equipment and Materials
 Sideboom height etc.
 Trenching equipment height
 Length of pipe
 Crane height
 Vessel height
 Building height
 Truck load height
 Height of all other equipment, materials, loads, etc.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 97
 Establish ”CRITICAL” area
 Where practical, designate the area 15.24m (50ft) parallel to each side of the power line
as a “CRITICAL” area where no construction equipment can operate unless companied
by a watchman.
Line Voltage Additional Clearance
0-5,000 volts 2.0m (6.5 ft)
5,000-50,000 3.0m (9.8 ft)
50,000-250,000 4.5m (14.8 ft)
over 250,000 6.0m (19.7 ft)
 Do not overlook clearance from construction activities, spill piles, etc.
Provide Warning Devices and Supervision
 Position warning signs to identify the “CRITICAL” area. Signs are to be .61 m x 1.22 m
(2 ft by 4 ft) and mounted securely to an “A”
Provide Protection for Workmen when Guiding Equipment
 Tag lines of sufficient length of non-conductive material must be provided
NOTE: This procedure must be enforced during all guiding activities to minimize the
injury potential to personnel
Construction Activities should be Eliminated or Minimized which Require Paralleling
Power Lines
 Select alternate location or route
NOTE: If the selection of an alternate location or route is not feasible, the work area
must be inspected and special safety procedures determined. N.B. Atmospheric
conditions must be closely monitored as temperature, humidity, and wind may dictate
more stringent, safety procedures.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 98
18.41 Pneumatic Tools
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Pneumatic tools discharge high-velocity projectiles used in securing, fastening, and erecting,
and they are often used in roofing, framing, and finishing. Their use requires caution because
they can be accidentally discharged.
Pneumatic tools safe work practices
Follow these safe work practices when using pneumatic tools:
 Allow only authorized, trained, experienced workers to use pneumatic nailing and
stapling tools
 Inspect the pneumatic tool before connecting it to the air supply
 Ensure screws and caps on the tool are securely tightened
 Check any hose for cuts or bulges, and replace any hose found to be defective
 Hold pneumatic tools used for nailing and stapling against the work surface before
pulling the trigger
 Do not disengage or override safety features
 Do not hold operating triggers in the “on” position while moving between work positions
 Do not secure operating triggers in the “on” position under any circumstances
 Disconnect the air supply before making adjustments or repairs to the tool
 Never exceed the manufacturer-specified air pressure for tools, hoses, and fittings
 Do not point the tool towards yourself or others, regardless of whether it is empty or not
 Do not use compressed air to blow debris or clean dust from clothes
 Do not lay hoses across walkways
 Do not hold the material being fastened

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 99
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 100
18.42 Power Blower – Gas Powered

Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Date Created: 12/05/14

Date of Last Revision: 12/05/14

Hazards Identified / Present:

 Noise
 Flying Debris
 Dust
 Vibration
 Burns from Exhaust

Personal Protective Equipment or Devices Required:

 N/P 95 Dust Mask
 Gloves
 Safety Footwear
 Safety Glasses
 Hearing Protection

Training Requirements:
 Instructed on safe use and operation by a competent supervisor.

Safe Work Practices:

Pre-Operational Checks

DO
 Check unit for loose/missing nuts, bolts and screws. Tighten and/or replace as needed.
 Inspect fuel lines, tank and area around carburetor for fuel leaks.
 Follow all manufacture’s safety recommendations in the operator’s manual.
 Ensure all guards are fitted, secure and functional.
 Report faulty or suspect machinery immediately to your supervisor and tag out the equipment.

DO NOT
 Operate the machine if fuel leaks are found.
 Use any attachment or accessory unless it is recommended in the operator’s manual.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 101
Operational Checks
DO
 Be aware of pedestrians, other or animals in the area.
 Operate only at reasonable hours.
 Start the machine upright on a level surface. Check that the blower pipe is not blocked.
 Keep a firm grip.
 Maintain a straight wrist position. Avoid using your wrist in a bent, extended or twisted position.
 Position the muffler side of the engine away from your body to avoid burns.
 Always walk towards your work when using a power blower.
 Maintain footing and balance at all times.
 Keep exhaust area clear of flammable debris.
 Allow engine and muffler to completely cool before performing maintenance activity.
 Use rakes or brooms to loosen debris prior to blowing.
 Pick up debris, bag and dispose.

DO NOT
 Use a higher speed setting than necessary to perform the task.
 Direct the blower in the direction of other people.
 Work on slippery, uneven, or unstable surfaces or in odd positions.
 Work from ladders.
 Refuel a hot engine.

Related Guidance Documents / Standards / Applicable Legislation / Other Practices or Procedures /

Forms:
 Provincial Acts and Regulations
 Manufacturer’s Operation Manual

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 102
18.43 Power Lines and Underground Hazards
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Power lines can be overhead (See Safe Work Practice 18.39) or underground and are closely
regulated by legislation. Safe distances from overhead power lines must be determined and
adhered to. Underground lines must always be located by the power company having
jurisdiction over the power lines in question.
The following power line and underground hazards safe work practices and procedures should
be implemented.
Power Lines and Underground Hazards Safe Work Practices
Follow these safe work practices regarding power lines and underground hazards:
 Notify the power company for a locate of underground lines
 Perform a hazard assessment and ask the following questions:
o What equipment will you be using?
o If constructing a building, will it be too close to the power lines?
o Are the materials and building components being used awkwardly and at risk due
to power line closeness?
 Notify the power company for disconnection or relocation of the line if needed, or have
the line isolated or de-energized
Warning: Under no circumstances shall workers work within the limits of approach specified
in the following table.
Warning: Materials shall not be stacked, scaffolds erected, or tools or equipment operated
closer to power lines than the distances specified in the following table.
VOLTAGE MINIMUM DISTANCE
V to 75 KV 3.05 m (10 ft)
Over 75 KV to 250 KV 4.57 m (15 ft)
Over 250 KV to 550 KV 6m (20 ft)
Note: Sufficient distance must be added to the specified distance to prevent unplanned or
accidental movements bringing the worker, tools, equipment or material within the specified
distance.
The specified distance applies to all parts of the equipment, including booms, hoisting
cables and any part of the load being raised. Distances must be increased to provide for any
change in boom angle, swing of the hoisting cable and the load while it is being raised,
lowered, or moved laterally, to ensure that safe distance is maintained at all times.
Operators must give consideration to the probability of hazard from switching surges,
altitude, humidity, line configuration, wind etc.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 103
 Where required, post signs above buried cables for the duration of construction indicating
the location of the lines
 When power lines are encountered within a work area, the Supervisor must be alerted,
and the Supervisor must determine the voltage and minimum distance required and
complete any forms required
 When job circumstances require that work be done closer than the limits of approach
stated above, the following must be done prior to commencing work:
o Obtain a signed assurance in writing from the person(s) controlling the electrical
system (The assurance must state that during the work period, the electrical
conductors will be de-energized or effectively guarded against contact, or
displaced/re-routed from the work area)
o Make the assurance available for inspection at the project site
o Use a trained signaller
o Keep an eye out overhead at all times
o Look out for uneven ground that may cause a vehicle to bounce or weave
o Never ride or climb on equipment or a load when near a power line
o Do not ground equipment around a power line
o Remember electricity is invisible and do not take chances near it
o If a power line comes in contact with your vehicle, stay in the vehicle until help
arrives
Striking a Power Line Procedure
If you strike a power line, do the following:
15. Report the details of the incident to the power company that controls the line (the power
company will inspect and repair the area).
16. Report the incident to the head office of the provincial safety authorities.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 104
18.44 Power Tools
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Power tools include both corded and cordless devices such as saws, drills, and vacuums. Care
and caution must be exercised when they are used.
Power tools safe work practices
Follow these safe work practices when using power tools:
 Inspect power tools, power cords, and electrical fittings for damage (including broken or
inoperative guards) prior to each use
 Repair or replace damaged equipment
 Do not use a defective power tool
 Do not wear gloves, loose clothing, or jewellery while using revolving power tools
 Switch power tools “off” before connecting them to a power supply
 Do not use electric tools in wet or damp locations unless the tool is connected to a
ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)
 Ensure that power tools are properly grounded (three-prong plug) or are double
insulated
 Keep power cords clear of tools during use
 When possible, suspend power cords over aisles or work areas to avert stumbling or
tripping hazards
 Do not carry electrical tools by the power cord
 Avoid octopus connections
 Wear safety glasses or goggles when using power tools for grinding, cutting, chipping,
and sanding operations
 Wear hearing protection when operating power tools

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 105
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 106
18.45 Propane
Safe Work Practice
Hazard ranking: A

Since propane is heavier than air and invisible, it is a special concern when it is used on the job-
site.
All installations and use of this product on the job-site must comply with the Government
Legislation set out for its safe use.
Suppliers delivering the product or setting up the equipment at the site must be part of the safe
work practice.
 Ropes, chains and slings shall not be used to suspend cylinders, unless cylinder was
designed for such
 Where appropriate lifting attachments have not been provided on the cylinder/container,
suitable cradles or platforms to hold the containers shall be used for lifting.
 “Lifting lugs” provided on tanks are typically designed for lifting empty cylinders only. Do
not use these lugs to hoist full or partially full cylinders
 Tank valves and regulators are to be removed from the tank prior to any movement of the
tank
 Crane hooks shall be equipped with a “safety latch”
 All trucks, cranes or equipment used to handle propane tanks must be equipped with a
fire extinguisher appropriate for the size and type of tank being handled
 Except in an emergency, any movement or repositioning of tanks shall be performed by a
competent worker
 Tanks are not to be heated to increase flow
 Propane bottles, especially when being used, are to be securely held in an upright position.
Secure cylinders with rope, wire, or chain to keep them upright
 Store cylinders where they won’t be struck by falling materials or moving equipment
 Never store cylinders in enclosed, unventilated places such as trailers
 Tanks are not to be hooked up and used without proper regulators
 Only cylinders in use should be inside a building. 420 lb. cylinders are not permitted
indoors. They must be stored and connected for use outside the building
 Keep propane cylinders at least 4.57 m (15 ft), but no more than 15.24m (50 ft), away from
the heaters to which they are connected

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 107
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 108
18.46 Respiratory Protective Equipment Code of Practice
Safe Work Practice
Hazard ranking: A
Complete Form 86: Respiratory User Screening Form
Assessment of Needs
Respirators are designed for specific purposes to meet the certain needs within a well-defined
set of limitations. Air purifying types of respirators are very specific in the types and
concentrations of contaminants they will protect against. Therefore, there are several important
factors to consider in determining when and what types of respiratory protective devices are
required.
Atmospheric Oxygen
If it is likely that at any time the work environment will contain less than 19 kilopascals partial
pressure of oxygen (approx. 19% by volume), then an air supplying respirator is required.
This type of respirator will not be dealt with here as this requires much more specific
information and training.
Atmospheric Contaminants
For concentrations of contaminants like dust, mist, fumes or vapors which are not
immediately dangerous to life and health but are in excess of the Occupational Exposure
Limit, the appropriate air purifying type of respirator will, in most cases, suffice.
Adequate Warning Properties
Warning properties (odor, taste or irritancy) of airborne contaminants are important when air-
purifying types of respirators are employed. As chemical cartridge filters absorb
contaminants they gradually become saturated to the point where their air purifying
capability decreases markedly. When it does, a condition known as “break- through” occurs
and the contaminants pass through with increasing concentration.
Therefore, because it is impossible to predict the useful life span of air purifying chemical and/or
HEPA cartridges, the user may have to depend upon the odor or taste of the contaminants to
signal the end of cartridge life.
Comfort and Duration of Use
Although comfort and duration are rather subjective areas of concern in respirator selection,
they are important because ultimately they affect the user's willingness to accept the devices
and use them properly.
Two of the most important factors affecting comfort and duration of use are face piece size and
temperature extremes.
Not all faces are the same size; therefore, it may be necessary to try a model of respirator that
comes with different sizes of face piece. If a respirator is not compatible with the users face
size or features, comfort is compromised in order to achieve a good mask to face seal. A
compromise fit is one where the device is forced to fit resulting in uncomfortable pressure points
and straps, which are usually too tight.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 109
 If a respirator is required in an environment where it is either very hot or cold, other unique
problems arise.
In a warm environment where hard physical activity is required, the user sweats, the face seal
becomes uncomfortable, the mask shifts around more easily, and leaks are more likely to occur.
In cold environments, fogging inside full-face piece masks is often a problem. Nose cups
mounted inside the face piece in addition to the use of anti-fogging solutions applied to the visor
will help.
Care, Use and Limitations
User Training and Fit Testing
All personnel required to use respiratory protective equipment must be trained in the
following areas. A record of this training must be kept.
Need
User acceptance of respiratory protective devices and their willingness to use it properly
depends on their full understanding of when and why respiratory protection is necessary
and why other controls are not feasible.
Each situation and application where respiratory protection is required will differ;
therefore such discussion will need to be specific to suit the circumstances.
Limitations
It is essential that anyone using a respiratory protective device be made aware of the
capabilities and limitations of the device and under what circumstances protection will be
provided, when it will not, and why.
The understanding of why chemical filter and/or HEPA filter cartridge life is not
predictable is also important. Filter cartridge longevity will depend mainly on the
following factors:
 The breathing rate and lung capacity of the individual
 The airborne concentration of the contaminant which the filter is absorbing
 The presence of other atmospheric contaminants which may impair cartridge
capacity or efficiency
Other factors may include temperature extremes, high humidity, or other interfering
gases.
Excessive airborne particulate matter may physically plug up the porous surface of the
filter media, increasing breathing resistance.
Respirators and Facial Hair
It is imperative that clean smooth skin be in contact with the respirator face piece. Even
a mild growth of whiskers may interfere and cause leakage. Moustaches and small
beards that fit entirely inside the respirator may create problems in that hair may easily
become lodged in the exhalation valve and again cause leakage.
Correct Fit
Achieving a correct fit is critical. Wearing a respirator face piece that does not seal
properly around the face defeats the purpose of the respirator and gives the wearer a
false sense of security and protection.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 110
 There are two methods, which may be used to verify that an adequate fit is achieved, the
qualitative and quantitative fit tests.
Qualitative testing is relatively simple and fast, can be performed in the field, and
includes a positive and negative pressure check. To perform the negative pressure
check, the wearer covers the inlet and inhales. The face piece should collapse slightly
and no leaks should be felt against the wearers face. The positive pressure check is
similar except that the wearer exhales gently with the exhalation valves covered and the
face piece should expand slightly.
After the user is satisfied that a good fit has been achieved, aerosol tests using irritant
smoke or isoamyl acetate (banana oil) are highly recommended. The aerosol is
released around the edges of the respirator face piece and if the wearer smells it then
the respirator must be readjusted and the test repeated until no odors can be detected.
Irritant smoke is recommended.
The positive and negative pressure fit check should also be performed each time a
respirator is worn. It is simple, takes only a minute and once the user is familiar with the
respirator, it helps to ensure a good fit every time.
Annual aerosol fit testing is recommended because it reinforces user confidence and
the need for a proper fit.
Quantitative tests are more sophisticated and involve the monitoring of actual
contaminant concentrations inside the respirator face piece. For our purposes,
quantitative fit testing is not practical.
Precaution Summary
Leave the area immediately if:
 Breathing becomes difficult
 Adverse effects become apparent, i.e. nausea, dizziness, fatigue, etc.
 Taste or smell of contaminant becomes apparent
Inspections, Maintenance, Cleaning and Storage
This is a very important part of a respiratory protection program. A maintenance
schedule is necessary. Respirators must be cleaned and inspected daily for faults by
routine users or as often as required by occasional users. If they are shared by different
persons they need to be sanitized properly, not just wiped between uses.
Most air purifying types of respirators are quite simple to clean and maintain. Listed
below is a set of simple procedures to maintain and care for typical cartridge air purifying
respirators.
Inspection and Maintenance Procedure
The respirator must be inspected before each use to ensure it is in proper operating
condition. Any damaged or defective parts must be replaced before use.
1. Where applicable, examine the face piece for cracks, tears and dirt. Examine the
inhalation valves for signs of distortion, cracking or tearing.
2. Check that the head straps are intact and have good elasticity.
3. Examine all plastic parts and gasket areas for signs of cracking and fatigue and
replace if necessary. Remove the exhalation valve cover and examine the
exhalation valve and seat for signs of dirt, distortion, cracking or tearing. The
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 111
 exhalation valve is a critical component of the respirator. Replace the valve if
necessary.
Cleaning and Storage Procedure
Cleaning is recommended after each use.
1. Remove cartridges and / or filters.
2. Gently wash the facemask and rubber parts using warm water and mild
soapsuds, (e.g. dishwashing detergent). DO NOT use bleach, cleansers,
abrasives, alcohol, alkali or other household cleaners or solvents because they
may accelerate deterioration of the rubber. If disinfection is necessary in order to
share a mask, use a commercially available cleaner disinfectant for respirators,
which contains a bactericidal agent.
3. Rinse in fresh, warm water and allow to air-dry in a non-contaminated
atmosphere. Then reassemble.
4. Store in a clean location ready for use, preferably in a sealable plastic bag in a
locker or on a shelf. DO NOT leave the respirator out on a bench or hanging on
a nail in the shop where it gathers dust and is subject to damage and abuse.
5. ALWAYS use approved replacement parts. DO NOT mix and match parts from
one mask to another. and NEVER build makeshift parts for respirators.
General Safety Regulations
Determination of Needs for Equipment
The employer shall determine the degree of danger presented to the worker by the
conditions that are or may be present at the work site and need for respiratory protective
equipment.
In making this determination, the employer shall consider:
 The nature of any contaminants
 The concentration or likely concentration of any airborne contaminants
 The duration or likely duration of the worker’s exposure
 The toxicity of the contaminants
 The warning properties of the contaminant
 Hazard assessment
 MSDS if one is available
Selection of Respiratory Protective Equipment
Based on this determination, the employer shall provide and ensure the availability of the
appropriate respiratory protective equipment required.
Responsibilities
Site Safety Coordinators are responsible for:
 Becoming qualified by appropriate training or experience that is appropriate to
the program
 Overseeing the respiratory protection program and conducts evaluation of the
workplace to ensure the written respiratory protection program is being properly
implemented

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 112
  Determining factors to be evaluated when doing assessment include but are not
limited to the following:
o Respirator fit (including the ability to use the respirator without
interfering with effective workplace performance.)
o Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the employee
is exposed
o Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions that the
employee encounters; and proper maintenance of the respiratory
equipment
o Updating the respiratory protection program to reflect changes in
workplace conditions that affect respiratory use
NOTE: If a safety coordinator is not assigned to the job, supervisory personnel
will assume these responsibilities.
Supervisory Personnel may include general superintendents, assistant superintendents
or foremen. Supervisory personnel are responsible for:
 Identifying all employees under his/her supervision who require respiratory
protection during their work
 Supporting and being actively involved in employee training in the use of
respiratory protection and documenting the training conducted
 Ensuring the proper selection and use of equipment by the employee in any
assignment that requires respiratory protection
 Making management aware of changes in the workplace that could affect the
respiratory protection program
Workers are responsible for:
 Proper use, inspection, care and storage of his/ her assigned protective
equipment in accordance with the instructions and training received
 Notifying their front line supervisor of any malfunction in his/ her equipment
 Assuring that an adequate respirator-to-face fit is achieved each time the
respirator is worn by performing the required “Positive / Negative Fit check”
 Notifying their immediate supervisor of any medical signs or symptoms that are
related to the ability to use respirators
Respirator Selection
Respirators are selected based on the physical, chemical and physiological properties of
the air contaminant and on the concentration likely to be encountered. The quality of fit
and the nature of the work being done also affect the choice of respirators. The
capability of the respirators chosen is determined from appropriate governmental
approvals, manufacturers' tests and experience with the respirators.
Distribution
Respirators are issued to individuals when required. Each respirator, which is
individually assigned, is identified in a way that does not interfere with its performance.
Records
The following records are maintained by:
 The number and type of respirators in use
 A record of employees’ training
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 113
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 114
18.47 Retractable Knives
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

When using a retractable knife, the following safe work practice is to be followed:
 Prior to set up and use, Form 23: Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) should be
completed to assess and control all hazards
 Include gloves (Kevlar if required) as part of the PPE for any task requiring a retractable
knife
 Inspect the tool prior to use to ensure it is not broken/broken pieces
 Extend blade only as far as backing so blade will be supported. If you need a longer
length, a different tool will be required. Once blade is in position, turn “blade tensioned”
so blade will not move while in use
 Always cut away from the body, never towards yourself or co-workers
 Cut in straight lines, never use sideways motions
 Ensure the blades you use are sharp. Once the tip becomes dull, use a pair of pliers to
break off the piece. Before discarding the sharp metal into the garbage bin, wrap it in
many layers of tape to help prevent anyone from getting hurt
 Once your task is complete, unlock the blade by loosening the “blade tensioner,” retract
the blade inside, and then re-tighten the “blade tensioner”. Never leave a piece of blade
extended even if walking away “for a minute” Always double check blade position
before putting tool into a pocket
 The container that holds the replacement blades is generally made of plastic. Be careful
when picking it up as blades may possibly cut through
 Due to various styles of retractable knives, when changing the blade, follow all
manufacturer specs for the specific knife you are using
 Always pay attention, and be careful when using this tool. As with all tools on site
serious injury can result if tool is used incorrectly. If in doubt, ask your
supervisor

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 115
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 116
18.48 Rigging
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Rigging looks like an easy operation that requires no particular skill or experience. But if you
have an idea that just anybody can do it, you’re on the wrong track. Too many workers have lost
fingers or hands or have suffered more serious injuries because they thought, “Anybody can do
that.”
Rigging safe work practices
Here are some dos and don’ts to remember:
 Name one member of the crew to act as a signalman, and instruct the equipment
operator to recognize signals from that person only. The signalman must be careful not
to order a move until an “all ready” signal from each member of the crew.
 Each rigger must be sure they are in the clear before giving an “all ready” to the
signalman. When you have positioned the sling or choker you’re using, release it, if
possible, before you give the “all ready” signal.
 If you must hold the sling or choker in position, be sure your hand is clear of pinch points.
In fact, your hand should be far enough away so there’s no possibility of a frayed wire
catching your glove or jerking your hand into a pinch point (of course, frayed cables
should never be used).
 Watch out for the roll or swing of the load. Since it’s almost impossible to position the
hook exactly over the load center, there will almost always be a swing or roll. Anticipate
the direction of the swing or roll and work away from it.
 Never place yourself between material, equipment or any stationary object and the load
swing. Also, stay away from stacked material that may be knocked over by a swinging
load.
 Never stand under the load, and keep from under the boom as much as possible.
Chances are that nothing will break, but something might.
 Look over the place where the load is to be set. Remove unnecessary blocks or other
objects that might fly up if struck by the load.
 When lowering or setting the load, be sure your feet and all other parts of your body are
out from under. Set the load down easily and slowly so that if it rolls on the blocking, it
will be a slow shift that you can get away from.
 Identify the designated signalman by the use of distinctive vests, armlets, etc.
 Use tag lines to control the leads
For additional information, refer to Section 18.30: Safe Work Practice - Hoisting.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 117
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 118
18.49 Safe Driving
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Driving is amongst the most hazardous tasks performed by our employees. Therefore, it is
expected that employees will follow safe driving practices. Safe driving practices include steps
to ensure the driver’s total concentration and safe operation of vehicles, such as determining
clear directions before departing and not operating a vehicle when the driver’s ability to react is
impaired. The use of cell phones is strictly forbidden while operating a company vehicle. The
use of company provided cell phones is also not permitted while operating a personal vehicle.
Drivers are expected to follow defensive driving principles and Alberta laws and regulations to
prevent incidents in spite of unsafe driving by others and/or adverse driving conditions.
No employee shall be allowed to operate a company motor vehicle without a valid license and
prior authorization. The Company reserves the right to request a copy of an employee’s driving
record (driver’s abstract) if deemed necessary.
Misconduct involving vehicles may be grounds for disciplinary action up to and including
termination. Should discipline become necessary, it shall follow Section 3.10.1: Safety non-
compliance consequences.
Operator Responsibilities
The vehicle operator is responsible for, but not limited to, the following:
 Vehicle visual inspection - tire wear/pressure, mirrors/lights, seat belts (ensure seat belts
work properly), cleanliness (exterior clean to present good company image; interior
clean, box free of debris; windows/mirrors clean)
 Vehicle Maintenance - regular routine services (ensure they are performed when
required), brakes, tires windshields
o Inform equipment manager of work performed.
 Vehicle loads - stacked properly, secured load, flagged if necessary
 Operation - wear seat belts, obey traffic laws, no hitchhikers, no riders on exterior of
vehicles, lock vehicle when unattended
Motor Vehicle Incidents
 Stop immediately
 Take steps to prevent other incidents at the scene
 Call a doctor or ambulance, if necessary
 Notify police
 DO NOT sign any paper(s) or make any statement as to who was at fault

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 119
  Obtain the name, address and telephone number(s) of each witness
 Provide your name, address, place of employment, office number and name of your
supervisor
 Make notes of the following:
o Other driver’s name, address, telephone numbers, driver’s license number,
vehicle license plate number, VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) and vehicle
description
o Name and address of each person involved and extent of injury, if any
o Name and address of company insuring other vehicle(s), policy number and
expiry date
o General information such as location, time, measurements, weather, damage,
brief description of the incident, etc. Take pictures if possible
 If the vehicle is unsafe to operate, have it towed to the nearest garage or service station
 Notify your immediate supervisor and equipment manager as soon as possible
 Submit an incident report to your supervisor and/or Division Safety Supervisor within
one working day
If you are injured, have the police notify your supervisor, who will assume your responsibilities
for reporting the incident

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 120
18.50 Scaffolds (Metal and Wood)
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Metal scaffolds and wood scaffolds require different safe work practices.
Scaffolds (Metal and Wood) Safe Work Practices
Follow these safe work practices regarding metal and wood scaffolds:
Metal Scaffold Safe Work Practices
Each type of metal scaffold has a particular method of assembly. Every worker who constructs a
metal scaffold should be competent and know the manufacturer’s specifications for that type of
scaffold.
The scaffold type best suited for the job and its required load capacity must be determined
before the job begins.
Follow these metal scaffold safe work practices:
 Ensure that the scaffold is the correct one for the job
 Do not intermix frames and components from different manufacturers
 Inspect all scaffold parts and locking devices before use
 Inspect all scaffold parts and locking devices regularly during use
 Make sure the location where the scaffold will be constructed is level or is capable of
presenting secure footing by use of proper mudsills (the mudsill must cross at least 2
separate supports) or other devices
 A competent worker must erect the scaffold
 The scaffold must comply with provincial legislative and regulatory requirements and the
manufacturer’s requirements
 Safe access and egress to both the scaffold and the general work area must be provided
 Do not climb cross braces
 Do not over-extend levelling adjustment screws
 Tower scaffolds must have outriggers or be guyed
 Tower scaffolds must have all component parts secured in place (cross braces, pins,
and lateral braces)
 Scaffold work platforms must have perimeter guardrails designed to withstand 90.75 kg
(200 lb) in any direction applied to any point of the top rail
 The following specifications must be adhered to:
o Horizontal rail – 107 cm (42”) above the platform
o Intermediate rail – a horizontal rail midway between scaffold platform and top rail

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 121
 oToeboard – a horizontal member at platform level no less than 14 cm (5 ½”) in
height or no more than 6 mm (1/4”) clear from the lower edge and the platform.
 For workers employed on stilts or platforms above the scaffold floor, the guard rail must
be increased to a minimum effective height of 1.06 m (42”) or safety belts and lifelines
must be used
 Do not use ladders or other devices on top of scaffold
 Do not overload the scaffold platform with material
 Scaffold planks must be made of number one grade materials with the maximum span of
3.1 m (10.17 ft) on light duty and a maximum span of 2.3 m (7.55 ft) on heavy duty with
a maximum projection beyond the ledger of no more than 300 mm (12 in)
 Rolling scaffolds must only be used on hard, level surfaces
 No one may ride on a rolling scaffold when it is being moved if the height of the work
platform exceeds twice the shortest base dimension of the scaffold
 All tools or material must be removed from a scaffold or secured before moving the
scaffold
 All wheels must be locked in place while in use
Wood Scaffold Safe Work Practices
The construction of wood scaffolds is closely regulated by legislation. Materials and material
dimensions are specified in detail in provincial regulations.
Care must be taken not to build wood scaffolds haphazardly.
Follow these safe work practices regarding wood scaffolds:
 Only competent workers may design, construct, alter, or remove wood scaffolds
 The wooden material used to construct wood scaffolds must be sound, close grained,
and finished on all 4 sides
 A wood scaffold must be able to support 4 times the load that might be imposed on it
 All component parts of a wood scaffold must fit tight together and properly fixed to each
other
 Proper perimeter railing that includes a top rail, an intermediate rail, and a toe board
must be set in place
 Scaffold work platforms must be 500 mm (1.64 ft) wide for light duty and one 1 m (3.28
ft) wide for heavy-duty scaffolds
 When used as a scaffold work platform, the planks of a wood scaffold must be secured
from movement by cleats or by being wired in place
 Scaffold access and egress must be provided to all work platforms by the use of ladders
 Scaffold work platforms must not span more than 2.3 m (7.55 ft) on light duty scaffolds
or 3.1 m (10.17 ft) on heavy-duty scaffolds
Reference: Form 81: Scaffold Inspection Checklist

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 122
18.51 Silica Exposure
Safe Work Practice
Hazard ranking: A
Silica is a naturally occurring mineral found in concrete, grout, masonry block and other common
material such as sand, granite, aggregates, stone, shale, clay, slate and sandstone. Silica can become
a serious occupational hazard when silica dust is created in a workspace without proper PPE and other
control measures in place. Silica is a suspected human carcinogen and with prolonged exposure, can
cause permanent lung damage and sometimes a fatal lung disease called Silicosis.
 Prior to set up and use, Form 23: Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) should be
completed to assess and control all hazards
 Any work that generates dust while working with sand, granite, aggregates, stone, shale
or concrete etc. has the potential to harm workers; tasks such as sweeping of dry
cement or concrete; and drilling, chipping, abrasive blasting or cutting masonry block,
bricks, cement board, concrete; and mixing concrete, grout and mortar have the
potential to harm workers
 The eight hour occupational exposure limit for silica is 0.025mg/m3 at this level silica
dust is not visible therefore; any of the above work requires control measures to be put
in place
 If applicable each worksite must have a site-specific exposure control plan for silica
which must be reviewed annually and be completed for each task which exposure to
silica may occur. (Respirators are only to be used as a secondary protective measure,
never as a primary protective measure)
 Control measures such as negative air units, local ventilation, abatement, dustless
power tools (grinder, jack hammers, chippers, saws, etc.), N95 dust masks/respirators
and eye protection are to be used as required according to the site-specific exposure
control plan for silica
 Enclosed work areas with poor ventilation require the use of a 100 series HEPA filter on
a full-face respirator
 Work areas which may generate silica dust must have warning tape and/or signs to warn
workers of the hazard and the required PPE to enter the affected area
 When using a respirator or N95 dust mask, the user’s face must be cleanly shaven to
ensure a proper seal
 When using a respirator, a fit test must be conducted and recorded. Complete Form 86
Respirator User Screening Form.
 Workers working in an enclosed area with silica dust such as a stairwell or abatement,
must wear protective clothing to ensure workers do not get silica on their street clothes
and decontaminate themselves before entering an area where other workers are not
fully protected from the silica dust

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 123
  Any suspected exposure to silica in the workplace must be immediately reported to your
supervisor and be documented
 Ensure all workers in the area of silica dust are protected from the hazard, if impractical
to use abatement, such as in an occupied building, schedule work after hours

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 124
18.52 Skid Steer
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

When operating a skid steer, the following safe work practices are to be followed:
 Proper clothing
 Appropriate personal protective equipment
 Inspect before each use
 Proper maintenance
 Employee training
 Instruct all workers, particularly spotters and inexperienced workers, to stand clear of the
equipment
 Know the operating characteristics
 Know the maximum capacity
 Use seat belt/restraint bar
 Operate at a safe speed
 Caution while backing
 Know the work area (rough spots, hidden obstruction, drop-offs, weak spots, slippery
surfaces, etc.)
 Overhead hazards
 Power lines
 Underground hazards
 Avoid over-extending the lift arms
 Avoid steep slopes
 Keep back from embankments
 Proper loading and unloading procedures
 Secure vehicle when parked

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 125
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 126
18.53 Structural Steel Erection
Safe Work Practice
Hazard ranking: A
The following safe work practice is to be followed for structural steel erection:
 Drawings, erection procedures certified by a professional engineer, must be prepared in
advance of work and available on site identifying:
o The sequence of erecting the structure
o Procedures for ensuring the stability of the structure during its assemble
o The horizontal and vertical placement of base structures and footings
 Ensure sufficient follow-up is done to ensure that the sequence of work is performed in
accordance with the drawings. If necessary, consult with the engineer and have them
periodically monitor the construction phase of the structure
 Structural erector must provide the superintendent with a copy of their fall protection plan
for their workers. Please keep in mind that legislation does not provide partial exemption
from the need to use fall protection. Workers engaged in connecting structural members
of a skeleton structure, welding, torquing, cross-bridging, etc. must use fall protection
 Qualifications of iron workers who will be employed as riggers, welders, and connectors
require journeyman/apprentice certificates. Welders must be certified by the Canadian
Welding Bureau
 Superintendents must follow-up and ensure that the structural erector has the
appropriate fall protection equipment available on site
 Superintendents must request details from the structural erector on the effect of weather
conditions on their work, and who makes the decision to suspend activity due to
excessive wind, cold, lightning etc.
 Superintendents must ensure that there are no other activities scheduled directly
beneath overhead steel work without alternate overhead protection provisions in place
 Provisions should be in place to ensure that rebar dowels below over head steel work
are bent over. From a safety point of view, it is best to bend the dowels over, rather than
rely on the plastic caps.
 Superintendents should check to verify that the crane operator is certified to operate the
crane being used. Check rigging to ensure it is in good condition. Ensure tag lines are
being used

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 127
  Superintendents must ensure that the structural roof steel is not loaded with other
materials such as Q-Deck, until the roof area has been released and called by the
structural steel foreman
 As a rule, the following is a basic summary of the proper sequence of structural erection:
o Columns and beams are installed
o Tie-joists are installed and bolted
o Open web joists and bridging are installed and welded

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 128
18.54 Swing Stages
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

Swing stages are work platforms that can be raised and lowered against a vertical surface. They
are often used as platforms for workers who clean windows of multi-storey buildings.
Swing Stages Safe Work Practices
Follow these safe work practices when working with swing stages:
 Review the job requirements and the placement of the swing stage at a pre-use planning
session
 The Supervisor or designate must inspect the swing stage equipment prior to use
 Do not use defective equipment
 Check the swing stage for the following:
o Repairs, dents, or worn components on the frame and the stirrups
o The platform must be solid and secure
o The motors and pulleys are working properly (Test each day at no more than
.610 m (2 ft) above ground)
o Wire ropes or clams for signs of whickering, wear, or kinks
o Hoisting motors must be equipped with secondary escape land levers in case of
power failure
o The platform must be equipped with handrails and toe boards
 Protect swing stage ropes from the adverse effects of chemicals
 The total load on the suspension ropes must not exceed 1/10 of the rope’s strength
 Do not use ropes that have knots in them
 Independently anchored lifelines and safety belts must be used for all workers on swing
stages 3.04 m (10 ft) or more above a floor or grade. (This does not apply where a
boatswain's chair is suspended by a block and tackle system manually operated by the
worker in the chair in accord with provincial regulations)
 Thrust outs must have adequate counterweights and anchors
 Thrust outs must be tied back to separate anchors
 Line grabs must be CSA approved and the correct size for the safety line used
 Do not exceed the safe working load specified on the swing stage

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 129
  Operators must use an approved CSA safety harness with minimum 1.83 m (6 ft)
lanyard and shock absorber
 No more than 2 workers may be on the work platform at a time
 Other workers may not work above or below the swing stage
 Ensure proper signage is in place warning people that work is being performed above
 Ensure that the area directly below the swing stage is barricaded to pedestrian and
vehicular traffic

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 130
18.55 Table Saw
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

When operating a table saw, the following safe work practices are to be followed:
 Wear safety glasses, goggles or a face shield at all times while using the saw
 If the cutting operations are dusty, wear a dust mask
 Avoid wearing gloves while operating a table saw
 Avoid long sleeves, ties, dangling jewellery, long hair, or any other loose fitting clothing
while operating a table saw. The clothing could get caught in the blade
 Wear non-slip footwear
 Use a push stick to cut stock that is 150 mm (5.9 in) or less in width
 Use a stop block when you crosscut short lengths
 Position your body so that it is NOT in line with the blade. This is to avoid being injured
by flying sawdust, woodchips or the work
 Always stand firmly on the floor and avoid any awkward operations, this is to avoid
falling into the blade by slipping or losing your balance
 Do not carry on a conversation while cutting. Pay close attention to the work being
performed
 Do not reach behind or over the blade unless it had stopped turning
 Do not leave the saw until the blade has come to a complete stop
 Always disconnect the power prior to changing the blade or performing any other
maintenance operation
 Make sure that the blade has stopped turning before you adjust the table saw
 After any adjustment, make sure that the blade is ‘free’ before you turn on the power
 Ensure the rip fence is parallel to the blade so the stock will not blind on the blade and
be thrown
 Never operate a table saw with the throat plate removed
 Do not make free-hand cuts on the table saw
 After the user is finished using the Dado blade, the table saw guard must be replaced
before user leaves the saw area
 Preferably seasoned, dry flat wood should be cut

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 131
  Work should be released only when it has gone past the blade
 Whenever the stock is lifted or titled above the surface of the table, the saw can shake
the stock, causing you to lose your grip. Losing your grip on a piece means that your
hand can slip towards the saw blade or the work can be forcefully kicked back towards
you
 Check that the stock has no nails, screws, stones etc. in it prior to cutting the wood.
These items can become projectiles and can cause injury
 Do not use the fence and a mitre gauge at the same time
 The fence must not be adjusted while the saw is running

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 132
18.56 Temporary Power
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: A

C-panels are used on construction sites as a source of temporary power. Only qualified
electricians are permitted to tie C-panels in to distribution panels or make any modifications or
repairs.
 All hard wire electrical tie-ins are to be completed by a qualified electrician
 Never use a C-panel as a work bench, saw horse, etc. Use equipment for what/how it is
intended
 Ensure all plug-ins are in good working order
 Ensure all receptacles are GFCI protected (this is Code)
 All covers are to be in place
 Make sure area around C-panel is clean and tidy
 When finished using cords, wrap up and put away

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 133
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 134
18.57 Tiger Torches
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Tiger torches are attached to propane tanks and are used to melt, heat, or thaw. They can be
misused in ways that can make them dangerous.
Tiger Torch Safe Work Practices
These safe work practices must be followed when using a tiger torch:
 The tiger torch operator must be trained in the proper lighting and use of tiger torches
 Make sure an adequate fire extinguisher is nearby when a tiger torch is used
 Do not use tiger torches for heating work areas or thawing lines and equipment
 Ensure that the propane bottles are properly shut off after use
 Make sure that the fuel lines have regulators
 Secure propane bottles in an upright position
 The tiger torch operator must adhere to proper handling and storage of compressed gas
practices

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 135
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 136
18.58 Utility Locates
Safe Work Practice
Hazard Ranking A
All utilities MUST BE properly located prior to performing any “Ground Disturbance” activity.
The process for locating and marking buried utilities will be conducted in accordance with Best
Practices developed in the Common Ground Study and supported by the Common Ground Alliance.
Ground disturbance
Ground disturbance is defined as any work, operation or activity that results in the disturbance of the
earth except:
 cultivation less than 450 mm (1.5 ft) in depth, or
 a disturbance of the earth less than 300 mm (1 ft) in depth provided it does not reduce
the earth cover over a buried pipeline to a height less than that provided when the
pipeline was installed
Agricultural activities such as subsoil aeration and mechanical rock picking are considered ground
disturbances if they disturb the ground to a depth of 450 mm (1.5 ft) or more.
Activities that disturb the ground may include:
 digging
 excavation
 trenching
 plowing pipe or cable
 vertical drilling
 hydrovacing
 horizontal directional drilling
 vertical and horizontal auguring
 tunnelling, boring or pushing pipe
 cutting fire breaks
 ditch shaping
 grading and land contouring
 topsoil stripping
 land levelling
 tree planting
 blasting and vibroseis
 mechanical rock picking
 subsoil aeration or stabilization
 driving fence posts
 driving bars, rods, pins or anchors

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 137
 Although not technically a ground disturbance, the unrestricted crossing of pipelines with
vehicles and equipment does have the potential to cause damage to pipelines. Some provinces
prohibit the operation of vehicles or equipment across pipelines at any location that is not within
the travelled portion of a highway or public road unless:
 approval in writing is obtained from the owner/operator or
 the vehicle or equipment is used for agricultural purposes
Where ground disturbance activities are planned within public road allowance, provincial
highway right of way or utility right of ways, the contractor may be required to obtain an
excavation permit or written permission before disturbing the ground.
If the ground disturbance is to install new services, line assignments may have to be obtained
from the authority having jurisdiction over the right of way prior to construction.
Regardless if the ground disturbance is to take place on private or public land, Occupational
Health and Safety Legislation requires that all buried services potentially in conflict with ground
disturbance activity is identified and their horizontal alignments be marked before the ground
disturbance begins.
Utility Locate Services
 Each province has a different locate system with specific rules outlining their services,
though there may be some similarities with provinces using the “One Call or Call before
You Dig” system. It is very important to understand the provincial or local guidelines in
advance of your operation as rules may vary
 Locate service providers (utility owners) typically require 2 to 3 days advanced notice
before performing locates. Be certain to verify notification requirements for each
province
 Where feasible and before requesting locates, the proposed work area should be
accurately pre-marked with white paint stakes or flags to better identify the work area for
locate service personnel coming to site
 For more details on utility locate services, contact the respective Division Safety
Supervisor in your region
Provincial One Call Contact Number(s)
BC (1-800-474-6886)
Alberta (1-800-242-3447)
Saskatchewan (1-866-828-4888)
Manitoba (1-888-624-9376)
Ontario (1-800-400-2255
One Call or call Before You Dig program – How the Service Works
 The contractor who plans to conduct ground disturbance activities makes one simple
telephone call to the applicable provincial One Call Centre. The call is answered by a One
Call Operator at the Customer Care Centre
 Operator takes down details from the caller on the proposed location and details on the type
of work to be done, etc.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 138
  Operator then uses the One Call Mapping System to locate the work site where ever it might
be in the specific province. The mapping system allows the operator to identify utility owners
of various buried pipes, cables, conduits, etc on and in proximity to the caller’s work site
 Operator then creates a numbered reference One Call ticket which shows details of the
work site and lists the names of the One Call members who own buried utilities on or near
the caller’s worksite. The operator then sends this ticket to each of those members
 Each One Call member notified by the ticket is made aware of the contractor planned work.
Each member then assesses the information on the ticket and determines whether or not
the proposed work activities will be in conflict with their utility(s)
 Members then contact the contractor within the 2 to 3 business days and advise the
contractor that there is no conflict or make arrangements for a mutually acceptable time to
meet on site to identify and mark locations of buried utilities
 If a utility operator advises the contractor that no locate is required, the contractor is advised
to confirm and obtain such information in writing for their protection.
 Members then identify and mark the location of their utilities using paint, stakes and/or flags
at no charge to the contractor and should provide the contractor with documentation of the
locate(s) performed
 Members typically do not provide depth but should warn the contractor if they suspect the
utility to be deeper or shallower than might normally be expected.
 The marking of all buried utilities shall comply with the International Colour Code for Marking
Buried Utilities
International colour code for marking buried utilities
Red Street lighting, electrical
Yellow Gas, oil, steam
Orange Telecommunication, railroad
Blue Water
Green Sewer, storm drain
Pink Temporary Survey Markings
White Proposed Excavation
Lifespan of locate marks
 Locate marks are valid for as long as they visible, but for not more than 14 calendar
days. They are temporary marks and are intended to provide the contractor with a
window of opportunity within which they can undertake ground disturbance activities
 If a project does not begin within 14 Days of the date a locate was done or the work
interrupted during the 14 day period, the contractor should request another locate
 If the duration of the proposed project will extend beyond 14 calendar days from the date
a locate was provided, the contractor should request another locate at least 2 full
working days in advance of the expiration date of the existing locate marks to avoid
disruptions to their schedule
 On receipt of a request for another locate, individual operators of buried utilities, in
consultation with the contractor, will determine whether a new locate is required or the
lifespan of the existing locate can be extended

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 139
  If at any time the contractor is of the opinion that the locate marks are not adequate for
the successful and safe completion of the work they should request another locate
Hand Expose Zones
 The hand expose zones is a distance of 1 m (3.3 ft) either side of the locate marks within
which excavation with mechanical equipment must not take place until the buried utilities
have been hand exposed and is clearly visible. This hand zone applies to all buried
utilities except for pipelines and some buried electrical utilities
 Standard hand expose zones for pipelines are 5 m (16.4 ft)
 Some operators of buried high voltage electrical utilities have implemented hand
exposed zones greater than 1 m (3.3 ft). Locate documentation will advise the contractor
of any such specific instances
Hand Exposure (“Daylighting”)
 Hand exposure pertains to the physical exposure of buried utilities using non-destructive
excavation techniques acceptable to the owner of the buried utility
 Normally the hand exposure process begins at or near the location marks and works
down and outwards into the hand expose zone until the buried utility is found
 If the contractor has made a reasonable attempt to locate the buried utility but cannot
find it, they should contact the utility owner directly for assistance. Once the utility has
been hand exposed and is clearly visible, the contractor may use mechanical equipment
within the hand expose zone provided they take great care to ensure the utility is not
damaged
 A safe work procedure must be developed to remove hard surface material. The safe
work procedure should consider, once the hard surface has been removed, non-
destructive excavation techniques acceptable to the utility owner that should be followed
Emergency Locate Requests
An emergency locate requests is defined as a locate request placed prior to the commencement of a
ground disturbance to correct any abnormal condition that constitutes a clear and present danger to life,
health or property by reason of escaping gas or petroleum products, breaks or defects in a buried utility,
including the disruption of essential services, or by reason of any disaster of natural or artificial causes.
The expectation is that locators will respond to emergency locate requests in urban areas within 1 hour
of the locate request being placed and within 2 hours in rural areas.
Priority Locate Requests
Defined as “ a locate request placed prior to the commencement of a ground disturbance to effect a
repair or replacement of a defective buried utility in the situation where there is not present or
immediate danger to life, health or property but there is some urgency.
The expectation is that locators will respond to priority locate requests within the requested time frame.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 140
Pipelines and Right of Ways
 The area on either side of a pipeline of a provincially regulated pipeline is a controlled
area. The area within 30 m (98.24 ft) of the right of way of a federally regulated pipeline
is a safety zone. The pipeline owner must be notified of any intent to disturb the ground
within the controlled area or safety zone and the contractor must request locates. Some
provinces also require anyone proposing to undertake a ground disturbance search an
area 30 m (98.24 ft) beyond the limits of the proposed ground disturbance for the
presence of pipelines
 A pipeline right of way has specific boundaries within which the pipeline owner has the
right to construct pipelines and control activity. If the proposed ground disturbance is
within the pipeline right of way, the contractor must obtain written approval from or enter
into a crossing or proximity agreement with the pipeline owner
 Mechanical excavating equipment must not be used within 5 m (16.4 ft) of a provincially
regulated pipeline until the pipeline has been hand exposed and is clearly visible.
Mechanical equipment may not be used within 600 mm (2 ft) of the exposed pipeline
except under direct supervision of the pipeline owner
 Mechanical equipment may not be used within 3 m (9.8 ft) of a federally regulated
pipeline until the pipeline has been hand exposed and is visible
 Permits to work in such locations must be requested and obtained from the respective
provincial authority having jurisdiction
Energized Power Cables
 Hand exposure of energized or live high voltage cables must not be undertaken until the
electric power facility owner has been consulted for advice and assistance. Provincial
legislation typically places an obligation of the electric facility owner to ensure that the
exposure of energized power cables in done safely. The facility owner will determine if
direct or in-direct supervision is required depending up the scope of work and cable type
Private Property
 As a general rule, utilities situated on private property or customer owned utilities will not
be located by locate service providers
 Any contractor planning to undertake a ground disturbance of private property should
make special provisions for identifying and locating privately owned and customer owned
buried utilities
 The private or customer owner may have to engage into a contract with a locator to
identify and mark the locations of all buried utilities.
 Transportation and Utility Corridors (TUC’s)
 If a ground disturbance is to take place within a TUC, written authorization is required
before a ground disturbance occurs

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 141
Utility Right of Ways (URW’s)
 In many municipalities, it has become necessary to install shallow utilities in a utility right
of way across residential properties. Most home owners are not aware of the existence
of a utility right of way on their property
 Because the owners of utilities buried in the utility right of way must have access to the
right of way for maintenance and repair purposes, property owners are restricted as to
what they can build and plant on the right of way
 Property owners need to check their certificates of title for utility right of ways to
determine what restrictions may be imposed upon them regarding right of way land use
Failure to Respond to Locate Requests
 If a utility owner has been notified of a locate request on behalf of a provincial one call
service and has not contacted the contractor requesting the locate within two or three
days, or has failed to mark the locations of the buried utilities, the contractor should
contact the applicable provincial One Call Service and file a complaint
NOTE: Do not proceed with any ground disturbance work activities until all utility
owners noted on the One Call ticket have contacted the contractor and granted
permission to proceed
Permits
A Ground Disturbance Permit must be completed for all operations which disturb or penetrate the
original ground surface. The foreman/supervisor of each operation is responsible for ensuring that the
One Call Clearance Certificate, Ground Disturbance Permit, Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)
form and all necessary drawings are available at the operation and in the cab of the equipment
operator. The equipment operator is ultimately responsible and accountable to ensure ground
disturbance activity does not occur without a valid Ground Disturbance Permit and One Call or Utility
Clearance Certificate
The Ground Disturbance Permit has several steps in requiring completion. All steps will be completed
and legible. The project superintendent is responsible for ensuring the Ground Disturbance Permit has
been properly completed. The following documents will be attached before being distributed to the
foreman and equipment operator:
 A completed and signed copy of Form 23: Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)
 A copy of the site plans showing topography details if available, including the buildings
footprint
 A copy of the Utility locates ticket
 A current copy of any as-built drawings that show above ground and underlying utilities
 If as-built drawings are not available, refer to the practice for Daylighting

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 142
18.59 Wire Rope
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: B

Wire rope is any stranded, braided cable made of metal. It can be used for hoisting, craning,
towing, and guard rail construction.
Wire Rope Safe Work Practices
Take care when handling wire rope to prevent damage to the rope or the individual wire strands
that will affect the strength and performance of the rope.
Prevent the formation of kinks because this displaces the strands of wire from their original
position and relation to each other, causing severe bending and unequal strand tension. This
distortion and wire displacement cannot be corrected, even under high tension, because a
permanent weak spot remains in the rope. Displaced or raised wires indicate a previous kink,
but do not show the extent of the damage to the inner rope wires.
Wire rope should never be pulled over a non-operating support such as a spindle bar, a pin, or
an inoperative sheave because this causes severe abrasion to the outer strand wires.
A properly operating sheave or snatch block is essential to safety and to the long life of the
rope. The use of worn sheaves with flat grooves should be avoided since they do not provide
sufficient support to prevent the distortion and flattening of the rope as it passes over the
sheave.
Sheaves having nicked or broken flanges are likely to cut or otherwise damage the rope and
should not be used. An even distribution of wire rope coils over the hoist drum is essential to
smooth operation and to preventing rope from cutting down through or crushing other coils on
the drum, which can damage the rope and cause difficulty in unreeling it.
Inspection and Maintenance
To maintain wire rope in serviceable condition, three types of inspection should be carried out
when it is in daily use:
 Daily inspections
 Monthly inspections
 Quarterly inspections
More frequently, more thorough inspections should be made if the condition of the rope
indicates the need for them.
If wire rope has been idle for more than a month, a thorough inspection must be carried out
before it is used.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 143
Daily Inspections
All running rope in continuous service should be inspected each working day before the rope is
used for the first time. This inspection should cover the eye (the dead end of the rope where it is
fixed to the boom) and the portion of the rope used most extensively in daily operation.
The eye should be inspected for abrasion, corrosion, broken wire, and loose or broken
servings/seizing (the small wire wrapped around the wire rope to prevent fraying at the end of a
non-rotating wire rope).
The remainder of the rope length normally used for daily operation should be inspected for
areas showing kinks, sharp bends, or any evidence of damage or excess wear.
Monthly Inspections
During monthly inspections, the entire length of wire rope should be inspected. A thorough
inspection of the eye and the length of rope normally used in daily operations should be made.
The remainder of the rope should be inspected for kinked, crushed, or otherwise damaged
areas.
Quarterly inspections
During the quarterly inspections, the entire rope length should be inspected. This inspection will
usually indicate greater wear at the eye end of the rope, so the rope should be reversed on the
drum so that the wear will more nearly equalize along the entire length of the rope.
Idle rope
All rope that has been idle for a month or more must be given a thorough inspection that covers
all types of deterioration before it re-enters service.
Replacement
It is difficult to determine the exact time to replace wire rope because many variable factors are
involved. An experienced person must evaluate the remaining strength in a used rope taking
into consideration the deterioration revealed during inspection.
One of the following reasons is sufficient for considering rope replacement:
 Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay
 Three broken wires in one strand in one rope lay
 Wear of one-third of the original diameter of outside individual wires
 Kinking, crushing, bird caging, pining (flattening of strands) or any other damage
resulting in distortion of the rope structure
 Reductions of more than .79 mm (1/32 in) from the new condition nominal rope diameter
Reference: See Section 19.16: Safe Work Procedure – Wire Ropes for instructions on the
installation of wire rope clips

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 144
18.60 Office Ergonomics – Chair Height
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Office workers often sit at their workstations for long periods, day after day. If they do not have
their chairs and workstation set up correctly, they may be sitting and using their computer in a
manner that could lead to injuries over time.
To minimize the risk of injury, workers should be equipped with adjustable chairs and
workstations and be trained on how to properly adjust them.
Adjust a chair for height
 Stand in front of the chair
 Adjust the height so the highest point of the seat
(when in the horizontal position) is just below
the knee cap

 Sit on the chair and keep your feet flat on the floor
 Check that the clearance between the front edge
of the seat and the lower part of the legs (calves)
fits a clenched first (about 2 inches)

 Adjust the back rest forwards and backwards as

well as up and down so that it fits the hollow in
the lower back
 Sit upright with arms hanging loosely by ones sides.
Bend elbows at a right angle (900) and adjust the
armrest(s) height until it barely touches the
undersides of the elbows.
 Remove the armrests from the chair if this level
cannot be achieved or if the armrests, in their
lowest adjustment, elevate the elbows even slightly
 Tilt the seat itself forwards or backwards as
preferred

Reference: Section 4.16 Musculoskeletal Injury Prevention Program

Source: How to Adjust Office Chairs (April 2007). Retrieved from
http://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/safety_haz/chair_adjusting.html
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 145
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 146
18.61 Preventing Slips, Trips & Falls
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Slips and trips are caused by the following factors:

 Wet or oily surfaces
 Occasional spills
 Weather hazards
 Loose, unanchored rugs or mats flooring or other walking surfaces that do not have
same degree of traction in all areas
 Obstructed view
 Poor lighting
 Clutter in your way
 Wrinkled carpeting
 Uncovered cables
 Bottom drawers not being closed
 Uneven (steps, thresholds) walking surfaces
Three Keys to Preventing Falls
1. Housekeeping
 Cleaning all spills immediately
 Marking spills and wet areas
 Mopping or sweeping debris from floors
 Removing obstacles from walkways and always keeping them free of clutter
 Securing (tacking, taping, etc.) mats, rugs, and carpets that do not lay flat
 Always closing file cabinet or storage drawers
 Covering cables that cross walkways
 Keeping working areas and walkways well lit
 Replacing used light bulbs and faulty switches
2. Flooring
Recoating or replacing floors, installing mats, pressure-sensitive abrasive strips or
abrasive-filled paint-on coating, and metal or synthetic decking can further improve
safety and reduce risk of falling. However, it is critical to remember that high-tech
flooring requires good housekeeping as much as any other flooring. In addition, resilient,
non-slippery flooring prevents or reduces foot fatigue and contributes to slip prevention
measures.
3. Footwear
In workplaces where floors may be oily or wet or where workers spend considerable time
outdoors, prevention of fall accidents should focus on selecting proper footwear.
Properly fitting footwear increases comfort and prevents fatigue which, in turn, improves
safety for the employee.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 147
 What Can YOU do to Prevent Falls?

 Take your time and pay attention to where you are going
 Adjust your stride to a pace that is suitable for the walking surface and the tasks you are
doing
 Walk with your feet pointed slightly outward
 Make wide turns at corners
 Always use installed light sources that provide sufficient light for your tasks
 Use a flashlight if you enter a darkened room/area
 Ensure that the things you are carrying or pushing do not prevent you from seeing any
obstructions, spills, etc.

Reference: Section 4.16 Musculoskeletal Injury Prevention Program

Source: Prevention of Slips, Trips & Falls (June 2008). Retrieved from
http://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/safety_haz/falls.html

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 148
18.62 Safe Lifting Practices
Safe Work Practice

Hazard ranking: C

Low back injury is the most likely kind of injury incurred when lifting.
5 Steps to Safe Lifting
1. Clear the Path
 Make sure you have plenty of room to lift the object properly
 Check to see that nothing blocks the path to your destination
 Prop doors open or ask someone to hold them
 Avoid slippery or uneven surfaces or find an alternate route
2. Size Up the Load
 Push the object lightly or lift a corner to get a sense of its weight. If it’s too heavy:
break it down into smaller loads; get help; or use a hand truck, pushcart, or
forklift.
 Make sure the contents won’t shift
 Get help for awkward loads or those that will block your
vision
3. Make the Lift
 Stand as close to the load as possible and face it squarely
 Bend your knees, not your waist and keep your back as
straight as possible
 Lift slowly and steadily, using your legs and not your back
 Avoid twisting as you lift and keep your head up
4. Carry the Load
 Hold the load close to your body between your shoulders and waist
 Keep your back straight or slightly arched
 Walk slowly and maintain firm footing
 Use your feet to change directions; avoid twisting at the waist
5. Set it Down
 Move as close as possible to where you want to place the object
 Squat down to lower the object using your legs
 Avoid twisting and bending at the waist
 Keep your head up
 Let go only when the object is down and hands and toes are clear

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 149
 Tips of Prevention
 Do a warm up stretch to prevent musculoskeletal injuries
 Eliminate heavy lifting (when necessary) OR use an alternative method (i.e. pushing,
pulling, or asking for help)
 Take rest breaks
Environmental Factors
When the lifting tasks are done outdoors, the temperature conditions including the humidex (in
hot weather) or wind-chill factor (in cold weather) have to be monitored very closely.
 Keep working area temperatures between 18°C and 21°C (when practical)
 Reduce lifting tasks by half when the temperature exceeds 28°C
 Stop lifting when the temperature exceeds 40°C
 Wear proper clothing to decrease the heat absorption by the body and to increase
evaporation
 Restrict lifting to the minimum possible when wind-chill drops below -25°C
 Stop lifting when wind-chill drops to -35°C
 Use proper protective clothing when working in a cold environment (this is essential to
protect workers from hypothermia and to preserve dexterity needed for safe work)
 Illuminate the work area for lifting tasks at the level of 200 lux
 Use task lights or other additional light source to improve the ability to see when lifting
requires fine visual discrimination
 Use angular lighting and colour contrast to improve depth perception. This helps when
lifting involves climbing stairs or moving in passageways
Proper Lifting Technique

Reference: Section 4.16 Musculoskeletal Injury Prevention Program

Source: Back Injury Prevention (March 2007). Retrieved from
http://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/safety_haz/falls.html

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 18 Safe Work Practices Page 150
 Section 19 Safe Work Procedures
19.1 Safe Work Procedures ............................................................ 19-3
19.2 Hazard Levels .......................................................................... 19-5
19.3 Chop Saw Safety ..................................................................... 19-7
19.4 Concrete Work ......................................................................... 19-9
19.5 Contaminated Items (including Sharps) .............................. 19-13
19.6 Dedicated Evacuation Platform (DEP) ................................. 19-17
19.7 Excavation and Trenching .................................................... 19-21
19.8 First Aid .................................................................................. 19-27
19.9 Major Incident ........................................................................ 19-29
19.10 Material Handlers................................................................... 19-31
19.11 Media ...................................................................................... 19-35
19.12 Propane and Natural Gas Heaters ........................................ 19-37
19.13 Radial Arm Saw ..................................................................... 19-41
19.14 Scissor Lifts, Booms and Giraffes ....................................... 19-43
19.15 Traffic Control ........................................................................ 19-47
19.16 Wire Rope .............................................................................. 19-51
19.17 Working Alone ....................................................................... 19-55
19.18 Cut-off Saw ............................................................................ 19-57

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 1
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 2
 19.1 Safe Work Procedures

Safe work procedures are a written step-by-step description of how to do jobs safely
from start to finish.
They provide a reference for jobs not done very often, jobs requiring uniformity, and jobs
that, due to their hazardous nature, require that those performing them receive guidance
for safety.
Stuart Olson has done the following with regard to safe work procedures to promote
worker safety:
 Involve workers in the development of job procedures
 Put job procedures in writing
 Make job procedures available to all workers
 Provide safe equipment, tools, and materials
 Require Supervisors to enforce the use of, and compliance with, job procedures
 Provide Management support
Job procedures developed by the Stuart Olson will comply with or exceed legislated
requirements and manufacturer’s specifications.
Job procedures will change from time to time, so an annual review of selected job
procedures will be carried out, and any necessary changes will be made.
Where work is performed using client-specified safe work procedure and/or
subcontractor safe work procedure, this procedure will be used unless the procedure
specified is of a lower standard than the company procedure. When this situation occurs,
the higher company standard will be used.
In no case will work be carried out in contravention of the safety legislation of the
authority having jurisdiction in the province in which the work is being done.
All Supervisors must be familiar with the safe work practices and procedures contained
in Section 18: Safe Work Practices and understand the different hazard levels as
detailed in Section 19.2:

Note: Much of the material presented in the Safe work procedures section is general
and brief. Specific situations may require specific procedures outside the scope of this
manual. For more detailed information about safe work contact the Regional Safety
Manager, the authority having jurisdiction in the province in which the work is being
done, or consult reference material.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 3
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 4
 19.2 Hazard Levels

Job hazards can be classified according to level of danger and assigned a letter that
corresponds to the danger level as detailed in
Table 1: Job Hazard Levels:

Table 1: Job Hazard Levels

Hazard class Danger level Danger type
Class A High A condition or practice with the potential for permanent disability
or loss of life and/or extensive property damage
Class B Medium A condition or practice with the potential for serious injury/illness
or non-disruptive property damage
Class C Low A condition or practice with potential for minor injury/illness or
non-disruptive property damage

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 5
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 6
 19.3 Chop Saw Safety

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: B

The following safe work procedure must be used when operating a chop saw:
 A full face shield, safety glasses and hearing protection is required. Operators
should always wear safety glasses under a full face shield
 Gloves, loose clothing, jewellery, or any dangling objects including long hair
should not be worn as they may catch in the rotating parts of the saw
 All guards must be in place and operating. If a guard seems slow to return to its
normal position or hangs up, adjust it or repair it immediately. Unplug or lockout
power when making repairs
 Hands and fingers must be kept clear of the path in which the blade travels
 Clean the lower guard frequently to help visibility and movement. Unplug before
adjusting or cleaning
 Use only the recommended RPM and sizes of blades
 Regularly inspect and tighten the blade and the blade-attachment mechanism
 Prior to installing or changing a blade, be sure to lockout or unplug equipment.
Ensure that the blade and its related washers and fasteners are correctly
positioned and secured on the saw's arbour
 To avoid losing control or placing hands in the blade path, hold or clamp all
material securely against the fence when cutting. Do not perform operations
freehand
 Never re-cut small pieces
 Long material should be supported at the same height as the saw table
 Never place hands or fingers in the path of the blade or reach in back of the
fence
 Use the brake if one is provided. To avoid contact with a coasting blade, do not
reach into the cutting area until the blade comes to a full stop
 After completing a cut, release the trigger switch and allow the blade to come to
a complete stop, and then raise the blade from the work piece. If the blade stays
in the cutting area after the cutting is complete, injury can result from accidental
contact

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 7
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 8
 19.4 Concrete Work

Safe Work Procedure

19.4.1 Tilt-up Construction

Hazard ranking: A
Tilt up construction is the manufacture of wall panels poured on the ground, and then
erected vertically and secured in place.
When working with tilt-up construction, the following procedures must be followed and
signed off by each worker working on the tilt slab before any work begins:
1. Identify the signal person and the lead hand
2. Identify the operator and the second man
3. Identify the First Aid Attendant, the location of first aid facilities, and the first aid
horn locations
4. Ensure that hard hats, steel toed boots, safety vests, and safety glasses (as
required) are worn at all times
5. Allow only those directly involved with the lift to be on the slab
6. Ensure that all rigging and hardware has been inspected for flaws and damage
7. Ensure that each person is assigned duties of work and shown how to do those
duties safely
8. Review how all rigging and clutches are to be installed for proper lifting
9. Assign one person to each brace as brace man
10. Instruct all brace men to follow the signalman’s instructions
11. Tell workers not to walk, stand, or assist with placement of the panels from the fall side
12. Ensure that all workers are aware of the shortest route for escape in the event
of an incident
13. Use only pry bars or shims between the panel and the slab or panel to panel
Warning: Under no circumstances are workers to place their fingers under the
panel, or between panels to adjust shim packs
Warning: Do not place arms or hands between the panel and the slab or
panel to panel
14. Make the lifting crew aware of the dangers of placing their feet between the
panel and any other obstruction on the slab. (In bite, between panels)
15. The signal person will do all crane signals
16. The “All Stop” signal can be given by anyone on the slab in an emergency.
(Workers must be shown the signal by the operator before work begins)
17. The signal person must ensure that the spreader bar is centred directly over
the lift inserts during the initial lifting of the panel

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 9
 The signal person must ensure that all the rigging is correctly installed before
the panel is lifted
18. Tag lines must be attached to provide additional control of the panels being
flown
19. The signal person must ensure that the spreader bar and/or panel will never
come into contact with the boom
20. Wedges must be used on all panes to assist the release of the panel from the
slab
21. Review the brace best practices, which are the following:
 Keep braces off the slab until the instruction is given from the signal
person
 Do not disconnect clutches until the signal person has reviewed all
braces and confirmed that they have been bolted down
22. Hold all clutches at the same elevation while booming or moving the crane
23. Remove all reveal strips, nails, and other debris from the slab and sweep the
slab after the panel has been braced
24. All braces must be checked at the end of each day and re-torqued as
necessary

19.4.2 Wall Forming

Hazard ranking: B
Wall forming conditions change from job to job. Wall thickness, wall structure, soil
conditions, and other environmental obstacles make it necessary that a hazard
assessment be done for each project.
When wall forming, do the following:
1. Lay out the wall grid lines on the footing
2. Fasten the bottom plate with a powder actuated tool and fasteners
3. Diagram the layout for snap tie spacing on a sheet of form plywood
4. To save time drilling holes, stack 3-4 sheets of plywood together and use the
top sheet for a template when drilling
5. Stand up plywood forms vertically
6. Nail one bottom corner to the bottom plate, level the sheet, and then nail the
other bottom corner to the bottom plate
7. Install the rest of the forms and temporarily brace them to keep them standing
8. Install snap ties and camlocks
9. Install 2x4 walers (field cut walers) to fit joint at the center of the camlock
10. All waler joints should be at least two tie spaces apart
11. Install spider clamps and 2x4 strong backs approximately 2.43 m (8 feet) long
every fourth row of snap ties

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 10
 19.4.3 Job Procedures
When doing wall forming, do the following:
1. Drive 2x4 pegs into solid ground for bracing
2. Nail 2x4 braces to form first using 3 ½” double headed nails
3. Plumb the corner of the forms then nail brace to peg
4. Using your string line at each corner, straighten the wall by moving the form to
match the line, and nail the braces
5. Lock your corners with 2x4 kickers on alternate corners
6. Install small nails into each camlock to prevent the form loosening
7. Shoot your finished concrete elevation using the builders’ level
8. Install blockouts, if necessary
9. Clean all debris from the top of the footing
10. Install reinforcing bars as per the drawings and to the proper elevation
11. Close up the forms using steps starting at 4 to 9, 13 and 14
12. Check the elevations
13. Check the forms for squareness
14. Pour the concrete
Note: If the wall is supported on piles, refer to grade beam formwork for sleeper and
kicker procedures.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 11
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 12
 19.5 Contaminated Items (including Sharps)

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

Contaminated items (condoms, etc.) and contaminated sharps, such as used needles,
blades, scalpels, or other surgical instruments, can be found anywhere. They may be
contaminated with HIV, Hepatitis B, and Hepatitis C, are often thrown away in streets,
buildings, and public areas.
The following exposure incidents are potentially harmful:
 Skin is punctured with a contaminated sharp
 A mucous membrane (eyes, nose, or mouth) is splashed with blood or body
fluids
 Non-intact skin (skin that has open cuts, nicks, wounds, abrasions, chapping,
damage, eczema, or dermatitis) is splashed with blood or body fluids
These materials should be treated as contaminated until proven otherwise by a certified
facility. Do not pick up sharps or other suspect items unless you have proper personal
protective equipment (PPE) and you have been instructed in how to do so safely.
Report the discovery of any sharps to your Supervisor and to the First Aid Attendant.
Exposure to Contaminated Sharps Safe Work Procedure
If exposure to a contaminated item occurs, do the following:
1. Get first aid immediately
 If the mucous membranes of the nose, eyes, or mouth are affected, flush
with lots of water at a sink or an eyewash station
 If there is an injury caused by a sharp, allow it to bleed freely and then
wash the area thoroughly with non-abrasive soap and water
2. Report the incident as soon as possible to the Supervisor and the First Aid
Attendant. (This should not cause significant delay in seeking medical attention)
3. Seek medical attention immediately, preferably within two hours, at the closest
emergency room or at a health care facility
 (Immunization or medications may be necessary to help prevent infection
or to favourably alter the course of the disease if infection occurs. Blood
tests should also be done. A family doctor may need to be seen within the
next five days for a follow-up, such as counselling and medications)
If a used syringe caused the exposure, place the syringe in a needle container and take
it to the place the wound will be treated as detailed in Section 8: First Aid.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 13
 Contaminated Items Disposal Safe Work Procedures
The following safe work procedures should be used when disposing of sharps or other
objects that may be contaminated:
Disposing of a Contaminated Item
To dispose of a sharp or other possibly contaminated item, do the following:
1. Use a sharps container
2. Wear disposable, waterproof gloves
3. Place the sharps container on the ground. Do not hold the container in your
hand
4. Keep your hands clear of the container
5. With tongs or pliers, pick up the item (If it is a needle, pick it up by its shaft)
6. Place the item in the sharps container (If it is a needle, place it into the sharps
container pointed end first)
7. Wash the tongs or pliers with germicide and bleach and water solution (1 part
bleach to 10 parts water)
8. Remove the gloves
9. Dispose of the gloves in a safe manner
10. Wash your hands
Disposal of a Sharp Using a One-needle Container
A needle may have to be transported to a hospital with a worker who has been injured
by it so that medical personnel can determine if it is contaminated. A one-needle
container may be used to do this.
To transport a needle in a one-needle container, do the following:
1. Use a proper puncture-resistant, leak-proof container
2. Wear disposable, waterproof gloves
3. Hold the blunt end of the syringe in one hand. Do not hold the container in your
hand
4. Keep your hands clear of the container
5. Ease the sharp end of the needle into the opening of the container
6. Lift the tip of the needle and the container up so that the container falls down
over the needle
7. After the sharp end of the needle is enclosed in the container, carefully grasp the
container and place the cap on it. (When you turn the container over, the needle
will sink into a Styrofoam plug for added safety.) The sharp is now safe for
transport or disposal
8. Remove the gloves and dispose of them
9. Wash your hands
10. Transport the needle to the hospital

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 14
 Disposal of a Used Condom
To dispose of a used condom, do the following:
1. Wear disposable waterproof gloves
2. Using tongs, or gloved hand, put the condom into a plastic bag
3. Put the plastic bag containing the condom into a garbage bin
4. Remove and dispose of the gloves
5.
Wash your hands
Clean-up of Mould
Mould is a major concern with water entry. If there is mould in a building there is no limit
to the potential cost.
Preventing mould is very simple – do not allow moisture to remain in any part of the
building for more than 48 hours.
In the event that mould is detected in an existing building undergoing renovations or in
new construction:
1. Seek advice from a specialist in mould detection and remediation
2. Document replacement of all materials susceptible to mould growth
Reference: Quality Control / Quality Assurance Manual

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 15
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 16
 19.6 Dedicated Evacuation Platform (DEP)

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

General
 The DEP shall only be used in an emergency situation for the purpose of
evacuating an injured worker when there is no other means
 The DEP shall not be used for any other purpose such as using as a work
platform to transport materials on site.
 The DEP must be designed by a professional engineer and must have design
drawings
 The DEP must be rated to carry a minimum of 367.87 kg (800lbs)
 The DEP is to be identified on the exterior to ensure all workers are aware of its
purpose, weight restrictions and registration number
Perform Trial Lifts (Practice or Test Runs)
A trial lift with the unloaded DEP, from the location where the platform is stored (a
permanent location with easy access for rigging in case of emergency), to all possible
locations to which the DEP may be required must be done. The trial lift is to determine
that all landing locations can be reached without contacting obstructions , and that the all
up- weight (weight of platform and rigging plus rated capacity) indicated on the data
plate remains within 50% of the crane or hoist rating throughout the range of intended
operation.
Toolbox Meeting
A meeting will be held to review procedures. Attendees:
 Crane operator
 Signal person(s)
 Workers
 CSO/NCSO / Site Safety Coordinator
Maintenance and Inspection
 The platform and its rigging must be inspected by a qualified person prior to
being put into use
 “Qualified” means being knowledgeable of the work, the hazards involved and
the means to control the hazards, by reason of education, training, experience or
a combination thereof

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 17
 Rigging for DEP
 An additional safety sling must be used between the platform master link and an
anchorage above the load hook that will prevent the DEP from falling more than
15cm (6in.) if the DEP becomes dislodged from the hook
 The rigging slings and fittings must be permanent attachments to the platform
and must not be used for other load lifting purposes
Personal Fall Protection
 Personnel in the DEP attending to the injured worker must wear personal fall
protection, including a full body harness and shock-absorbing lanyard, secured to
a designated anchorage point
 The casualty is to be strapped to the basket stretcher and the basket stretcher is
to be secured to the platform
The DEP must Incorporate At All Times (Stored In)
 Personal fall protection
 A stretcher and 3 blankets
 The DEP must be covered at all times (i.e. tarp)
 Stored on dunnage; creates vacuum in mud and freezes to ground
Removal of an Injured Worker Using DEP
When an injury incident occurs:
1. The air horn must be blasted 3 times to signal an emergency
2. The designated first aider(s) will proceed to the incident scene to investigate and
shall decide whether or not emergency services are required, and whether or not
the Dedicated Evacuation platform (DEP) is required
3. If injury is severe, notify the Stuart Olson site supervisors to call emergency
services – 911
4. If the DEP is required, instruct radio personnel to contact the crane operator
5. Unhook load and all rigging to the block. The crane operator will then swing over
to the DEP
6. If fall protection equipment (PPE) is not stored in the DEP, either the rigger or a
designate will secure body harnesses, lanyards and place in the DEP Personnel
can attach lanyards to the DEP
7. The rigger will hook up the DEP to the crane and secure the safety line
(secondary rigging) to the block
8. Crane operator will then lift DEP to the incident scene. Preferable landing areas
are the top slab/roof or the nearest thrust out platform
9. If the DEP must be positioned and loaded at the slab edge then tag lines are to
be attached to the DEP and personnel guiding the DEP into position must be
protected from fall hazards – i.e. PPE

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 18
 10. The first aider in charge will decide whether or not to move the injured worker to
the DEP
11. Place and strap down the injured worker in the basket and secure basket to the
bottom of the DEP. Another option is equipping the injured worker with PPE, if
possible. Note: Only two people, or as per manufacturer’s specifications, are
permitted in the DEP – injured worker and responder. Stay low in the DEP
12. Crane operator will lift DEP and land near the site office or to a location identified
by the person in charge of the incident
13. The crane operator and rigger are to remain in constant radio contact
14. Assist the injured worker to the first aid room or if applicable, assist emergency
services personnel
Note: This procedure must be reviewed with the designated response personnel.
Workers injured severely enough for medical aid must not drive themselves to a
medical clinic or hospital.
Reference: Form 63: Removal of Worker Using DEP

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 19
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 20
 19.7 Excavation and Trenching

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

An excavation is a depression dug in the ground. A trench is defined as an excavation

deeper than it is wide at the bottom. Excavations and trenches pose many hazards and
require that extra precautions be taken.
Trenching incidents usually involve cave-ins, but there are other risks to workers:
 Material falling into the trench
 Improper handling and placing of material
 Workers falling as they climb in and out of the trench
 Workers falling over equipment or excavation material
 Workers falling into the trench
 Workers being exposed to toxic, irritating, or flammable gases
Understanding trenching and excavation terminology is necessary to implementing
trenching and excavating safe work practices:
Excavation – a man-made cavity or depression in the earth’s surface formed by
earth removal that includes a trench, deep foundation, tunnel, shaft, or open
excavation
Trench – an excavation having a depth that exceeds its width measured at the
bottom
Shoring – a construction procedure (includes a trench cage) used to maintain the
stability of the walls and ceiling of an excavation
Sheathing – a continuous row of wood or steel sheets in close contact that are used
to provide a tight wall to resist the pressures of the walls of an excavation
Uprights – the vertical members of shoring system placed in contact with the earth
Waler – a horizontal member of the shoring system that is placed parallel to the
excavation face
Strut – a horizontal cross-member of a shoring system that directly resists pressure
from a waler or upright

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 21
 Excavations
 Temporary protective structures used in excavations over 3m (9.95 ft) in depth
shall be designed, constructed, installed, and certified by a professional
engineer.
 The drawings of the temporary protective structures shall:
o Show the size and specifications of the supporting structure, type and
grade of all material for its construction
o Show the loads for which the supporting structure is designed
o Bear the seal and signature of all Professional Engineer
o Be kept at the project at all times while the supporting structure is being
erected and is in place
 Every employer shall directly supervise all excavation work or shall appoint an
experienced, trained excavation worker to supervise each excavation project
 When an employee is required to work in an excavation greater than 1.2 meters
(4 feet) and closer to the wall or bank than the depth of the excavation, his
employer shall ensure that the worker will be protected from cave-ins or sliding
materials by:
o The cutting back of the walls of the excavation to reduce the height of the
remaining vertical walls, if any, to not more than 1.2m (4 ft)
o Temporary protective structures shall be installed
o Using a combination of the methods noted above
NOTE: refer to applicable provincial legislation regarding the acceptable
height required for excavation as this may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction
 When the cutback method is used the walls of the excavation shall be cut back
as follows:
o In hard, compact soil to not less than 30 degrees from the vertical
o In all other soils to not less than 45 degrees from the vertical
 When wall of an excavation are cutback spoil piles are to be kept at least 1 meter
from the edge of the excavation to prevent material from rolling, sliding or falling
into the excavation
 If the cutback method is not used the excavated material shall be kept back from
the edge of the excavation a distance of at least one-half of the depth of the
excavation
 Loose material shall be scaled or trimmed from the sides of an excavation
 Where there is a hazard from rolling or sliding material from slopes adjacent to
excavations, screens, netting or other protective devices shall be installed
 Ladders will be used for safe access and egress of excavating
 Only competent operators are to use excavating equipment. Letters of
competency should be received prior to work starting

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 22
 Trenching
 Employees required to enter any trench 1.2 meters (4 ft) or more in depth shall
be provided with protection from cave-ins or slide by installation of temporary
protective structures, (shoring) trench shield or by cutting back the walls of the
trench
 When equipment or other heavy objects are placed or are working within a
distance of one-half of the depth of the trenches or if trenches are adjacent to or
abutting buildings or other structures, additional bracing shall be installed in the
trench to support the additional load
 Shoring required in trenches more than 3 m (9.75 ft) in depth shall be designed
by a Professional Engineer
 The drawings for the temporary protective structures shall be kept at the project
at all times while the shoring is being installed or used
 Shoring shall not be removed from a trench until there is no further occasion or
need for a worker to be in the trench
 Frozen ground shall not change the requirements of this section except where
freezing is a design specification to control a fluid condition
 In lieu of wooden shoring or bracing, screw jacks, hydraulic equipment or other
apparatus may be used provided it is at least equivalent in strength
 A ladder for each 49.53 ft of working length of trench shall be provided and the
ladder shall extend at least 1m (3 ft) above the top of the trench
 No worker shall be in an unprotected trench more than 1.2 m (4 ft) in depth
 When the cut back method is used in trenches less than 6 m (19.5 ft) in depth,
the walls of the trench shall be cut back as follows:
o In hard compact soil to not less than 30 degrees from the vertical
o In all other soils to not less than 45 degrees from the vertical
o Refer to applicable provincial legislation regarding permissible slopes or
angles as they may vary
 When the walls of a trench are cut back the excavated material shall be piled so
that the slope of the pile above the excavation is at an angle of not less than 45
degrees from the vertical and the pile is kept at least 1 m (39 in) from the edge of
the trench.
 When installing shoring and bracing, a worker shall use a ladder and work
downward from the top of the trench, installing each brace in order
 When removing shoring and bracing, a worker shall use a ladder and work
upward from the bottom of the trench, removing each brace in order
 When the quality of the ground in which a trench has been dug has deteriorated
to the extent that it would be unsafe to use the method of removal described
above, shoring and bracing shall be removed by a method which does not
require a worker to enter into or to be in any portion of the trench

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 23
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 24
  When wall of trenches are cut back in trenches more than 6 m (19.5 ft) in depth,
the slope of the cut back shall be:
o In hard compact soil to not less than 30 degrees from the vertical
o In all other soils to not less than 45 degrees from the vertical and the soil
pile shall be placed in accordance with the specifications and instructions
of a Professional Engineer
 When there is a square cut at the bottom of a trench, the walls of the trench
above the square portion shall be cut back at such an angle that the width of the
trench at the top shall be not less that it would have been if the walls had been
sloped from the bottom of the trench
 Where the vertical walls of the square cut portion of the trench are 1.2 m (4 ft) or
greater in height, the vertical walls shall be shored and braced as required by the
preceding sections and tables, or a cage may be used
 Where there is a hazard from rolling or sliding material from slopes adjacent to
trenches; screens, netting or other protective devices shall be installed
Excavating & Trenching Checklist
Reference: Form 61: Excavating & Trenching Checklist
Excavation Measurements

WIDTH ACROSS TOP OF TRENCHES FOR 45 DEGREE CUTBACK

METERS FEET
WIDTH WIDTH
OF 1½ 2 2½ OF 4 6 8
BOTTOM BOTTOM
DEPTH WIDTH OF TOP DEPTH WIDTH OF TOP
1½ 4½ 5 5½ 5 14 16 18
2 5½ 6 6½ 6 16 18 20
2½ 6½ 7 7½ 7 18 20 22
3 7½ 8 8½ 8 20 22 24
3½ 8½ 9 9 ½ 10 24 26 28
4 9½ 10 10 ½ 12 28 30 32
4½ 10 ½ 11 11 ½ 14 32 34 36
5 11 ½ 12 12 ½ 17 38 40 42
6 13 ½ 13 14 ½ 20 44 46 48

Trenching Hazard Assessment (to be completed prior to excavation)

Reference: Form 64: Trenching Hazard Assessment

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 25
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 26
 19.8 First Aid

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: C

Note: reading this procedure does not constitute nor replace the need for first aid
training
In all cases requiring emergency medical treatment, immediately call, or have a co-
worker call to request emergency medical assistance.
Wounds:
Minor: Cuts, lacerations, abrasions, or punctures
• Wash the wound using soap and water; rinse it well
• Cover the wound using clean dressing
Major: Large, deep and bleeding
• Stop the bleeding by pressing directly on the wound, using a bandage or
cloth
• Keep pressure on the wound until medical help arrives, or until the victim has
been transported to a medical facility and turned over to a competent
medical provider
Broken Bones:
• Do not move the victim unless it is absolutely necessary
• If the victim must be moved, "splint" the injured area. Use a board,
cardboard, or rolled newspaper as a splint
Burns:
Thermal (Heat)
• Rinse the burned area, without scrubbing it, and immerse it in cold water; do
not use ice water
• Blot dry the area and cover it using non-stick dressing or a clean cloth; as
gauze will stick to blisters and pull them open when removed. It will also
leave filaments behind.
Chemical
• Flush the exposed area with cool water immediately for 15 to 20 minutes
Eye Injury:
Small particles
• Do not rub your eyes

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 27
 • Use the corner of a soft clean cloth to draw particles out, or hold the eyelids
open and flush the eyes continuously with water.
Large or stuck particles
• If a particle is stuck in the eye, do not attempt to remove it
• Cover both eyes with bandage and transport worker to a medical facility
Chemical
• Immediately irrigate the eyes and under the eyelids, with water, for 30
minutes and transport worker to a medical facility
Neck and Spine Injury:
If the victim appears to have injured their neck or spine or is unable to move their
arm or leg, do not attempt to move the victim unless it is absolutely necessary.
(Only to prevent a more serious injury)
Heat Exhaustion:
• Loosen the victim's tight clothing
• Give the victim "sips" of cool water
• Have the victim lie down in a cooler place with their feet raised

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 28
 19.9 Major Incident

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

In the event of a major incident, the following procedure is to be followed:

 Notify the senior Stuart Olson representative on site who will:
o Dispatch the on-site safety personnel to the scene
o Notify local emergency services and request assistance as necessary
o Enact the Site Emergency Plan
o Notify the Regional Vice President, Regional Safety Manager and Field
Manager. In the event that the Regional Safety Manager does not
acknowledge immediate receipt of the notification and their intent to do
so, the senior representative will also notify the COO of Stuart Olson
Construction Ltd. and the President of Stuart Olson Inc.
Reference Section 12.3.6 – Serious Injury or Fatality
 Prior to proceeding to the scene of the incident, do a quick visual hazard
assessment of the area to ensure you are not putting yourself or anyone else at
unnecessary risk or danger
 Always ensure your own safety before proceeding with any first aid or rescue
attempt
 Assess whether you need an ambulance, or if 911 is warranted. This is a
judgment call and the injured worker’s well-being overrides everything else.
Immediately call other departments or utility companies, as circumstances
dictate, to assist you. Keep in mind, when you call 911, the media will probably
beat everyone else to the scene and you will have them to deal with as well
Note: Only the designated Stuart Olson spokesperson is to talk to the media.
Reference: Section 19.11: Safe Work Procedure - Media
 Depending on the severity of the incident, counsellors may be required for
emotionally traumatized workers. This will be arranged by the Regional Safety
Manager, Human Resources Manager or the Regional Vice President
 The scene of the incident is not to be disturbed (ribbon off or barricade, if
necessary) until all investigations are complete and you are given the all clear by
investigators having authority/jurisdiction, the Regional Safety Manager, and
possibly the local law authorities
 Exception: If the scene of the incident has to be altered to accommodate the
safe extraction of the injured worker, then by all means do so, but keep a mental
picture of the scene so the incident can be reconstructed as accurately as
possible after the worker has been taken care of.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 29
  All courtesy and cooperation will be given to the officer(s) representing the
provincial authorities. It is absolutely imperative that facts given to these
authorities be accurate and truthful. Anything less could jeopardize the
investigation and ultimately be held against Stuart Olson and possibly the
perpetrator of the inaccurate information in a court of law
 Pictures and measurements of the incident scene are to be taken and included in
the incident report that will be done by the Superintendent, Witnesses (if
applicable) and the Regional Safety Manager.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 30
 19.10 Material Handlers

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: B
Safe operation of material handlers is dependent on the operator, the mechanical
condition of the unit, and using the truck to lift loads within its maximum rated capacity.
Only a trained and qualified person may operate a material handler. This equipment is
not to be loaned to trade contractors or other contractors for any reason.
All operating regulations, manufacturer recommendations, and safety practices and
procedures must be observed.
Material Handlers Safe Work Procedures
Follow these safe work procedures when working with material handlers:
Pre-start Inspection Procedure
Before starting a material handler, do the following:
1. Visually check the entire unit looking for any cracks, deformity, damage, pools of
leaking fluids, outrigger creep etc.
2. Check that the tires are properly inflated
3. Check engine oil, radiator coolant, and hydraulic reservoir levels
4. Check the seat belt and the seat belt hardware for wear or damage
5. Check the brake lights, flashers, turn signals, headlights, horn, and windshield
wipers for proper operation
6. Verify that all instruction and safety labels are in place and readable
7. Clean any foreign material from the steps and operator’s platform to reduce the
danger or slipping
Do not fill the fuel tank while the engine is running, while near an open flame, or
while smoking
8. Wipe up any spilled fuel
9. Check for warning tags placed on the material handler
Do not operate the machine until repairs have been made and authorized
personnel remove warning tags
10. Know the location of the Emergency shut-down control (if material handler has
one)
11. Always know the capacity and limitations of the equipment being used (speed,
gradeability, steering, braking, etc.)
12. Be aware of the dimensions of the material handler (height, width, length, and
weight)

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 31
 13. Be aware of the transporter dimensions (height, width, length, and weight)
14. Check the forklift or jib attachment in accordance with the manufacturer
requirements
15. Lubricate the forklift or jib attachment where called for by the manufacturer’s
requirements
16. Watch for overhanging obstructions such as wires or tree limbs
17. Check for conditions that could be dangerous (holes, banks, underground
culverts, manhole covers, water meter pits, curbs, street boxes, etc.)
Note: The seat belt must be fastened at all times during the operation of a material
handler.
Starting Procedure
When starting a material handler, do the following:
1. Use the handrails and steps to get on and off the material handler
2. Read and follow all instruction decals
3. Wear seatbelts and other required safety equipment when operating the material
handler
4. Ensure that the direction control is in “Neutral” (N) before you start the material
handler
5. Before you start the material handler, ensure that the parking brake is fully
applied, with the lever in the locked position
6. Before you start the material handler, ensure that no one is standing between the
wheels and the frame
7. Only start the engine from the operator’s position
8. Extend outriggers and operate the boom through two complete cycles to check
the operation of the controls and hydraulic cylinders
9. Check the operation of all the systems, including transmission, brakes, and boom
operations before beginning work
Warning: Do not jump-start the engine.
Operating Safe Work Practices
When operating a material handler, do the following:
 Avoid fast starts (Sudden movements can cause the material handler to tip or
lose the load)
 Lift loads slowly and evenly to keep the material handler stable
 Carry a load close to the ground (When a load is carried too high, a material
handler is more likely to tip)

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 32
  Carry a load as low as possible when turning, when the load is heavy, when
travelling on a slope, or when travelling on rough surfaces
 Keep attachments level while moving lift arms or driving up and down hills
 Operate at a speed that is appropriate for conditions to prevent a loss of control
of the material handler
 Operate the controls smoothly to prevent jerking or bucking
 Operate on level, stable surfaces
 Load, unload, and turn on solid, level ground
 Drive up and down hills, not across them
 Drive slowly on slopes
 Do not make sharp turns on hills (The material handler may roll over)
 Do not use the material handler on steep hills
 Check to make sure the tail swing area is clear before turning
 Travel slowly when turning with or without a load (The combination of speed and
sharpness of turn can cause the machine to tip over)
 Avoid holes, large bumps, and soft spots
 Stay away steep edges, ramps, ditches, curbs, retaining walls, and near trenches
(You could fall over the edge or the bank could cave in)
 Handle only loads within the rated capacity of the material handler, as shown on
the rated capacity charts
 Inspect the load to be lifted
 Do not raise the boom unless the frame is level
 Handle only stable loads
 Position each load the same distance from the centre of the carriage
 Make sure that the floor or surface can hold the weight of the material handler
and the load
 Be careful when placing loads at high elevation and use a helper to guide you
(When lift height increases, your depth perception decreases)
 When travelling up or down a grade with a load, the load must be kept up grade
to maintain control
 When travelling on a steep grade without a load, the counterweight must be kept
up grade
 Slow down and sound the horn when approaching blind intersections or turns

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 33
 Shut down procedure
When shutting down a material hander, do the following:
1. Stop the machine and apply the parking brake
2. Fully lower the boom and fork
3. Tilt the carriage forward until the tips of the forks touch the ground
4. Idle the engine for a few minutes for cool down
5. Turn the key and the switch to the “off” position
6. Cycle the control levers
7. Remove the key before dismounting
8. Lock the cab doors
Rollover safety procedure
If the material handler tips over, do the following:
1. Stay on the machine—do not jump
2. Hold the steering wheel firmly
3. Brace your feet
4. Lean forward and away from the impact

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 34
 19.11 Media

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: C

If approached by the media, the following procedure is to be followed:

 Only a designated Stuart Olson spokesperson is to talk to the media on our sites.
Workers are to be informed of this rule. The media may be informed that an
incident has happened. No particulars about the workers name, the company
they work for, or extent of injuries are to be divulged.
 The only acceptable approach is to say that an investigation into the incident will
be completed by internal personnel, as well as investigators having
authority/jurisdiction, and it would be inappropriate at the present time to answer
their question.
 The next of kin of a seriously injured, or fatally injured worker, must be notified at
the earliest possible moment. Notification must be made by the appropriate
authority such as the police, or senior company representative. Information
needs to be secured as to where the ambulance will be taking the injured worker
for treatment.
 Do not speculate on the facts or offer any comments to the media that are ‘off the
record.’
 Be careful about all statements near the media. Even if the microphone is down,
or appears to be off, it may still be recording.
 Attempt to present yourself in a professional and calm manner. Do not lose your
composure with the media. They are only trying to do their job.

Reference: Section 12.4.2

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 35
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 36
 19.12 Propane and Natural Gas Heaters

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

No open flame air forced heaters (torpedo furnace, salamander heaters) are to be used
to heat the interior of any building.
Open flame heaters can be use on the exterior of the building to heat and hoard
masonry veneer and stucco. They can also be used to heat the underside of a slab or in
large concrete areas provided that these steps are followed
 The heaters must have a yearly date of inspection completed by a qualified
heater specialist.
 The heaters must be used in a well ventilated area.
 Only trained, designated personnel are to turn/shut down the open flame heater
equipment.
 Open flame heaters cannot be used in finished areas.
Warning: Where a propane gas heater or other open flame heating device is used, the
device must be positioned on fire resistive drywall board, tied off to a wall or floor with
not less than 1m (3 ft) of clear space surrounding it. Failure to comply with this warranty
shall render all insurance null and void.
Warning: Carbon monoxide (CO) poisoning is a potential hazard of temporary heating.
The most obvious symptom of CO poisoning is headaches. If you suspect high levels of
CO, notify your Foreman.
Note: A carbon monoxide monitor should be present when a propane or natural gas
heater is used and CO could pose a danger.
Propane and Natural Gas Heater Safe Work Practices
Follow these safe work practices when using propane or natural gas heaters:
 NO SMOKING during any gas fitting/lighting operations
 Special care should always be taken to ensure that heaters are set in safe
locations and not located in hazardous, flammable environments
 Minimize the number of persons involved in heater operations. Only authorized
persons are permitted to operate, adjust, install, shut down, or move heaters
 Plan for regular heater checks, even during after hours, to ensure the heaters
operate safely
 No one else should tamper with heaters
 Propane cylinders under 136 kg (300 lbs.) may be used indoors during temporary
construction

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 37
  A carbon monoxide (CO) monitor should be present when a propane or natural
gas heater is used (Carbon monoxide poisoning is a potential hazard of
temporary heating, and its most obvious early symptom is headaches)
 Regulators must be used with the propane tank
 A 1st stage regulator is required at the propane tank end to reduce the high
pounds tank pressure down to the low pounds pressure for the heater
 Position temporary heaters at least 1.83m (6 ft) away from the fuel cylinder
 Hose length must be a minimum of 3.05m (10 ft) and a maximum of 15.24m (50
ft)
 Position fire extinguishers within 9.23m (30 ft) of a heating unit
 All propane cylinders must be stored outside in a well-ventilated area
 Connection and reconnection of propane tanks must be carried out by a worker
trained and certified to do so
 If a manifold system is used, the maximum number of propane cylinders per
heater is three (3)
 All propane cylinders must rest on a stable base or be secured when in use or in
storage
 When using a gas heater inside a building, the regulator must be vented to the
outside (use a garden hose or a black hose)
 Tape the inlets of the gas line and the regulator if the heating unit will not be in
use for a period of time
 All hoses should be protected from equipment and vehicle traffic
 Maintenance of plumbing in the heater should only be done by a qualified gas
fitter
 Vaporizers should be appropriately protected from the environmental elements
 All gas line valves should be located in same area as heater to ensure safe shut
down if required
 There should also be other secondary valves, such as on the gas supply, where
you can shut off the gas supply in the event you can’t get close to the heater
 Cylinder valves should be all the way open or all the way closed – not in-between
 If heating unit becomes unplugged and will not start, do the following to reset the
unit and allow it to start:
1. Push the “Stop” button.
2. Push the “Start” button.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 38
 Heater Start-Up Procedure
 Place heaters – area around heaters are to be kept clear of all combustible
materials
 Hook up gas lines and tighten all fittings
 Run power source to heaters
 Set valve for either propane gas or natural gas depending on the available
source
 Turn on the main gas
 Turn on the auxiliary gas
 Check lines and fittings for leaks, using bubble solution. Fix any leaks by
tightening the fittings
 Turn gas valve wide open to light
 Turn power switch on
 Second switch – push down to start fan
 Push up to start igniter
 Hold up until the light goes out (on some models wait until the light comes on)
 Make sure the fire extinguisher is located near the heater
 If heater does not start after three (3) tries, turn off the gas source and notify a
supervisor
Heater Shut-Down Procedure
 Shut off main gas
 Turn off auxiliary gas
 Purge all gas from heater by burning off the gas
 Turn off power on heater
 Disconnect hoses
 All open-ended lines at auxiliary valves are to be securely capped
 Roll up hoses and cords
 Put all heaters, hoses, and cords away
Vaporizer Lighting Procedure
 Have fire extinguisher at vaporizer location
 Close all valves leading from vaporizer to heaters
 Open valve from tank to vaporizer and light pilot
 Turn on valves leading to heaters being used

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 39
 Vaporizer Shut-Down Procedure
 Have fire extinguisher at vaporizer location
 Turn off valve on tank
 Hook up a heater to vaporizer and allow all gas to be used up in line from tank
 Turn off pilot – do two (2) visual checks to make sure pilot is out
 Crack fitting at tank to drain propane left in line
 Remove line at vaporizer
 When removing lines from vaporizer to heater, always shut off lines at vaporizer
first

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 40
 19.13 Radial Arm Saw

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

The principal injuries to persons using radial arm saws includes cuts or amputation to
arms or hands caused by the blade, flying wood chips and handling of materials. It is
therefore necessary that no person operate this equipment until its use has been
thoroughly demonstrated and understood.
Pre-Operation
 A radial arm saw requires many adjustments prior to use. Ensure that the saw is
locked out before making these adjustments
 Safety glasses or goggles must be worn. A face shield may also be required and
it should be used in conjunction with proper eye protection
 Read and understand the operating manual prior to use
 Choose the proper blade for the job and ensure that it is installed correctly
 Ensure that the blade guards are securely installed. The upper half of the blade
must always be guarded, including the arbour end. The lower half of the saw
should have an articulating guard for 90-degree crosscut operations
 The tabletop should be large enough to cover the blade in any direction (mitre,
bevel or rip). The saw should never be operated with the blade in a position
where it protrudes or extends beyond the table
 The slots of the back fence should not be deeper than 6mm (1/4”). The fence
must be replaced if the slots are deeper than this or if pieces are missing
Operation (all cuts)
 Do not stand in a direct line with the blade
 Never carry on a conversation or interrupt a person operating a radial arm saw.
 Allow the saw to reach full speed before starting the cut
 Hold the stock firmly against the tabletop and the rear fence
 A push stick should be used when ripping. The push stick should be longer than
the blade's diameter
 Keep proper footing and balance at all times
 Never leave the radial arm saw unattended while the blade is running. Wait until
the blade has come to a full stop before leaving the area
 Always remove scrap material from the table with a stick

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 41
 Ripping
 Rotate the radial saw's head 90 degrees so that the blade is parallel to the fence
and is clamped in position. Lower the blade so that it will cut through the stock
 Position the:
o Nose of the guard (or drop the guard down), to just clear the stock
o The spreader (to prevent the material from coming together after
ripping, binding and producing a kickback)
o The anti-kickback devices (position so that the anti-kickback fingers ride
on the stock. The angle should be adjusted so that if the stock is pulled
out by hand, it will jam under the fingers and the stock cannot be
moved)
 Using a push-stick, feed the stock against the direction of rotation of the revolving
blade from the side at which the blade rotates upwards towards the operator
 For in rip, feed the material from right to left, for out rip, feed the material from left
to right. Serious injury can result from feeding the material from the wrong side
as the operator's hands can be drawn into the blade
 A person or helper standing on the in feed side of the blade can be at serious risk
of injury from flying stock. It is important to be aware of this fact
 When feeding the stock, hold it firmly against the table and the fence. Apply a
firm, even pressure. Operators should never release the feed pressure until the
cut is completed and the work piece has fully cleared the table
 Care must be taken when ripping material with thin, lightweight, hard or slippery
surfaces because of the reduced efficiency of the anti-kickback devices
Crosscutting
 Radial arm saws used for crosscutting are pulled across the cutting area by
means of a handle located to one side of the blade. The operator should stand, if
possible, on the handle's side and pull the cutting head with the hand nearest the
handle. The product being cut should be manoeuvred with the other hand
 The blade should never be pulled beyond the point necessary to make the cut as
the back of the blade could lift the work piece and throw it over the fence
 Place the material to be cut against the fence or a special jig, never cut freehand
 Never remove short pieces from the table until the saw has returned to its normal
position at the rear of the table. Always use a stick, not your hands, to remove
scrap from the table

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 42
 19.14 Scissor Lifts, Booms and Giraffes

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

For safe operation of a scissor lift, boom or giraffe, you must understand the instructions,
have training that includes the actual operation of the machine, and have knowledge of
the safety rules and regulations for the job site.
Know the rules that govern operation and maintenance of the equipment.
 Know the capacity and operating characteristics of the aerial platform.
 Inspect your machine before each use
 Check the work area for hazards that might cause the equipment to tip over
 Check your path of travel above, below, and all around for hazards
 Maintain specified distances from electric power lines
 Keep others away from your work area
 Wear a full body harness and lanyard
 Never modify or remove parts of the equipment
 If machine is not attended, lower platform, shut off engine, engage parking
brake, and remove the key
Protect yourself by wearing the proper protective clothing and personal safety
devices. Use:
 Full body harness and lanyard
 Tie-off to specific locations on the lift is mandatory 100% of the time (refer to
the owner’s manual)
 Hard hat
 Safety boots
 Safety glasses, goggles, or face shield
 Gloves
 Hearing protection
 Do not wear any loose clothing or accessories that can get caught in moving
parts

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 43
 General Safety:
 Know the equipment and how to safely operate all of the controls, gauges, and
dials. Know the rate work load, speed, range, braking and steering
characteristics, turning radius and operating clearances
 Use all available protective and safety devices. Keep all protective and safety
devices in proper working order. Make certain all guards, railings, covers, and
safety signs are installed on the aerial platform. Always take advantage of the
protection available
 Check equipment before you begin your work day. Inspect your machine and
report any deficiencies. Do not operate until the deficiencies are corrected. RED
TAG equipment until it is serviced. Check for missing, damaged, or unreadable
safety signs.
 Perform all necessary maintenance. Check for cracked welds or other structural
damage. Check hydraulic system for leaks and damage
 Check the work area for holes, obstacles, drop-offs, or rough spots. Look for
weak spots on ramps, oil spills, soft soil, slippery surfaces, and standing water
 Be aware of strong and/or gusty wind conditions
 Use caution when fuelling. An aerial platform must be lowered in the stowed
position and all power turned off before fuelling. Never fuel tank with the engine
running, while smoking, or near an open flame
 Look out for others. Before starting, walk completely around the machine. Make
sure no one is under it or close to it
 Let others know you’re starting up and don’t start until everyone, particularly
spotters and inexperienced workers, are clear of the machine
 Test the controls. After starting, recheck all gauges and lights. Check the
audible and visual alarms (if provided). Check all control functions including
emergency stop buttons on both the upper and lower stations. Be certain you
can control speed, elevation and steering before moving
 Follow safe operating procedures. If there is more than one person on the
platform, only the designated operator should operate the controls. Never jam
an operating control from one travel direction to the other. Return to neutral,
stop, then proceed in the other direction. Avoid sudden stops, starts, turns, or
changes in direction. Never leave the platform running while unattended. Never
override any hydraulic, mechanical, or electrical safety devices
 Pay attention. Always keep your attention focused in the direction of travel. Be
sure to check clearance above, below, and on all sides. Use a spotter if your
view is obstructed
 Never use a ladder, planks, steps, or other devices to provide additional reach
or gain greater height. Do not lean over or sit or climb on the platform railing
 Never tie off to an adjacent structure when working from an aerial platform

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 44
  Never allow anyone to service or operate a machine from the lower control
station while personnel are in the platform except in an emergency. If the
platform or any part of the machine becomes entangled with an adjacent
structure, do not attempt to free the machine. Call for rescue or request qualified
personnel to free the machine
 If your platform becomes disabled, attach a Red Warning Tag to both the upper
and lower control stations. This equipment should not be started. Remove the
key or ground from the battery

Always Remember:
 Read all signs and warning tags
 Don’t take chances or exceed safe limits
 Avoid fires and hazardous explosions
 Assess/prepare work area
 Work safely
 Watch out for others
 Follow safe operating procedures
 Test the controls
 Use caution when fuelling
 Use all available protective and safety devices
 Know your equipment and check it regularly

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 45
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 46
 19.15 Traffic Control

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

This procedure is intended to provide the safest possible conditions in regards to traffic
control.
Stuart Olson representatives will ensure that Contractors will follow the established
guidelines or submit a Safe Job procedure that meets or exceeds applicable legislative
and/or Stuart Olson requirements.
1. Ensure that effective traffic control is provided and used whenever the
uncontrolled movement of vehicle traffic could be hazardous to workers and the
general public.
2. During traffic control operations a supervisor must be designated to be
responsible for ensuring that:
 The required traffic control devices are in place
 Each member of the traffic control are to wear the required personal
protective clothing and equipment
 Traffic control persons perform traffic control duties competently and
safely
 If 2 or more traffic control persons are required to work as a team at the
worksite, responsibility for coordination of changes in traffic flow is
assigned and radio communications are available when required
3. Traffic control devices must be put in place before commencing operations and
must be removed when they are no longer required.
4. Traffic control persons are required when any of the following conditions prevail:
 Traffic is required to pass a worker, equipment or other obstruction that
may block all or part of the traveled roadway
 Workers or equipment are employed on the traveled way over the brow of
a hill, around a sharp curve, or at any other location where sight distance
is not adequate for oncoming traffic to have adequate warning of their
presence
 It is necessary to institute a one-way traffic system through a construction
zone where traffic volumes are heavy, approach speeds are high, and a
traffic signal system is not used
 Construction vehicle traffic is not coordinated with an existing traffic
control system, or an existing traffic signal light system is not adequate to
regulate traffic, or the work encroaches into an intersection so as to
interfere with regular traffic movement

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 47
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 48
  Traffic speed or volume is a hazard to workers while setting up or
removing other traffic control devices
 Workers are not adequately protected by other traffic control devices
5. A traffic control person must be adequately trained with sufficient supervision.
6. During traffic control operations a traffic control person must remain on duty at
the assigned station until relieved and must be alert at all times.
7. A traffic control person must stand in a safe position, preferably on the driver’s
side of the lane under the flag person’s control, be clearly visible and have an
unobstructed view of approaching traffic, and be positioned at least 25m (80ft.)
away from the work area unless circumstances or space requirements such as
working at or near an intersection dictate otherwise.
8. Signs advising of a traffic control person ahead must be placed in advance of
each traffic control persons station and removed promptly when traffic control
persons are no longer on duty at that station.
9. All traffic control persons must use appropriate traffic control paddles and
reflective clothing.
10. A traffic control person must make all traffic control motions and signals precisely
and deliberately so that the meaning of signals can be clearly understood.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 49
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 50
 19.16 Wire Rope

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: B

Cable Clips and Clamping Wire Ropes

There is only one way to install cable clips when you want to get the maximum efficiency
– up to 85% - out of a prepared loop or thimble-eye termination. Otherwise the
termination can be severely reduced in capacity.
There are two sections, a saddle part and a U-shaped part.
Ensure you have the right size of clip for the wire rope diameter.
The cable clip installation table will tell you how many clips you’ll need, the spacing
between clips, and the torque needed to tighten the nuts.
Three clips are required if the wire rope is used for overhead lifting.
All three clips must be installed with the saddle part on the live end of the wire rope. This
lets the live end rest in the saddle so it’s not crushed by the U part of the clip.
The old rule is “never saddle a dead horse.”
The U goes on the dead end of the rope where crushing will not affect the breaking
strength of the hoist line.
Cable Clip Installation Table

Diameter of Rope Number of Spacing Between Clips Torque

Clips Centre to Centre
Millimetres Millimetres Inches Newton- feet
Metres
6 2 38 1½ 20 65.2
8 2 51 2 40 131.2
10 2 57 2¼ 65 213.3
11 2 64 2½ 90 295.3
12 3 78 3 90 295.3
16 3 102 4 135 443
19 4 114 4½ 176 577.4
22 4 133 5¼ 305 1001
25 4 152 6 305 1001

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 51
 Installing Wire Rope Clips Safe Work Procedure
To install wire rope clips, do the following:
1. Wire the thimble to the rope at the desired point, band the rope around the
thimble, and secure it temporarily by wiring the rope members together
2. Attach the clip farthest from the thimble first and tighten it (be sure the base of
the saddle rests upon the live end of the rope and the “U” bolts on the short end)
3. Put the clip nearest the thimble on next, but do not tighten it. (If one or more
additional clips are to be attached, place them at an equal distance apart
between the clips already attached)
4. Attach all clips in the same manner as the clip farthest from the thimble
5. Before tightening a clip, place some stress on the rope to take up the slack and
equalize the tension on both sides of the clip. (Do not apply too much stress,
because if you do, the clip attached below will not hold)
6. Tighten all clips to the recommended torque
For further information, see the appropriate provincial regulations.

Refer to the following diagram

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 52
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 53
HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015
Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 54
 19.17 Working Alone

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: A

The following is a brief overview that represents existing legislation concerning the
practice of working alone.
Definitions
Working Alone – Means to work alone at a work site in circumstances where assistance
is not readily available in the event of an injury, illness or emergency. This policy applies
in such circumstances.
Employee Training – It is the responsibility of the Superintendent to ensure that, in any
working alone situation, a hazard assessment shall first be conducted to identify existing
potential hazards arising from the conditions and circumstances of the work.
Hazard Assessment
1. Shall be first conducted to identify existing or potential hazards arising from
the conditions and circumstances of the work.
2. The hazard assessment must be completed in every working alone situation
and shall be communicated to all workers affected by the Hazard
Assessment.
3. If any hazards are identified during the Hazard Assessment, Stuart Olson
shall take all reasonable steps to eliminate such hazards or, if it is not
reasonably practical to do so, to control such hazards. In the first instance, it
shall be the responsibility of the Superintendent to identify, eliminate and
control hazards.
4. If it is appropriate to the conditions and circumstances of the work, then
further hazard assessments shall be conducted at additional appropriate
intervals of time.
Communication Methods
1. In working alone situations, in addition to conducting a Hazard Assessment
as described above, Stuart Olson shall establish an effective means of
communication between the worker and persons capable of responding to
the workers needs, including radio, telephone or other electronic
communication device that includes regular contact (meaning someone
capable of a rescue must check in with the person working alone on a regular
basis).
2. In the first instance, it shall be the responsibility of the Superintendent to
ensure that an effective means of communication is provided.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 55
 3. Where practical, Stuart Olson shall provide cell phones to workers in working
alone situations, with emergency phone numbers programmed as “speed-
dial” or “hot “ buttons, and the worker will be instructed in advance on use of
those functions.
4. In circumstances where it is not possible to establish an effective means of
communication by way of radios, telephones or other devices, then Stuart
Olson shall either ensure that the worker is visited from time to time at
appropriate intervals or alternatively, ensure that the worker contacts the
Superintendent or co-worker at appropriate intervals.
5. For these purposes, an appropriate interval of time during which the worker
shall either be visited or contacted depending on the nature of the potential
hazard. In the event that contact is not affected during the interval as
planned, it shall be the responsibility of the Superintendent to ensure that
procedures are in place to immediately visit or establish contact with the
worker.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 56
 19.18 Cut-off Saw

Safe Work Procedure

Hazard ranking: B

PPE required: Face shield, safety glasses, ear plugs, cut resistant gloves, CSA hard
hat, CSA steel toe boots and long sleeve shirt

Items required: cut-off saw

The following safe work procedures must be used when operating a cut-off saw:
1. Inspection of saw:
 Make sure you inspect the saw for any loose bolts, nuts, screws and fuel cap.
 Make sure the blade rotates smoothly.
 Check to ensure the throttle trigger, full throttle lock button, the choke lever,
decompression valve and kill switch all function properly without failure.
 Check the guard for any damage and adjust it as needed so sparks are
directed away from the operator.
 Do not start the saw if damage is found or if it’s not completely and securely
assembled. Lock and tag out the saw if damaged or requires service.
2. Starting the saw:
 To start, place the machine firmly against the ground and make sure the
blade is not contacting anything.
 Maintain good balance and secure footing.
 Press the decompression valve button and set the choke level if cold.
 Pull the throttle trigger backwards as far as the stop and hold it in position.
 Press down the full throttle lock button and release the throttle trigger.
 Hold the front handle with left hand and firmly press the cut-off saw against
ground, place right foot on the carburetor box cover or place your toe in the
throttle handle base for additional support.
 Hold the starter cord securely and pull sharply, guiding it back slowly. Do not
let go of the grip handle halfway.
 If the engine does not start, press the button of the decompression valve
again and restart the engine.
 If the saw runs for a while but doesn’t continue to run, press the
decompression valve in and turn the choker to off.
 As soon as the engine is running press the throttle trigger to disengage the
full throttle lock button which will revert to its original position.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 57
 3. PPE
 Protect your hands with gloves. Heavy-duty, cut resistant, nonslip gloves
improve your grip and protect your hands.
 Wear goggles or a full face shield with safety glasses underneath.
 Hearing protection must be worn due to extreme noise.
4. Operation:
 Gently pull the throttle trigger backwards to accelerate the engine. When the
blade speed is up and stable, you can begin to move the slowly toward the
material to be cut.
 Keep your body positioned to either side of the work piece, but not in line with
the wheel.
 After the cutting edge comes in contact with the object, increase pressure to
the saw slowly until the blade is at the desired depth. Hold the machine
securely and move along a straight line to complete the cut.
 To stop or halt the cut lift the blade out of the cut, release the throttle trigger,
wait until the engine slows down to idle speed and blade stops running and
then turn off the machine.
 In an emergency the machine has a Kill Switch that can be engaged.
 Never run the machine indoors or in poorly ventilated areas. Ensure proper
ventilation when working in trenches or other confined areas.
 Operate the cut-off saw under good visibility and daylight conditions only.

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 19 Safe Work Procedures Page 58
Drugs and Alcohol in
the Workplace:
Policies and Procedures
September 16, 2014
This Manual supports Provincial legislation. Changes to such legislation will take precedence over
documentation herein. Periodic updates to the Health, Safety & Environmental Manual will reflect
any legislative changes that may have been enacted.

The Policies and Procedures in this Manual are applicable to all employees of the Stuart Olson
Buildings Ltd. group of companies (herein referred to as Stuart Olson). In the event of a legal
name change, merger or acquisition, sale or purchase of the Stuart Olson Buildings Ltd. group of
companies, the resultant corporation shall, if still wholly owned by Stuart Olson Buildings Ltd., be
bound by the Policies and Procedures herein. Dormant companies are also covered by these
Policies and Procedures.

Property of Stuart Olson Buildings Ltd.

Unauthorized modification, reproduction, distribution or transmission
in any form is prohibited
Contents
Drug and Alcohol in the Workplace Policy ......................................................................................................... 2
Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policies and Procedures ......................................................................... 3
1.0 Purposes of the Alcohol and Drug Policy ..................................................................................... 3
2.0 The Alcohol and Drug Policy is Important ..................................................................................... 3
3.0 Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ......................................................................................................... 3
4.0 Implementation of the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ..................................................................... 5
4.1 Education
4.2 Self-Help
4.3 Possession of Alcohol and Drugs
4.4 Observation of Employee Conduct
4.5 Incidents and Near Misses
4.6 Site Access Testing
4.7 Pre-Employment Testing
4.8 Alcohol and Drug Testing
4.9 Alcohol and Drug Testing Results
4.10 Assistance of a Representative
5.0 Consequences for Failure to Comply with the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule ..............................9
5.1 Company Responses to Violations
5.2 Violations of 3.1 (b) of the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule
5.3 Violation of 3.1 (a), (c) or (d) of the Alcohol and Drug Work Rule
5.4 Owner Responses to Violations
5.5 Bargaining Agent or Labour Provider Responses to Violations
6.0 Definitions ....................................................................................................................................11

List of Appendices
Appendix A: Alcohol and Drug Testing Procedures ........................................................................................ 14
Appendix B: Substance Abuse Expert ............................................................................................................. 20
Appendix C: Drug and Alcohol Testing Process ............................................................................................. 22
Appendix D: Drug and Alcohol Flowchart ........................................................................................................ 26
Appendix E: Actions Required Flowchart ....................................................................................................... 27

Forms – in order of appearance

Conditions for Employment (Pre-Employment) – Form 70(b)
Conditions for Employment (current employees) – Form 70
Determining Reasonable Cause – Form 76
Reasonable Cause Observation Checklist – Form 85
Manitoba and Ontario Addendum

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-1
Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace Policy
Stuart Olson recognizes its legal and moral responsibilities to provide a safe and productive work
environment for all workers.
Drug and alcohol abuse in the workplace can result in incidents, injuries, lower productivity, lost
profits, increased health care costs, and legal difficulties for workers and employers.
The use, possession, or sale of alcohol or illegal drugs in the workplace and the inappropriate use
of prescription drugs and over-the-counter drugs in the workplace poses serious risks to the health,
safety, and well-being of workers and will not be tolerated by Stuart Olson.
It is therefore our policy that:
• All Stuart Olson direct employees and Labour Supply companies providing labour only
services direct to Stuart Olson who work in safety sensitive positions are required to pass
Pre-Employment Drug and Alcohol Testing as a condition of employment, unless otherwise
excused by these policies or any other Stuart Olson policy or agreement.
• All workers are prohibited from manufacturing, cultivating, distributing, dispensing,
possessing, or using illegal, mind-altering, or intoxicating substances while on Company
premises and work sites (including parking areas and other Company grounds) or while
performing work duties away from the Company’s premises.
• Workers must not report to work, or continue to work, if in any way unfit to perform work in a
safe manner due to drugs or alcohol. Workers must not report to work suffering the
aftereffects of the use of illicit drugs or alcohol, or the intentional or unintentional misuse of
prescribed drugs.
Stuart Olson has adopted these policies in order to provide a safe workplace for all workers and to
ensure the safety of those who may be affected by the conduct of Company workers.
Unless expressly addressed in another Stuart Olson corporate policy, this policy is applicable to all
Stuart Olson employees who shall agree to be bound by the policy, and to all trade contractors
working on Stuart Olson sites, who shall agree to be bound by the policy and to manage their
employees in accordance with the policy.
The policy shall be discussed in detail at general safety meetings and a copy of the policy will be
available at each Company project site. Copies will also be provided to each employee upon
request.

____________________
David LeMay
President and CEO
Stuart Olson Inc.
January 7, 2011, (Reaffirmed January 2, 2015)
(Amended September 16, 2014, April 24, 2014, July 26, 2013)

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-2
Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policy and Procedures
1.0 PURPOSES OF THE ALCOHOL AND DRUG POLICY

1.1 The alcohol and drug policy is established

(a) to provide a safe workplace for all employees and those whose safety may be
affected by the conduct of employees, and
(b) to ensure that all employees are treated fairly and with respect.

2.0 THE ALCOHOL AND DRUG POLICY IS IMPORTANT

2.1 The use of alcohol and drugs adversely affects the ability of a person to work in a safe
manner. Employees at construction workplaces are often working independently or with
equipment or material in an environment that poses a threat to the safety of themselves, the
workforce, the workplace and the property at the workplace, if handled without proper care
and attention. In setting the requirements in the Work Rule it is acknowledged that
assessments of risks relating to work activities, equipment and processes may lead to a
workplace adopting more rigorous requirements in relation to the risks faced in particular
work. This Policy will remind employees of the risks associated with the use of alcohol and
other drugs and provide understandable and predictable responses when an employee’s
conduct jeopardizes the safety of the workplace.

2.2 By pursuing the purposes of this alcohol and drug policy, the company promotes

(a) the safety and dignity of its employees,

(b) the welfare of its employees and their families,
(c) the best interests of the bargaining agent or labour provider to which employees
belong, and
(d) the best interests of the company, the owner, the construction industry and the
public.

2.3 There are no other reasonable alternatives available to the company that impose a smaller
burden on any rights an employee may have under Human Rights, Citizenship and
Multiculturalism Act, and the respective legislation of other provinces and territories where
the company conducts its business, and at the same time are equally as effective in
promoting the purposes of this alcohol and drug policy.

3.0 ALCOHOL AND DRUG WORK RULE

3.1 An employee shall not

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-3
 (a) use, possess or offer for sale alcohol and drugs or any product or device that may
be used to attempt to tamper with any sample for a drug and alcohol test while on
company property or at a company workplace,
(b) report to work or work

(i) with an alcohol level equal to or in excess of 0.040 grams per 210 litres of
breath,
(ii) with a drug level for the drugs set out below equal to or in excess of the
concentrations set out below, or
(iii) while unfit for work on account of the use of a prescription or non-prescription
drug,

(c) refuse to

(i) comply with a request made by a representative of the company under 4.3,
or
(ii) comply with a request to submit to an alcohol and drug test made under 4.4,
4.5, 4.6 or 4.7, or
(iii) provide a sample for an alcohol and drug test under 4.8,

(d) tamper with a sample for an alcohol and drug test given under 4.8.

The company follows current Canadian regulations for testing urine and oral fluid drug
concentration limits outlined in the Canadian Model for Providing a Safe Workplace: Alcohol and
Drug Guidelines and Work Rule (COAA Model) and the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
Procedures for Transportation Workplace Drug and Alcohol Testing Programs.

3.2 An employee complies with 3.1(a) or 3.1(b)(iii) of the alcohol and drug work rule if he or she
is in possession while at a company workplace of a prescription drug prescribed for him or
her or a non-prescription drug and

(a) the employee is using the prescription or non-prescription drug for its intended
purpose and in the manner directed by the employee’s physician or pharmacist or
the manufacturer of the drug, and
(b) the use of the prescription or non-prescription drug does not adversely affect the
employee’s ability to safely perform his or her duties, and
(c) the employee has notified his or her supervisor or manager before starting work of
any potentially unsafe side effects associated with the use of the prescription or
nonprescription drug.

3.3 The supervisor or manager who has received a notification under 3.2 may not disclose any
information provided under 3.2 to any person other than a person who needs to know, to
discharge a statutory or common-law obligation.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-4
 4.0 IMPLEMENTATION OF THE ALCOHOL AND DRUG WORK RULE
4.1 Education
4.1.1 The company is committed to informing employees of the existence of this alcohol
and drug policy and to taking such other steps as are reasonable to inform its
employees of the safety risks associated with the use of alcohol and drugs and the
assistance available under the employee assistance services program.
4.1.2 The likelihood that an employee will comply with the alcohol and drug work rule is
increased if he or she knows the safety risks associated with the use of alcohol and
drugs and the assistance available under the employee assistance services
program.

4.2 Self-help
4.2.1 This policy encourages employees who believe that they may require the help
provided by substance abuse experts (SAEs) and employee assistance services
programs (EAPs) to voluntarily request that help. An employee requesting help will
not be disciplined unless he or she:

(a) has failed to comply with the alcohol and drug work rule,
(b) has been requested to confirm compliance with the alcohol and drug work
rule under 4.3,
(c) has been requested to submit to an alcohol and drug test under 4.4, 4.6 or
4.7, or
(d) has been involved in an incident referred to in 4.5.

4.2.2 An employee who believes that he or she may be unable to comply with the alcohol
and drug work rule should seek help by:

(a) contacting a qualified person responsible for the administration of the

employee assistance services program for his /her workplace, branch or
region,
(b) informing a family member or friend and asking for assistance in contacting a
person responsible for the administration of the employee assistance
services program, or
(c) informing a co-worker, a supervisor, or a representative of the company, the
bargaining agent or labour provider to which the employee may belong of his
or her wish to contact a person responsible for the administration of the
employee assistance services program.

4.2.3 In responding to an employee’s request for help, a foreman, supervisor or manager

must

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-5
 (a) inform the employee of the assistance available under the employee
assistance services program, and direct them to a company representative in
Human Resources,
(b) encourage the employee to utilize the employee assistance services
program which may assist the employee, and
(c) inform the employee that if he or she fails to utilize the employee assistance
services program the company may insist that the employee submit to any or
all of the following:
(i) a medical assessment conducted by a physician selected by the
company for such purposes,
(ii) alcohol and drug testing as set out in 4.8,
(iii) an assessment conducted by a substance abuse expert ,

and that his or her failure to do so may result in the termination of his or her
employment.

4.2.4 An employee who receives assistance from the employee assistance services
program on account of his or her use of alcohol and drugs must comply with the
terms and conditions of any program established to help the employee as a
condition of his or her continued employment.

4.2.5 An employee who is at work and enrolled in the employee assistance services
program must comply with the alcohol and drug work rule.

4.3 Possession of alcohol and drugs

4.3.1 A representative of the company or the owner or a sub-contractor who has reasonable
grounds to believe an employee may not be in compliance with 3.1(a) of the alcohol
and drug work rule, must request

(a) that employee to confirm that he or she is in compliance with 3.1(a) of the
alcohol and drug work rule, or
(b) the assistance of appropriate authorities to confirm that employee’s
compliance with 3.1(a) of the alcohol and drug work rule.

4.3.2 A representative of the company or the owner must provide to the employee the
reason for the request under 4.3.1.

4.4 Observation of employee conduct

4.4.1 A supervisor or a manager of an employee must request an employee to submit to
an alcohol and drug test under 4.8 if the supervisor or manager and the next or
equal level of management present at the company workplace, if any, have
reasonable grounds to believe that an employee is or may be unable to work in a
safe manner because of the use of alcohol and drugs.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-6
 4.4.2 A supervisor or manager of an employee must provide to the employee the reason
for the request under 4.4.1.
4.5 Incidents and near misses
4.5.1 A supervisor or manager of an employee must request an employee to submit to an
alcohol and drug test under 4.8 if the supervisor or manager and the next level of
management present at the company workplace, if any, have reasonable grounds to
believe that an employee was involved in an incident or near miss that could have
resulted in medical treatment.

4.5.2 A supervisor or manager of an employee must provide to the employee the reason
for the request under 4.5.1.

4.5.3 A supervisor or manager must make a request under 4.5.1 immediately following an
incident or near miss unless it is not practicable or reasonable to do so until a later
time.

4.5.4 A supervisor or a manager of an employee need not request the employee to submit
to an alcohol and drug test if the supervisor or manager and the next, or equal, level
of management present at the company workplace, if any, conclude that there is
objective evidence to believe that the use of alcohol and drugs did not contribute to
the cause of the incident or near miss.

4.6 Site access testing

When an owner directly or by contract requires site access testing, an employer may
require alcohol and drug testing under 4.8 of any employee as a condition of access to the
owner’s property.

4.7 Pre-employment testing

All employees who work in safety sensitive positions are required to pass pre-employment
testing as a condition of employment. If the candidate does not pass the pre-employment
testing, the employer may release its obligation to hire. If, in the future the candidate
provides proof of successful completion of a substance abuse program, recommended by a
professional appointed substance abuse expert (SAE), the employer will re-enter the
candidate application into its applicant pool.

4.8 Alcohol and drug testing

4.8.1 The company agrees to retain a laboratory, as defined in this policy, to conduct urine
drug testing under 4.8 in accordance with those parts of the United States
Department of Transportation Workplace Drug and Alcohol Testing Programs in
force as of the date of this publication, which relate to testing procedures in
laboratories. Additionally, the company agrees to have alcohol testing under 4.8
conducted by personnel in accordance with the above standards and procedures as
they relate to alcohol testing.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-7
 4.8.2 The company agrees to retain a laboratory, as defined in this policy, to conduct oral
fluid testing under 4.8. Oral fluid testing may be permitted for incident and near miss
(post incident), and observation of employee conduct (reasonable cause) testing.
Oral fluid testing is not permitted for site access or any testing that is included in
conditions established pursuant to 5.2.2(b) or 5.4.2.

4.8.3 A summary of the features of the alcohol and drug tests is set out in Appendix A of
this alcohol and drug policy.

4.8.4 The Process for alcohol and drug testing is set out in Appendix C of this alcohol and
drug policy.

4.8.5 By continuing his or her employment with the company the employee accepts the
terms of this alcohol and drug policy and authorizes the laboratory to provide the test
results to the company or any person with legal authority to require the disclosure of
the test results, subject to 4.9.4, below. Further, the employee authorizes the
medical review officer to provide the test results to a substance abuse expert to
whom the employee has been referred under the provisions of this policy.

4.9 Alcohol and drug testing results

4.9.1 Alcohol and drug test results can be negative, positive, tampered and invalid or
inconclusive. A negative test result means the employee is in compliance, a positive
test result means non-compliance, a tampered test result means non-compliance,
and an invalid or inconclusive test result cannot be relied upon to determine
compliance or non-compliance. All test results will be provided in a confidential
written report from the medical review officer to the designated company
representative.

4.9.2 A report from the medical review officer to the designated company representative in
Human Resources that the employee’s sample produced a negative test result
means that the employee complied with 3.1(b) of the alcohol and drug work rule.
The designated company representative must notify the employee of the negative
test result and that no other steps under this alcohol and drug policy will be taken. It
may be appropriate to pursue procedures under other policies or take other steps,
including a medical assessment, in order to assist the employee to perform at a
satisfactory level.

4.9.3 A confidential written report from the medical review officer to the designated
company representative in Human Resources that the employee’s sample produced
a positive test result means that the employee failed to comply with 3.1(b) of the
alcohol and drug work rule, unless the medical review officer has determined that
there is a legitimate medical explanation for the positive test result whereby a
fitness-for-work assessment should be conducted and there may have been a failure
to comply with 3.2.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-8
 4.9.4 A confidential written report from the medical review officer to the designated
company representative in Human Resources that the employee’s sample has been
tampered with means that the employee failed to comply with 3.1(d) of the alcohol
and drug work rule.
4.9.5 A confidential written report from the medical review officer to the designated
company representative in Human Resources that the employee’s sample is invalid
or inconclusive means that the test cannot be relied upon for the purposes of this
work rule.

4.9.6 Where a person is referred to testing required under 4.7 by the bargaining agent or
labour provider of that person, a confidential written report from the medical review
officer shall be issued to the designated representative of the bargaining agent or
labour provider.

4.9.7 In order to preserve the confidentiality of test results, the designated company
representative in Human Resources and any person to whom disclosure is permitted
under this alcohol and drug policy must not disclose the test results to any person
other than a person who needs to know the test results to discharge an obligation
under this alcohol and drug policy.

4.10 Assistance of a representative

4.10.1 A representative of a bargaining agent or labour provider of which an employee is a
member and with whom the employer has a bargaining relationship may assist the
employee with any matter arising under this alcohol and drug policy if the employee
wishes to have the assistance of a representative.

4.10.2 A representative of a bargaining agent or labour provider of which an employee is a

member and with whom the employer has a bargaining relationship, may attend any
meeting or discussion which takes place under this alcohol and drug policy if the
employee wishes the representative to attend and the attendance of the
representative does not unduly delay the time at which the meeting or discussion
takes place.

5.0 CONSEQUENCES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ALCOHOL AND DRUG WORK
RULE
5.1 Company responses to violations
The company may discipline, or terminate for cause, the employment of an employee who
fails to comply with the alcohol and drug work rule. The appropriate consequence depends
on the facts of the case, including the nature of violation, the existence of prior violations,
the response to prior corrective programs and the seriousness of the violation.

5.2 Violation of 3.1(b) of the alcohol and drug work rule

5.2.1 Prior to the company making a final decision with regard to disciplining or
terminating the employment of an employee, who has failed to comply with 3.1(b) of

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-9
 the alcohol and drug work rule, the company shall direct the employee to and the
employee shall meet with a substance abuse expert. The substance abuse expert
shall make an initial assessment of the employee and make appropriate
recommendations. The assessment by the substance abuse expert shall be applied
utilizing the processes and approaches set out in Appendix B. The employee shall,
through the substance abuse expert, provide to the company a confidential report of
his or her initial assessment and recommendations. The company then shall make
the final decision under 5.1. The initial assessment is to be completed as soon as
possible, and the report shall be delivered to the company within two days of
completion. Failure by the employee to attend the assessment or follow the course
of corrective or rehabilitation action shall be cause for termination of the employee.
During the period of assessment and corrective rehabilitative programs
recommended by the substance abuse expert the employee shall be deemed to be
suspended from his or her employment without pay.

5.2.2 In addition to disciplining or terminating for cause the employment of an employee

who fails to comply with 3.1(b) of the alcohol and drug work rule, the company may
give written notice to that person that the person will not be re-employed again by
the company unless the person provides the company with the following:

(a) a certificate issued

(i) by the company approved rehabilitation program service provider

certifying that the person who was terminated has successfully
completed its rehabilitation program and continues to comply with all
the requirements of the rehabilitation program, or
(ii) by a licensed physician with knowledge of substance abuse disorders
certifying that the person who was terminated is able to safely
perform the duties he or she will be required to perform if employed
by the company, and
(b) a statement signed by the person and, if represented by a bargaining agent
or labourer provider, by the bargaining agent or labour provider
acknowledging that the person agrees to any conditions imposed as part of a
corrective rehabilitative program and such other reasonable conditions set by
the employer. The employer may terminate the employment of the employee
who fails to comply with the conditions set out in such statement.

5.3 Violation of 3.1 (a), (c) or (d) of the alcohol and drug work rule
If a company decides to discipline or terminate for cause the employment of an employee
who fails to comply with 3.1(a) or (c) or (d) of the alcohol and drug work rule, the company
shall refer such employee to a substance abuse expert and shall notify the bargaining agent
or labour provider, if the employee has one, of such referral.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-10
 5.4 Owner responses to violations
5.4.1 The owner of a site where a person was working when he or she failed to comply with the
alcohol and drug work rule may give the person who failed to comply with the alcohol and
drug work rule written notice that he or she shall not enter the owner’s site.

5.4.2 The owner of a site where a person was working when he or she failed to comply with the
alcohol and drug work rule may give that person who has been denied permission to enter
its site under 5.4.1 written notice that the person may enter the owner’s site if

(a) a company engaged in work at the owner’s site, or

(b) the bargaining agent or labour provider of that person, if the person is represented
by a bargaining agent or labour provider, or
(c) a company engaged in work at the owner’s site and the bargaining agent or labour
provider of that person provides the owner with a written statement by the person
who has been denied permission to enter the owner’s work site under 5.4.1
acknowledging that that person agrees to reasonable conditions imposed by the
owner or the contractor or the bargaining agent or labour provider or a part of a
corrective or rehabilitative program.

5.4.3 The owner may withdraw permission given under 5.4.2 if the person given permission to
enter the owner’s work site under 5.4.2 fails to comply with the alcohol and drug work rule or
any condition imposed under 5.4.2.

5.4.4 The owner is not obliged to give a person who has been denied permission to enter the
owner’s site under 5.4.3 another opportunity to work on the owner’s site.

5.5 Bargaining agent or labour provider responses to violations

A bargaining agent or labour provider shall decline to dispatch a person to a company until
that organization has reviewed the initial assessment, referred to in Article 5.2 or 5.3, and
until the conditions set out therein for the person have been met.

6.0 DEFINITIONS

6.1 In this alcohol and drug policy, the following definitions apply:

(a) Alcohol: Any substance that may be consumed and that has an alcoholic content in
excess of 0.5 per cent by volume.

(b) Alcohol and drugs: Alcohol or drugs or both.

(c) Alcohol and drug test: A test administered in accordance with 4.8.1 of this alcohol
and drug policy.

(d) Alcohol and drug work rule: The alcohol and drug work rule set out in 3.1 of this
alcohol and drug policy.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-11
 (e) Company: A corporation, partnership, association, joint venture, trust or
organizational group of persons whether incorporated or not; more specifically, the
Stuart Olson Buildings Ltd. group of companies, herein referred to as Stuart Olson.

(f) Company workplace: Includes all real or personal property, facilities, land,
buildings, equipment, containers, vehicles, vessels, boats and aircraft whether
owned, leased or used by the company and wherever it may be located.

(g) Drug paraphernalia: Includes any personal property which is associated with the
use of any drug, substance, chemical or agent the possession of which is unlawful in
Canada.

(h) Drugs: Includes any drug, substance, chemical or agent the use or possession of
which is unlawful in Canada or requires a personal prescription from a licensed
treating physician, any non-prescription medication lawfully sold in Canada and drug
paraphernalia.

(i) Employee: Any person engaged in work on a work site, or in a work location, where
this policy applies.

(j) Employee assistance services program: Services that are designed to help
employees who are experiencing personal problems such as alcohol and drug
abuse.

(k) Employer: A person who controls and directs the activities of an employee under an
express or implied contract of employment.

(l) Incident: An occurrence, circumstance or condition that caused or had the potential
to cause damage to person, property, reputation, security or the environment.

(m) Laboratory: A laboratory providing urine-based drug testing services or oral

fluidbased drug testing services must be certified by the United States Department
of Health and Human Services under the National Laboratory Certification Program.
A laboratory providing oral fluid-based drug testing services must ensure that the
oral
fluid testing be performed in such a manner that: (1) acceptable forensic practices
and quality systems are maintained; (2) specimen validity testing is deployed; (3)
regular independent audits occur; and (4) proficiency test samples are included.

(n) Manager: Includes team leaders and other persons in authority.

(o) Medical review officer (MRO): A licensed physician with knowledge of substance
abuse disorders and the ability to evaluate an employee’s positive test results who is
responsible for receiving and reviewing laboratory results generated by an
employer’s drug testing program and evaluating medical explanations for certain
drug test results.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-12
 (p) Negative test result: A report from the medical review officer that the employee
who provided a specimen for alcohol and drug testing did not have an alcohol and
drug concentration level equal to or in excess of that set out in 3.1(b).

(q) Owner: The person in legal possession of a site.

(r) Positive test result: A report from the medical review officer that the employee who
provided a specimen for alcohol and drug testing did have an alcohol or drug
concentration level equal to or in excess of that set out in 3.1(b).

(s) Reasonable grounds: Includes information established by the direct observation of

the employee’s conduct or other indicators, such as the physical appearance of the
employee, the smell associated with the use of alcohol or drugs on his or her person
or in the vicinity of his or her person, his or her attendance record, circumstances
surrounding an incident or near miss and the presence of alcohol, drugs or drug
paraphernalia in the vicinity of the employee or the area where the employee
worked.

(t) Rehabilitation program: A program tailored to the needs of an individual which

may include education, counselling and residential care offered to assist a person to
comply with the alcohol and drug work rule.

(u) Substance abuse expert (SAE): A licensed physician; a licensed or certified social
worker; a licensed or certified psychologist; a licensed or certified employee
assistance expert; or an alcohol and drug abuse counsellor. He or she has received
training specific to the SAE roles and responsibilities, has knowledge of and clinical
experience in the diagnosis and treatment of substance abuse-related disorders,
and has an understanding of the safety implications of substance use and abuse.

(v) Supervisor: The person who directs the work of others and may, depending on the
nature of the company’s structure, include the foreman, general foreman,
supervisor, superintendent and team leader.

(w) Tamper: To alter, meddle, interfere or change.

(x) Work: Includes training and any other breaks from work while at a company
workplace.

(y) Work site: A place at which a person performs work for an owner or employer.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-13
APPENDIX A – Alcohol and drug testing procedures
The following procedures are a general overview only. For more detailed information, contact your testing
provider.

1.0 Alcohol testing

General

1. The donor is the person from whom a breath or saliva sample is collected.
2. The donor is directed to go to a collection site in order to give a breath or saliva sample.
3. The breath alcohol technician (BAT) or the screening test technician (STT) as appropriate,
establishes the identity of the donor. Photo identification is preferable. Positive identification
by a company representative who holds a supervisory position is acceptable.
4. The BAT or STT as appropriate, explains the testing procedure to the donor.
5. The company must securely store information about alcohol test results to ensure that
disclosure to unauthorized persons does not occur.
6. Breath testing and saliva testing devices are used to conduct alcohol screening tests and
must be listed on the National Highway Traffic Safety Administrations (NHTSA) conforming
products list.

Breath testing
1. The BAT and the donor complete those parts of the alcohol testing form that are to be
completed before the donor provides a breath sample.
2. The BAT opens an individually wrapped or a sealed mouthpiece in the presence of the
donor and attaches it to the breath testing device in the prescribed manner.
3. The BAT explains to the donor how to provide a breath sample and asks the donor to
provide a breath sample.
4. The BAT reads the test result and ensures that the test result is recorded on the alcohol
testing form after showing the results to the donor.
5. The BAT completes the part of the alcohol testing form that is to be completed after the
donor provides a breath sample and asks the donor to do so as well.
6. If the test result shows an alcohol level that is less than 0.020 grams/210 litres of breath, the
BAT informs the donor that there is no need to conduct any further testing and reports the
result in a confidential manner to the company’s designated representative. While the initial
communication need not be in writing, the BAT must subsequently provide a written report
of the test result to the company’s designated representative.
7. If the test result shows an alcohol level that is equal to or greater than 0.020 grams/210
litres of breath, the BAT informs the donor of the need to conduct a confirmation test.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-14
 Saliva testing
1. The STT and the donor complete those parts of the alcohol testing form that are to be
completed before the donor provides a sample.
2. The STT checks the expiration date of the saliva testing device, shows the date to the
employee and uses a saliva testing device only if the expiration date has not passed.
3. The STT opens an individually wrapped or a sealed package containing the saliva testing
device in the presence of the donor.
4. The STT invites the donor to insert the saliva testing device into the donor’s mouth for the
time it takes to secure a proper specimen. If the donor does not wish to do this, the
collection site person offers to do so.
5. The STT reads the result the saliva testing device produces and records the test result on
the alcohol testing form after showing the results to the donor.
6. The STT completes the part of the alcohol testing form that is to be completed after the
donor provides a saliva sample and asks the donor to do so as well.
7. If the test result shows an alcohol level that is less than 0.020 grams of alcohol in 100
millilitres of saliva or an equivalent concentration in other units, the STT informs the donor
that there is no need to conduct any further testing and reports the result in a confidential
manner to the company’s designated representative. While the initial communication need
not be in writing, the STT must subsequently provide a written report of the test results to
the company’s designated representative.
8. If the test result shows an alcohol level that is equal to or greater than 0.020 grams of
alcohol in 100 millilitres of saliva or an equivalent concentration in other units, the STT
informs the donor of the need to conduct a confirmation test.

Confirmation test
1. If a breath alcohol testing device was used for the screening test, an evidential breath
alcohol device must be used to conduct the alcohol confirmation test. If a saliva testing
device was used for the screening test, the confirmation test will use an evidential breath
alcohol testing device.
2. The BAT advises the donor not to eat, drink, put anything into his or her mouth or belch
before the confirmation test is complete.
3. The confirmation test must start not less than fifteen minutes after the completion of the
screening test and not more than thirty minutes after the completion of the screening test.
4. The BAT and the donor complete those parts of the alcohol testing form that are to be
completed before the donor provides a breath sample.
5. The BAT opens a new individually wrapped or sealed mouthpiece in the presence of the
donor and inserts it into the breath testing device in the prescribed manner.
6. The BAT explains to the donor how to provide a breath sample and asks the donor to
provide a breath sample.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-15
 7. The BAT reads the test result on the device and shows the donor the result displayed. If the
confirmation test result is equal to or in excess of 0.040 grams per 210 litres of breath, the
BAT will do an external calibration check (accuracy check) to ensure the device is in
working order. The BAT ensures that the test result is recorded on the alcohol testing form.
The BAT verifies the printed results with the donor.
8. The BAT completes the part of the alcohol testing form that is to be completed after the
donor provides a breath sample and asks the donor to do so as well.
9. The BAT immediately reports in a confidential manner the test results to the company’s
designated representative. While the initial communication need not be in writing, the BAT
must subsequently provide a written report of the test result to the company’s designated
representative.

2.0 Drug testing (urine)

1. The donor is the person from whom a urine specimen is collected.

2. The donor is directed to go to a collection site in order to give a urine specimen.
3. The collection site person must establish the identity of the donor. Photo identification is
preferable. Positive identification by a company representative who holds a supervisory
position is acceptable.
4. The donor must remove coveralls, jacket, coat, hat or any other outer clothing and leave
these garments and any briefcase or purse with the collection site person.
5. The donor must remove any items from his or her pockets and allow the collection site
person to inspect them to determine that no items are present which could be used to
adulterate a specimen.
6. The donor must give up possession of any item which could be used to adulterate a
specimen to the collection site person until the donor has completed the testing process.
7. The collection site person may set a reasonable time limit for providing a urine specimen.
8. The collection site person selects or allows the donor to select an individually wrapped or
sealed specimen container. Either the collection site person or the donor, in the presence of
the other, must unwrap or break the seal of the specimen container.
9. The donor may provide his or her urine specimen in private, in most circumstances. The
specimen must contain at least forty-five millilitres.
10. The collection site person notes on the custody and control form any unusual donor
behaviour.
11. The collection site person determines the volume and temperature of the urine in the
specimen container.
12. The collection site person inspects the specimen and notes on the custody and control form
any unusual findings.
13. If the temperature of the specimen is outside the acceptable range or there is evidence that
the specimen has been tampered with, the donor must provide another specimen under

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-16
 direct observation by the collection site person or another person if the collection site person
is not the same gender as the donor.
14. The collection site person splits the urine specimen into two specimen bottles. One bottle is
the primary specimen and the other is the split specimen.
15. The collection site person places a tamper-evident bottle seal on each of the specimen
bottles and writes the date on the tamper-evident seals.
16. The donor must initial the tamper-evident bottle seals to certify that the bottles contain the
urine specimen the donor provided.
17. The donor and the collection site person complete the custody and control form and seal the
specimen bottles and the laboratory copy of the custody and control form in a plastic bag.
18. The collection site personnel arrange to ship the two specimen bottles to the laboratory as
quickly as possible.
19. The laboratory must be the holder of a certificate issued by the Substance Abuse and
Mental Health Services Administration of the United States Department of Health and
Human Services under the National Laboratory Certification Program.
20. The laboratory must use chain of custody procedures to maintain control and accountability
of urine specimens at all times.
21. Laboratory personnel inspect each package along with the enclosed specimens for
evidence of possible tampering and note evidence of tampering on the specimen forms.
22. Laboratory personnel conduct validity testing to determine whether certain adulterants or
foreign substances were added to the urine specimen.
23. Laboratory personnel conduct an initial screening test on the primary specimen for the
drugs set out in 3.1 using established immunoassay procedures. No further testing is
conducted if the initial screening test produces a negative test result.

24. Laboratory personnel conduct a confirmatory test on specimens identified as positive by the
initial screening test. The confirmatory test uses approved mass spectrometry techniques.
25. A certifying scientist reviews the test results before certifying the results as an accurate
report.
26. The laboratory reports the test results on the primary specimen to the company’s medical
review officer (MRO) in confidence.
27. The MRO, if satisfied that there is no legitimate medical explanation for a positive test result,
will inform the company’s designated representative in a confidential written report that an
employee tested positive. Prior to making a final decision on whether a test result is positive,
the MRO must give the employee an opportunity to discuss the results. The MRO shall
report to the employer whether the test result is negative, tampered, invalid or positive, or, if
positive, whether or not there is a legitimate medical explanation.
28. An employee who has received notice from the MRO that he or she has tested positive may
ask the MRO within 72 hours of receiving notice that he or she has tested positive to direct
another laboratory to test the split specimen. The employee is responsible for reimbursing
the company for the cost of the second test.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-17
 29. The laboratory reports the test results on the split specimen to the company’s MRO in
confidence.
30. The MRO will declare the test results negative if the test results for the split specimen are
negative and the failure to reconfirm is not due to the presence of an interfering substance
or adulterant.

3.0 Drug testing (oral fluids)

1. The donor is the person providing his or her oral fluid for the purposes of a drug test.
2. The donor is informed of the requirement to test in private and escorted to the collection site
for the purpose of providing an oral fluid specimen.
3. The collector must establish the identity of the donor. Photo identification is preferable.
Positive identification by a company representative who holds a supervisory position is
acceptable.
4. The donor must clear any foreign material from the mouth (e.g. food, gum, tobacco
products, lozenges, etc.).
5. The collector observes the donor for a minimum of 10 minutes prior to providing the
specimen. The donor may not eat, drink, smoke or put anything in his or her mouth during
the observed waiting period.
6. The collector checks and records the lot number and expiration date of the device.
7. In the presence of the collector, the donor opens the sealed device and the specimen is
collected according to the manufacturer’s specification.
8. The collected specimen should be kept in view of the donor and the collector at all times
prior to it being sealed and labelled for shipment to laboratory.
9. The collection site person places a tamper-evident bottle seal on the specimen identifying it
as specimen A. If a second oral fluid specimen is to be collected, steps 6 through 8 should
be repeated and the second specimen should be labelled specimen B.
10. The collector records the date and has the donor initial the seal(s) on the specimen(s).
11. The donor and the collection site person complete the custody and control form and seal the
specimen(s) and the laboratory copy of the custody and control form in a chain of custody
bag.
12. The collector notes any unusual donor behaviour on the custody and control form F.
13. The collection site personnel arrange to ship the two specimen bottles to the laboratory as
quickly as possible.
14. The laboratory must be the holder of a certificate issued by the Substance Abuse and
Mental Health Services Administration of the United States Department of Health and
Human Services under the National Laboratory Certification Program.
15. The laboratory must use chain of custody procedures to maintain control and accountability
of specimens at all times.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-18
 16. Laboratory personnel inspect each package along with the enclosed specimen(s) for
evidence of possible tampering and note evidence of tampering on the specimen forms.
17. Laboratory personnel conduct validity testing to determine the suitability of the specimens.
18. Laboratory personnel conduct an initial screening test on the specimen for the drugs set out
in 3.1 using established immunoassay procedures. No further testing is conducted if the
initial screening test produces a negative test result.
19. Laboratory personnel conduct a confirmatory test on specimens identified as positive by the
initial screening test. The confirmatory test uses approved mass spectrometry techniques.
20. A certifying scientist reviews the test results before certifying the results as an accurate
report.
21. The laboratory reports the test results on the primary specimen to the company’s medical
review officer (MRO) in confidence.
22. The MRO, if satisfied that there is no legitimate medical explanation for a positive test result,
will inform the company’s designated representative in a confidential written report that an
employee tested positive. Prior to making a final decision on whether a test result is positive,
the MRO must give the employee an opportunity to discuss the results. The MRO shall
report to the employer whether the test result is negative, tampered, invalid or positive, or, if
positive, whether or not there is a legitimate medical explanation.
23. An employee who has received notice from the MRO that he or she has tested positive may
ask the MRO within 72 hours of receiving notice that he or she has tested positive to direct
another laboratory to retest the specimen. The employee is responsible for reimbursing the
company for the cost of the second test.
24. The laboratory reports the results of the retest to the company’s MRO in confidence. The
MRO will declare the test results negative if the test results for the split specimen are
negative and the failure to reconfirm is not due to the presence of an interfering substance
or adulterant.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-19
APPENDIX B – Substance abuse expert
1.0 The substance abuse expert

The substance abuse expert (SAE) is a person who evaluates individuals (clients) who have sought
or been referred for assessment. The SAE makes recommendations concerning education,
treatment, follow-up testing and aftercare.

The SAE is not an advocate for the employer, the client or the bargaining agent or labour provider if
the employee has one. The function of the SAE is to protect the safety and health of the client, his
or her co-workers and the work site by professionally evaluating the client and recommending
appropriate education and/or treatment, follow-up tests and aftercare.

The SAE is a licensed physician; a licensed or certified social worker; a licensed or certified
psychologist; a licensed or certified employee assistance professional; or an alcohol and drug
abuse counsellor. He or she has received training specific to the SAE roles and responsibilities, has
knowledge of and clinical experience in the diagnosis and treatment of substance abuserelated
disorders, and has an understanding of the safety implications of substance use and abuse.

2.0 The evaluation and assessment

Consistent with sound clinical and established SAE standards of care in clinical practice, and
utilizing reliable alcohol and drug abuse assessment tools, the SAE must conduct a face-to-face
evaluation of the client. The evaluation should comprise a standard psychosocial history; an
indepth drug and alcohol use history (with information regarding onset, duration, frequency and
amount of use; substance(s) of use and choice; emotional and physical characteristics of use;
associated health, work, family, personal and interpersonal problems); and, a current mental status.
The evaluation should provide a diagnosis, treatment recommendations and a treatment plan to be
successfully complied with prior to the employee becoming eligible for follow-up evaluation and
subsequent return to work in the construction industry.

When a client has failed to comply with 3.1(b) or 3.1(d) of the Canadian Model, the SAE may
consult with the medical review officer (MRO) who verified the client’s alcohol and drug test in
gathering information for this evaluation. The MRO and SAE are free to discuss the test result,
substance concentration levels (if available), and any other pertinent medical information disclosed
during the MRO’s verification interview with the client.

The SAE shall provide a confidential written report to the employer, the client and the bargaining
agent or labour provider if the employee has one, advising of the SAE’s determination of the level
of assistance the client requires.

3.0 The referral

As a result of the evaluation and assessment, the SAE will refer the client to the appropriate
program or programs. The SAE will facilitate the referral by making contact with the recommended
program or programs, and will transmit the treatment plan with diagnostic determinations to the
treatment provider(s).

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-20
4.0 Follow-up evaluation

Following prescribed treatment, the SAE will evaluate the client prior to return to work in the
construction industry. The SAE will gauge the client’s success in meeting the objectives of the
prescribed treatment plan. The client’s ability to successfully demonstrate compliance with the initial
treatment recommendations will be determined in a clinically based follow-up evaluation. The SAE
will also base the determination on written reports from and personal communication with the
respective education and/or treatment program professionals. The SAE will prepare a report for the
client, the employer or prospective employer, and the bargaining agent or labour provider if the
employee has one, setting out the clinical determination as to the client’s success in meeting the
objectives of the treatment plan, and may include in the report the client’s continuing care needs in
respect to specific treatment, aftercare, support group services recommendations and a follow-up
testing plan.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-21
APPENDIX C – Drug and Alcohol Testing Process
1.0 Safety Manager

The Safety Manager oversees the drug and alcohol testing process for supervisors and workers on project
sites and equipment shops including all Stuart Olson and trade contractor employees. The process
responsibilities assigned to the Safety Manager are shown graphically in Figure C.1, i.e. the process steps
1.1 up to and including step 1.11.
1.1 Site Access Testing: will be necessary only when required by owner or by contract.
1.2 Post Incident Testing: the supervisor or manager must arrange, as soon as practical, for
someone to accompany the person involved in the incident for drug and/or alcohol testing as
well as notify the Safety Manager.
1.3 Reasonable Grounds: the supervisor or manager must decide if there is reasonable grounds
which, by definition, includes direct observation of drug and/or alcohol and possession or use,
irrational behaviour, and reporting to work in an apparent unfit condition (based on specific,
contemporaneous, clear observations concerning the individuals appearance, behaviour,
speech or body odours) which would reasonably lead one to believe that the individual may
be under the influence of a drug and/or alcohol. If there are reasonable grounds, the
supervisor or manager must arrange for someone to accompany the person involved in the
incident for drug and/or alcohol testing as well as notify the Safety Manager.
1.4 Test: drug and alcohol testing will be done by CannAmm Occupational Testing Services.
Phone: 1-800-440-0023 (select option 2 when prompted) or email: Booking@CannAmm.com.
Access to test results is limited to the Safety Manager, Human Resources Representative
and the Division Vice President.
1.5 Refusal: refusal to be tested will be viewed as non-compliance with Company policy and a
breach of the Program. Upon refusal to test, the employee will be subsequently terminated
for cause (see 1.9 below).
1.6 Negative Result: test shows compliance.
1.7 Return to Work: employee meets Return to Work conditions. The Safety Manager notifies the
supervisor or manager that employee is fit to return to work.
1.8 Positive Result: test shows non-compliance with Company policy. This non-compliance
includes results from drug and alcohol testing subject to tampering.
1.9 Quits: employee chooses on her/his own accord to end employment by formally submitting a
notice of resignation or by not returning to work.
1.10 Termination for Cause: the Safety Manager will notify the Manager, Supervisor, HR, Payroll, IT
and Division VP that the employee is terminated. The employee will receive letter of
termination, ROE and final pay pursuant to the Provincial Employment Standards.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-22
2.0 Human Resources Representative

The Human Resources (HR) Representative oversees the drug and alcohol Pre-Employment testing
process for managers, supervisors and employees working direct for Stuart Olson or for Labour Supply
companies providing labour only services direct to Stuart Olson. In addition, the HR Representative will
assist supervisors and managers with office employee on-the-job performance issues related to drug
and/or alcohol and the Safety Manager with project site employees who have been suspended because of
a positive test result.

The process responsibilities assigned to the HR Representative are shown graphically in Figure C.1, i.e.
the process steps 2.1 up to and including step 2.10 for both office and project site employees. The HR
Representative will also facilitate process steps 1.3 up to and including 1.11, when required, for drug and
alcohol testing of office employees.

2.1 Suspension: employee is suspended immediately without pay and the opportunity to
participate in a rehabilitation program is offered to employee. HR Representative is to
process Change of Status (COS) notification. If the employee is deemed by the Substance
Abuse Expert to have a disability, the HR representative will assist the employee to obtain
Short Term Disability (STD) coverage.
2.2 Refuses Help: refusal to enter Substance Abuse Program will be viewed as non-compliance
with Company policy. Upon refusal the employee will be subject to termination of
employment for cause (see 2.10 below).
2.3 Ask For Help: employee is referred to Substance Abuse Program (SAP) administered by
CannAmm Occupational Testing Services and encouraged to contact their Employee
Assistance Services Program (EASP) representative. The cost of the SAP is the
responsibility of Stuart Olson.
2.4 Return to Work Program: employee must sign the Conditions for Employment form
authorizing acceptance of Return to Work conditions at Stuart Olson. The Return to Work
Program will clearly outline the employee’s responsibilities and obligations resulting in a
timely Return to Work.
2.5 Clearance: upon successful completion of Substance Abuse Program, the Substance
Abuse Expert will make the recommendation employee is fit for Return to Work. Final
clearance to Return to Work is at the discretion of Stuart Olson.
2.6 Follow-up Testing: employees who return to work following a negative Return to Duty Test
for drugs and/or alcohol will be subject to reasonable un-announced, follow-up testing as
recommended by the SAP. The cost of Follow-Up Testing is the employee’s responsibility
and will be deducted from their pay.
2.7 Negative Result: test shows compliance.
2.8 Return to Work: employee meets Return to Work conditions. The Human Resources
Representative is to process Change of Status notification.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-23
 2.9 Positive Result: test shows non-compliance with Company policy. This non-compliance
includes results from drug and alcohol testing subject to tampering.
2.10 Termination for Cause: the Human Resources Representative will notify the Manager,
Supervisor, and/or Safety Manager, Payroll, IT and Division VP that the employee is
terminated. The employee will receive letter of termination, ROE and final pay pursuant to
the Provincial Employment Standards.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-24
Figure C.1 Drug and Alcohol Testing Process

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-25
APPENDIX D – Drug and Alcohol Flow Chart
Flow chart to follow for suspicion of Drug or Alcohol use or in case of an injury, accident or potentially serious near EE - Employee miss where drug
or alcohol use cannot be ruled out. ER - Employer

LU - Local Union

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-26
APPENDIX E – Actions Required Flow Chart

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures September 16, 2014 Section 20-27
CONDITIONS FOR EMPLOYMENT

This form must be filled out for DOT regulations* and/or Human Rights accommodation.

I ___________________________, SIN # ______________________ agree to the below listed conditions of

employment and further understand that if I do not meet all the conditions outlined I will not be considered for further
employment.

1. I agree to be evaluated by the designated Substance Abuse Professional (SAP) and follow all recommendations
provided by the evaluator.
2. I will successfully complete all require treatment, education, and after care as recommended by the SAP.
3. I hereby authorize the Substance Abuse Professional appointed by CannAmm OTS to release my substance abuse
assessment recommendations to CannAmm OTS and my present/potential employer, __________________. I
further authorize CannAmm OTS to release pertinent information to the appointed Substance Abuse Professional.
This release of information is valid for six months from the date below.
4. I understand that after completion of the SAP’s recommendations I will be required to have a negative Return to
Duty (RTD) drug and/or alcohol test* before commencing work with _________________.
5. I understand that I will have to participate in a follow-up testing program in addition to continuing to comply with the
company’s standard testing program.
6. I ________________________ hereby authorize the SAP to release the recommendations of my evaluation to
CannAmm Occupational Testing Services and to __________________, my current/potential employer.
7. I understand that, I must not drive, perform sensitive duties, or operate heavy equipment for the company until a
negative drug and/or alcohol test is reported to the company.
*To comply with US Department of Transport regulations,
 A non-negative Return to Duty test will require reassessment.
 A minimum of 6 follow-up tests in the first 12 months is required.
 Effective August 31, 2009, direct observation collections will now be mandatory for ALL Return to Duty and
Follow-up Drug tests.
I authorize my employer to deduct the cost for this service from my pay. ___________ ____________
Date Initials of Employee

Employee Home Phone Number: _____________________________

Employee Work Phone Number: _____________________________

Employee Home Mailing Address: _______________________________________________________

x______________________________________ x____________________________________
Employee: I accept these conditions. Supervisor Signature

x______________________________________ x____________________________________
Employee: I do NOT accept these conditions. Supervisor Signature

_______________________________________ _____________________________________
Date Date

You may retain a photocopy for your records.

January 2012 Page 1 of 1 Form 70

CONDITIONS FOR EMPLOYMENT
(PRE-EMPLOYMENT)

I ___________________________, SIN # ______________________ agree to the below listed

conditions of employment and further understand that if I do not meet all the conditions outlined I will not
be considered for employment.

1. I agree to undergo a Drug and Alcohol test as a condition of my employment.

2. I agree to be evaluated by the designated Substance Abuse Professional (SAP) should my test
results come back as non-negative.
3. I hereby authorize the Substance Abuse Professional appointed by CannAmm OTS to release my
substance abuse assessment recommendations to CannAmm OTS and potential employer,
__________________. I further authorize CannAmm OTS to release pertinent information to the
appointed Substance Abuse Professional. This release of information is valid for six months from the
date below.
4. I ________________________ hereby authorize the SAP to release the recommendations of my
evaluation to CannAmm Occupational Testing Services and to __________________, my potential
employer.
5. I understand and accept that while Stuart Olson has no obligation to hire me, in the future if I provide
proof of successful completion of a Substance Abuse Program, recommended by a professional
appointed Substance Abuse Professional (SAP), the Company will re-enter my application into its
applicant pool.

The cost of the Condition for Employment Pre-Employment testing is assumed by Stuart Olson.

___________ ___________________
Date Initials of Potential Employee

Candidate Phone Number: ______________________________

Candidate Home Mailing Address: __________________________________________________

x______________________________________ x____________________________________
Candidate: I accept these conditions. Hiring Manager Signature

x______________________________________ x____________________________________
Candidate : I do NOT accept these conditions. Hiring Manager Signature

_______________________________________ _____________________________________
Date Date

You may retain a photocopy for your records.

July 2014 Page 1 of 1 Form 70(b)
DETERMINING REASONABLE CAUSE

When dealing with an employee you believe is under the influence and who is either just reporting for duty, currently on
duty, or has immediately finished duty, you must consider the questions below:

Has some form of impairment been shown in the employee’s appearance, actions or
Yes No
work performance? (I.e., slurred speech, unsteady on feet, yelling, fighting, etc.)

Does the impairment result from the possible use of drugs or alcohol? Do you have
Yes No reasonable grounds to believe that the subject was using a drug or alcohol? (I.e.,
odor, witness, admission, physical signs, etc.)

Are the facts reliable? Did you witness the situation personally, or are you sure that
Yes No
the witness(es) are reliable and have provided first hand information?

Yes No Are the facts plausible? Are they capable of explanation?

Are the facts capable of documentation? Can you document dates, approximate
Yes No
times, names, locations, etc?

Yes No Is the impairment current, today, now while on the job or company property?

If you can answer ‘Yes’ to all of the questions above, then take the appropriate action and fill out the form attached. Do
NOT proceed with reasonable cause testing unless all of the above questions are answered with a YES.

This form is to be handed into your Program Manager, the person in charge of the drug and alcohol testing program.
Remember this form and the attached form/check list is confidential when filled out.

Date: ____________________________ Time of Incident: _________________________________

Employee Name: ____________________________ Employee ID#: __________________________

Company Division: _________________________________________________________________

Supervisor Name: ________________________ Supervisor Signature: _____________________

To arrange a drug and alcohol test, call CannAmm at 1-800-440-0023 any time.

July 2014 Page 1 of 1 Form 76

REASONABLE CAUSE
OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
Short Term Indicators
This checklist is intended to assist a supervisor in referring a person for drug testing. Has the employee manifested any
of the following behaviours? Circle the appropriate terms. This form is strictly confidential when filled out.
Employee Name: ____________________________ Employee ID#: ________________________________

Location: __________________________________ Time of Incident: ______________________________

Supervisor Name: ___________________________ Supervisor Phone Number: _____________________

Observations (Circle all that apply)

Breath Strong Faint Moderate None

Bloodshot Glassy Normal Watery Clear

Eyes
Heavy Eyelids Fixed Pupils Dilated Pupils Constricted Pupils

Confused Stuttered Slurred Good Fair

Speech

Mumbled Thick Tongued Deliberate Other: _________________

Excited Combative Hilarious Cocky Polite

Attitude Indifferent Sleepy Talkative Insulting Profane

Care Free Cooperative Other: _________________

Hiccupping Belching Crying Laughing Vomiting

Unusual
Actions
Fighting Other: _________________

Falling Staggering Stumbling Swaying Unsteady

Balance

Other: _________________

Falling Staggering Stumbling Swaying Unsteady

Walking
Other: _________________

Falling Staggering Stumbling Swaying Unsteady

Turning

Other: _________________

July 2014 Page 1 of 4 Form 85

REASONABLE CAUSE
OBSERVATION CHECKLIST

Indicate any other unusual actions or statements:

________________________________________________________________________________

Signs or complaints of illness or injury:

________________________________________________________________________________

Physical Signs or Symptoms

Possessing, dispensing, or using prohibited substance Details: _________________________________

Flushed or very pale face Details: _________________________________
Highly excited or nervous Details: _________________________________
Odor of Marijuana Details: _________________________________
Disheveled, untidy appearance Details: _________________________________
Shaking hands or body tremors/twitching Details: _________________________________
Breathing irregularly or difficulty breathing Details: _________________________________
Runny nose or sores around nostrils Details: _________________________________
Inappropriate wearing of sunglasses Details: _________________________________
Puncture marks or “track marks” on arms Details: _________________________________
Other (please specify) Details: _________________________________

Written Summary

Please summarize the facts and circumstances of the incident, employee responses, supervisor actions taken, and any
other pertinent information not previously noted. Please note the date, times, and location of reasonable cause testing or
note if the employee refused the test. Attach additional information or statements from witnesses. (See scenario for
example of written summary.)

_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________

July 2014 Page 2 of 4 Form 85

REASONABLE CAUSE
OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
Long Term Indicators

This list of behaviours is intended to assist a supervisor in referring a person for drug testing. Has the employee
manifested any of the following behaviours? If so, indicate by circling the appropriate answer. Also, if documentation
exists to support a behaviour, indicate with (D).

Employee Name: ______________________________ Period of Evaluation: _______________________

Supervisor Name: ________________________ Supervisor Phone Number: _______________________

Supervisor Name: ________________________ Supervisor Phone Number: _______________________

A. Quality and Quantity of Work

Yes No 1. Clear refusal to do assigned tasks

Yes No 2. Significant increase in errors
Yes No 3. Repeated errors in spite of increased guidance
Yes No 4. Reduced quantity of work
Yes No 5. Inconsistent, “up and down” quantity or quality of work
Yes No 6. Behaviour that disrupts work flow
Yes No 7. Procrastination on significant decisions or tasks
Yes No 8. More than usual supervision necessary
Yes No 9. Frequent, unsupported explanations for poor work performance
Yes No 10. Other (specify): _________________________________________

B. Interpersonal Work Relationship

Yes No 1. Significant change in relations with coworkers, supervisors, others

Yes No 2. Frequent or intense arguments
Yes No 3. Verbal abusiveness
Yes No 4. Physical abusiveness
Yes No 5. Persistently withdrawn or less involved with people
Yes No 6. Intentional avoidance of supervisor
Yes No 7. Expressions of frustration or discontent
Yes No 8. Change in frequency or nature of complaints
Yes No 9. Complaints by coworkers or subordinates
Yes No 10. Cynical, “distrustful of human nature” comments
Yes No 11. Unusual sensitivity to advice or critique of work
Yes No 12. Unpredictable response to supervision
Yes No 13. Passive-aggressive attitude/behaviour, doing things “behind your back”

C. General Job Performance

Yes No 1. Excessive unauthorized absences – number in past 12 months ________

Yes No 2. Excessive authorized absences – number in past 12 months ________
Yes No 3. Excessive use of sick leave in past 12 months ______
Yes No 4. Frequent Monday/Friday absence or other pattern

July 2014 Page 3 of 4 Form 85

REASONABLE CAUSE
OBSERVATION CHECKLIST
Yes No 5. Frequent unexplained disappearances
Yes No 6. Excessive “extension” of breaks or lunch
Yes No 7. Frequently leaves work early – number of days per week or month ______
Yes No 8. Increased concern about or actual incidents of safety offences
Yes No 9. Experiences or causes job incidents
Yes No 10. Major change in duties or responsibilities
Yes No 11. Inability to follow through on job performance recommendation

D. Personal Matters

Yes No 1. Changes in or unusual personal appearance (dress, hygiene)

Yes No 2. Changes in or unusual speech (incoherent, stuttering, loud, etc.)
Yes No 3. Changes in or unusual physical mannerisms (gesture, posture)
Yes No 4. Changes in or unusual facial expressions
Yes No 5. Changes in or unusual level of activity – reduced _____ or increased _____
Yes No 6. Changes in or unusual topics of conversation
Yes No 7. Engage in detailed discussions about death/suicide or harming someone
Yes No 8. Increasingly irritable or tearful
Yes No 9. Persistently boisterous or rambunctious (more than his/her normal level)
Yes No 10. Unpredictable or out of context displays of emotion
Yes No 11. Unusual fears
Yes No 12. Lacks appropriate caution
Yes No 13. Engages in detailed discussion about obtaining or using drugs and/or alcohol
Yes No 14. Has personal relationship problems (spouse, boy/girlfriend’s children)
Yes No 15. Has received professional assistance for emotional/physical problems
Yes No 16. Makes unfounded accusations towards others, i.e., has feelings of persecution
Yes No 17. Secretive or furtive
Yes No 18. Memory problems (difficulty recalling instructions, data, past behaviours)
Yes No 19. Frequent colds, flu or other illnesses
Yes No 20. Comes to work with alcohol on breath (specify dates and times)
Yes No 21. Excessive fatigue
Yes No 22. Makes unreliable or false statements
Yes No 23. Unrealistic self-appraisal or grandiose statements
Yes No 24. Temper tantrums or angry outbursts
Yes No 25. Demanding, rigid, inflexible
Yes No 26. Major change in physical health

Any other information or observations can be attached as needed.

Supervisor Signature: ______________________________ Date: ________________________

Supervisor Signature: ______________________________ Date: ________________________

To arrange a drug and alcohol test, call CannAmm at 1-800-440-0023 any time.

July 2014 Page 4 of 4 Form 85

 ADDENDUM TO DRUGS AND ALCOHOL IN THE WORKPLACE: POLICY
AND PROCEDURES

NOTE: This Addendum shall be appended to the front of the “Stuart Olson Drugs and
Alcohol in the Workplace: Policy and Procedures” in the Provinces of Manitoba and
Ontario. It must be provided with every copy of the Policy distributed and supplied within
these provinces.

MANITOBA and ONTARIO

1. ADMINISTRATION OF POLICY
The Stuart Olson Buildings Ltd. Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policy and Procedures shall be
administered as provided in the Policy subject to any collective labour or settlement agreements providing
amending or additional administrative procedures. If any collective labour or settlement agreements specify
express deletions or amendments to the Policy, these deletions or amendments shall be followed as provided in
those agreements.

2. SITE ACCESS TESTING

Paragraph 4.6 Site access testing shall be subject to any collective labour or settlement agreements providing
amending or additional standards or procedures.

3. PRE-EMPLOYMENT
Paragraph 4.7 Pre-employment testing shall be subject to any collective labour or settlement agreements
providing amending or additional standards or procedures.

The following relevant collective labour or settlement agreements that are in place are as follows:

1. Stuart Olson Dominion Construction Limited and Construction & Specialized Workers’ Union, Local 1258 &
Local Union 343 of The United Brotherhood of Carpenters and Joiners of America
– dated April 16, 2014.
*A summary of the amendments, deletions, and procedural differences provided by the above agreement is
appended hereto.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures April 24, 2014
ADDENDUM – Manitoba and Ontario
 ADDENDUM TO DRUGS AND ALCOHOL IN THE WORKPLACE: POLICY
AND PROCEDURES

APPENDIX “A”

The Stuart Olson Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policies and Procedures, as
administered in Manitoba and Ontario shall be amended by the following:

4. Section 2.3
Section 2.3 shall be deleted.

5. Section 4.5
Section 4.5 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

4.5 Incidents and near misses

Incident and near miss testing may be reasonable in certain circumstances. In deciding whether to request a
test, a decision maker should apply the following principles:
a. The decision to request a test is discretionary. The decision maker must exercise real discretion on
whether a test is required in the circumstances of a case. A request to test must not be an
automatic response to accidents or injuries that occur in the workplace;
b. Employees have a significant interest in their privacy, bodily integrity and personal dignity. A
decision to request a drug and alcohol test must take into consideration the impact of the test on
these employee interests;
c. The incident or near miss which may give rise to a reasonable request to a test must be significant.
Minor damage to property or personal injury will not normally result in a request for a test. In order
to determine the significance of the event, considerations must include the following non-
exhaustive factors:
i. The magnitude of the property damage, if any, or in cases of near misses, the
reasonable conclusion that serious damage could have occurred;
ii. The severity of personal injury, if any, or the risk of personal injury;
iii. Whether the incident caused harm to the environment;
iv. Whether the incident gave rise to a duty to report to a public body; and
v. Whether the incident created a realistic risk of legal action or liability.
d. In accordance with site and/or Stuart Olson policies and procedures, the decision maker must
conduct an investigation into an incident or near miss to determine whether a realistic cause exists
apart from drug and alcohol use. When investigating the employee’s actions or omissions as
possibly contributing to the cause of the incident or near miss, the investigation must include the
following minimum considerations about the employee:
i. The explanation provided by the employee, and any witnesses, as to the cause of the
incident or near miss;
ii. Whether the employee exhibits signs of impairment; and
iii. The employee’s behaviour, work and performance record.
e. In the event that the employee provided with a request for a test following an incident or near miss
is a unionized employee, that employee’s union will be provided written notice.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures April 24, 2014
ADDENDUM – Manitoba and Ontario
 6. Section 4.6
Section 4.6 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

4.6 Site Access Testing

Site access testing will not be implemented on any worksite without a demonstrated drug and alcohol problem in
that workplace. In the event that site access testing is implemented, Stuart Olson will provide written notice to
the applicable union(s) and all affected employees at least 30 days prior to the implementation of site access
testing on the worksite.

7. Section 4.7
Section 4.7 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

4.7 Pre-employment Testing

Pre-employment testing will not be implemented on any worksite without a demonstrated drug and alcohol
problem in that workplace. In the event that pre-employment testing is implemented, Stuart Olson will provide
written notice to the applicable union(s) and all affected employees at least 30 days prior to the implementation
of pre-employment testing on the worksite. The herein standard shall not apply to safety-sensitive, non-
unionized positions of which pre-employment testing is mandatory.

8. Section 4.9.8
Section 4.9.8 shall be added following Section 4.9.7:

4.9.8 Where a drug and alcohol test result is found to be negative, the employee shall be returned to work as
soon as reasonably possible, and shall be made whole for all lost wages and benefits during the period
of time he or she was required to be off work following a request for a drug and alcohol test and the
report of negative results to the extent that such period was not as a result of a refusal by the employee
to undergo the test.

9. Section 5.5
Section 5.5 shall be deleted.

10. Section 6.1 (l)

Section 6.1 (l) shall be deleted.

11. Forms 70 and 70(b)

Conditions for Employment Agreements (Forms 70 and 70(b)) shall be deleted.

Drugs and Alcohol in the Workplace

Policy and Procedures April 24, 2014
ADDENDUM – Manitoba and Ontario
EMPLOYMENT APPLICATION

Company:

Office:

Phone: Fax:

Date: Wage Expected: Date Available:

PERSONAL INFORMATION

Surname: First: Middle:

Address: City: Province: Postal Code:

Phone: Alternate Phone No:

Journeyman Trade Ticket: Certificate #: Trade Level:

Are you legally entitled to work in Canada? Yes No

Have you previously been employed by this Company or affiliate? Yes No

If yes, date left: Company name previously employed with:

Are you 18 years of age or older? Yes No

Do you own transportation? Yes No

Do you hold a valid drivers license? Yes No

Have you ever been convicted of an offense for Yes No

which a pardon has not been granted?

Are you WHMIS trained? Yes No

Are you CSTS trained? Yes No

Do you have a valid First Aid certificate? Yes No Expiry date:

If yes, which type? ____________ Province: _____________

Have you taken Fall Protection certified? Yes No Date taken:

Have you taken Scaffolding certified? Yes No Date taken:
Have you taken Confined Space certified? Yes No Date taken:
Are you lift or boom certified? Yes No Expiry date:
If yes, which type(s)? ___________

Revised September 2014 Page 1 Form 120

EMPLOYMENT APPLICATION

Will you participate in company training? Yes No

Will you work on our out of town projects? Yes No

Have you worked on industrial projects? Yes No

Do you have the ability to full-fill job duties that Yes No

require heavy lifting (up to 50lbs.)?

Do you have the ability to climb ladders/scaffolding Yes No

or stairs?

If no, please explain:

EMPLOYMENT RECORD (See Resume)

Company Name City From/To Date Position Held Wage

to

to

to

to

to

EDUCATION (See Resume)

Highest Length of Training Facility Diploma/Degree Awarded Year

Grade Course Completed
Completed

High School

Business, Trade or
Technical School

College or University

LIST ANY OTHER WORK RELATED TRAINING

Revised September 2014 Page 2 Form 120

EMPLOYMENT APPLICATION

REFERENCES

Reference information:

1. Name: Organization:

Telephone #: Title:

2. Name: Organization:

Telephone #: Title:

3. Name: Organization:

Telephone #: Title:

RELEASE BY CANDIDATE
I authorize the above-noted references to release information about my employment history to Stuart Olson.
I agree not to commence any complaints or actions against these references for providing this information
honestly, accurately and in good faith.

Signature Date

RELEASE BY STUART OLSON

Stuart Olson agrees not to commence any complaints or actions against the above-named references for
providing information about the candidate’s employment history honestly, accurately and in good faith.

Signature – Hiring Manager Date

CONDITIONS OF PRE-EMPLOYMENT DRUG AND ALCOHOL TESTING

I understand and accept that Stuart Olson employees are required to pass Pre-Employment Drug and Alcohol
Testing as a condition of employment. If I do not pass my Pre-Employment Drug and Alcohol Test, the
Company releases its obligation to hire me. If, in the future I provide proof of successful completion of a
Substance Abuse Program, recommended by a professional appointed Substance Abuse Expert (SAE), the
Company will re-enter my application into its applicant pool.

Signature Date

Revised September 2014 Page 3 Form 120

EMPLOYMENT APPLICATION
CIVIL SKILLS

Mark only those activities, equipment and tools with which you have had experience. If hired, you will be expected to
perform those activities and use the tools and equipment you indicate.

Identify by using “F” (fully experience) or “S” (some experience). Leave blank if you have no experience/qualifications.

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
Craftsman Helper Paving Brick Installation Swing Stage Work
Demolition Hand Excavation Rigging
Rigid Insulation Backfilling Scaffolding
Welding & Cutting Small Tool Repair Crane Signal
GENERAL CONCRETE ACTIVITIES
Vibrator Operator Vapour Barrier Power Troweling
Placing Water Stop Grouting
Concrete Pump Hose Hand Troweling Caulking
Screening Hardeners/Special Finishes Epoxies
Waterproofing Patch and Rub Rebar Placing
GENERAL CARPENTRY ACTIVITIES
Framing Fly-Forms Caulking
Sheathing, Hoarding Steel Forms Cabinet Work
Siding Stripping Laminates
Formwork – Grade Beams Paneling Toilet Partitions
Formwork - Walls, Columns Wood Doors and Frames Survey – Laser
Formwork – Slabs, Beams Metal Doors and Frames Survey – Transit
Formwork – Stairs Hardware Survey – Level
Formwork – Corewalls Millwork Survey – Total Station
GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
Tampers Forklift Pneumatic Nailer
Bobcat Front End Loader Cutoff Saw
Roller Compactor Dewatering Pump: 2”, 4”, 6” Table Saw
Backhoe Grinders Power Plane
Air Compressors Chippers Power Activated Tools
Jackhammer Construction Heaters install, Masonry Saw
maintain
Other Construction Activities (please list):

I certify that the statements made by me are true and complete. I also understand that a false statement may disqualify
me from employment or result in dismissal for just cause without notice or payment in lieu of notice.

Signature Date

Revised September 2014 Page 4 Form 120

 21. Forms (listed by Section)

Administration
07 Emergency Preparedness Checklist
08 Emergency Response Test Record
78 General Safety Rules (for posting)
75 Mock Evacuation Report
29 Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report
67 Safe Work Procedure Template
06 Site Emergency Plan
Safety Orientation and New Worker Forms
09 Employee Training Record
51 Hearing Test Waiver
16 Hepatitis B Vaccination Waiver
79 New Worker Evaluation Form
52 Safety Eyewear Authorization Form
48 Safety Orientation Quiz
33 Safety Orientation Workers
44 Voluntary Emergency Medical Information
50 Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation
Stuart Olson Meetings
15 Health and Safety Committee Meeting Minutes
22 Job Site Safety Committee Meeting Minutes
43 Safety Meeting Attendance List
42 Tool Box Safety Meeting (available as pre-printed booklet)
73 100% Safe Shift “Start” Meeting
74 100% Safe Shift “End” Meeting
Claims Management
25 Illness / Injury Report
28 Modified Work Program Offer

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 1
 Safety Violation and Discipline
24 Lock-out Removal by Others
34 Notice of Safety Non-Compliance
35 Progressive Disciplinary Action Form
37 Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension
Trade Contractor Forms
71 Project Specific HSE Plan Acknowledgment Form
38 Trade Contractor Clean-Up Notice
41 Trade Contractor Employee Orientation List
36 Trade Contractor Formal Notice of Safety Non-Compliance
39 Trade Contractor Requirements
40 Trade Contractor Toolbox Meeting Record
60 Trade Contractor Start-Up Meeting / Agreement
Hazards
23 Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA) (available as pre-printed booklet)
14 Hazard Assessment Report
54 WHMIS Inventory List
Incident Reporting
Serious Incident Protocol
27 Damage Report
10 Environmental Project Release Report
55 Harassment, Violence, Discrimination Reporting Form
19 Incident Investigation
20 Incident Investigation Checklist
58 Incident Witness Statement
72 Near-Miss Report Form
12 Record of First Aid
66 Utility Strike Report
57 Vehicle Collision Form
Inspection Reports
05 Project Safety Inspection Report (available as pre-printed booklet)
30 Safety Inspection Report
30B Office Inspection Report

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 2
 Safe Work Practices and Procedures
04 Critical Task Inventory
32 Dangerous Work in Progress
82 Equipment Maintenance Log
61 Excavation and Trenching Checklist / Hazard Assessment
11 Fall Protection Work Plan
80 Forklifts Daily checklist
65 Ground Disturbance Permit
17 Hot Work Permit Control Sheet
18 Hot Work Permit
21 Job Safety Start-up List
63 Removal of an Injured Worker using D.E.P.
68 Request to Work After Hours or on Non-Working Days
86 Respirator Use Screening Form
81 Scaffold Inspection Checklist
62 Telephone Threat Report
31 Work Refusal Process and Record Form
46 Working Alone Plan (Job Site)
47 Working Alone Plan (Office)
Confined Space Entry
01 Air Monitoring/Testing and Entry Log
02 Confined Space Entry Permit
03 Confined Space Hazard Assessment
69 Confined Space Identification
Drug and Alcohol in the Workplace: Policy and Procedures (Section 20)
70 Conditions for Employment
70b Conditions for Employment (Pre-Employment)
76 Determining Reasonable Cause
85 Reasonable Cause Observation Checklist
Employment Application Form

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 3
 22. Forms (listed alphabetically)

Number Form Name Form Section

73 100% Safe Shift “Start” Meeting Stuart Olson Meetings
74 100% Safe Shift “End” Meeting Stuart Olson Meetings
01 Air Monitoring/Testing and Entry Log Confined Space Entry
70 Conditions for Employment Section 20 – Drug & Alcohol
70(b) Conditions for Employment – Pre-Employment Section 20 – Drug & Alcohol
03 Confined Space Hazard Assessment Confined Space Entry
69 Confined Space Identification Confined Space Entry
04 Critical Task Inventory Safe Work Practices/Procedures
27 Damage Report Incident Reporting
32 Dangerous Work in Progress – Warning Safe Work Practices/Procedures
76 Determining Reasonable Cause Section 20 – Drug & Alcohol
07 Emergency Preparedness Checklist Administration
08 Emergency Response Test Record Administration
09 Employee Training Record Safety Orientation
10 Environmental Project Release Report Incident Reporting
82 Equipment Maintenance Log Safe Work Practices/Procedures
61 Excavating & Trenching Checklist/Hazard Assessment Safe Work Practices/Procedures
11 Fall Protection Work Plan Safe Work Practices/Procedures
23 Field Level Hazard Assessment Hazards
80 Forklift Daily Checklist Safe Work Practices/Procedures
78 General Safety Rules Administration
65 Ground Disturbance Permit Safe Work Practices/Procedures
55 Harassment, Violence, Discrimination Reporting Form Incident Reporting
14 Hazard Assessment Report Hazards
15 Health & Safety Committee Meeting Minutes Stuart Olson Meetings
48 Health, Safety & Environmental Quiz Safety Orientation
51 Hearing Test Waiver Safety Orientation
16 Hepatitis B Vaccination Waiver Safety Orientation
17 Hot Work Permit Control Sheet Safe Work Practices/Procedures
18 Hot Work Permit Safe Work Practices/Procedures
19 Incident Investigation Incident Reporting
20 Incident Investigation Checklist Incident Reporting
58 Incident Witness Statement Incident Reporting
25 Illness/Injury Report Claims Management
52 Industrial Eyes Safety Orientation
21 Job Safety Start-Up List Safe Work Practices/Procedures
22 Job Site Safety Committee Meeting Minutes Stuart Olson Meetings

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 4
 Number Form Name Form Section
24 Lock-Out Removal by Others Safety Violation/Discipline
75 Mock Evacuation Report Administration
28 Modified Work Program Offer Claims Management
29 Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report Administration
72 Near Miss Report Form Incident Reporting
79 New Worker Evaluation Form Safety Orientation
34 Notice of Safety Non-Compliance Safety Violation/Discipline
30B Office Inspection Form Inspection Reports
26 Operator Competency Assurance Verification Trade Contractor Forms
35 Progressive Disciplinary Action Safety Violation/Discipline
05 Project Safety Inspection Report Inspection Reports
71 Project Specific HSE Plan Acknowledgement Form Trade Contractor Forms
12 Record of First Aid Incident Reporting
85 Reasonable Cause Observation Checklist Section 20 – Drug & Alcohol
63 Removal of an Injured Worker using D.E.P. Safe Work Practices/Procedures
68 Request to Work After Hours or on Non-Working Days Safe Work Practices/Procedures
67 Safe Work Procedure Administration
81 Scaffold Inspection Checklist Safe Work Practices/Procedures
30 Safety Inspection Report Inspection Reports
43 Safety Meeting Attendance List Stuart Olson Meetings
33 Safety Orientation – Workers Safety Orientation
Serious Incident Protocol (no form number) Incident Reporting
06 Site Emergency Plan Administration
62 Telephone Threat Report Safe Work Practices/Procedures
42 Tool Box Safety Meeting Stuart Olson Meetings
38 Trade Contractor Clean-Up Notice Trade Contractor Forms
41 Trade Contractor Employee Orientation List Trade Contractor Forms
36 Trade Contractor Formal Notice of Safety Non-Compliance Trade Contractor Forms
39 Trade Contractor Requirements Trade Contractor Forms
60 Trade Contractor Start-Up Safety Meeting / Agreement Trade Contractor Forms
40 Trade Contractor Toolbox Meeting Record Trade Contractor Forms
77 Utility Strike Report Incident Reporting
57 Vehicle Collision Form Incident Reporting
50 Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation Safety Orientation
44 Voluntary Emergency Medical Information Safety Orientation
31 Work Refusal – Process and Record Safe Work Practices/Procedures
46 Working Alone Plan (Job Site) Safe Work Practices/Procedures
47 Working Alone Plan (Office) Safe Work Practices/Procedures
54 WHMIS Inventory List Hazards
37 Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension Safety Violation/Discipline

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 5
 23. Forms (listed numerically)

Number Form Name Forms Section:

01 Air Monitoring/Testing and Entry Log Confined Space Entry
02 Confined Space Entry Permit Confined Space Entry
03 Confined Space Hazard Assessment Confined Space Entry
04 Critical Task Inventory Safe Work Practices/Procedures
05 Project Safety Inspection Report Inspection Reports
06 Site Emergency Plan Administration
07 Emergency Preparedness Checklist Administration
08 Emergency Response Test Record Administration
09 Employee Training Record Safety Orientation
10 Environmental Project Release Report Incident Reporting
11 Fall Protection Work Plan Safe Work Practices/Procedures
12 Record of First Aid Incident Reporting
14 Hazard Assessment Report Hazards
15 Health & Safety Committee Meeting Minutes Stuart Olson Meetings
16 Hepatitis B Vaccination Waiver Safety Orientation
17 Hot Work Permit Control Sheet Safe Work Practices/Procedures
18 Hot Work Permit Safe Work Practices/Procedures
19 Incident Investigation Incident Reporting
20 Incident Investigation Checklist Incident Reporting
21 Job Safety Start-Up List Safe Work Practices/Procedures
22 Job Site Safety Committee Meeting Minutes Stuart Olson Meetings
23 Field Level Hazard Assessment Hazards
25 Illness/Injury Report Claims Management
26 Operator Competency Assurance Verification Trade Contractor Forms
27 Damage Report Incident Reporting
28 Modified Work Program Offer Claims Management
29 Monthly Safety Activity Summary Report Administration
30 Safety Inspection Report Inspection Reports
30B Office Inspection Report Inspection Reports
31 Work Refusal – Process and Record Safe Work Practices/Procedures
32 Dangerous Work in Progress – Warning Safe Work Practices/Procedures
33 Safety Orientation – Workers Safety Orientation
34 Notice of Safety Non-Compliance Safety Violation/Discipline
35 Progressive Disciplinary Action Safety Violation/Discipline
36 Trade Contractor Formal Notice of Safety Non-Compliance Trade Contractor Forms
37 Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension Safety Violation/Discipline
38 Trade Contractor Clean-Up Notice Trade Contractor Forms
41 Trade Contractor Employee Orientation List Trade Contractor Forms
42 Tool Box Safety Meeting Stuart Olson Meetings
43 Safety Meeting Attendance List Stuart Olson Meetings
44 Voluntary Emergency Medical Information Safety Orientation

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 6
 Number Form Name Forms Section:
46 Working Alone Plan (Job Site) Safe Work Practices/Procedures
47 Working Alone Plan (Office) Safe Work Practices/Procedures
48 Health, Safety & Environmental Quiz Safety Orientation
50 Visitor and Short Duration Work Orientation Safety Orientation
51 Hearing Test Waiver Safety Orientation
52 Industrial Eyes Safety Orientation
54 WHMIS Inventory List Hazards
55 Harassment, Violence, Discrimination Reporting Form Incident Reporting
57 Vehicle Collision Form Incident Reporting
58 Incident Witness Statement Incident Reporting
60 Trade Contractor Start-Up Safety Meeting / Agreement Trade Contractor Forms
61 Excavating & Trenching Checklist/Hazard Assessment Safe Work Practices/Procedures
62 Telephone Threat Report Safe Work Practices/Procedures
63 Removal of an Injured Worker using D.E.P. Safe Work Practices/Procedures
65 Ground Disturbance Permit Safe Work Practices/Procedures
67 Safe Work Procedure Administration
68 Request to Work After Hours or on Non-Working Days Safe Work Practices/Procedures
69 Confined Space Identification Confined Space Entry
70 Conditions for Employment Section 20 – Drugs & Alcohol
70b Conditions for Employment – Pre-Employment Section 20 – Drugs & Alcohol
71 Project Specific HSE Plan Acknowledgement Form Trade Contractor Forms
72 Near Miss Report Form Incident Reporting
73 100% Safe Shift “Start” Meeting Stuart Olson Meetings
74 100% Safe Shift “End” Meeting Stuart Olson Meetings
75 Mock Evacuation Report Administration
76 Determining Reasonable Cause Section 20 – Drugs & Alcohol
77 Utility Strike Report Incident Reporting
78 General Safety Rules Administration
79 New Worker Evaluation Form Safety Orientation
80 Forklift Daily Checklist Safe Work Practices/Procedures
81 Scaffold Inspection Checklist Safe Work Practices/Procedures
82 Equipment Maintenance Log Safe Work Practices/Procedures
85 Reasonable Cause Observation Checklist Section 20 – Drugs & Alcohol
86 Respirator Use Screening Form Safe Work Practices/Procedures
Serious Incident Protocol (no form number) Incident Reporting

HSE Manual, Revision #6 – June 2015

Section 21 Forms Page 7